HF 9000 Instruction Book

instruction book HF-9000 High-Frequency
Communications System
instruction book
(operation and organizational
maintenance)
NOTICE
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
This document may contain technical data that may be restricted for export under the
International Traffic in Arms Regulations (ITAR) or the Export Administration
Regulations (EAR). Violations of these export laws may be subject to fines and
penalties under the Arms Export Control Act (22 U.S. C. 2778).
© Copyright 2004 Rockwell Collins, Inc. All rights reserved.

Rockwell Collins, Inc.
*523-0806627*
January 27, 2004
TO: HOLDERS OF THE HF-9000 HIGH-FREQUENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

OPERATION AND ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION BOOK (523-
0806627)
This instruction book supersedes the HF-9000 High-Frequency Communications System Operation
and Organizational Maintenance manual, part number 523-0774345-406211. The following pages
need to be replaced in the instruction book. Retain this letter for future reference.
Change pages supplied are:
1. Cover page
2. Title page – 6th Edition, Change 5, dated January 27, 2004
3. List of Effective Pages – page A
4. List of Effective Page – page C
5. Table of Contents – page iii
6. List of Illustrations – page vi
7. List of Tables – page vii/viii
8. Section 1 Description – page 1-11/1-12
9. Supplement – page 1
10. Supplement – page 3
TECHNICAL OPERATIONS
1/2
HF-9000 High-Frequency
instruction book
(operation and organizational
maintenance)
NOTICE
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
This document may contain technical data that may be restricted for export under the
International Traffic in Arms Regulations (ITAR) or the Export Administration
Regulations (EAR). Violations of these export laws may be subject to fines and
penalties under the Arms Export Control Act (22 U.S. C. 2778).
Printed in the United States of America

© Copyright 1986 - 2004 Rockwell Collins, Inc. All rights reserved. Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52498
523-0806627-506211
6th Edition, Dec 1/1996
*HF-9000_IB_JAN_27/2004 Change 5, Jan 27/2004
NOTICE: This instruction book supersedes 523-0774345-406211 4th Change dated December 10, 2003.
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.
CAUTION
The material in this manual is subject to change. Before attempting any maintenance
operation on the equipment covered in this manual, verify that you have a complete and up-
to-date publication applicable to your equipment.
We welcome your comments concerning this instruction book. Although Send comments to: Rockwell Collins
every effort has been made to keep it free of errors, some may occur. Customer Response Center
When reporting a specific problem, please describe it briefly and include 400 Collins Road NE, M/S 133-100
the instruction book part number, paragraph or figure number, and Cedar Rapids, IA 52498-0001
page number.
Total number of pages in this publication is 300 consisting of the following:

Page *Change Page *Change
No. No. No. No.
Front Matter (523-0806627-506211) 2-12 Blank ........................................... 0

1st Ed – 1 Nov 86 2-13 ...................................................... 0
2nd Ed – 1 Mar 87 2-14 Blank ........................................... 0
3rd Ed – 1 Apr 90 2-15 ...................................................... 0
4th Ed – 1 Nov 91 2-16 Blank ........................................... 0
5th Ed – 1 Jul 94 2-17 ...................................................... 0
6th Ed – 1 Dec 96 2-18 Blank ........................................... 0
Chg 1 – 1 Apr 99 2-19 ...................................................... 0
Chg 2 – 15 Oct 99 2-20 Blank ........................................... 0
Chg 3 – 10 Nov 03 2-21 ...................................................... 0
Chg 4 – 10 Dec 03 2-22 Blank ........................................... 0
Chg 5 – 27 Jan 04 2-23 ...................................................... 0
Title ........................................................ 5 2-24 Blank ........................................... 0
A ............................................................. 5 2-25 ...................................................... 0
B ............................................................. 3 2-26 Blank ........................................... 0
C ............................................................. 5 2-27 ...................................................... 0
i............................................................... 0 2-28 Blank ........................................... 0
ii.............................................................. 3 2-29 ...................................................... 0
iii ............................................................ 5 2-30 Blank ........................................... 0
iv thru v ................................................. 3 2-31 ...................................................... 0
vi thru vii ............................................... 5 2-32 Blank ........................................... 3
viii Blank ............................................... 0 2-33 ...................................................... 0
ix thru xii ............................................... 3 2-34 Blank ........................................... 3
Section 1 Description 2-35 ...................................................... 0
2-36 Blank ........................................... 0
1-1 thru 1-3 ............................................ 0
2-37 ...................................................... 0
1-4 thru 1-8 ............................................ 3
2-38 Blank ........................................... 0
1-9 thru 1-10 .......................................... 0
2-39 ..................................................... 0
1-11......................................................... 5
2-40 Blank ........................................... 0
1-12 Blank ............................................. 0
2-41 ...................................................... 0
Section 2 Installation 2-42 Blank ........................................... 0
2-1 thru 2-3............................................ 0 2-43 ...................................................... 0
2-4 Blank ............................................... 0 2-44 Blank ........................................... 0
2-5 .......................................................... 0 2-45 ...................................................... 0
2-6 Blank ............................................... 0 2-46 Blank ........................................... 3
2-7 .......................................................... 0 2-47 ..................................................... 0
2-8 Blank ............................................... 0 2-48 Blank ........................................... 3
2-9 .......................................................... 0 2-49 ...................................................... 0
2-10 Blank ............................................. 0 2-50 Blank ........................................... 0
2-11 ........................................................ 0 2-51 thru 2-52...................................... 0
*Zero in this column indicates an original page.
A
No. No. No. No.
2-53 thru 2-54 ....................................... 3 2-113 .................................................... 0

2-55 thru 2-63 ....................................... 0 2-114 Blank......................................... 0
2-64 Blank ............................................. 0 2-115 .................................................... 3
2-65 thru 2-67 ....................................... 0 2-116 .................................................... 0
2-68 ........................................................ 3 2-117 .................................................... 0
2-69 ........................................................ 0 2-118 Blank ......................................... 0
2-70 Blank ............................................. 0 2-119 .................................................... 0
2-71........................................................ 0 2-120 Blank ......................................... 0
2-72 Blank............................................. 0 2-121 .................................................... 0
2-73........................................................ 0 2-122 Blank ......................................... 0
2-74 Blank............................................. 0 2-123 .................................................... 0
2-75........................................................ 0 2-124 Blank ......................................... 0
2-76 Blank............................................. 0 2-125 .................................................... 0
2-77........................................................ 0 2-126 Blank ......................................... 0
2-78 Blank............................................. 0 2-127 .................................................... 0
2-79........................................................ 0 2-128 Blank ......................................... 0
2-80 Blank............................................. 0 2-129 .................................................... 0
2-81........................................................ 0 2-130 Blank ......................................... 0
2-82 Blank............................................. 0 2-131 .................................................... 0
2-83........................................................ 0 2-132 Blank ......................................... 0
2-84 Blank............................................. 0 2-133 .................................................... 3
2-85........................................................ 0 2-134 Blank ......................................... 0
2-86 Blank............................................. 0 2-135 .................................................... 0
2-87........................................................ 0 2-136 Blank ......................................... 0
2-88 Blank............................................. 0 2-137 .................................................... 0
2-89........................................................ 0 2-138 Blank ......................................... 0
2-90 Blank............................................. 0 2-139 .................................................... 0
2-91........................................................ 0 2-140 Blank ......................................... 0
2-92 Blank............................................. 0 2-141 .................................................... 0
2-93........................................................ 0 2-142 Blank ......................................... 0
2-94 Blank............................................. 0 2-143 .................................................... 0
2-95........................................................ 0 2-144 Blank ......................................... 0
2-96 Blank............................................. 0 2-145 .................................................... 0
2-97........................................................ 0 2-146 Blank ......................................... 0
2-98 Blank............................................. 0
2-99........................................................ 0 Section 3 Operation
2-100 Blank........................................... 0 3-1 ........................................................ 3
2-101...................................................... 0 3-2 thru 3-4.......................................... 0
2-102 Blank........................................... 0 3-5 thru 3-9.......................................... 3
2-103...................................................... 0 3-10 thru 3-16...................................... 0
2-104 Blank........................................... 0 3-17 ...................................................... 3
2-105...................................................... 0 3-18 thru 3-20...................................... 0
2-106 Blank........................................... 0 3-21 thru 3-24...................................... 3
2-107...................................................... 0 3-25 ...................................................... 0
2-108 Blank........................................... 0 3-26 thru 3-30...................................... 3
2-109...................................................... 0 3-31 ...................................................... 0
2-110 Blank........................................... 0 3-32 ...................................................... 3
2-111...................................................... 0 3-33 ...................................................... 1
2-112 Blank........................................... 0 3-34 thru 3-70...................................... 0
B
No. No. No. No.
Section 4 Theory Section 8 Supplements

4-1 thru 4-2 ........................................... 0 HF-9000D High Frequency
4-3 .......................................................... 3 Communications Systems
4-4 Blank ............................................... 0 (523-0778856-202211)
4-5 thru 4-10 ......................................... 0 1st Ed – 20 Apr 98
4-11........................................................ 3 2nd Ed – 15 Oct 99
4-12 Blank............................................. 0 Chg 1 – 10 Nov 03
Chg 2 – 27 Jan 04
Section 5 Maintenance 1............................................................ 2

5-1 thru 5-2 ........................................... 0 2............................................................ 0
5-3 .......................................................... 1 3............................................................ 2
5-4 .......................................................... 0 4 thru 5 ................................................ 0
5-5 .......................................................... 3 6 Blank................................................. 0
5-6 thru 5-10 ......................................... 0 7............................................................ 0
5-11........................................................ 3 8 Blank.................................................
5-12 thru 5-17 ....................................... 0 9............................................................
5-18........................................................ 3 10 Blank .............................................. 0
5-19 thru 5-20 ....................................... 1 11.......................................................... 1
5-20A Added.......................................... 1 12 Blank .............................................. 0
5-20B Blank Added .............................. 1 13.......................................................... 0
5-21........................................................ 3 14 Blank .............................................. 0
5-22 thru 5-30 ....................................... 1 15.......................................................... 0
5-30A Added.......................................... 1 16 Blank .............................................. 0
5-30B ..................................................... 1 17 thru 33 ............................................ 0
5-31 thru 5-32 ....................................... 1 34 Blank .............................................. 0
5-32A Added.......................................... 1 35 thru 36 ............................................ 0
5-32B Blank Added .............................. 1 37 thru 39 Added ................................ 0
40 Blank Added................................... 0
Section 6 Parts List
6-1 thru 6-3 ........................................... 0 Appendix A
6-4 thru 6-5 ........................................... 3 A-1 thru A-32....................................... 0
6-6 thru 6-10 0
6-11........................................................ 3
6-12 Blank............................................. 0
Section 7 Diagrams
7-1.......................................................... 0
7-2 Blank............................................... 0
C
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Section 1 Description
1.1 General ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Equipment Supplied................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.3 Installation Hardware.............................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.4 Accessories ................................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.5 Options ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.6 Equipment Specifications......................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.7 Related Publications................................................................................................................................. 1-5
Section 2 Installation
2.1 General ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Unpacking and Inspecting ....................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Preinstallation Check............................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4 Cabling ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4.1 General ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4.2 Shielding and Grounding ......................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4.3 RF Grounding ......................................................................................................................................... 2-51
2.4.4 Fiber-Optic Cabling ................................................................................................................................ 2-51
2.4.5 Lightning Arresters................................................................................................................................ 2-51
2.4.6 Address and Parity Strapping ............................................................................................................... 2-52
2.4.7 ARINC 429 Port and Burst Strapping .................................................................................................. 2-52
2.4.8 Line Replaceable Unit Identification Strapping................................................................................... 2-52
2.4.9 Master/Slave Strapping ......................................................................................................................... 2-52
2.4.10 Antenna Coupler Strapping................................................................................................................... 2-53
2.5 Installation Procedures .......................................................................................................................... 2-53
2.5.1 Shunt and Notch Antenna System Installation ................................................................................... 2-53
2.5.2 Tuned HF Monopole Antenna HF-9090 Installation ........................................................................... 2-61
2.6 Datafill Requirements ............................................................................................................................ 2-67
2.7 Postinstallation Check ........................................................................................................................... 2-69
Section 3 Operation
3.1 General ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2 Controls and Indicators............................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.3 Radio Set Control HF-9010 Operating Procedures .............................................................................. 3-10
3.3.1 General .................................................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.3.2 Preliminary Procedures ......................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.3.3 Self-Test Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 3-10
3.3.4 Manual Mode .......................................................................................................................................... 3-12
3.3.5 Program Mode......................................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.3.6 Channel Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 3-14
3.3.7 Emergency Mode .................................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.3.8 Scan Mode ............................................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.3.9 Standby Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.3.10 Maritime Mode ....................................................................................................................................... 3-16
3.3.11 External Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 3-16
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS — CONT
Page
3.3.12 Fault Clearing Procedure.......................................................................................................................3-17

3.3.13 User-Programmed Preset Channel Erase or Change ..........................................................................3-17
3.4 Radio Set Control HF-9012 Operating Procedures ..............................................................................3-17
3.4.1 General ....................................................................................................................................................3-17
3.4.2 Preliminary Procedures..........................................................................................................................3-18
3.4.3 Self-Test Mode ........................................................................................................................................3-18
3.4.4 Automatic ALE Mode .............................................................................................................................3-20
3.4.5 Manual ALE Operation..........................................................................................................................3-24
3.4.6 Manual Mode ..........................................................................................................................................3-25
3.4.7 Program Mode.........................................................................................................................................3-26
3.4.8 Channel Mode .........................................................................................................................................3-29
3.4.9 Emergency Mode.....................................................................................................................................3-29
3.4.10 Scan Mode ...............................................................................................................................................3-30
3.4.11 Standby Mode .........................................................................................................................................3-30
3.4.12 Maritime Mode........................................................................................................................................3-30
3.4.13 External Mode.........................................................................................................................................3-31
3.4.14 Fault Clearing Procedure.......................................................................................................................3-31
3.4.15 Information Deleted ...............................................................................................................................3-32
3.5 Dual System Operation ..........................................................................................................................3-32
3.6 Remote Terminal ALE Operation..........................................................................................................3-33
3.6.1 Preliminary Procedures..........................................................................................................................3-34
3.6.2 Unsolicited Responses ............................................................................................................................3-34
3.6.3 Operating Procedures.............................................................................................................................3-37
3.6.4 Self-Test Mode ........................................................................................................................................3-37
3.6.5 ALE Mode................................................................................................................................................3-37
3.6.6 Standby Mode .........................................................................................................................................3-46
3.6.7 Fault Reports ..........................................................................................................................................3-46
3.6.8 Edit Commands ......................................................................................................................................3-46
3.6.9 Host Commands......................................................................................................................................3-46
3.6.10 List Commands .......................................................................................................................................3-46
3.6.11 Datafill Commands.................................................................................................................................3-53
Section 4 Theory
4.1 General ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2 Single System............................................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.3 Dual System.............................................................................................................................................. 4-2
4.4 Automatic Link Establishment ............................................................................................................... 4-7
4.4.1 Scanning.................................................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.4.2 Sounding and Link Quality Analysis ...................................................................................................... 4-8
4.4.3 Calling Options and Addresses................................................................................................................ 4-8
4.4.4 All Calls ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-9
4.4.5 Any Calls .................................................................................................................................................4-10
4.4.6 Group Calls .............................................................................................................................................4-10
4.4.7 Net Call ...................................................................................................................................................4-10
4.4.8 Silent Operation......................................................................................................................................4-10
4.4.9 System Programming .............................................................................................................................4-10
ii Change 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS — CONT
Page
4.4.10 Datafill Operation................................................................................................................................... 4-11

4.4.11 Zerioze Operation ................................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.5 Information Deleted ............................................................................................................................... 4-11
Section 5 Maintenance
5.1 General ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Preventive Maintenance .......................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.3 Testing and Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.3.1 General ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.3.2 Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures....................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.3 Minimum Performance Test .................................................................................................................. 5-18
5.4 Disassembly/Assembly ........................................................................................................................ 5-30B
6.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 6-1

6.1.1 General ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Group Assembly Parts List ...................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.3 Numerical Index ....................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.4 How To Use This Parts List..................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2 Group Assembly Parts List ...................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.3 Numerical Index ..................................................................................................................................... 6-11
Section 7 Diagrams............................................................................................................................................... 7-1
Section 8 Supplements
HF-9000D High Frequency Communications System, 523-0778856-202211
1 Description ................................................................................................................................................... 1
2 Installation................................................................................................................................................... 4
3 Operation ................................................................................................................................................... 17
4 Theory......................................................................................................................................................... 30
5 Maintenance............................................................................................................................................... 35
6 Parts List.................................................................................................................................................... 39
7 Diagrams .................................................................................................................................................... 39
Appendix A — Environmental Qualification Data............................................................................................... 39
Appendix A Environmental Qualification Data ................................................................................................ A-1
Change 5 iii
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure Page
1-1 Typical HF-9000 Equipment.................................................................................................................... 1-1
2-1 Typical Interconnect Diagram for HF-9000 System Using Manual Control........................................ 2-3
2-2 Typical Interconnect Diagram for Dual HF-9000 System Using Manual Control............................... 2-7
2-3 Typical Interconnect Diagram for HF-9000 System Using ARINC 429 Single Port Bus
Control.....................................................................................................................................................2-13
2-4 Typical Interconnect Diagram for HF-9000 System Using ARINC 429 Multiport Bus
Control.....................................................................................................................................................2-17
2-5 Typical Interconnect Diagram for HF-9000 System Using MIL-STD-1553B Bus Control ...............2-21
2-6 HF-9000 System, Partial Interconnect Diagram Showing Tuned HF Monopole Antenna
AT-9090 .................................................................................................................................................. 2-25
2-7 HF-9000 System With Automatic Link Establishment (ALE) Control Processor 309M-1
and Radio Set Control HF-9012.............................................................................................................2-27
2-8 HF-9000 System With ALE Control Processor 309M-1 and Voice Privacy Unit VP-110 ..................2-31
2-9 HF-9000 System With Embedded ALE Receiver-Transmitter............................................................2-37
2-10 HF-9000 System With Bandpass Filter HF-9060 ................................................................................2-41
2-11 This Illustration Deleted........................................................................................................................2-47
2-12 Typical Shunt and Notch HF Antenna Systems ..................................................................................2-55
2-13 Typical Shunt and Notch HF Antenna Types.......................................................................................2-56
2-14 Typical Shunt and Notch HF Antenna Installation.............................................................................2-57
2-15 Tuned HF Monopole Antenna AT-9090, Outline and Mounting Dimensions Diagram ....................2-62
2-16 Tuned HF Monopole Antenna AT-9090, HF-9000 System Pictorial Diagram ...................................2-63
2-17 Tuned HF Monopole Antenna AT-9090, Typical Installation Diagram..............................................2-65
2-18 Radio Set Control HF-9010, Installation Control Drawing .................................................................2-71
2-19 Radio Set Control HF-9012, Installation Control Drawing .................................................................2-73
2-20 Electrical Equipment Mounting Base MT-9030, Installation Control Drawing ................................2-75
2-21 Electrical Equipment Mounting Base MT-9030A, Installation Control Drawing..............................2-77
2-22 Electrical Equipment Mounting Base MT-9030B, Installation Control Drawing..............................2-79
2-33 Electrical Equipment Mounting Base MT-9044A, Installation Control Drawing............................2-101
2-34 Electrical Equipment Mounting Base MT-9077 and MT-9077B, Installation Control
Drawing.................................................................................................................................................2-103
2-35 Electrical Equipment Mounting Base MT-9077A, Installation Control Drawing............................2-105
2-36 Electrical Equipment Mounting Base MT-9079B, Installation Control Drawing............................2-107
iv Change 3
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS — CONT
Figure Page
2-37 Antenna Coupler HF-9040, Installation Control Drawing ................................................................ 2-109

2-38 Antenna Coupler HF-9041 or HF-9042, Installation Control Drawing ............................................ 2-111
2-39 Receiver-Transmitter HF-9030, Installation Control Drawing.........................................................2-113
2-41 Receiver-Transmitter HF-9031A, Installation Control Drawing ...................................................... 2-117
2-44 Receiver-Transmitter HF-9034A, Installation Control Drawing ...................................................... 2-123
2-49 This Illustrated Deleted ....................................................................................................................... 2-133
Section 3 Operation
3-1 Radio Set Control HF-9010, Controls and Indicators ............................................................................ 3-2
3-3 Silent Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 3-21
3-4 Sounding ................................................................................................................................................. 3-22
3-5 Channel ALE Operation......................................................................................................................... 3-23
3-6 Manual ALE Operation.......................................................................................................................... 3-24
3-7 Programming Preset or ALE Channels................................................................................................. 3-27
3-8 Programming ALE Self-Address ........................................................................................................... 3-28
Section 4 Theory
4-1 Typical HF-9000 System, Block Diagram............................................................................................... 4-3

4-2 Dual HF-9000 System, Block Diagram ................................................................................................... 4-5
4-3 Station-To-Station Automatic Link Establishment ............................................................................... 4-9
5-1 Fiber-Optic Fault Indications, Clockwise Configuration (Radio Set Control to

Antenna Coupler to Receiver-Transmitter) .......................................................................................... 5-14
5-2 Fiber-Optic Fault Indications, Counterclockwise Configuration (Radio Set Control to
Receiver-Transmitter to Antenna Coupler) .......................................................................................... 5-15
5-3 Fiber-Optic Fault Cable Test Setup Diagram ...................................................................................... 5-17
5-4 Receive Test Setup Diagram.................................................................................................................. 5-31
5-5 Transmit Test Setup Diagram............................................................................................................... 5-32
5-6 ALE Test Setup Diagram.................................................................................................................... 5-32A
Change 3 v
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS — CONT
Figure Page
6-1 HF-9000 High-Frequency Communications System, Parts Location Diagram.................................... 6-3

6-2 HF-9000 High-Frequency Communications System Mounts, Parts Location Diagram...................... 6-6
HF-9000D High Frequency Communications Systems, 523-0778856-202211
1 Receiver-Transmitter HF-9087D and Radio Set Control HF-9012D ....................................................... 1

2 Typical Interconnect Diagram for HF-9000D System Using Manual Control ........................................ 5
3 Radio Set Control HF-9012D, Installation Control Drawing ................................................................. 11
4 Receiver-Transmitter HF-9087D, Installation Control Diagram........................................................... 13
5 Radio Set Control HF-9012D Controls and Indicators ........................................................................... 17
6 Typical HF-9000D System, Block Diagram ............................................................................................. 33
7 HF-9000D High-Frequency Communications System, Parts Location Diagram.................................. 39
LIST OF TABLES
Table Page
1-1 Radio Set Control, Equipment Supplied ................................................................................................. 1-2

1-2 Receiver-Transmitter, Equipment Supplied........................................................................................... 1-3
1-3 Antenna Coupler, Equipment Supplied .................................................................................................. 1-5
1-4 Equipment Mounts, Equipment Supplied .............................................................................................. 1-6
1-5 Installation Hardware.............................................................................................................................. 1-7
1-6 Antenna Options....................................................................................................................................... 1-8
1-7 HF-9000 System Equipment Specifications ........................................................................................... 1-8
1-8 Related Publications...............................................................................................................................1-11
2-1 Continuous Mode Port Selection ...........................................................................................................2-52

2-2 Antenna Coupler Strapping...................................................................................................................2-53
2-3 Antenna Mounting Hardware Required But Not Supplied .................................................................2-66
2-4 Datafill Hardware Requirements ..........................................................................................................2-68
Section 3 Operation
3-3 Dual-System Operating States ..............................................................................................................3-33
3-4 HF-9000 System Status Line Definitions .............................................................................................3-35
3-5 State, Key Words ....................................................................................................................................3-36
vi Change 5
LIST OF TABLES — CONT
Table Page
3-6 Sound Command Context Dependencies .............................................................................................. 3-40

3-7 Supplemental Operating Commands .................................................................................................... 3-41
3-8 Edit Commands ...................................................................................................................................... 3-47
3-9 Host Commands...................................................................................................................................... 3-48
3-10 List Commands....................................................................................................................................... 3-48
3-11 Datafill Commands................................................................................................................................. 3-53
3-12 Configuration Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 3-68
3-13 Remote Terminal Command Summary ................................................................................................ 3-69
Section 4 Theory
4-1 HF-9000 Dual System Operating States ................................................................................................ 4-5

4-2 HF-9000 Dual System Logic States......................................................................................................... 4-6
5-1 Test Equipment and Tools ....................................................................................................................... 5-3

5-2 Fault/Message Code Display and Repair Action .................................................................................... 5-4
5-3 Example Test Procedure ........................................................................................................................ 5-16
5-4 Preset Switch Setup ............................................................................................................................... 5-19
5-5 Performance Test Procedures ............................................................................................................. 5-20A
HF-9000D High Frequency Communications Systems, 523-0778856-202211
1 Radio Set Control Equipment Supplied ..................................................................................................... 2

2 Receiver-Transmitter Equipment Supplied............................................................................................... 2
3 HF-9000D System Equipment Added Specifications ................................................................................ 3
4 Radio Set Control HF-9012D Controls and Indicators ........................................................................... 18
5 HF-9000D Fault/Message Code Display and Repair Action................................................................... 35
Change 5 vii/viii
INTRODUCTION
DESIGN FEATURES
The HF-9000 High-Frequency Communications System (called HF-9000 system) provides 99 user-
programmable preset channels and 280 000 discrete operating frequencies covering the 2.0000- to
29.9999-MHz frequency range in 100-Hz steps with selectable RF output power levels of up t o 175 watts
peak envelope power (pep), 50 watts average. In addition, six emergency channels plus all 249 International
Telecommunication Union (ITU) maritime radiotelephone network channels are stored in permanent
nonvolatile memory.
Communications are possible using either simplex or half-duplex operation in upper sideband (USB), lower
sideband (LSB), amplitude modulation equivalent (AME), and continuous wave (CW). The HF-9000 system
provides operation with either voice or data in USB, LSB, and AME modes. In data modes, the HF-9000
system can operate with audio frequency-shift keying (AFSK), multitone, or single-tone modems.
The HF-9000 High-Frequency Communications System can be configured as a single or dual system. A
single system (or half of a dual system) consists of a compact control unit (optional with Aeronautical Radio,
Inc. (ARINC) 429 or MIL-STD-l553B), one of several available receiver-transmitters, and one of several
available automatic antenna couplers. The HF-9000 system using HF-903X receiver-transmitters is Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) type accepted for parts 80, 87, and 90. Environmental qualification data
for units having Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) technical standard order (TSO) approval is listed in
appendix A.
The latest microprocessor technology and advanced solid-state integrated circuit techniques provide a
compact and lightweight system offering many features not found in any other hf radio system. Automatic
link establishment (ALE) is available either embedded in the receiver-transmitter (MIL-STD-188-141A,
appendix A) or using external ALE equipment such as the ALE Control Processor 309M-1.
All functions are controlled by either a digital display, full frequency control unit, or optionally from ARINC
429 o r MIL-STD-1553B buses.
Typical HF-9000 High-Frequency Communications System Components
Change 3 ix
introduction
Built-in test equipment (BITE) provides diagnostic testing and monitoring t o determine that the HF-9000
system is capable of providing specified performance. Should a fault occur, BITE identifies the specific unit
and module or circuit card.
MILITARY NOMENCLATURE
The following military nomenclature are assigned t o the HF-9000 equipment

PART MILITARY
DESCRIPTION NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
HF Communications System HF-9000 822-0091-001 AN/ARC-217(V)1
Radio Set Control HF-9010 622-8111-001 C-12174/ARC-217 (V)
Radio Receiver-Transmitter HF-9030 622-8112-001 C-1651(V)4/ARC-217 (V)
Radio Receiver-Transmitter HF-9031 622-8125-001 RT-1651(V)5/ARC-217(V)
Radio Receiver-Transmitter HF-9032 622-8128-001 RT-165l(V)6/ARC-217(V)
Radio Receiver-Transmitter HF-9070 622-8126-001 RT-1651(V)l/ARC-217(V)
Radio Receiver-Transmitter HF-9071 622-8129-001 RT-165l(V)2/ARC-217(V)
Radio Receiver-Transmitter HF-9072 622-8132-001 RT-1651(V)3/ARC-217(V)
HF Antenna Coupler HF-9040 622-8113-001 CU-2477/ARC-217(V)

HF Antenna Coupler HF-9041 622-8114-001 CU-2478/ARC-217(V)
Antenna Coupler HF-9042 622-9405-001 CU-2476/ARC-217(V)
Electrical Equipment Mounting Base MT-9030 622-8 115-001 MT-6813/ARC-217(V)
Electrical Equipment Mounting Base MT-9030A 622-8116-001 MT-6790/ARC -217(V)
Electrical Equipment Mounting Base MT-9040 622-8117-001 MT-6812/ARC-21 7 (V)
Electrical Equipment Mounting Base MT-9040A 622-8118-001 MT-6791/ARC -217(V)
Electrical Equipment Mounting Base MT-9041 622-8122-001 MT-6792/ARC-217(V)
Electrical Equipment Mounting Base MT-9044A 622-9408-001 MT-6793/ARC-217(V)
COMMON NAMES
Throughout this instruction book, receiver-transmitter is used as a common name for all radio receiver-
transmitter versions; radio set control is used as a common name for all radio set control versions; antenna
coupler is used as a common name for all hf antenna couplers; and equipment mounts is used as a common
name for all electrical equipment mounting base versions.
INSTRUCTION BOOK
This instruction book provides instructions for the HF-9000 system t o support maintenance t o the unit
replacement level using the HF-9000 system built-in test (BIT) capability.
NON STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS
The following abbreviations and acronyms appear within the text of this instruction book.
ABBREVIATION MEANING
ACK Acknowledge
AFSK Audio frequency-shift keying
AGC Automatic gain control
ALE Automatic link establishment
AME Amplitude modulation equivalent
A/R As required
x Change 3
ABBREVIATION MEANING
ARINC Aeronautical Radio, Inc.
BER Bit error rate
BIT Built-in test
BITE Built-in test equipment
CPU Central processing unit
CW Continuous wave
EEPROM Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory

EPROM Erasable programmable read-only memory
ESDS Electrostatic discharge sensitive
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FSK Frequency-shift keying
IAR Inhibit automatic responses
Id Identifier
IDENT Identification
I/O Inputloutput
ITU International Telecommunication Union
LD Lower sideband data
LQA Link quality analysis
LRU Line replaceable unit
LSB Lower sideband
LV Lower sideband voice
ms Milliseconds
NAK Not acknowledged
NVG Night vision goggles
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Pa Power amplifier
PC Personal computer
Pep Peak envelope power
PS Power supply
Ptt Push to talk
RAM Random access memory
ROM Read-only memory
RP Parallel resistance
RT Receiver-transmitter
RTCA Radio Technical Commission for Aeronautics
SB Service bulletin
SDI Source/Destination Index
SIL Service information letter
TSO Technical standard order
UD Upper sideband data
USB Upper sideband
UV Upper sideband voice
Vswr Voltage standing-wave ratio
xmt Transmit
SERVICE BULLETINS/SERVICE INFORMATION LETTERS
Service bulletins (SB) and service information letters (SIL) are written against individual equipment types,
Refer t o the applicable intermediate maintenance instruction book for a listing of SB and SIL that apply t o
specific equipment.
Change 3 xi
introduction
PART NUMBERS
Unless otherwise indicated, part numbers appearing in text and tables or on illustrations are Rockwell
Collins, Inc., part numbers.
SAFETY SUMMARY
The following are general safety precautions that are not related t o any specific procedures and therefore do
not appear elsewhere in this publication. These are recommended precautions that personnel must
understand and apply during many phases of operation and maintenance.
Keep Away From Live Circuits
Personnel must at all times observe all safety precautions. Do not replace components or make adjustments
inside the equipment with the high-voltage power supply turned on. Under certain conditions, dangerous
potentials may exist when the power control is in the off position due t o charges retained by capacitors. To
avoid severe shock or injuries, always remove power, and discharge and ground a circuit before touching it.
Do Not Service or Adjust Alone
Never reach into or enter the enclosure for the purpose of servicing or adjusting the equipment except in the
presence of someone who is capable of rendering aid.
Resuscitation
Personnel working with or near high voltages should be familiar with modern methods of resuscitation. Such
information may be obtained from the Bureau of Medicine and Surgery.
The following warnings and cautions appear in the text of this instruction book and are repeated here for
emphasis.
This paragraph contains a listing of all service bulletins/service information letters applicable to the
equipment and included in the text of this instruction book.
WARNING
The HF-9000 system contains an RF transmitter. When operated into an antenna, it may
produce electromagnetic fields near the antenna that exceed Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) recommended maximum limits.
Observe the following precautions when handling fiber-optic components.

a. The output from fiber-optic links can cause serious damage to the eye. Glass in the cable
can pierce the skin.
b. Use caution when viewing fiber ends or optical ports under magnification. For further
precautions and information, see ANSI 2136.2-1988.
c. Use caution when viewing an optical port without knowing the optical power level and
the wavelength.
d. Handle bare optical fiber with care. The core end of the fiber is glass that can pierce the
skin and break off. This is a hazard only when terminating a fiber end with a connector
or splice.
e. Potential eye problems result from invisible wavelengths, collimated light, and light
intensity of unknown sources. As a general rule, it is always safer and more accurate to
use a meter t o measure light output.
f. The HF-9000 fiber-optic system operates a t 850 nanometer wavelength with a maximum
output of 200 microwatts into a 200 micrometer optical cable.
xii Change 3
I Section 1 Description
SECTION 1
DESCRIPTION
1.1 GENERAL
The HF-9000 High-Frequency Communications System (referred to as the HF-9000 system) is a light-
weight, airborne system providing 280 000 communications channels in the hf band (2.0000 t o 29.9999
MHz). Operating modes (either simplex or half duplex) include upper sideband voice ( U V ) ,upper sideband
data (UD), lower sideband voice (LV), lower sideband data (LD), amplitude modulation equivalent (AME),
and continuous wave (CW).
The HF-9000 system can store frequency and RF emission mode data for 99 user-programmed preset
channels in nonvolatile memory. Preprogrammed information in nonvolatile memory includes six
emergency channel frequencies and all 249 half-duplex International Telecommunication Union (ITU)
maritime radiotelephone channel frequencies.
The HF-9000 system using the HF-9030/9031/903lA/9032/9034/9034A/9070/9072 receiver-transmitters is

fully technical standard order (TSO) compliant (TSO-C3ld and TSOC32d) and meets the requirements of
Radio Technical Commission for Aeronautics (RTCA) DO-l60B, DO-163, and DO-178. The HF-9000 system
using the HF-903X receiver-transmitters is in compliance with Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) parts 80, 83, and 90 requirements for radiotelephone use.
1.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED
Typical HF-9000 equipment is shown in figure 1-1.Information about the HF-9000 system equipment
statuses available are listed in tables 1-1through 1-4.
Typical HF-9000 Equipment

Figure 1-1
1-1
description
TYPE PART PANEL KNOB COLOR ]ALE**

I
i
NUMBER NUMBER COMPATIBLE
LIGHTING COLOR
I l u I I
3 1 %
HF-9010 622-8111-001 X I X
622-8111-002 X X X I
622-8111-003 X X X
622-8111-004 X X X
622-8111-005 X X ~
X I
622-8111-006 I 1 x 1 I x X
HF-9012 622-9409-001 1 X I I I x X I
I
X
622-9409-002 I I x I r x -1 X I X
622-9409-003 X X X I X
622-9409-004 X X X I X
NOTE
Incorporation of Service Information Letter (SIL) 1-91 or Service Bulletin (SB)No 5

changes the Radio Set Control HF-9010 part numbers as listed below.
OLD PART NO NEW PART NO
622-8111-001 622-8111-004
622-8111-002 622-8111-005
622-8111-003 622-8 111-006
*Night vision goggles
""Automatic link establishment
1.3 INSTALLATION HARDWARE
The hardware required for installation of the HF-9000 system is listed in table 1-5. Since many configura-
tions of the HF-9000 system are possible, table 1-5 lists equipment t o support the basic units listed in
tables 1-1 through 1-4, plus other equipment required for all configurations.
Band-Pass Filter HF-9060 (commonly called preselector) is an automatically-tuned, 4-pole pre/postselector

that is compatible with the receiver-transmitters designated PRESELECTOR COMPATIBLE in table 1-2.
The preselector is needed when operating a receiver in close proximity to a transmitting antenna.
1-2
description
Table 1-2. Receiver-Transmitter,. Equipment

- - Supplied
--
TYPE PART FILTER POWER OUTPUT REMOTE
NUMBER NUMBER (PEP/AVG*) CONTROL**
HF-9030 622-8112-001
622-8112-002
622-8112-003
HF-9031 622-8125-001
622-8 125-002
HF-9031A 822-0 101-001
822-0101-002
HF-9032 622-8128-001
622-8 128-002
622-8128-003
HF-9034 822-0090-002
HF-9034A 822-0102-001
HF-9070 622-8126-001
622-8126-002
622-8 126-003
HF-9071 622-8129-001
622-8 129-002
622-8 129-003
HF-9072 622-8132-001
622-8 132-002
622-8132-003
+Peak envelope power or average
'*All units can be manually controlled with Radio Set Control HF-9010 or Radio Set Control HF-9012.
"""Aeronautical Radio, Inc.
1-3
description
Table 1-2. Receiver-Transmitter, Equipment Supplied (Cont)
TYPE PART FILTER POWER OUTPUT REMOTE

NUMBER NUMBER (PEP/AVG*) CONTROL**
INTERNATL ALE
MULTIPORT 429
NARROWBAND
PRESELECTOR
MIL-STD-1553B
COMPATIBLE
ARINC*** 429
175 W/100 W
200 W/100 W
WIDEBAND
200 W/50 W
175 W/50 W
HF-9074 622-9424-002 X X X
622-9424-003 X X X X
**HF-9080 822-0108-001 X X X
**HF-9081 822-0109-001 X X X X
**HF-9082 822-0110-001 X X X
**HF-9084 822-0111-001 X X X X
NOTE
Incorporation of SIL 1-91 or SB 5 changes Receiver-Transmitter HF-9030 part number
from 622-8112-001 to 622-8112-002.
NOTE
Incorporation of SIL 1-91 or SB 2 changes Receiver-Transmitter HF-9032, HF-9070 and
HF-9071 part numbers from 622-8112-001 to 622-8112-002.
EQUIPMENT OLD PART NO NEW PART NO

HF-9032 622-8128-001 622-8128-002
HF-9070 622-8126-001 622-8126-002
HF-9071 622-8129-001 622-8129-002
NOTE
Incorporation of SB 2 changes Receiver-Transmitter HF-9072 part number from
622-8132-001 to 622-8132-002.
* Peak envelope power or average.

**All units can be manually controlled with Radio Set Control HF-9010 or Radio Set Control HF-9012.
***Aeronautical Radio, Inc.
1-4 Change 3
description
Table 1-3. Antenna Coupler, Equipment Supplied
TYPE PART ANTENNA TYPE ALTITUDE

NUMBER NUMBER
16 764 M (55 000FT)
10 668 M (35 000FT)

GROUNDED WIRE/
SHORTING RELAY
GROUNDED TUBE
WHIP/TUBE OPEN
AT-9090 BLADE
DUAL SYSTEM
PRESSURIZED
EXTERNAL
CONTROL
ELEMENT
SHUNT
HF-9040 622-8113-002 X X X X
622-8113-003 X X X X
685-0365-001 X X X X
(note 2)
HF-9041 622-8114-001 X X X X X
622-8114-002 X X X X X
685-0350-002 X X X X X
(note 3)
HF-9042 622-9405-001 X X X X X X
622-9405-002 X X X X X X
(note 3)
622-9405-003 X X X X X X
Notes
1. Information deleted.
2. Supplied with coax adapter 685-0355-001.
3. Supplied with ground ring 685-0349-001.
1.4 ACCESSORIES
No accessories are available for use with the HF-9000 system at this time.
1.5 OPTIONS
Antenna options for the HF-9000 system are listed in table 1-6.
1.6 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
HF-9000 system equipment specifications are listed in table 1-7. Refer to the applicable intermediate
maintenance book for equipment specifications for individual units of the HF-9000 system.
1.7 RELATED PUBLICATIONS
Related publications are listed in table 1-9.
Change 3 1-5
description
Table 1-4. Equipment Mounts, Equipment Supplied

TYPE PART NUMBER EQUIPMENT MOUNTED DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the related equipment, use rigid equipment mounts only in locations
where it is assured the mounted equipment vibration specifications are not exceeded.
MT-9030 622-8115-001 See note Mount, rigid

MT-9030A 622-8116-001 See note Mount, shock isolated, low profile
MT-9030B 822-0594-001 See note Mount, shock isolated
MT-9032B 622-9411-001 Receiver-Transmitter HF- Mount, shock isolated, low
9032/9034/ 9072/9074 profile, with cooling fan
MT-9040 622-8117-001 HF Antenna Coupler HF-9040 or Mount, rigid
Bandpass Filter HF-9060
MT-9040A 622-8118-001 HF Antenna Coupler HF-9040 or Mount, shock isolated, low profile
MT-9040B 822-0595-001 HF Antenna Coupler HF-9040 or Mount, shock isolated
MT-9041 622-8121-001 HF Antenna Coupler HF-9041 or Mount, rigid
Antenna Coupler HF-9042
MT-9041A 622-8122-001 HF Antenna Coupler HF-9041 or Mount, shock isolated, low profile
MT-9041B 822-0596-001 HF Antenna Coupler HF-9041 or Mount, shock isolated
MT-9042 622-8123-001 Two HF Antenna Couplers HF- Mount, rigid
9041
MT-9042A 622-8124-001 Two HF Antenna Couplers HF- Mount, shock isolated, low profile
9041
MT-9043 622-8135-001 HF Antenna Coupler HF-9040 and Mount, rigid
external element
MT-9044A 622-9408-001 HF Antenna Coupler HF-9040 and Mount, shock isolated, low
external element profile, green case
MT-9077 822-0096-001 Receiver-Transmitter HF- Mount, rigid
9076/9077/ 908X
MT-9077A 822-0097-001 Receiver-Transmitter HF- Mount, shock isolated, low profile
9076/9077/ 908X
MT-9077B 822-0597-001 Receiver-Transmitter HF- Mount, shock isolated
9076/9077/ 908X
MT-9079B 822-0099-001 Receiver-Transmitter HF- Mount, shock isolated, includes
9076/9077/ 908X cooling fan
Note: Mounts single Receiver-Transmitter HF-9030/9031/9031A/9032/9034/9034A9070/9071/9072/90.7
1-6 Change 3
description
Table 1-5. Installation Hardware

TYPE PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
None 751-0236-002 Mating connector kit for Radio Set Control HF-9010
None 751-8156-005 Mating connector kit for Receiver-Transmitter HF-9081/9082
None 751-0237-002 Mating connector kit for Receiver-Transmitter HF-903X/907X
None 685-0360-002 Mating connector kit for HF Antenna Coupler HF-9040; qty 3
FL-9003 685-0355-001 HN connector adapter kit for HF Antenna Coupler HF-9040; 9041,
or 9042 (note 1)
FL-9005 685-0364-001 Wire/strap adapter kit for HF Antenna Coupler HF-9040; 9041, or
9042 (note 1)
FL-9001 685-0326-001 RF feedline (CL-601-3A, RJ) for HF Antenna Coupler HF-9041, or

9042 dual system (note 1)
FL-9002 822-0089-001 RF feedline (G-IV) for HF Antenna Coupler HF-9041, or 9042 dual
system (note 1)
None 685-0360-002 Mating connector kit for HF Antenna Coupler HF-9041 or

None 139-0924-010 Mating connector kit for HF Antenna Coupler HF-9041 dual
installation; qty 2 required
None 685-0349-001 Grounding ring adapter kit for HF Antenna Coupler HF-9041 dual
installation; qty 2 required
None 751-0238-002 HF-9000 System connector kit (note 2)
None 216-0029-010 Fiber-optic cable (note 3)
None 261-0054-010 Fiber-optic connector
None 247-0029-020 Fiber-optic installation kit
Notes
1. Optional item, use either FL-9003 or FL-9005.

2. Includes one each of 751-0236-002, 751-0237-002, and 685-0360-002.
3. Unit of measure is 1 ft.
Change 3 1-7
description
Table 1-6. Antenna Options
TYPE NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER
AT-9090F A/R Antenna, tuned HF monopole (olive) 013-1923-010
AT-9090F A/R Antenna, tuned HF monopole (white) 013-1923-020
AT-9090F A/R Antenna, tuned HF monopole (black) 013-1923-030
None A/R HF Antenna, array (towel bar) (white) 218-0153-010
None A/R HF Antenna, array (towel bar) ( black) 218-0153-020
Table 1-7. HF-9000 System Equipment Specifications

CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION
Related documents
TSO category -C31d, -C32d (with HF-9030/9031/9032/9034)
RTCA DO-160B, DO-163, and DO-178A
FCC Parts 80, 87, and 90 (with HF-9030/9031/9032/9034)
Electrical
Frequency range 2.0000 to 29.9999 MHz
Channels
Discrete frequency 280 000 10 100-Hz steps
Preset
99 User programmable
249 Preprogrammed ITU maritime (except HF-908X)
6 Preprogrammed emergency international distress frequencies
(except HF-908X)
Operating modes
USB Upper sideband voice and data
LSB Lower sideband voice and data
AME Amplitude modulation equivalent
CW Continuous wave
Tuning time
New frequency 1 second nominal, 6 seconds maximum
Pretuned preset channel 40 ms nominal
Primary power 28 V dc
Power consumption 542 W maximum at 28 V dc, transmit (HF-9030/9031/9070/9071)
461 W maximum at 28 V dc, transmit (HF-
9032/9034/9072/9074/9082/9084)
582 W maximum at 28 V dc, transmit (HF-9080/9031/9081)
1-8 Change 3
description
2HARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION
Duty cycle
Receive Continuous
Transmit The receiver-transmitter is capable of continuous voice operation
over the temperature range of -55 to +71 "C (-67 t o +160 O F ) . RF
output power may automatically be reduced under some power
level and ambient thermal condition combinations t o improve
equipment reliability. During severe thermal stress, the unit
disables the transmit function and provides an indication t o the
operator t o prevent equipment failure.
Frequency stability
Short term 4 parts in 10'
Long term 5 parts in 10'
Receive
Sensitivity
SSBICW 0.5 mV maximum (-113 dBm) maximum for 10 dB (s+n)/n
AME 3.0 mV maximum (-97 dBm) maximum for 10 dB (s+n)/n with
30%, l-kHz modulation
Audio output
Voice lOO-mW, 600-Q, balanced, center tapped, with 1 mV RF input
100% modulated at 1kHz
Data O-dBm, 60042, balanced, center tapped, with 1 mV RF input signal
at (F, +1 kHz)
SELCAL'" O-dBm, 60042, with 1 mV RF input 100% modulated at 1kHz
Selectivity
HF-9030/9031/9032/9034 SSB and CW: ripple from 530 t o 2300 Hz will be not more than
1 dB; ripple from 350 t o 530 Hz and 2300 t o 2450 Hz will be not
more that 1.5 dB; 60-dB bandwidth is 3.850 kHz
HF-907019071190721 SSB and CW: ripple from 450 t o 3050 Hz will be not more than 1
9074/9080/908 1190821 dB; ripple from 300 t o 450 Hz will be not more than 1.5 dB; 60-dB
9084 bandwidth is 4.8 kHz
Transmit
Audio inputs
Voice -10 t o +10 dBm into 600 Q or 150 Q, floating
Data 0 dBm r l dB into 600 fi or 150 Q, floating
Carbon microphone Specified performance with 0.25 V rms into microphone, bias
voltage provided
1-9
description
~
Table 1-7. HF-9000 System Equipment Specifications (Cont)
CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION
Power output Selectable to three levels
Low power 10 W -1,+1.5 dB pep and average
Medium power 50 W -1,+1.5 dB pep and average
HF-908219084 100 W -1,+1.5 dB pep and average
High power
HF-903019031190 701 175 W -1, +1.5 dB pep, 50 W average
9071
HF-908019081 200 W k1.5 dB pep, 50 W average
HF-903219034 175 W -1,+1.5 dB pep, 100 W average
HF-9072/9074/9082/ 200 W k1.5 dB pep, 100 W average
9084
Tuning time
New channels 1 second nominal
Learned frequency 40 ms nominal
Environmental
Temperature -55 t o +71 "C (-67 to +160 O F )
Altitude
Radio set control 0 t o 16 800 m (0 t o 55 000 ft)
Receiver-transmitter 0 t o 16 800 m (0 t o 55 000 ft)
Antenna coupler
HF-9040 0 t o 10 700 m (0 t o 35 000 ft)
HF-9041 0 t o 16 800 m (0 t o 55 000 ft)
HF-9042 0 t o 16 800 m (0 to 55 000 ft)
Humidity 95% relative for two 24-hour temperature cycles
Shock
Operational 6g
Crash safety 15 g
Vibration Certified for use in piston or turbine, fixed wing, and rotary wing
aircraft
1-10
description
Table 1-8. Related Publications

TITLE PART NUMBER
HF-9000 High-Frequency Communications System Operator’s Manual 523-0774344
HF-9000 Radio Set Controls, Depot Maintenance Instruction Book 523-0775444
HF-9000 Receiver-Transmitters, Depot Maintenance Instruction Book 523-0775445
HF-9000 Antenna Couplers, Depot Maintenance Instruction Book 523-0775446
HF-9000 Receiver-Transmitters, Intermediate Maintenance Instruction Book 523-0806628
HF-9000 Radio Set Controls, Intermediate Maintenance Instruction Book 523-0777200
HF-9000 Antenna Couplers, Intermediate Maintenance Instruction Book 523-0777201
HF-9000 Electrical Equipment Mounting Bases, Depot Maintenance Instruction Book 523-0777570
Change 5 1-11/1-12
I Section 2 Installation
SECTION 2
INSTALLATION
2.1 GENERAL
This section provides information and instructions for installing all units of the HF-9000 system and
making it operational. No cooling provisions are required other than providing nominal free space around
the equipment for normal air movement.
1-
produce electromagnetic fields near the antenna that exceed Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA) recommended maximum limits.
Observe the following precautions when handling fiber-optic components.
a. The output from fiber-optic links can cause serious damage t o the eye. Glass in the cable can
pierce the skin.
b. Use caution when viewing fiber ends or optical ports under magnification. For further
precautions and information, see ANSI 2136.2-1988.
C. Use caution when viewing an optical port without knowing the optical power level and the
wavelength.
d. Handle bare optical fiber with care. The core end of the fiber is glass that can pierce the skin
and break off. This is a hazard only when terminating a fiber end with a connector or splice.
e. Potential eye problems result from invisible wavelengths, collimated light, and light intensity
of unknown sources. As a general rule, i t is always safer and more accurate t o use a meter t o
measure light output.
f. The HF-9000 system fiber-optic system operates at 850 nanometer wavelength with a
maximum output of 200 microwatts into a 200 micrometer optical cable.
2.2 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING
Unpack and handle the equipment with care. Check equipment received against the packing list. Examine
each item for evidence of shipping damage. If damage is found, notify the shipper immediately and retain
packing materials.
This equipment contains electrostatic discharge sensitive (ESDS) devices. Use special
handling methods and materials t o prevent equipment damage.
Keep protective covers on fiber-optic connectors when interconnect cables are not connect-
ed. Dust and moisture on the internal optical lenses of the connectors degrade HF-9000
system operation.
NOTE
It is good practice to save the packing containers and materials for use in future storage or
shipment of the equipment.
2- 1
installation
2.3 PREINSTALLATION CHECK
The equipment was properly aligned and tested before shipment. Successful completion of the testing and
troubleshooting procedures in the maintenance section of this book verifies the equipment is functioning
within normal limits.
2.4 CABLING
2.4.1 General
RF and fiber-optic control cabling is required between units of the HF-9000 system a s well as audio
cabling t o HF-9000 system audio devices. In addition, RF cabling is required between the antenna coupler
and the antenna. Refer t o the HF-9000 system interconnect diagrams, figures 2-1 through 2-11, for to-from
information. Observe the precautions listed in paragraphs 2.4.2, 2.4.3, and 2.4.4 when fabricating and
in stalling cables.
2.4.2 Shielding and Grounding
Observe the following precautions when installing the HF-9000 system interconnect wiring.
a. Shield and bond all parts of the installation electrical system, such as generators and ignition systems.
b. Route connecting cables away from circuits carrying heavy currents, equipment transmitting pulses, o r
other sources of interference.
C. Leave slack in cables t o permit free sway of equipment in mounts and t o avoid breakage resulting
from vibration.
d. Do not remove protective caps on connectors not used. If caps are misplaced, install new caps.
e. Clamp all radio set control lines against a metallic structural member, as close t o the unit connector as
possible.
f. Never route cabling close t o the antenna RF feedline or RF ground return path. If it is necessary t o
route radio set control cables within approximately 0.3 m (1ft) of the RF output or feed wire, shield
the overall radio set control cable. Use a braid (RF shield) around the entire radio set control cable and
ground the ends of the braid t o the cable connector shell or t o the metal ground (bulkhead) where the
cable leaves the RF environment.
g. Audio input lines are especially critical if an unbalanced input is used. Use twisted-pair, shielded wire
and route audio lines away from 400-Hz power lines or other high-current lines that could induce hum
or noise.
h. Space the antenna feedline away from metal (or sharp objects) t o avoid high-voltage flashover or
arcing. A 50.8-mm (2-in) or larger spacing is required for altitudes of 9150 m (30 000 R).
Be sure all personnel are clear of the hf antenna when performing radio checks. Do not
touch the RF output terminal on the antenna coupler, the antenna lead-in wire, the
insulated feedthrough, or the antenna itself while the microphone is keyed or while tuning
is in progress. Serious RF burns can result from direct contact with the above items when
the HF-9000 system is transmitting.
2-2
installation
-IF-9030/9032/9070/9072
?ECEI V ER -
TRANSMITTER HF-9010
F 1 J1
R A D I O SET
-c CONTROL +28 V DC INPUT (1 AMAX)
b AGC TIME CONSTANT - PWR GND
c_ SPEECH PROC DSBL 115 V AC LIGHTING BUS (RESERVED)
d TFST ENBL 5 V AC LIGHTING BUS NOTE 9
- I FAULT +28 V DC INPUT MA STER/ SLAVE
MASTER/SLAVE GND
)NOTE 1
G TUNE I N PROGRESS (20 A M A X )
T SYSTEM KEY NOTE 5 .- L I G H T I N G BUS COMMON
BB
cc
U
H
-5
XMT INTLK
NORMAt/BB
DAGC CS
DAGC CE
DAGC 0
G
K
PWR GND
NOTE 5
i
kH SPARE
28 V DC L I G H T I N G BUS
5 V DC LIGHTING BUS
J2
HF-9040/9041/
9042 ANTENNA
COUPLER
7
ANTENNA
7
D DAGC 1 RESERVED 13 J2 FIeER OPTIC L I N K
1 FIBER O P T I C LINK FBR OPT GUT 'B2 OPT l!4
Y DAGC 2 :BR OPT IN
FBR OPT OUT
r DAGC 3 J L
X DAGC 4 12 J3
P RT ADDRESS 0 FIBER O P T I C L I N K NOTE 7 r-
R RT ADDRESS 1 FBR OPT I N %R OPT OUT
-m
k RT ADDRESS 2
RT ADDRESS 3
S RT ADDRESS 4 R F 110 R F 110
3F I / O
AA RT PARITY
a RCV MilTE '10 J l p
Z CPLR BYPASS -z
E RCV VOICE 600 R NOTE 13 (*28 V DC INPUT (J A MAX)
F RCV VOICE 150R B 1 1 RCV VOICE AUDIO OUT
RCV VOICE COM c ' 1 I I NOTE 2 PWR GND
-i SPARE
W J P - } RESERVED
n RCV VOICE SHu>
P RCV DATA 600R
2 RCV DATA 150R RCV DATA AUDIO OUT (CONFIG A
RCV DATA COM NOTES 2. 11
U
RCV DATA SHLD

SELCAL RCV H t
i
SELCAL AUDIO OUT
-
J6 SELCAL RCV L DD NOTE 10
(CONFIG GNO
DUAL +28 V DC I N
R
D
AMPL XMT VOICE 600 R
RF 1/0 XMT VOICE AUDIO I N STATUS A E
XMT VOICE 150R
- U T VOICE COM
XMT VOICE SHU) f IP
NOTES 2 AND 3 STATUS 8
E X 1 ELEMENT A
F
J
J7 XMT DATA 6 0 0 R RESERVED
XUT DATA AUDIO I N E X 1 ELEMENT 8 K
RCVR/ XMT DATA 150 S I NOTES 2, 1 1 E X 1 ELEMENT C L
EXCTR XMT DATA COM V v
E X 1 ELEMENT D M
- RF 1/0 XUT DATA SHLD
CARBON M I C H
X
CARBON M I C I N P U T
E X 1 ELEMENT E N
NOTE 8
CARBON M I C L h NOTE 3 E X 1 ELEMENT F P
S
PTT KEY
STOP SCAN
RETRANSMIT
-J 1
u D N O T E 6
PTT KEY
SPARE
-.T
CHASSIS
GND
i 751-1 I98
-
TPE 1634-015
Typical Interconnect Diagram for HF-9000

System Using Manual Control
Figure 2-1 (Sheet 1 of 2)
2-312-4
in stallatj on
NOTES:
1 . CONNECT P I N S E AND F FOR SINGLE CONTROL OPERATION.
2. CONNECT EITHER 1 5 0 OHM OR 6 0 0 OHM BALANCED AUDIO, COUPLER CONFIGURATION STRAPPING T A B L E 1
NOT BOTH.
-
3. CONNECT EITHER XMT VOICE AUDIO INPUT OR CARBON :ON FI GURATION
MIC INPUT, NOT BOTH. iTRAPPlNG
4. CONFIGURATION STRAPPING. REFER TO TABLE 1. )=GND ( J l - R ) ,
ANTENNA TYPE I= OPEN
5 . USE NO. 10 AWG (MINIMUM) WIRE FROM AIRCRAFT 28 V DC
BUS TO W I T H I N 0.3 METERS (12 INCHES) FROM THE HF-9030 - -
RECEIVER/TRMSMITTER. CONNECT THE 28 V DC P O S I T I V E
WIRE TO AN EIGHT STUD TERMINAL BLOCK PN 376-0808-080
-
1- A '1-c
-
GROUNDED TUBE/GROUNDED WIRE 1 1
bAS 2721211-8) OR EQUIVALENT. USE BUS BAR PN 367-0810 TUBE: 3.66 M (12 F T ) MINIMUM
-050 (MS 25266-2-6) OR EOUIVALENT AND COVER PN 367-0809-080 WIRE: 3.05 M (10 F T ) M I N I M U M
(MS 18029-15-8) OR EOUIVALENT. USE FIVE 20 AWG WIRES, LENGTH (HF-9040/9041/9042)
NOT TO EXCEED 0.46 METER (18 INCHES), FROM THE BUSED
TERMINALS TO J4 PINS A, 6, C, D, AND J OF THE HF-9030. SHUNT ANTENNAWSHORT GROUNDED 1 1
TilBES W - 9 0 4 1 ONLY)
USE A 25 AMP C I R C U I T BREAKER FOR THE RECEIVER/TRANS-
MITTER. A SINGLE 5 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER MAY BE USED
FOR THE ANTENNA COUPLER AND THE RADIO SET CONTROL
COMBINED. WHIP/OPEN ANTENNAS (HF-9042 ONLY) 1 0
USE F I V E NO. 20 AWG WIRES, LENGTH NOT TO EXCEED 0.46

METER (18 INCHES), FROM J4 P I N S E, F, G, H, AND K TO AN
AIRCRAFT GROUND TERMINAL.
OPEN ANTENNAS @F-9040/9042 W I T H 0 1
ALL OTHER WIRES ARE NO. 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE EXT€RNAL ELEMENT ONLY)(MONOPOLE
SPECIFIED. BLADE, LOAD COIL E T C I
6. FOR SQUELCH-CONTROLLED STOP SCAN OPERATION, CONNECT
P I N q TO P I Nu.
7. USE F I B E R O P T I C CABLE SPECTRAN SPECIALTY OPTICS
HCP-MOXXIT-MIIFS-IU (W216-0029-UTO)OR EOUIVALENT.
8. COAXLAL J W E R SUPPLIED
9. CONNECT 28 V OR 5 V PANEL LIGHTING CONTROL AS
REQUIRED
10. CONNECT SELCAL AUDIO I F REQUIRED
11. CONNECT DATA AUDIO I F REQUIRED
12 * MATING CONNECTORS. TlglE 2
SELECT EITHER COWERICAL (SOLDER) CR MILITARY [CRIMP) STYLE CONNECTOR,

13. USE NO. 20 AWG WIRE FROM AIRCRAFT 28 V DC BUS FOR COUPLER POWER,
751-1 198
-
TPB I634 -015
Typical Interconnect Diagram for HF-9000

Figure 2-1 (Sheet 2)
2- 512- 6
installation
f I B E R OPTIC LINK NOTE 7

HF-9030 RECEIVER- I RG-4001 U
TRANSMITTER NO I FIBER OPTIC LINK J
HF-9030 RECEIVER - HF-9010 R A D I O SET

FIBER OPTIC IN CONTROL NO 1
TRANSMITTER NO 2
RF 1/o
FIBER OPTIC OUT

3
5-
J4
RCV V O I C E { coL(
ISO n
Z J l
RCV VOICE A U D I O OUT @)

FIBER OPTIC 01
J1
*28 v Dc LNPUT (1 A MAW
RCV DATA AUDIO OUT Q) Y A s T u V ~ v EQND )NOTE 1

1
LfQWING BUS COWON
AMPL RF 110
C SELCAL RCV [r
[SO0 R
SELCAL AUDIO OUT (2)
V DC LIGHTING BUS
e28 V DC INPUT (20 A MAX)
NOTE 5 J3 FIBER OPTLC L I N K
E
F FIBER OPTIC OUT NOTE 7
f chn 2
RCVR / E X m I I
{ :.:
RF I/O
NOTE 8 PUR 6ND XMT DATA
NOTE 5
(r1
'/O JI X P
(600 R CARBON MIC CARBON MIC INPUT (2)
RCV VOICE AUDIO OUT (1) h NOTE 3
{
150 S I
RCV VOICE COM
F
PTT KEY
STOP SCAN
AUDIO OUT (1) NOTE 6
RCV DATA { COM
150 S l
RETRANSMIT
1SHLD
v v
HF-9010 RADIO SET
CHASSIS GND FF
SELCAL RCV
f H CONTROL NO 2 +28 V DC INPUT (1 A MAX)
LL HH
- PUR GND
600 Sl
XMT VOICE 150 fl
5 V AC LIGHTING BUS N O T E 9
COM
SHLD
600 n F -/SLAVE GND
150 n XMT DATA AUDIO I N (1) G LIGHTING BUS COMAON
XMT DATA +28 V DC INPUT (20 A MAX)
COM (NOTE 5)
SHLD E -I p:8 V PC LIGHTING BUS'\NOTE
CARBON M I C
CARBON MXC INPUT (1)
NOTE 3 FR
G I
P S V'DC LIGHTING BUS 1 9
1 FIBER OPTLC LWK

53
PUR GND
PTT KEY NOTE 5 FIBER OPTLC OUT
STOP SCAN
I?' 53 J2 I
r$
RETRANSMIT 1 FIBER OPTIC LINK I
r V
,MPL R F I10
FIBER OPTIC OUT FIBER OPTIC IN
CHASSIS GND
I NOTE 8
'CVRIEX CTR
IF 110
FIBER OPTIC IN
RF 1/0
J5
FIBER OPTIC LINK NOTE 7
RG- 4 0 0 / U
F
SH 2
Y
751- 1197
TPB-1182-025
Typical Interconnect Diagram for Dual HF-9000

2-7/24
installation
HF-9041 ANTENNA r
I
- -HT-9042
- - - -DUAL
- -1
COUPLER NO 1 COUPLER MOUNT
JJ R F 110 OR ADAPTER
FIBER OPTIC LINK I
A FIBER OPTIC OUT
-
J1 I
B R6- 4001 U n
H +26 V DC I N @ A MAX)
mm
V
0
I
UF IlO SPARE QfE3ERVED) S ) RESERVED
I
L M T ELEM P W R GND
CONFIG A
tt
A
I
FIBER OPTIC LINK J2
c NOTE 7
FIBER OPTIC I N
CONFIG B
CONFIG C
8
C
I
CONFIG 6ND R I
EXT ELEM A J 7
EXT ELEM B K I
EXT ELEM C
EXT ELEM D
L
M
RESERVED
I
+28 V DC EXT E l E M PWR
SPARE T
U
I
DUAL r28 V DC I N
STATUS B
D
F
I I
STATUS A
U T ELEM F
E I I
P
EXT ELEM E N
- I I
I I
I I
HF-9041 ANTENNA I I
COUPLER NO 2 I
J2 J1
I
I
STATUS A
FIBER OPTIC I N
STATUS B 1 I
FIBER OPTIC LINK J3 WT ELEM E
E%T ELEM F I I
FIBER OPTIC OUT +28 V DC EXT ELEM P W R
DUAL +28 V DC I N
u+ I I
+28 V DC I N 0 A MAX) I I
- RF I/O
PUR
SPARE (RESERVED)
GND
EXT ELEM PWR G N C

CONFIG A
H
A
I
I
I
I
I
CONFIG B
CONFIG C NOTE 4 I I
CONFIG GND I I
EXT ELEM A
EXT ELEM 8 I I
EXT ELEM C RESERVED
I 1
EXT ELEM D
SPARE
I I
1 I
1
RF L/O I
7 5 1 1197
TPB 1182 0 2 5

2-912-10
installation
1IDTES:
1. DE3IC)IATE ONLY WE CONTROL I N EACH SMSYSTEY AS 12 LUTING CONNECTORS:
UASTER BY CONNECTING P I N E TO P I N F.
2. CONNECT EITHER 150 OH1 OR 6QO OW.
BALANCED AUDIO, UOT BOTH.
3. CONNECT EITHER M VOICE AUDIO INPUT
OR CARBON Y I C IMPUT. HOT 8OTH.
4. FOR HF-9041 CONFIGURATION STRAPPING.
REFER TO TABLE.
5. USE NO. 10 A I G @ I N I Y W ) V I R E F R W AIRCRAFT 28 V DC
BUS TO WITHIN 0.3 YETERS (12 INCHES) FROU THE HF-9030
R E C E I V E R / T R A . CONNECT THE e6 V DC P O S I T I V E
QtSml2-1-81 OR EQUIVALENT. USE BUS BAR PN 567-0810
-050 W 25266-2-6) OR EQUIVALENT AND COVER PN 367-
0 8 0 9 - 0 8 0 WS 18029-1s-6) OR EQUIVALENT. USE F I V E 20
AWG WIRES, LENGTH NOT TO EXCEED 0.46 METER (18 INCHES),
FROM THE BUSED TERMINALS TO J 4 P I N S A. B, C, D, AND J
OF THE HF-9030.
USE A 25 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR THE RECEIVER/TRANS-
MITTER. A SINGLE 5 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER MAY BE USED
FOR THE ANTENNA COUPLER AND THE RADIO SET CONTROL
COMBINELL
USE FIVE No. 20 A I G WIRES, LENGTH NOT TO EXCEED 0.46
METER (18 INCHES), FROM J 4 P I N S E, F, G, H, AND K TO AN
AIRCRAFT GROUND TERMINAL.
ALL OTHER WIRES ARE NO. 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPEC I FI E D .
6. FOR SQUELCH-CONTROLLED STOP SCAN SELECT EITHER COMMERCIAL (SOLDER) OR M I L I T A R Y (CRIMP) STYLE CONNECTOR.
OPERATION, CONNECTP-IN q TO P I N u.
7. USE F I B E R OPTIC CABLE SPECTRAN SPECIALTY OPTICS HCP-
M0200T-DOIFS-IO OR EOUIVALENT, PN 216-0029-010. 13. USE N0.20 AWG WIRE FROM AIRCRAFT 28V DC BUS FOR COUPLER POWER.
8. COAXIAL JUMPER SUPPLIED.
9. CONNECT 28 V OR 5 V PANEL L I G H T I N G AS REQUIRED.
10. CONNECT SELCAL AUDIO I F REQUIRED.
11. CONNECT DATA AUDIO I F REQUIRED.
H F - 9 0 4 1 CONFIGURATION STRAPPING TABLE

~~ ~ ~~
CONFIGURATION STRAPPING
ANTENNA TYPE O=GND (J1 -R). 1 COPEN
GROUNDED TUBEIGROUNDED WIRE 1 1 1

TUBE: 3.66 m (12 FT) U I N
WIRE: 3.05 UI (10 FT) M I N
I SHUNT/SHORT GROUNDED TUBE l 1 t 0 l 1 1
751 -I 182-025
TPB-I 197

2- 1112-12
installation
HF - 9031/ HF-9034 HF-9010

RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER R A D I O SET
CONTROL +28 V DC INPUT (1 AMAX)
NOTE 12 PWR GND
-
P/O J1
b AGC TIME CONSTANT +28 V DC INPU
115 V AC LIGHTING BUS (RESERVED)
5 V AC LIGHTING BUS NOTE 9
)NOTE 1
-d SPEECH PROC DSBL (20 A M A X ) F MASTER/SLAVE GND
1
C
TEST ENBL NOTE 5 - L I G H T I N G BUS COMMON
-I FAULT SPARE
-
G TUNE IN PROGRESS 28 v DC L I G H T I N G Bus
- ANTENNA
J
T SYSTEM KEY 13 5 V DC LIGHTING BUS
PWR GND
U XMT INTLK K NOTE 5
H NORMAL/BB
J2
BB DAGC CS RESERVED 13 J2 FIBER OPTIC L I N K
cc DAGC CE FIBER OPTIC L I N K FBR OPT Ou'
-I DAGC 0 FBR OPT OUT
D DAGC I 12 53
Y DAGC 2 FIBER OPTIC L I N K NOTE 7 r
r DAGC 3
X DAGC 4 I FBR OPT I N
a RCV MUTE
z CPLR BYPASS I- RF 110
IS
RG- 4OO/U n
54
4 L f RF 1/0
E
F
-ni
YO J l
1
p
-
J1
{
I
SPARES RCV VOICE 600n

RCV VOICE AUDIO OUT
+28 V DC INPUT ( 3 A UAX) -Y
-PP R C V VOICE 150 n
RCV VOICE COM NOTE 2
NOTE14
PUR 6ND -G
+28.V DC EXT ELEMENT PWR U
R RCV VOICE SHLD
W
RCV DATA 600R EXT ELEMENT PWR GND H
RCV DATA AUDIO OUT
RCV DATA 150 R -A
i
Y 1 1
CONFIG A
NOTES 2, 11
RCV DATA COM U CONFIG 6 -8
RCV DATA SHLD
SELCAL RCV H
GG
r
CONFIG C -C
SELCAL AUDIO OUT CONFIG GND- R
SELCAL RCV L DD P NOTE 10
DUAL +28 V DC I N
\
D
" n
XMT VOICE 600 R K " STATUS A E
XMT VOICE 150 R 'I 'I XMT VOICE
}NOTES ALJDIO
2 AND 3 IN
STATUS B F
XMT YOICE COM
dm XUT VOICE SHLD EXT ELEMENT A J
IW XMT CATA 600R EXT ELEMENT B K )RESERVED
XMT DATA AUDIO I N
w
I J 7 XMT DATA 150 R EE ; I I NOTES 2. 1 1 EXT ELEMENT C L
PCVR/ XMT DATA COM V
NOTE 8 EXT ELEkBNT D M
EXCTR XMT DATA SHLD -
X
EXT ELEMENT E N
RF *IoCARBON M I C H CARBON M I C INPUT
NOTE 3 EXT ELEMENT F P
CARBON M I C L /
S
SPARE
J PTT KEY
ARINC 429
STOP SCAN
9 1 NOTE 6
-
T
DATA BUS u
-- 751 1195
T P B 1633.025
Typical Interconnect Diagram for HF-9000 System

Using ARINC 429 Single Port Bus Control
2- 13/2-14
installation
NOTES: ANT EN N A COU PLER C'JN F IGU RAT ION STRAP PI N G TAB L E
1. CONNECT PINS E AND F FOR SINGLE CONTROL OPERATION.
2. CONNECT EITHER 150 OHM OR 600 OHM BALANCED AUDIO,
,.-.
NOT RnTH
- -,...
IICONFIGURATION
STRAPPING
3. CONNECT EITHER XMT VOICE AUDIO INPUT OR CARBON 0. GND (Jl-R).
M I C INPUT, NOT BOTH. ANTENNA TYPE
1 = OPEN
4. HF-9040/9041 CONFIGURATION STRAPPING. REFER TO I I 1
TABLE. JI-A Jf-8 Jl-C
5. USE NO. 1 0 AWG WINIMUM) WIRE FROM AIRCRAFT 28 V 1 1 1
DC BUS TO WITHIN 0.3 METERS (12 INCHES) FROM THE TUBE: 3.66 M (12 FT) MINIMUM
HF-9031/HF-9034 RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER. CONNECT THE 28 V
DC POSITIVE WIRE TO AN EIGHT STUD TERMINAL
BLOCK PN 376-0808-080 WS 27212-1-8) OR
1 WIRE:
HF- 9 0 43.05
0 / 9 0M
4 1(10
/ 9 0 4FT)
2 MINIMUM I I I I
EQUIVALENT. USE BUS BAR PN 367-0810-050 (MS SHUNT ANTENNAS/SHORT GROUNDED
25266-2-6) OR EQUIVALENT AND COVER PN 367-0809- TUBES (HF-9041 ONLY)
080 (LIS 18029-13-8) OR EWIVALENT. USE FIVE 20
AWG WIRES. LENGTH NOT TO EXCEED 0.46 METER (18 r
INCHES), FROM THE BUSED TERMINALS TO J4 PINS A 8, WHIP OPEN ANTENNAS (Hf-9042 ONLY) 1 1 0
C. D, AND i OF THE HF-903l/W-9034.
USE A 25 AUP CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR THE RECEIVER/
TRANSMITTER. A SINGLE 5 AW CIRCUIT BREAKER MAY
BE USED FOR THE ANTENNA COUPLER AND THE RADIO OPEN ANTENNAS @IF-9040/9042WlfH 0 1 1
SET CONTROL C W I N E D . EXTERNAL ELELIENT ONLY)
USE FIVE NO. 20 A16 WIRES. LENGTH NOT TO EXCEED AT-9090 MONOPOLE E X
0.46 METER (18 INCHES), FROM J4 PINS E, F, G. H
AND K TO AN AIRCRAFT GROUND TERMINAL.
ALL OTHER WIRES ARE NO. 22 A 1 6 UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED.
U. FOR SQUELCH-CONTROLLER STOP SCAN OPERATION, CONNECT PTN 9 TO P I N 2.
7. USE FIBER OPTIC CABLE BRAND SPECTRAN SPECIALTY OPTIC3 HCP-MO2OOT-DOIFS- IO OR EQUIVALENT PN 216-0029-010.
8. COAXIAL JUMPER-SUPPLIED.
9. CONNECT 28 V OR 5 V PANEL -LIGHTING CONTROL AS REQUIRED.
10. CONNECT SELCK AUDIO I F REQUIRED.
12. USE OF HF-9010 CONTROL E
i OPTIONAL WHEN NtINc-429 CONTROL IS U S m IF W-9010IS NOT USED
CONNECT HF-9031/HF-9W FBR OPT OUT J3 TO HF-9040/HF-9041/9042 FBR OPT IN J2.
13. MATING CONNECTORS:

~
CONNECTOR COWERCIAL M
L
TIARY
UNIT
CONNECTOR STRAIN RELIEF
371 -641: -000 359-7504-040 359-7007-010 PN
Jl
PTO6A12-1 OS(SR) MS3476L12-10s MS3417-12N TYR ,
-IF-3010
. 261-0054-010 PN
1
~
J2/J3 SPECTRAN
CH-230-1.8 TYPE
371-6225-000 I 359-7504-250 359-7007-020 PN .
J1 PT06A22-55S(SR) I MS3476L22-2-53 MS3417-E , TYPE ,
HF-
HF-
PTOGA12-1OSWlSR: MS3476L12-1 OS1 MS3417-12N TYPE .
357-9292-000 PN
J5 M1L-C-39012/16-0101 'TYPE
I I
i 1
I
I I I
371-8007-000 359-7504-080 359-7007-010 PN .
HF-9040
'' ' PTOGA1419S(SR)
261-0054-01 0
MS3476Lt4-19S 1.6341 7-1 4N TYPE
, PN ,
I J2/J3 1 SPECTRAN I I I I
HF-9041 CM-230-1.8 TYPE 1
357-9292-000 751 - 1195
HF-9042
34
MIL-C-39012/16-0101
PN
TYPE J
TPB -1633 015-

14. USE N0.20 AWG WIRE FROM AIRCRAFT 28 V DC BUS FOR COUPLER POWER.
Using- ARINC 429 Single Port Bus Control
2-15/2-16
installation
+28 V DC INPUT
HF-9031A/HF-9034A (20 A MAX)
RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER NOTE 4
PUR GND
NOTE 4
P/C G
P
J1
-
H HF-9040/
S ARINC 429 INPUT PORT A-A 904 1 /9042
-k ARINC 429 INPUT PORT A-B J3 J2 ANTENNA COUPLER
V ARINC SHLD
FIBER OPTIC L I N K FBR OPT I N
P ARINC 429 INPUT PORT B-A FBR OPT OUT ANTENNA
R ARINC 429 INPUT PORT B-B
3
AR INC P Y J2 J3
429 FIBER OPTIC L I M NOTE 6
E ARINC 429 INPUT PORT C-A FBR OPT OUT
DATA FBR OPT I N
D ARINC 429 INPUT PORT C-B RF 1/0
BUS
NOTE 11
m ARINC 429 OUTPUT PORT A-A
J5
-
n RG-400/U n
- J4
AA ARINC 429 OUTPUT PORT A-B RF 1/0 RF 110

P Y
I
BB ARINC 429 OUTPUT PORT 8 - A
J1
W v cc ARINC 429 OUTPUT PORT B-B +28 V DC -
Ap}
'10
V
AptT} .
r ARINC 429 A/B SELECT Jt P ( 3 A MAXI
-
S ARINC 429 C SELECT
RCV VOICE 600A RCV VOICE
Y ARINC 429 BURST ENBL PUR GND- G
AUDIO OUT
X
G
LRU IDENT
TUNE I N PROGRESS
RCV VOICE i5on B
RCV VOICE CON C
RCV VOICE SHLC w W
V P
w 'I
U
u
NOTE I
+28 V DC EXT ELEMENT PWR
EXT ELEMENT PUR GND
U
H
} RESERVED
H NORMALI~EZE RCV DATA 600A RCV DATA
CONFIG A- A
T SYSTEM KEY CONFIG B- B
RCV DATA i 5 o n AUDIO OUT
U XMT I N T L K
RCV DATA COW NOTES 1 , 9
CONFIG C - C
Z CPLR BYPASS CONFIG GND- R
RCV DATA SHLC
a RCV MUTE
SELCAL RCV I- SELCAL AUDIO OUT
GAL+28 v DC IN D
b EXT AGC TIME CONST NOTE 8
STATUS A E
SELCAL RCV L F
- SPEECH PROC DSBL STATUS B
b I
C
XMT VOICE 600n
d TEST ENBL XMT VOICE AUDIO I N EXT ELEMENT A J
XMT VOICE i5on RESERVED
-i TEST PASS NOTES 1 , 2 EXT ELEMENT B K
7 XMT VOICE COW
F EXT ELEMENT C L
i p)
XMT VOICE SHLC f M
J EXT ELEMENT D
-
n SPARE XMT DATA 600n XMT DATA AUDIO I N EXT ELEMENT E N
XMT DATA 150n P
e XMT DATA COk v
?E
v u
NOTES 1 , 9 EXT ELEMENT F
1 XMT DATA SHLC SPARES { S
T
J6 CARBON MIC I- CARBON MIC INPUT -
CARBON MIC L h NOTE 2
AMPL RF 1/0
PTT KEY
STOP SCAh
NOTE 5
k
RETRANSMI7 - U
RCVRIEXCTR RF 1/0 CHASSIS GND

NOTE 7 751-1195
I
TPB-1533-025

Using ARINC 429 Multiport Bus Control
2-1712-18
NOTES :
1 . CONNECT EITHER 150 OHM OR 600 OHM BALANCED AUDIO, NOT BOTH. CONFIGURATION
2 . CONNECT EITHER XMT VOICE AUDIO INPUT OR CARBON M I C STRAPPING
INPUT, NOT BOTH. ANTENNA TYPE 0 = GND ( J 1 - R l ,
3 . HF-9040/9041 CONFIGURATION STRAPPING, REFER TO TABLE, 1 = OPEN
4 . USE NO, 10 AWG (MINIMUMI WIRE FROM AIRCRAFT 28 V DC BUS TO
J1-A J1-B J l - C
WITHIN 0 . 3 METERS ( 1 2 INCHES) FROM THE HF-9031A/HF-9034A
RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER. GROUNDED TUBEIGROUNDED WIRE 1 1 1
CONNECT THE 28 V DC POSITIVE WIRE TO AN EIGHT STUD TUBE: 3 ,66 M ( 12 F T I MINIMUM
TERMINAL BLOCK PN 376-0808-080 (MS 27212-1-81 OR WIRE: 3 , 0 5 M ( 1 0 F T ) MINIMUM
EQUIVALENT. USE BUS BAR PN 367-0840-050 (MS 25266-2-61 HF-9040/9041/9042
OR EQUIVALENT AND COVER PN 367-0809-080
SHUNT ANTENNAWSHORT GROUNDED 1 0 1
(MS 18029-1S-83 OR EQUIVALENT.
TUBES (HF-9041 ONLY1
USE F I V E NO. 20 AWG WIRES, LENGTH NOT TO EXCEED
0 . 4 6 METER ( 1 8 INCHES), FROM THE BUSED TERMINALS TO WHIP OPEN ANTENNAS [HF-9042 ONLY) 1 1 0
J 4 P I N S A, B, C, D, AND J OF THE HF-9031A/HF-9034A8
OPEN ANTENNAS (HF-9040/HF-9042 0 1 1
USE A 2 5 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR THE RECEIVER/
WITH EXTERNAL ELEMENT ONLY1
TRANSMITTER. A SINGLE 5 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER MAY BE USED
AT-9090 MONOPOLE ET
FOR THE ANTENNA COUPLER AND
THE RADIO SET CONTROL COMBINED. 1 2 . MA1 :NG CONNECTORS :
I
USE F I V E NO. 20 AWG WIRES, MILITARY
LENGTH NOT TO EXCEED 0 . 4 6 UNIT CONNECTOR COMMERCIAL
METER ( 1 8 INCHESI, FROM J 4
P I N S E , F, G , H, AND K TO AN 371-6225-000 359-7504-250 359-2007-020 PN
AIRCRAFT GROUND TERMINAL. J1
PT06A22-55S(SR) MS3476L22-55S 6 3 4 17-22N TYPE
ALL OTHER WIRES ARE NO. 22 AWG
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
5 . FOR SQUELCH-CONTROLLER STOP
SCAN OPERATION. CONNECT
P I N q TO P I N g . HF-903 1A
6 . USE FIBER OPTIC CABLE BRAND HF-9034A
SPECTRAN SPECIALTY OPTICS
HCP-M0200T-DOIFS-10 OR
EQUIVALENT, PN 216-0029-010.
7 . COAXIAL JUMPER SUPPLIED I
8 . CONNECT SELCAL AUDIO I F

REQUIRED.
9 . CONNECT DATA AUDIO I F
REQUIRED.
1 0 . USE OF HF-9010 CONTROL I S
OPTIONAL WHEN ARINC-429 HF-9040
CONTROL I S USED. I F HF-9010 HF-904 1
I S USED CONNECT HF-9031A/ HF-9042
HF-9034A FBR OPT J 3 TO
HF-9010 FBR OPT I N J2 AND
HF-9010 FBR OPT OUT J 3 TO 357-9292-000 PN
HF-9040/HF-9041/HF-9042 FBR J4
OPT MIL-C-39012/16-0101 TYPE i
ELECT E11
ARINC 4 2 9 BURST DATA MODE

11. CONNECT ARINC 4 2 9 BUS AND CONTROL ARINC 4 2 9 CONTINUOUS DATA MODE
LINES AS REQUIRED. A GROUND ON BURST ENABLE J 1 - YENABLES ARINC
LRU IDENT P I N J 1 - X IDENTIFIES THE SECOND PORTS A , B, OR C RECEIVES 4 2 9 BURST DATA MODE. A/B SELECT J1-r AND
SYSTEM I N A DUAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION. CONTINUOUS DATA ONLY WHEN C SELECT J1-5 ARE THEN INACTIVE. POETS A
OPEN SETS ARINC 4 2 9 DATA SDI B I T S (91 TO SELECTED. PORTS NOT SELECTED AND C THEN RECEIVE BURST DATA. PORT B
1 AND ( 1 0 ) TO 0 , GROUND SETS SDI B I T S ARE INACTIVE RECEIVES BOTH BURST OR CONTINUOUS DATA.
(91 TO 0 AND (101 TO 1 . I F CONTINUOUS DATA I S APPLIED TO PORT B,
DATA AT PORTS A AN0 C I S IGNORED,
1 3 . USE NO. 20 AWG WIRE FROM AIRCRAFT 2 8 V DC BUS FOR COUPLER POWER.
75 l - 1 195
TPB-1633425
+
Using ARINC 429 Multiport Bus Control
2 - 1912-20
installation
- -
HF-9071/9073 HF-9010
RECEIVER - TRANSMITTER R A D I O SET
CONTROL i 2 8 V DC INPUT (1 AMAX)
NOTE 14 PWR GND
P I 0 J1 115 V AC LIGHTING BUS (RESERVED)
v
b
c
AGC TIME CONSTANT
SPEECH PROC DSBL
d TEST ENBL
+28 V DC INPUT
(20 A M A X ) F MASTER/SLAVE GND
1
NOTE 1
NOTE 5 G (-LIGHTING BUS CO&N
1 FAULT H SPARE
G TUNE IN PROGRESS G 28 V DC L I G H T I N G RUS'I,T, g
"P-
T SYSTEM KEY
PWR GND K 5 V DC LIGHTING BUS
U XMT INTLK
K .NOTE 5
H NORMAL/BB I 13
BB DAGC CS RESERVED 53 J i 1 FIBER OPTIC LINK
cc DAGC CE FIBER OPTIC L I N K FBR OPT OUl
-r
-
s DAGC 0 FBR OPT OUT :BR OPT I N
D DAGC 1
J2
Y DAGC 2
r DAGC 3
FIBER OPTIC L I N K NOTE 7 F&/9041/9042 ANTENNA
FBR OPT I N
X DAGC 4
0 RCV MUTE
2 CPLR BYPASS
JS RG- 4 0 0 / U
RF 110
1
E
F
1 SPARES
n RCV VBICE 600 R
P RCV VOICE 150 R RCV VOICE AUDIO OUT
F R/T ADDRESS 0 RCV VOICE COM C NOTE 2
R R f ADDRESS 1 RCV VOICE SHLD W
b RT ADDRESS 2 RCV DATA 600R
m RCV DATA 150 R NOTES
RCV 2. 11
DATA AUDIO OUT RF I / O
Y
S RT ADDRESS 4 RCV DATA COM N
AA RT PARITY RCV DATA SHLD GG
V CHASSIS GND SELCAL RCV H
cc
SELCAL AUDIO OUT NOTE16
c 2 8 V DCINPlK(JAUAX)
SELCAL RCV L DD N O T E 10 PWR GND
XMT VOICE 600 R
M T VOICE 150 fl M T VOICE AUDIO I N
J6 I XMT VOICE COM NOTES 2 AND 3
x-'
AMPL XMT V D I W SHLD f
RF 1/0 XMT DATA 600 R I
n
XUT DATA AUDIO I N

XMT DATA 150 R
NOTE 8
RCVR/ XMT DATA COM
M T DATA SHLD
V
Y
I 1
v
NOTES 2. 11
CONF FIG GND-
EXCTR DUAL +28 V DC I N h
RF I/O CARBON M I C H CARBON M I C I N P U T STATUS A
CARBON M I C L h NOTE 3
NOTE 13 J8 STATUS a
I I
MIL-STD-15538 +?:]A BUS EXT ELEMENT A
PTT KEY
STOP SCAN ) RESERVED
A BUS 1 RETRANSMIT
NOTE 6 PTT KEY EXT ELEMENT E
EXT ELEMENT C
EXT ELEMENT C
CHASSIS
{ EXT ELEMENT E
{L
B BUS GNO
IH EXT ELEMENT F /
-
-
SPARE
75
T P1B- -1i169362 - 0 1 5

Using MIL-STD-1553B Bus Control
Figure 2-5 (Sheet 1 of 2 )
2-2112-22
installation
r
.NOTES: A N T E N N A COUPLER CONFIGURATION S T R A P P I N G T A B L E
~~
I. CONNECT P I N S E AND F FOR SINGLE CONTROL OPERATION. LONFI GURATION

2. CONNECT EITHER 150 OHM OR 600 OHM BALANCED AUDIO, NOT BOTH. ;TRAPPING
3. CONNECT EITHER XMT VOICE AUDIO INPUT OR CARBON M I C INPUT, )=GND (Jl-R),
NOT BOTH. ANTENNA TYPE I = OPEN
4. HF-9040/9041 CONFIGURATION STRAPPING, REFER TO TABLE.
5. USE NO. 10 AWG (MINIMUM) WIRE FROM AIRCRAFT 28 V DC BUS TO I - A IJI-B Jt-C
WITHIN 0.3 METERS (12 INCHES) FROM THE HF-9030 RECEIVER/ GROUNDED TUBE/GROUNDED WIRE 1
TRANSMITTER. CONNECT THE 28 V DC P O S I T I V E WIRE TO AN EIGHT TUBE: 3.66 M (12 FT) M I N I M U M
STUD TERMINAL BLOCK PN 376-0808-080 @S 27212-1-8) OR EQUI- HF-90 4 3.05
WiRE: M (10
O / 9 O4I/ 9 042
FT) M I N I M U M
VALENT. USE BUS BAR PN 367-0810-050 (MS 25266-2-6) OR
EQUIVALENT AND COVER PN 367-0809-080 619 18029-1s-8) OR
EQUIVALENT. USE F I V E 20 AWG WIRES, LENGTH NOT TO EXCEED 0.46 SHUNT ANTENNAS/SHORT GROUNDED 1
METER (18 INCHES), FROM THE BUSED TERMINALS TO J 4 P I N S A B, C. TUBES OiF-9041 ONLY)
D. AND J OF THE HF-9030.
USE A 25 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR THE RECEIVER/TRANSMITER. A -
SINGLE 5 AMP.CIRCUIT BREAKER MAY BE USED FOR THE ANTENNA WHIPIOPEN ANTENNAS (HF-9042 ONLY) 0
COUPLER AND THE RADIO SET CONTROL COYBINED.
USE F I V E N O - 2 0 AWG WIRES, LENGTH NOT TO EXCEED 0.46 METER
(18 INCHES), F R W J4 PTNS E. F. G. H. AND K TO AN AIRCRAFT -
GROUND TERMINAL. OPEN ANTENNAS @ F - 9 0 4 0 / 9 0 4 2 WITH 1
ALL OTHER WIRES ARE NO. 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. EXTERNAL ELNEWT ONLY)
FOR SQUELCH-CONTROLLED STOP SCAN OPERATION, CONNECT P I N q TO A T - 9 0 9 0 MONOPOLE E T C
6.
7.
PIN
USE FIBER OPTIC CASLE S_PE C- T R A N SPECIALTY OPTICS HCP-M0200T- -
Dol FS-IO
COAX1 OR EQUIVALENT
AL JUMPER PN 216-0029-010.
SUPPLIED.
8.
9. CONNECT 28 V OR 5 V P A N a LIGHTING CONTROL AS REQUIRED.
10. CONNECT S E L C M AUDIO I F REQUIRED.
12. CONNECT ADDRESS AND PARITY P I N S TO J l - V CHASSIS GROUND AS
REQUIRED.
13. U i E Mc-C-17/176-0002 TRIAX CABLE OR EQUIVALENT.
14. USE OF HF-9010 CONTROL I S OPTIONAL WHEN MTL-STD-15538 CONTROL I S USED.
I F HF-9010 I S NOT USED, CONNECT H F - 9 3 7 1 / 9 0 7 3 FRFi OPT OUT J3 TO H F - 9 0 4 0 / 9 0 4 1 / 9 0 4 2
FBR OPT I N J2
15. MATING CONNECTORS:
751- I196
TPB- 1632-01 5
SELECT EITHER COMMERCIAL (SOLDER) OR M I L I T A R Y (CRIMP) STYLE CONNECTOR.
16. USE NO. 20 AWG WIRE FROM AIRCRAFT 28V DC BUS FOR COUPLER POWER.
Using MIL-STD-1553B Bus Control
2-2312-24
installation
ANTENNA COUPLER
HF-9040
J2
’ FIBER OPTIC L I N K r FBR OPT I N
L
J3
FIBER OPTIC L I N K
FBR OPT OUT
J4 ANTENNA
TO/FROM AT-9090F
RG-400/U A
SYSTEM
RF 1/0 RF 1/0 RF I N
NOTE 1
L
PI0
RF GND
+28 V DC INPUT ( 3 A M A X I INSULATED LOAD
NOTE b-4{ PUR GND WIRE ( 12-20’1
DUAL +28 V DC I N
J2
EXT ELEMENT PWR GND 1 +28 V DC
PWR GND
EXT ELEMENT
CONFIG GND
CONFIG A
1
f A
CONFIG C
7
D
E
F
ELEMENT
CONFIG
CONFIG
CONFIG
CONFIG
GND
A
B
C
NOTES :
1 . REFER TO SYSTEM INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS.
2 . MATING CONNECTORS (AT-9090F ONLY)
1=. UNIT REQUIRES GOOD RF BON
TO AIRCRAFT S K I N THROUGH MIL I TARY
MOUNTING SURFACE CONNECTOR COMMERCIAL CONNECTOR STRAIN RELIEF
(USE GASKET 6 2 1 - 7 6 3 4 - 0 0 1 1 359-7504-210 359-7007-010 PN
J2 MS3476L14-19SW MS3417-14N TYPE
357-9303-000 PN
J1 MALE HN
UG-l213/U 1 TYPE
3 . SEE 621-7675-OOX
-003, RIGHT ANGLE CONNECTOR AND STRAIGHT CONNECTOR.
-004, RIGHT ANGLE CONNECTOR AN0 RIGHT ANGLE CONNECTOR.
4 . USE NO 20 AWG WIRE FROM AIRCRAFT +28 V DC BUS FOR COUPLER POWER
HF-9000 System, Partial Interconnect Diagram

Showing Tuned HF Monopole Antenna AT-9090
Figure 2-6
2-2512-26
installation
HF-9070/
J5
HF-9072 RG-400/U A
REVEIVER- RF
TRANSMITTER I
r
J2 FIBER
FIBER OPTIC L I N K NOTE 7 B
OPTIC I N
c
309M-1 ALE PROCESSOR i F - 9 0 12
J3
1 I
J5 J6 FIBER J2 ? A D 1 0 SET CONTROL J3
JE FIBER OPTIC L I N K FIBER OPTIC L I N K
FIBER OPTIC I N FIBER OPTIC OUT FBR OPT I N FBR OPT OUT C
AMPL RF 1 / 0
OPTIC OUT I I
+28 V DC INPUT ( 1 A MAX)
PWR GND
RESERVED 115 V AC LIGHTING BUS
RCVR/EXCTR
NOTE 8 RF 1/0
MASTER/SLAVE
L
P/C
P - J2 G LIGHT BUS COMMON
TB-1 J4
RCV DATA^
(600 OHM
sco;
RCV AUDIO I N 600 OHM
RCV AUDIO I N COMMON
RCV AUDIO I N SHIELD
CONFIGURATION
4 6
SPARE H
J
K
28 V DC LIGHTING BU
5 V DC LIGHTING BUSS)
NOTE
SHIELD 50
OUT CDM 43
(600 OHM 24 VP AUDIO I N L
XMT VOICE I N 49
XMT VOICE {
1 5 0 OHM
COM
L
NOTE 2
8
47
VP AUDIO I N H
VP AUDIO I N SHIELD
IN
SHLD
frP P I
SH IE L 0
L
XMT DATA (6°0sE!i !!
v
X
u v 64
62
XMT AUD OUT 600 OHM
XMT AUD OUT COMMON
XMT AUD OUT SHIELD
CALL ALERT
XMT AUD I N 600 OHM

- I XMT AUD I N COMMON
PTT KEY RADIO KEY
XMT AUD I N SHIELD
CHASSIS GND
DATA OUT 600 OHM 36
n n
RCV DATA
{
CHASSIS GND " II
DATA OUT 1 5 0 OHM 27 AUDIO OUT ( 0 dbml
FF I I ? I I II II
DATA OUT COMMON 45
RECEIVE MUTE
HH
-
RCV MUTE
-
DATA OUT SHIELD
DN/DFF 43
EXT AGC TIME CONST
TUNE I N PROGRESS "
AGC
PA T I P
AUX OUTPUT 1 34 7
XMT INTERLOCK CONT DATA 1 50
KEY I N H I B I T
SYSTEM KEY CONT DATA 2 56
SYSTEM KEY
CDNT DATA SHIELD 48
VP-110 PRESENT 12
f600 OHM
RCV VOICE{ 150 COM
OHM RCV L
B VOICE OUT
C NOTE 2 RS232 SHIELD
+28 V DC XMT L
( SHLD W
INPUT +28 V DC
1 2 0 0 BAUD
CONTROL SH IE L 0
NOTE 5 GROUND MONITOR H
CONTROL H
PTT KEY
752-4172
HF-9000 System With Automatic Link Establish-

ment (ALE) Control Processor 309M-1 and
Radio Set Control HF-9012
2-2712-28
installation
1 3 . WIRING I S SHOWN WITH INTERPHONE REQUIRING CARBON MICROPHONE INPUT.

I F INTERPHONE SYSTEM HAS BALANCED MICROPHONE OUTPUT, CONNECT DIRECTLY
TO RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER J1 PINS K OR L, M AND f ,
14 I
\ CONFIGURATION
MILITARY
UNIT CONNECTOR COMMERCIAL CONNECTOR STRAIN RELIEF
STRAPPING
PN
ANTENNA TYPE O=GND [ J l = R ) J1
PT06A22-55S(SP) MS3476L22-55S M85049/52-1-22N TYPE
1=OPEN
. -
NOTE 4 tJ1-AIJ1-BIJl-C
HF - 904 0 /HF - 9 0 4 1 GROUNDED TUBE/GROUNDED WIRE I l I l I 1
TUBE: 3 , 6 6 M ( 1 2 F T I MINIMUM
HF-9042 WIRE: 3.05 M ( 1 0 F T I MINIMUM
ANTENNA COUPLER
RF 1 / 0 RF 1 / 0
SHUNT ANTENNAS/SHORT GROUNDED TUBES '
(HF-9041 ONLY)
LONG OPEN ANTENNAS (HF-9042 ONLY) 1 1 0
OPEN ANTENNAS [HF-9040, HF-9042 0 1 1

FIBER WITH EXTERNAL ELEMENT ONLY)
OPTIC OUT [ACCOMPLISHED THROUGH INTERCONNECT1
FIBER '10 5 . USE NO. 10 AWG (MINIMUM WIRE FROM AIRCRAFT 28 V DC BUS TO WITHIN
OPTIC I N J1 0 . 3 METERS (12 INCHES) FROM THE HF-9070 RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER.
- CONNECT THE 2 8 V DC POSITIVE WIRE TO AN EIGHT STUD TERMINAL
+28 V DC EXT ELEMENT PWR U BLOCK PN 376-0808-080 (MS 27212-1-8) OR EQUIVALENT, USE BUS
EXT ELEMENT PWR GND H BAR PN 367-0810-050 ( M S 25266-2-6) OR EQUIVALENT AND COVER PN
EXT ELEMENT A J 367-0809-080 (MS 18029-1s-83 OR EQUIVALENT, USE F I V E 20 AWG
EXT ELEMENT B K WIRES, LENGTH NOT TO EXCEED 0 . 4 6 METER ( 1 8 INCHES), FROM THE
EXT ELEMENT C L BUSED TERMINALS TO J 4 PINS A , 8 , C , D , AND J OF THE H F - 9 0 3 0 .
EXT ELEMENT D
EXT ELEMENT E
M
N USE A 2 5 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR THE RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER.
1 J5'J6 I FIBERCI;;: TABLE I
EXT ELEMENT F P A SINGLE 5 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER MAY BE USED FOR THE ANTENNA
CONFIG GND R COUPLER AND THE R A D I O SET CONTROL COMBINED, USE 5 AMP
CONFIG A A CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR THE 309M-1 I
B USE F I V E NO. 2 0 AWG WIRES, LENGTH NOT TO EXCEED 0 , 4 6 METER ( 1 8

CONFIG C C INCHES), FROM J 4 PINS E , F , G, H, AND K TO AN AIRCRAFT GROUND
PIC -cl
+ 2 8 V DC ~1 TERMINAL, ALL OTHER WIRES ARE NO. 2 2 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE
INPUT SPECIFIED I
(3A M A X I +28 V DC
16 6 , CONNECT AC OR DC POWER BOTH.
NOTE 5 PWR GND
DUAL +28 V DC I N 7 . FIBER OPTIC TABLE ~ I CRIMPSTYLE
STATUS A
CONNECTOR
261-0054-010
CABLE 1 5 . THE RS 2 3 2 CONNECTOR I S RECOMMENDED TO BE INSTALLED I N THE AIRCRAFT TO BE ABLE
216-0029-010 TO F I L L PARAMETERS, FREQUENCIES ETC, INTO THE SYSTEM WITH A LAP-TOP COMPUTER.
HCP-MDEOOT-D01FS-10
1 6 . USE NO, 20 AWG WIRE FROM AIRCRAFT 28 V DC BUS FOR COUPLER POWER.
8 I C O A X I A L JUMPER SUPPLIED I
9 . CONNECT 2 8 V OR 5 V PANEL LIGHTING CONTROL AS REQUIRED,

1 0 . CONNECT SELCAL AUDIO I F REQUIRED,
11.,CONNECT DATA AUDIO I F REQUIRED.
1 2 . CONNECT ADDRESS AND PARITY PINS TO J 1 - V CHASSIS GROUND AS REQUIRED.
752-4 172
HF-9000 System With Automatic Link Establish-

ment (ALE) Control Processor 309M-1 and
Radio Set Control HF-9012
2-2912-30
installation
HF-9000 System With ALE Control Processor

309M-1 and Voice Privacy Unit VP-110
2-31/2-32
installation

Change 3 2-33/2-34
installation

Change 3 2-35/2-36
installation
HF-9080/9081/9082/9084
J1[ RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER
A BACKUP VCC ( + 2 8 V DC)
B GROUND
C
H F - 9 0 12
34 J1
D 1 RADIO SET
- +28 V DC I N P U T ( 1 A M A X I
P -
1J CONTROL
b AGC T I M E CONSTANT NOTE 14
5 V A C L I G H T I N G B U S NOTE 9
€ S P E E C H PROC D S B L
+28 V OC I N P U T
d TEST ENBL
(20 A MAX)
-I FAULT
E NOTE 5
G TUNE I N PROGRESS
F
U
H
XMT I N T L K
NORMAL/SECURE
G
PWR GND
K
28 V OC L I G H T I N G BUS
5 V DC L I G H T I N G B U S }
B0 CH BUSY RESERVED NOTE 5
cc SRDS 33 J2 FIBER OPTIC L I N K
FER OPT OUT
-
S LINKD/LNKNG FIBER OPTIC LINK
0 NAR FBR OPT OUT FBR OPT I N
Y PROC KEY
Z CPLR B Y P A S S
I
F B R OPT I N
X RETURN SCAN HF-9040/9041/9042
a ANTENNA
r
RCV MUTE
C A L L ALERT
- ANTENNA
n RG-400/U
COUPLER
1
E RF 1 / 0
F
J SPARES FBR OPT I N
n
RCV V O I C E 600 OHMS
eP RCV V O I C E 1 5 0 OHMS
J3
I
RT ADDRESS 0 FER OPT OUT
R RT ADDRESS 1
RCV V O I C E COM
RCV V O I C E S H L D
I
k RT ADDRESS 2 J4
i'
m RT ADDRESS 3 RCV DATA 6 0 0 OHMS
NOTE 12 RCV DATA A U D I O OUT
S R T ADDRESS 4 RCV DATA 1 5 0 OHMS Y NOTES 2 A N 0 1 1
RF 1 / 0 R F 110'
RCV D A T A COM N
AA
V
RT P A R I T Y
C H A S S I S GND
RCV DATA S H L D GG ._ r I
J1
-
1 S E L C A L RCV H S E L C A L A U D I O OUT
+28 V DC I N P U T ( 3 A M A X I - V
I S E L C A L RCV L
PWR G N D - G
XMT V O I C E 600 OHMS
XMT V O I C E 1 5 0 OHMS
XMT V O I C E COM
L
M
XMT V O I C E A U D I O I N
N O T E S 2 AND 3
+28 V DC E X T E L E M E N T PWR
E X T E L E M E N T PWR GND
U
H
) RESERVED
XMT V O I C E S H L D f P Y f CONFIG A - A
n n CONFIG B - B
XMT D A T A 6 0 0 OHMS
II 16{ CONFIG C - C
NOTE 8 EXCTR
XMT DATA 1 5 0 OHMS :E
XMT D A T A COM Y
II
XMT DATA A U D I O
N O T E S 2 AND 1 1
IN
C ON FIG GND - R
RF 1 / 0 XMT D A T A S H L D Y D U A L + 2 8 V DC I N D
I
n n STATUS A E
CARBON M I C H 9 CABON M I C I N P U T
CARBON M I C L h y-> NOTE 3
STATUS B F
EXT ELEMENT A J
-1
L
'}A BUS
A BUS P T T KEY
MT-9079B EXT ELEMENT B K RESERVED
STOP SCAN
J P T T KEY MOUNT EXT ELEMENT C L
NOTE 13 3 RETRANSMIT
S Y S T E M KEY
EXT ELEMENT
EXT ELEMENT
D
E
M
N
{
MIL-STD-1553B II II EXT ELEMENT F P
A BUS
CHASSIS
GND
+ 2 8 V DC
(300 rnA M A X ) + 2 8 V DC
SPARE { S
T
NOTE 5 - 751-9075-001
TPC-2953-022C
HF-9000 System With Embedded

ALE Receiver-Transmitter
2-3712-38
installation
NOTES : 16 I
I . CONNECT P I N S E AND F FOR SINGLE CONTROL OPERATION, ANTENNA COUPLER CONFIGURATION TRAPPING TABLE
2. CONNECT EITHER 150 OHM OR 600 OHM BALANCED AUDIO, NOT BOTH.
3 I CONNECT EITHER XMT VOICE AUDIO INPUT OR CARBON MIC INPUT, NOT BOTH. CONFIGURATION
4 I FOR KEY FILL USE, KYK-13 OR EQUIVALENT, STRAPPING
O=GND ( J l - R )
5. USE NO 10 AWG (MINIMUM) WIRE FROM AIRCRAFT 28 V DC BUS TO WITHIN ANTENNA TYPE
1 =OPEN
0 . 3 METERS ( 1 2 INCHES) FROM THE HF-9030 RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER, -- -
CONNECT THE 28 V DC POSITIVE WIRE TO AN EIGHT STUD TERMINAL BLOCK J1-A -
J1-B JI-C
PN 376-0808-080 (MS 27212-1-81 OR EQUIVALENT. USE BUS BAR PN 367-0810-050 GROUNDED TUBE/GROUNDED WIRE 1 1 1
[MS 25266-2-61 OR EQUIVALENT AND COVER PN 367-0809-080 (MS 18029-lS-81 TUBE: 3 , 6 6 M (12 F T ) MINIMUM
OR EQUIVALENT. USE F I V E 20 AWG WIRES, LENGTH NOT TO EXCEED 0 0 4 6 METER TUBE: 3 . 0 5 M ( 1 0 F T ) MINIMUM
( 1 8 INCHES), FROM THE BUSED TERMINALS TO J 4 P I N S A , B , C, D AND J OF THE HF-9030
USE A 2 5 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR THE RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER. A SINGLE SHUNT ANTENNAWSHORT GROUNDED 1 0 1
5 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER MAY BE USED FOR THE ANTENNA COUPLER, MOUNT, AND TUBES (HF-9041 ONLY)
THE RADIO SET CONTROL COMBINED.
WHIP/OPEN ANTENNAS (HF-9042) 1 1 0
USE F I V E NO 20 AWG WIRES, LENGTH NOT TO EXCEED 0 . 4 6 METER ( 1 8 INCHES),
OPEN ANTENNAS (WITH EXTERNAL 0 1 1
FROM J 4 P I N S E , F , G, H AND K TO AN AIRCRAFT GROUND TERMINAL.
ELEMENT I
ALL OTHER WIRES ARE NO 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE S P E C I F I E D ,
6. THIS MOUNT I S OPTIONAL FOR EXTENDED DUTY CYCLE. -
7. USE FIBER OPTIC CABLE SPECTRAN HCP-MO2OOT-D01FS-10 OR EQUIVALENT PN 216-0029-010
8 I COAXIAL JUMPER SUPPLIED I 1 7 . USE NO. 20 AWG WIRE FROM AIRCRAFT 28 V DC BUS FOR COUPLER POWER
9. CONNECT 28 V OR 5 V PANEL LIGHTING CONTROL AS REQUIRED.
10. CONNECT SELCAL AUDIO I F REQUIRED,
12. CONNECT ADDRESS AND PARITY P I N S TO J l - V CHASSIS GROUND AS REQUIRED.
13. USE MIL-C-17/176-0002 TRIAX CABLE OR EQUIVALENT. (HF-9081/HF-9084 ONLY1
14. USE OF HF-9012 CONTROL I S OPTIONAL WHEN MIL-STD-15538 CONTROL I S USED,
I F HF-9012 I S NOT USED. CONNECT HF-9079 FBR OPT OUT J 3 TO ANTENNA COUPLER FBR OPT I N J 2 .
15 I MATING CONNECTORS :
UNIT MILITARY
CONNECTOR COMMERCIAL
371-6411-000 359-7504-040 359-7007-070 PN
J1 PT06A12-10s ( S R ) MS3476L12-10S MS3417-12N TYPE
HF-90 12 261-0054-010 PN
I , ,.
SPECTRAN I
CM-230-1 .8
PN
HF-9OXX J10
MS3116F8-4S TYPE
371-8087-000 359-7504-080 359-7007-0 10 PN
J1 PT06A1419S(SRl MS3476L14-19S MS3417-14N TYPE
HF-9040 261-0054-010 PN
HF-904 1 J2/J3 SPECTRAN SPECIALTY
OPTICS
. CM-230-1
. . .._R
TYPE
~~~
I
HF-9042
J4 I
357-9292-000 PN
1
MIL-C-39012/16-0101 TYPE
751-9075-CUl
SELECT EITHER COMMERCIAL (SOLDER) OR MILITARY (CRIMP) STYLE CONNECTOR, TPC-295 3-O22C
HF-9000 System With Embedded

ALE Receiver-Transmitter
2-3912-40
installation
HF-9030/9032/9070/9072
P/
LL RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER
b AGC TIME CONSTAN'
FBR OPT I N
-
C SPEECH PROC DSBL
d TEST ENBL
FAULT
G TUNE I N PROGRESS
T RF 110
SYSTEM KEY
U XMT INTLK -
H J3
NORMAL/BB
BE DAGC CS FIBER OPTIC L I N K
FBR OPT OUT
cc DAGC CE -
RESERVED
-D
S DAGC 0
DAGC 1
Y DAGC 2
r DAGC 3
X DAGC 4
P RT ADDRESS 0
R RT ADDRESS 1
-k RT ADDRESS 2
m RT ADDRESS 3
S RT ADDRESS 4
AP RT PARITY
0 RCV MUTE
z CPLR BYPASS
E \I
-
P
F
-n
j IJ-
I
SPARES RCV VOICE 600 n
RCV VOICE 150n
RCV VOICE COM
RCV VOICE SHIELD
!
1 ; 1' 7 RCV VOICE AUDIO OUT
{NOTE 2
\
RCV DATA 6 0 0 n
RCV DATA 1 5 0 n RCV DATA AUDIO OUT
RCV DATA COM
YN NOTES 2 , 1 1
v
RCV DATA SHLD GG
SELCAL RCV H SELCAL AUDIO OUT
SELCAL RCV L NOTE 10
XMT VOICE 600
XMT VOICE AUDIO I N
XMT VOICE 150 n L
NOTES 2 , 3
XMT VOICE COM
XMT VOICE SHLD
XMT DATA 6 0 0 n
XMT DATA 150
XMT DATA COM
:(
-
1' + ; JNOTES 2, 11
XMT DATA SHLD
J6
7
CARBON MIC H CARBON M I C INPUT
4MPL RF 1/0 CARBON M I C L h NOTE 3
PTT KEY J PTT KEY
STOP SCAN
RETRANSMIT
?CVR/EXCTR
?F 1 1 0
CHASS IS
GND i
f
RCV IN/TX OUT

J1
A .
G
E
+28 V DC INPUT ( 1 . 5 A MAX)
PWR GND
OVERLOAD OUT
c , FAULT OUT
I I - NOTE 13
75 1-9O76-W 1
rPc-2954-034c
HF-9000 System With Bandpass Filter HF-9060

2-4112-42
installation
HF- 9010/9012
+28 V DC INPUT ( 1 A M A X )
RADIO SET PWR GND
CONTROL 115 V AC LIGHTING BUS (RESERVED1
D 5 V AC LIGHTING BUS NOTE 9
F
MASTER /SLAVE
MASTER/SLAVE GND
?-
NOTE 1
LIGHTING BUS' COMMON
28 V DC LIGHTING BUS
J
K 5 V DC LIGHTING BUS ) NOTE
FBR OPT I N
HF-9040/9041/
9042 ANTENNA
COUPLER
J3 J2
FIBER OPTIC L I N K
FBR OPT OUT FBR OPT I N ANTENNA COUPLER CONFIGURATION STRAPPING TABLE 1
CONFIGURATION
+E8 V DC INPUT ( 3 A MAX) STRAPPING
PWR GND
}
ANTENNA
ANTENNA TYPE
O=GND ( J l - R I
1 =OPEN I
T
EXT ELEMENT PWR GND
RESERVED J1-A I J1-B I J1-C
f CONFIG A h GROUNDED TUBE/GROUNDED WIRE 1 1 1
TUBE: 3 . 6 6 M ( 1 2 F T ) MINIMUM
CONFIG C C WIRE: 3 . 0 5 M ( 1 0 F T I MINIMUM
(CONFIG GND - R RF 1/0 (HF-9040/9041/9042)
DUAL +28 V DC I N D
SHUNT ANTENNAS/SHORT GROUNDED 1 0 1
STATUS A E TUBES (HF-9041 ONLY)
STATUS B F
EXT ELEMENT A J WHIP/OPEN ANTENNAS (HF-9042 ONLY) 1 1 0
' RESERVED
EXT ELEMENT B K
OPEN ANTENNAS (HF9040/9042 WITH 0 1 1
EXT ELEMENT C L
EXTERNAL ELEMENT ONLY) (MONOPOLE
EXT ELEMENT D M
BLADE, LOAD COIL ETC)
EXT ELEMENT E N
EXT ELEMENT F P
SPARE
S
T
{
I
J3
( A SH 1 1 NOTE 7
FBR OPT OUT
J4
( B SH 1 ) RG-400
?F 1/0
751-9076-001
TPC-2954-034

2-4312-44
installation
NOTES :
1 , CONNECT P I N S E AND F FOR SINGLE CONTROL OPERATION.
2 . CONNECT EITHER 150 OHM OR 600 OHM BALANCED AUDIO, M I L I TARY
NOT BOTH, UNIT CONNECTOR COMMERCIAL CONNECTOR STRAIN R E L I E F
3 , CONNECT EITHER XMT VOICE AUDIO INPUT OR CARBON 371-6411-000 359-7504-040 359-7007-070 PN
MIC INPUT, NOT BOTH. J1 PT06A 12- 1 OS( SR I MS3476L12-10S MS3417-12N TYPE
4 , CONFIGURATION STRAPPING. REFER TO TABLE 1 , HF-90 10 261-0054-010 PN
5 . USE NO. 10 AWG (MINIMUM) WIRE FROM THE AIRCRAFT 28 V DC J2/J3 SPECTRAN TYPF
BUS TO WITHIN 0 . 3 METERS (12 INCHES) FROM THE HF-9030
RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER. CONNECT THE 28 V DC P O S I T I V E
(MS 27212-1-81 OR EQUIVALENT. USE BUS BAR PN 367-0810
-050 (MS 25266-2-6) OR EQUIVALENT AND COVER PN 367-0809-080 I I JWJ~ I SPECTRAN~- I I I Tvnr I
(MS 18029-18-81 OR EQUIVALENT. USE F I V E 20 AWG WIRES, LENGTH HF-9030
NOT TO EXCEED 0 , 4 6 METER (18 INCHES), FROM THE BUSED
TERMINALS TO J 4 P I N S A , B , C, D, AND J OF THE H F - 9 0 3 0 .
USE A 2 5 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR THE RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER.
A SINGLE 5 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER MAY BE USED FOR THE
ANTENNA COUPLER, RADIO SET CONTROL, AND THE BANDPASS F I L T E R ,
USE F I V E NO, 20 AWG WIRES, LENGTH NOT TO EXCEED 0 . 4 6
METER ( 1 8 INCHES1 FROM P I N S E, F , G, H, AND K TO AN
AIRCRAFT GROUND TERMINAL. ALL OTHER WIRES ARE NO. 22 AWG
UNLESS OTHERWISE S P E C I F I E D .
6. FOR SQUELCH-CONTROLLED STOP SCAN OPERATION, CONNECT P I N q TO P I N g . HF-9040
7, USE FIBER OPTIC CABLE SPECTRAN SPECIALTY OPTICS HCP-M0200T-D01FS-10
HF-904 1
( 2 1 6 - 0 0 2 9 - 0 1 0 ) OR EQUIVALENT
I
CM-230-1 , 8
8. REMOVE COAXIAL JUMPER SUPPLIED AND REPLACE WITH FABRICATED HF-9042 357-9292-000 PN
COAXIAL CABLES TO/FROM BANDPASS F I L T E R . J4
MIL-C-39012/16-0101 TYPE
9. CONNECT 28 V OR 5 V PANEL LIGHTING CONTROL AS REQUIRED, PN
10. CONNECT SELCAL AUDIO I F REQUIRED. J1
MS3476W12-10SX M85049/52-1-12W TYPE
11. CONNECT DATA AUDIO I F REQUIRED. 261-0054-010 PN
HF-9060 J2’J3 SPECTRAN SPECIALTY T, Va D C
, L
OPTICS CM-230-1 .8
357-9666-000 PN
J4/J5
M39012/26-0101 TYPE
1 3 . PINS G AND E ARE OPEN FOR NORMAL OPERATION, GROUNDED I F FAULTED OR

OVERLOAD CONDITION. CAPABLE OF 200 mA SINKING CAPACITY.
1 4 . USE NO, 20 AWG WIRE FROM AIRCRAFT 28 V DC BUS FOR COUPLER POWER,
751-9076-001
TPC-2954-034

2-4512-46
installation
This Figure Deleted
Change 3 2-47/2-48
installation
This Figure Deleted
Change 3 2-49/2-50
installation
2.4.3 R F Grounding
Proper bonding of all units t o an acceptable ground is of prime importance. Special emphasis must be
placed on grounding the coupler and associated mounts.
Each equipment mount must be bonded directly t o the ground plane using silver- or tin-plated copper or
aluminum strap or equivalent structure. The length-to-width ratio of strap is not more than 5 t o 1 (that is,
a 127-mm (5-in) long strap is a minimum of 25.4 mm (1in) wide).
Bonding t o anodized or painted surfaces is not acceptable for good R F grounds. Surfaces to be bonded
should be sanded free of paint or anodic film and joined using screws with washers t o ensure maximum
surface contact over as large a n area as possible. Carefully select materials t o avoid corrosion due to
dissimilar metals. Use an electrically-conductive substance on all bare metal surfaces t o retard corrosion.
The ground strap between the antenna coupler and a good ground is the most important ground strap in
the HF-9000 system. Run i t parallel t o the antenna feedline and bond i t as near as possible t o the antenna
feedthrough insulator and t o the antenna coupler mount as close as possible to the coupler RF output
point. Maximum length-to-width ratio for this strap does not exceed 5 t o 1.
Installations using shielded antenna feedlines are not as critical, since a good RF return path is provided
by the feedline shield. However, these installations must also have a local ground strap t o a nearby good
ground.
2.4.4Fiber-optic Cabling
ed. Dust and moisture on the internal optical lenses of the connectors degrade HF-9000
system operation.
Proper installation of fiber-optic connectors is essential t o reliable HF-9000 system operation. Follow
closely the manufacturer's instructions supplied with the connectors.
After fiber-optic cables have been fabricated, use a fiber-optic test set to measure cable attenuation. (A
recommended unit is the Meson Design MC850A'S-IC-SMA with CPA-SMA power meter adapter.) Follow
the test equipment manufacturer's instructions for measuring cable attenuation. Attenuation should not
exceed 3.0 dB for each cable.
2.4.5 Lightning Arresters
A compatible lightning arrester may be used in any open wire antenna installation.
2-5 1
installation
2.4.6 Address and Parity Strapping
When an HF-9000 system receiver-transmitter is controlled via a MIL-STD-1553B bus, it must have a
unique address assigned t o it. Refer to figure 2-5. Receiver-transmitter address inputs (J1 pins P, R, k, m,
and S)along with receiver-transmitter parity input (J1-AA) are used t o create the receiver-transmitter
address. The receiver-transmitter address is a binary number. Any valid MIL-STD-1553B address is
acceptable; however, the receiver-transmitter requires an odd number of 1’s (including the parity bit) in its
address. The receiver-transmitter address and parity inputs are pulled high (to logic 1)within the
receiver-transmitter. Address strapping is accomplished by selectively connecting receiver-transmitter
address and parity inputs t o chassis ground J1-V. An address such as 00011 (3 binary) (Jl-P and J1-R left
open and J1-k, J1-m, and J1-s strapped t o chassis ground) is not acceptable since i t h a s an even number of
1’s. In this instance, the receiver-transmitter parity input (Jl-AA) is also left open (logic 11, making an odd
number of 1’s in the address.
2.4.7 ARINC 429 Port and Burst Strapping
Refer to figure 2-4. Aeronautical Radio, Inc. (ARINC) 429 ports A, B, and C must be selected t o receive
continuous data. If a port is not selected, i t is inactive. Refer t o table 2-1 for port selection.
Table 2-1. Continuous Mode Port Selection

PORT SELECTED N B SELECT (Jl-r) C SELECT ( J l - S ) BURST ENABLE (Jl-Y)
A Ground Open Open
B Open Open Open
C X Open Open
E X indicates either open or grounded.
A ground on BURST ENABLE (Jl-Y) enables ARINC 429 burst data mode. When burst mode is enabled,
ARINC 429 N B SELECT (Jl-r)and ARINC 429 C SELECT (Jl-s) are inactive. Ports A and C receive
burst data and port B receives both burst or continuous data. If continuous data is applied to port B, data
at ports A and C is ignored.
2.4.8 Line Replaceable Unit Identification Strapping
Line replaceable unit (LRU) identification (IDENT) J1-X identifies the second HF-9000 system in a dual-
system installation. When J1-X is open, ARINC 492 data SourceDestination Index (SDI) bit 9 is set t o 0
and bit 10 is set t o 1 (binary 1). When J1-X is grounded, ARINC 429 data SDI bit 9 is set t o 1 and bit 10
is set t o 0 (binary 2).
2.4.9 Master/Slave Strapping
Masterlslave strapping may be required when two radio set controls are used to control one HF-9000
system. Normally, the radio set controls are included in series in the fiber-optic ring. In this instance, the
radio set control last manipulated is the master, and the related HF-9000 system takes its commands from
that radio set control. When used in this configuration, no external mastedslave strapping is required.
NOTE
Some earlier version HF-9000 systems required a master radio set control t o be designated
by connecting J1-E to J1-F on the radio set control as shown in figure 2-2.
2-52
installation
2.4.10 Antenna Coupler Strapping
The HF-9000 system antenna coupler must be strapped to designate the type of antenna being used with
it. This strapping is accomplished by selectively connecting antenna coupler connector J1 pins A, B, and C
to J1-R, configuration ground. J1-A, J1-B, and J1-C are pulled high (to logic 1) within the antenna coupler.
Connect the appropriate pin(s) to J1-R for logic 0 as shown in Table 2-1.
Table 2-2. Antenna Coupler Strapping

ANTENNA TYPE CONFIGURATION STRAPPING
0 = GROUNDED, 1 = OPEN
J1-A J1-B J1-C
Grounded tube/grounded wire (HF-9040/9041/9042) 1 1 1
Tube: 3.66 m (12 ft) minimum
Wire: 3.05 m (10 ft) minimum
Shunt antenna/short grounded tubes (HF-9041 only) 1 0 1
Whip open antennas (HF-9042 only) 1 1 0
Open antennas (HF-9040/9042 with external element only) 0 1 1
(monopole blade, load coil, etc)
2.5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CAUTION
ed. Dust or moisture on the internal optical lenses of the connectors degrade HF-9000
system operation.
To prevent damage to fiber-optic connectors, only hand tighten the connectors. Never use a
wrench or spanner to tighten the connectors. Do not overtighten safety wire. Most
automatic safety-wire pliers exert excessive force on the connectors. Hand-tighten safety
wire or use extreme caution when using automatic safety-wire pliers
For installation control drawings and information on how t o install HF-9000 system equipment mounting
bases and HF-9000 equipments, refer to figures 2-18 through 2-53 and the applicable instruction book
listed in table 1-8.
Rockwell Collins has antenna systems engineers with many years of hands-on experience with many
different types of antenna systems. We welcome calls and questions on antenna system design.
2.5.1 Shunt and Notch Antenna System Installation
Shunt- or notch-type hf antennas are becoming increasingly popular for use on modern high-speed or
streamlined aircraft. The antennas are now frequently used in lieu of traditional wire, cap, or probe-type
hf antennas. The shunt or notch conformal antennas provide high-performance, reliable, lightweight, low-
drag antenna solutions, and are easy to integrate into the standard structure of most aircraft types.
Change 3 2-53
installation
The word shunt is used to reference both shunt and notch configurations as the main difference between
the two antenna systems relates to the antenna shape. When the dielectric area shape (as shown in figure
2-12) has a relatively large length compared t o the depth, the antenna is called a shunt type. When the
depth of the dielectric area is relatively large, the antenna is often called a notch or shunt-fed notch.
Figure 2-13 shows a variety of configurations and locations used for this type of antenna. Figure 2-14
shows general details of a preferred shunt antenna system installed with HF Antenna Coupler HF-9041.
These guidelines are provided to give antenna system designers and installers a broad, practical overview
of the most important HF-9000 system design parameters for shunt antenna systems. This information
helps provide an antenna system that is compatible with the HF-9000 system. This information also
applies to similar hf equipment with simple factors for power level. Discussion is based on system design
and installation experience rather than on detailed antenna theory. The antenna designer is responsible
for the normal qualification verification details of the design, but Rockwell Collins provides additional
needed assistance.
Although these guidelines are primarily about the more critical transmitting properties of shunt antenna
systems, they also apply to designing a good receive antenna system. A receive antenna system must also
be shielded from any local noise sources that may mask low-level receive signals.
The shunt (shunt-fed antenna) is best described as a low-impedance transmission line structure that
couples the hf energy to or from the larger aircraft structure. The whole conductive surface of the airframe
becomes part of the hf antenna. Various sections of the airframe are more significant for radiation at
different hf frequencies due to the resonant size-to-wavelength relationship. The shunt (with hf currents
flowing around the perimeter of the dielectric area) also radiates or receives directly as a loop antenna. In
contrast, most other hf antenna types (probe, cap, open wire, etc) are high-impedance structures that use
high voltage to couple to the aircraft.
The shunt antenna is basically formed by replacing a small section of the metal (conductive) surface of the
aircraft with a dielectric (insulating) material. The dielectric section forms an electrically small (low
impedance at lower hf frequencies) loop area about which hf currents can flow. In some cases, a metal
strip can be added along the outer edge of a composite section of the airframe to form the current loop
path. An antenna coupler is required to generate the relatively large hf currents required for efficient loop
excitation. The location and effective area of the current loop are important t o hf system performance.
Always treat antenna design as a system effort. The hf antenna system includes the antenna coupler,
feedline, and antenna structure. All of these parts (everything in the primary antenna current path) and
their location on the airframe are essential to proper antenna system Performance. The design process
involves finding a suitable location for the dielectric area, and then arranging the dimensions of the shunt
feed and dielectric area to provide an effective antenna that can be efficiently matched with a standard
antenna coupler. The following paragraphs provide some practical guidelines t o consider when designing a
shunt antenna system.
2.5.1.1 Antenna Location Selection
The first choice for antenna location selection is to place the shunt antenna at the root of the tail fin as
shown in most of the configurations in figure 2-13. This provides direct excitation of the vertical tail to
produce very good overall hf signal direction (omnidirectional and low angle) for long-range propagation.
This also enhances vertical polarized signals for ground or sea wave propagation at the lower hf
frequencies. With the shunt antenna in the wing, direct excitation of this horizontal structure favors
horizontally-polarized signals, but the rest of the airframe is still part of the antenna.
2-54 Change 3
installation
AIRCRAFT PROFILE
( F I N OR WING)
SHUNT ANTENNA
DIELECTRIC AREA
D = DEPTH OF DIELECTRIC AREA
RF TIGHT DESIGN
A/
NOTCH SHAPE
HIGH
VOLTAGE
AREA
I
b- HIGH CURRENT PATH TPC-3769-011A
Typical Shunt and Notch HF Antenna Systems

Figure 2-12
2-55
installation
-TAIL SHUNT
WING SHUNT
/
DORSAL SHUNT
0 COUPLER FEED POINT ( H I G H CURRENT-HIGH VOLTAGE FEEDTHROUGH)

TPC-3770-01 1 A
Typical Shunt and Notch HF Antenna Types

Figure 2-13
2-56
installation
/ SECONDARY
ANTENNA
/f CURRENTS TAIL OR WING
FLEXIBLE FEEDLINE
(COAXIAL SHIELD)
-
t HF-9041 ANTENNA COUPLER
MT-9042 MOUNT (SINGLE OR DUAL)
(COAXIAL SHIELD)
MOUNTING SHELF
(RFGROLJND)
USE RF GROUND STRAPS
TO BYPASS ISOLATORS IF
VIBRATON ISOLATORS USED
TPC-3765-011 T
Typical Shunt and Notch HF Antenna Installation

Figure 2-14
2-57
installation
The shunt antenna is typically placed in the area just in front of the load-bearing spar on the leading edge
of the tail or wing. The deeper notch configuration generally fits more easily into the dorsal area or the
transition faring a t the base of the tail fin or wing.
Keep the shunt close t o the fin or wing root for maximum coupling t o the aircraft. The antenna coupler
feedpoint is ideally located at the end of the shunt feed that is closest t o the center of the aircraft. This
becomes less critical for larger aircraft (where the part of the fin or wing beyond the feedpoint is large) or
where optimizing performance near 2 MHz is not critical.
As shown in figure 2-13, the shunt can be located a t various points on an airframe. Since it functions as a
current coupling loop t o excite the airframe, locate it a t a point of current concentration (low impedance) t o
best couple t o the airframe. A thin section such as the edge of a tail or wing where it connects t o the
fuselage is the ideal high-current area. The tips of the airframe are high-impedance points, so loop
coupling drops off significantly for these locations. The tips of the airframe are also the most likely areas
t o be hit by lightning, so this is a secondary reason t o keep the shunt away from these locations. The
shunt feed structure is well grounded t o the airframe and is normally located away from primary
lightning-hit areas, so lightning protection is not used with these antennas. Note that in comparison, cap,
probe, and most wire-type antennas require lightning protection.
Placing the shunt in the wing does reduce vertically-polarized signals somewhat, but is an excellent place
for adding a second hf antenna as shown in figure 2-13. A wing shunt generally has good isolation from
antennas on the tail, fuselage, or other wing, and provides a good dual system solution for simultaneous
operation. Specific discussion with CACD is recommended for dual antenna installations.
2.5.1.2 Antenna Coupler and Feedline Location Selection
The main benefit of a shunt antenna system is the opportunity t o locate the antenna coupler away from
the harsh environments and inaccessibility of fin and wingtip locations. The ideal location is provided
when the antenna feedpoint is positioned t o give an installation similar to figure 2-14. The antenna
coupler is located inside the fuselage. The mounting base and flexible feedline provide the coaxial
shielding required to effectively isolate the high-powered hf antenna current and voltage from aircraft
wiring.
The feedline (including the loop current return path on the ground side) can, if neglected, be a major
source of antenna system inefficiency andor RF interference problems. The flexible coaxial feedline shown
in figure 2- 14, provides a proven effective, low-maintenance, reliable, and low-loss feedline solution.
Do not use standard coaxial cable because very high losses occur in the coaxial cable and connectors. This
is a very high-current and moderately high-voltage circuit. One meter of 50-ohm coaxial cable could have
10- t o 20-dB of loss at 2 MHz.
If the antenna coupler mount and flexible feedline shown in figure 2-14 cannot be used, take care t o avoid
RF interference o r high-voltage problems. If the antenna coupler is located in the dielectric area, the large
hf loop current couples t o any exposed antenna coupler wiring or wiring loops. Conductive shielding is
required. Refer to paragraph 2.5.1.6, Antenna Efficiency. The open section of the feedline (in the dielectric
area) is part of the radiating antenna loop, but the coaxial section serves only t o add nonradiating
reactance t o the antenna impedance. Increasing the coaxial section length serves mainly t o increase the
voltage in the antenna coupler. For the coaxial section length, do not exceed 0.6 m (23.6 in). Contact
CACD for help with special feedlines. HF Antenna Coupler HF-9041 can be configured for single or dual
(ARINC) installations using standard electrical equipment mounting bases and feedlines.
2-58
installation
2.5.1.3 Dielectric Section
The primary function of the dielectric material is t o replace the surface of the aircraft where metal has
been removed to form the area for the current-coupling loop structure. The dielectric material must also
efficiently handle the hf power (current and voltage) associated with the antenna. Experience with a
variety of antennas (as shown in figure 2-13) indicates that exact size and shape of the dielectric area are
not critical design parameters.
Ensure the dielectric area shown in figure 2-12 is always as deep as practical for maximum coupling t o the
aircraft. Efficiency can be considered proportional t o dielectric area, but depth is more important than
length. As a general guide, the dielectric area does not exceed 0.5 square meters for good coupling at lower
frequencies. The effective area can be larger than the actual size because the loop current flows outward
more around the perimeter of the dielectric when the shunt is located in a thin section of the airframe.
Avoid long and very narrow dielectric shapes; depth is better than length.
To avoid RF heating and efficiency problems, the dielectric material should be a low-loss grade of fiber
glass or equivalent. Kevlar is often used where strength is required. Some materials, like graphite
composites, must not be used within the main current loop area. These are not really dielectrics and
should be treated as somewhat lossy conductors at hf frequencies. The dielectric surface must be sealed t o
prevent arcing due t o moisture and other contamination, but avoid paints with lossy metal fillers.
Shunt antennas typically do not have high-voltage problems if these overall design guidelines are applied.
A good antenna configuration results in a lower-excitation voltage being required t o transmit peak power
and have more high-voltage design margin. If the dielectric configuration starts to resemble a microstrip-
type of transmission line, a high-excitation voltage is required. The main voltage problem t o avoid in the
dielectric area is t o have the depth dimension in figure 2-12 too small at or near the feedline end of the
shunt feed. It is recommended that the dielectric depth be at least 200 mm at the feedpoint end, both for
good antenna coupling and voltage margin. The rule is “more dielectric depth is better.”
Any metal fasteners in the dielectric area must be spaced far enough apart along the depth (voltage
gradient) direction t o prevent arcing and not have any sharp points that could cause corona at altitude.
CACD has facilities t o perform voltage/altitude tests on sample parts/sections and discusses any voltage
concerns with our customers.
2.5.1.4 Shunt Feed
The size and shape of the shunt feed primarily determines the area of the shunt antenna loop, but i t also
has other functions. The shunt feed must be designed t o efficiently carry large hf currents, handle
moderately high hf voltage, be a rugged piece of aircraft structure, and be compatible with the antenna
coupler. The shunt feed often resembles the leading edge of the tail and is capable of bird-strike impact or
may be as simple as a piece of metal tube or strap. The length is typically between 1 m (3.28 ft) (for a
notch) and 3 m (9.84 ft) (for a shunt). The shunt feed is perhaps the most unique looking part of each
antenna system because it often looks like part of the aircraft.
Since RF currents of over 30 amperes (with a 200-watt radio) are typical near 2 MHz, the shunt feed and
all joints or connections must be designed to have very low R F resistance. Mechanical design requirements
generally dictate a feed structure size that is more than adequate for hf current needs. As a guideline, use
at least a 100-mm (3.94-in) wide aluminum strip for leading edge pieces or at least a 25-mm (0.98-in)
diameter aluminum tube for buried loop configurations. The end connections for the feed must provide
good mechanical bonding, be free of paint, and be treated for long-term protection from corrosion. The total
dc resistance around the whole loop measured at the tuner connection terminals is less than 20 milliohms.
2-59
installation
The highest voltage point on the shunt feed occurs a t the attachment to the feedline. This voltage drops t o
near zero at the far end where the feed connects t o the airframe. To prevent arcing or corona, there must
be no sharp edges on the feed metal parts and no gaps along the shunt feed where the feed metal is
bonded t o the dielectric material.
In designs where the feed is a metal tube buried under a dielectric cover piece, either a positive connection
or a sufficient voltage gap must be provided between the tube and the cover.
The maximum feed voltage can approach 3500 volts peak for the HF-9000 system for a limit condition
antenna. A well-designed antenna system does not approach this limit voltage and has ample voltage
design margin.
Shunt antennas rarely have any voltage problems unless extreme altitudes are involved. As a general rule,
a spacing (across air) of 25 mm (0.98 in) with no sharp points or edges present, handles approximately
10 000 peak volts a t 9144 m (30 000 ft) altitude. Use a safety factor of a t least 50 percent on spacing. Most
high-voltage test problems are solved by eliminating sharpness on mechanical parts rather than increasing
spacing. A good shunt antenna design has dimensions that eliminate voltage problems.
Avoid shunt configurations resembling a microstrip (a wide shunt feed placed close t o a flat, conducting
surface). These present special voltage, tuning, and radiation efficiency problems.
2.5.1.5 Antenna Impedance
To avoid the need for a complicated antenna coupler, the antenna impedance at 2.0 MHz (including the
feedline) has no less than +j20 ohms, and has parallel resonance between 20 and 30 MHz. Avoid series
resonance so the antenna reactance gets no closer t o resonance than approximately -jlOO ohms at 30 MHz.
The highest R, (parallel resistance) must be less than 20 000 ohms t o achieve good coupling. Typically, a
shunt (or large notch) antenna falls within these limits. Antenna resistance can be measured a t the lower
frequencies by using a low-loss capacitor t o resonate the inductive reactance and using a standard RF
impedance meter t o measure Rp.
A small inductance can be added in the feedline if needed t o meet the 2-MHz limit, but care must be taken
not t o exceed the Rp limit if the antenna coupling design is marginal.
2.5.1.6 Antenna Efficiency
The shunt antenna has rather large hf currents flowing around the loop area, so even a small resistance
can impact antenna efficiency. Reduce the 20-milliohm limit on dc resistance around the loop path if
possible and establish a lower limit for each unique design based on actual data. Measure this for each
new installation, and again periodically t o look for signs of degradation.
Since large hf loop currents flow around the dielectric area, no magnetic materials or materials of low
conductivity or high dissipation should be located in or near this area.
Keep wiring and other conductors out of the antenna area because they can be inductively coupled to the
main current loop. These secondary loops can have induced currents that dissipate hf power and couple hf
energy into the conductor. If a secondary loop path cannot be eliminated, keep the loop area as small as
possible t o reduce coupling. If a metal pipe is in the antenna loop area, it reduces the effective antenna
current loop size. Keep the metal pipe near the low-voltage part of the dielectric area and have the ends
bonded t o the loop perimeter metal t o reduce resistive losses in the secondary loop. The pipe can also be
bonded at points along its length or covered completely with a conductive shield t o reduce coupling loop
area.
2-60
installation
2.5.2 Tuned HF Monopole Antenna HF-9090 Installation
This paragraph provides procedures t o install Tuned H F Monopole Antenna HF-9090.
Tuned HF Monopole Antenna AT-9090, commonly called antenna) is intended primarily for aircraft
fuselage mounting, but may be mounted in the center of any large metal surface with dimensions of 1.22 x
1.22 m (4 x 4 ft) o r greater. Refer t o figure 2-15 for outline and mounting dimensions. Any modification t o
an aircraft structure for mounting the antenna must be approved by the responsible government agency.
The antenna is mounted directly t o the aircraft skin and support structure. A gasket provides a moisture
seal and RF bond t o the aircraft skin. As shown in figure 2-16, adequate support masts must be provided
for the load wire and insulator. A spring-tension device is required t o keep the load wire tight. A high-
voltage insulator is used t o terminate the end of the load wire.
For safety of flight, the HF-9000 system must be installed in a manner that prevents
entanglement of the load wire in rotor blades, propellers) etc, in case of breakage.
The mounting location for best performance of the antenna and load wire varies with the type of aircraft
o r vehicle. For helicopter applications, the antenna must be mounted on the bottom of the airframe t o
minimize rotor modulation problems. For other types of vehicles, top mount the antenna if possible.
Typical installations are shown in figure 2-17.
The radio set control cable inside the vehicle must be shielded and as short as possible. Mount the
antenna and antenna coupler a s near t o each other as possible (maximum of 0.61 m (2 ft) for RF cable).
Figure 2-16 shows the installation of the two units.
Since the antenna is mounted directly t o the skin of the vehicle) the surface must be properly reinforced
with a metal support structure (figure 2-16). The mounting surface must be cleaned t o remove all traces of
paint, rust, corrosion, or other contaminants that could cause poor RF bonding of the conductive gasket
used with the antenna.
Mount the antenna vertically (or as nearly as possible) with reference t o the normal attitude of the
aircraft o r other vehicle. Refer t o figure 2-17.
a. Mounting location for antenna is as close as possible t o horizontal center (H) and side-to-side center of
airframe.
b. Mounting location for antenna is as far as practical above o r below vertical center (V) of aircraft.
Mount only on bottom for helicopters.
C. Mount antenna with FWD arrow on base pointing toward the front of the aircraft or other vehicle. No
particular horizontal orientation is required for shelter installation.
2.5.2.1 Installation Procedures
NOTE
If the mounting surface is uneven, a machined metal spacer may be required t o provide a
flat conducting surface for mounting the antenna. Any insulating material between the
antenna and the mounting surface hampers antenna operation.
2-6 I
installation
t
‘
L QUICK DISCONNECT CHUCK
FOR ATTACHMENT OF
ANTENNA WIRE (SEALED
VERSION AVAILABLE FOR
SALT ATMOSPHERE)
\
\
363 5
[I4 311
-
- 5 2 ’ 4
r2 OS’ 108 7
+[4 281
133.35 __I
/
VIEW A - A
1 DIMENSIONS ARE NOMINAL FOR

REFERENCE ONLY A N D ARE IN
MILLMETRES [ I N C H E ~
MS3112El4-19PW P N
371-8204-000 MATES 2 WEIGHT 2 0 9 k p [4 6LB].
N CONNECTOR PN 357-9200-00 WITH MS3476L14-19SW 3 THIS IS OUTLINE DRAWING FOR
MATES WITH PN 357-9303-00 -
P N 359 7 5 0 4 - 2 I O PN 6 2 2 - 8 1 3 3 - 0 0 1
UG-I213/U APPROX LOCATION 4 SCG DENOTES THE
CENTER OF GRAVITY
TP3-7458-014
Tuned H F Monopole Antenna AT-9090, Outline and Mounting Dimensions Diagram

Figure 2-15
2-62
installation
LOAD WIRE
\ INSULATOR/TENSION
DEVICE
t-
WS-25/U (CPN 4 1 2 - 1 2 9 5 - 0 1 0 )
(COPPER CLAD STEEL CORE
ANTENNA WIRE)
AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE
(OR SUPPORT MAST)
STANDOFF
MAST(MASTS1
(NOTE 2 )
METAL SURFACE
( R F GROUND PLANE)
1 ADAPTER K I T
I
I
I
I
\
METAL SURFACE
( R F GROUND PLANE)
ANTENNA
COUPLER
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
NOTES :
I
I
I 1. T H I S I S A SPECIAL CABLE SUPPLIED WITH THE A T - 9 0 9 0 . LENGTH OF .61m ( 2 FEET)
M A Y NOT BE INCREASED.
/ / \ 2 . STANDOFF MAST AND TENSION DEVICE MUST L I M I T MOVEMENT OF WIRE (SEE T E X T ) .

GROUND STRAPS ' ( 4 CONTROL CABLE
BYPASS MOUNT TO SHELF (NOTE 3 ) \ SHELF PROVIDES RF GROUND
AT LEAST TWO STANDOFFS PLUS END SUPPORT ARE REQUIRED FOR HELICOPTERS.
CONNECTION TO AIRCRAFT
3 . SHIELDED BRAID ELECTRICALLY BONDED TO SHELL OF CONNECTOR I F REQUIRED
S K I N (NEAR AT-90901
TPB-5037-0: 4
Tuned HF Monopole Antenna AT-9090,

HF-9000 System Pictorial Diagram
Figure 2-16
2-6312-64
installation
L
V
--"
-TI-- STANDOFFS ' END SUPPORT M A S T
SECTION THRU H
L O A D WIRE
\
\
\
INSULATOR
AT-9090
1. M O U N T T H E A T - 9 0 9 0 :
-CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO HORIZONTAL CENTER OF AIRCRAFT ( H ) A N D
SIDE TO SIDE CENTER(S)
-AS FAR AS PRACTICAL ABOVE OR BELOW VERTICAL CENTER OF
A I R C R A F T ( V ) (ON HELICOPTER MOUNT ON BOTTOM ONLY-AWAY FROM
M A I N ROTOR)
2. L O A D W I R E
-LENGTH 3.05 TO 4.27 m (10 TO 14 FEET)
-SPACE AS FAR AS POSSIBLE FROM AIRCRAFT SKIN (254rnrn(10 I N ) MINIMUM
DESIRED). USE A MINIMUM OF TWO 10,000 V O L T STANDOFFS A N D END INSULATOR/
L O A D TERMINATION (SEE INSTRUCTION BOOK)
-USE 13.6 k g (30 L B ) TENSION DEVICE TO PREVENT MOVEMENT FROM WIND A N D VIBRATION
-ROUTE IN R E L A T I V E L Y STRAIGHT LINE TOWARD REAR OF AIRCRAFT.
3. VEHICLE OR F I X E D STATION INSTALLATIONS FOLLOW GENERAL RULES FOR

AIRCRAFT INSTALLATIONS. SPACE FAR END OF WIRE APPROX 0.9 m ( 3 FEET)
FROM M E T A L SURFACE
4 _ Y _S T -E M CONNECTIONS
S
-RF COAk-(O.6i-rn [2 FEET] LENGTH, RG-133A OR EQUIVALENT)
CONNECTS T O OUTPUT T E R M I N A L OF HF-9040
(REQUIRES H N CONNECTOR ADAPTER K I T )
-CONTROL CABLE ( 1 2 WIRES) CONNECTS TO HF-9040
V E H I C L E OR 1 t
FIXED S T A T I O N METAL SURFACE
STRUCTURE I (RF G R O U N D P L A N E )
H
i J
TPB-5041-0!9
Tuned HF Monopole Antenna AT-9090, Typical Installation Diagram

Figure 2-17
2-65
installation
a. Refer t o table 2-3 and note the hardware items required but not supplied with the antenna. Obtain the
items needed before beginning installation.
b. Prepare mounting surface (refer t o figure 2-15 for outline and mounting dimensions).
c. Attach antenna to mounting surface using eight AN960-C10 flat washers, eight AN3-series bolts (type
of installation determines length), and one metal-impregnated gasket (part number 62 1-7634-001,
supplied with antenna).
d. Torque the mounting bolts t o 17 t o 23 cm-kg (15 t o 20 in-lb).
NOTE
When removing and reinstalling antenna, always replace the metal-impregnated gasket,
part number 621-7364-001. Before reinstalling antenna, be sure t o clean mounting surface.
Table 2-3. Antenna Mounting Hardware Required But Not Supplied

ITEM DESCRIPTIONKJSE PART NUMBER/TYF'E
Aircraft grade mounting Mounts antenna t o vehicle or airframe. AN3 series or equivalent
bolts (8) Length is determined by type of installa-
tion.
Aircraft grade flat washers Mounts antenna AN960-C 10 or equivalent
(8)
Support masts (minimum Provides support for load wire. 10 000-volt Type t o be determined by
qty 2 required) RF insulated standoff. installer. Contact
Dayton-Granger or CACD hf
engineering for information
and suitable type numbers.
HR Smith support mast kit Mast kit. Includes insulating standoff, end Contact CACD hf engineer-
using stranded antenna wire load mast, antenna adapter, and stranded ing department for applica-
antenna wire. tions information. Reference
part number 637-4422-OOX.
Insulating tension unit Secures load wire t o airframe or vehicle Part number 013-1637-010
(Dayton-Granger part num-
ber 5 ARM 300-6CNL)
Antenna wire Load wire, 3.05 t o 4.3 m (10 t o 14 ft) WS-25/Cr7part number
422-1295-010
Wire retriever tool Used t o release load wire from chuck jaws Part number 013-1637-020
on antenna. Used t o remove insulation from (Dayton-Granger part num-
antenna wire. ber 50 ARM 300-250)
Sealant Moisture-proofing material Dow-Corning 3140 RTV
coating (part number
005-1692-000) and RTV
primer (part number
005-0981-000) or equivalent
2-66
installation
2.5.2.2 Antenna Connections
The RF cable handles high RF voltage and current. Use special care t o prevent damage t o
connectors. Damaged connectors or cables are susceptible t o burning or arcing and need t o
be repaired or replaced.
Use the RF cable supplied with the antenna t o connect the antenna coupler t o the antenna. If it is
necessary t o replace the RF cable, do not exceed 609.6 mm (24 in) maximum cable length.
The antenna load wire must have mounting hardware rated at 10 000 volts peak. The mounting hardware
must be strong enough t o withstand the tension required to limit movement caused by vibration and wind
loading. Such hardware is listed in table 2-1. For spacing between standoff masts of 304.8 t o 608.6 mm
(1 t o 2 R), movement should not exceed 25.4 mm (1in). For greater spacing between standoff masts, load
wire movement should not exceed 50.8 mm (2 in). As shown in figure 2-16, the load wire connects from the
quick-disconnect chuck (RF output) of the antenna through the standoff mast(s) t o the insulator/
tension device. The required wire type is WS-25fU (part number 422-1295-010) or equivalent.
a. Space the load wire as far as possible from the skin of the aircraft or other vehicle. A minimum
distance of 254 mm (10 in) is desirable. Radiating characteristics of the antenna improve as the
distance from load wire t o vehicle skin is increased.
b. Provide rigid support for the load wire t o prevent possible detuning from vibration. The insulating
tension unit used a t the end of the load wire provides approximately 13.6 kg (30 lb) of tension. For
helicopter installations, use a minimum of two standoff masts. Route load wire in a relatively straight
line toward rear of aircraft.
2.5.2.3 Antenna Sealing
When installation is complete, use Dow-Corning 3140 RTV coating and RTV primer or equivalent t o seal
the base of the antenna, mounting bolt heads, and quick-disconnect chuck.
2.6 DATAFILL REQUIREMENTS
If the HF-9000 system includes an ALE control processor, either an external ALE control processor or an
embedded (internal) ALE control processor, it must have a datafill performed before ALE operation is
possible. ALE systems must be programmed with compatible presets and operational parameters prior t o
operation t o fully utilize their automatic capabilities and ensure proper HF-9000 system operation. Refer
t o the theory section of this manual for a more detailed explanation of ALE operation.
Table 2-4 lists hardware required for datafill file generation. Hardware requirements may vary depending
upon the particular device used for datafill. For example, a laptop computer may serve as a portable
datafill device as well as the host personal computer (PC) used t o generate datafill files. If separate host
PC and datafill devices are used, but have compatible disk drives, files can be transferred between the two
devices on a floppy diskette. If the host PC and datafill devices do not have compatible disk drives, a serial
cable must be used t o transfer the datafill file. A serial (RS-232) cable is then used t o transfer the datafill
file from the datafill device t o the ALE control processor.
2-67
installation
Table 2-4. Antenna Coupler Strapping

ITEM USE REQUIREMENTS REPRESENTATIVE
TYPE
Host Edit and down- IBM-compatible PC with the following GATEWAY 2000
computer load datafill features. DW33 or equivalent
files into porta- a. DOS 5.0 or later
ble datafill b. l-Mbyte minimum disk space (hard, flop-
device. py, random access memory (RAM) disk,
etc)
c. 640-kbyte minimum RAM
d. File transfer capability between the host
PC and the datafill device (serial COM
port, floppy disk drive compatible with
datafill device, o r transportable RAM
“disk card)
e. If serial COM port is used for file transfer,
a serial cable is required t o interface the
host PC t o the datafill device.
Datafill Used to datafill Portable IBM-compatible PC with the follow- GRiD laptop computer
device ALE control ing features. or equivalent
processor a. DOS version 5.0 or later
b. 100-kbyte minimum disk space (hard,
floppy, RAM disk, etc)
c. 256-kbyte minimum RAM memory
d. Serial RS-232 COM port
e. Serial (RS-232) cable to interface with
ALE control processor
Datafill manager software (on a 3%-inch high-density diskette) is currently available from Collins under
part number 091-1323-001. Datafill manager software provides the following key features.
• Allows quick and easy generation of datafill files to support station-to-station ALE operation
• Downloads a datafill file t o the processor
• Allows HF-9000 system remote terminal operation using a resident communications program
• In operate mode, creates an optional log file t o record HF-9000 system activity
• Provides advanced features allowing users to view and edit existing datafill files and view LOG files.
Using this feature, the existing datafill file is revised if communications requirements change or is
tailored by selecting parameters other than those automatically chosen by datafill manager when
creating a datafill file.
To obtain a copy of datafill manager, contact:
HF-9000 System Program Manager

350 Collins Road NE
Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52498
FAX: 319/395-2009
2-68 Change 3
installation
2.7 POSTINSTALLATION CHECK
After the HF-9000 system is installed and all cabling is checked for proper fabrication and installation,
perform an HF-9000 system self-test (as described in the operation section of this instruction book) t o
verify HF-9000 system operation.
2-6912-7 0
installation
0;:1
APPROX
-1 I rSEE CHART
OPR MOM I FREWCHAN PWR
I 0 0
0
9
1.60+0.10
C . 0 6 3 f .0041
37.46
[ 1.475 IREF
1 4 1 1
44.45
[ 1.750)
MAX
[5.870]
1 4 9 10 MAX pj 1
10.2 [ . 4 0 ] MAX-4 b
127.00 [ 5 . 0 0 0 ] MAX 9.52
[.375] 'IN
NOTES:
CONNECT0 R STRAl N RELl EF
1. DIMENSIONS ARE IN M I L L I M E T R E S INCHES1 CONNECTOR INFORMATION
J1 P I N FUNCTION CHART
2. 1.2 kg 12.5 L B ' I MAX CONNECTOR FUNCTION TYPE NO PART NO MATING MATING TYPE NO. PART NO. PIN I FUNCTION
4 1
WEIGHT:
NO
3. POWER REOUIREMENTS:
TYPE NO. PART NO. A I + 2 8 V DC I N P U T (1 A MAX)
J1 POWER MS3112E12- 1 OP 371 - 2 1 56-000 MS3476L12-1OS 359-7504-040 MS3417-12N 359-7007-070
4 W MAX (LCD HEATER OFF)
1 ~ ~I-~ ING 1
16 W MAX (LCD HEATER ON) J2 CONTROL, F I B E R HONEYWELL 252-0042-010 ENSIGN-BICKFORD 261 -0054-010 - - 5 V AC L I G H T I N G BUS
OPTIC RCV HFD38Ol-002 C M - 2 3 0 - 1.8
4. I N D I C A T E S CENTER OF GRAVITY. ~ -.
J3 CONTROL. F I B E R HONEYWELL 252-0043-010 ENSIGN-BICKFORD 261-0054-010 - - F I GROUND
OPTIC XMT HFE4811-002 C M - 2 3 0 - 1.8
I I I I I I I BUS C O W N
28 V DC L I G H T I N G BUS
K 5 V DC L I G H T I N G BUS
T P B - 0 7 0 1 -014
Radio Set Control HF-9010,

Installation Control Drawing
Figure 2-18
2-7112-72
installation
NOTES: I . WEIGHT: I . I KG 1 2 . 5 0 LBS] M A X .

2. POWER REQUIREMENTS: 4 W A T T S M A X W I T H LCO HEATER OFF.
16 W A T T S M A X WITH LCD HEATER ON.
3. @ DENOTES CENTER OF G R A V I T Y . CONNECTOR J I (CONTROL)
4 . CONNECTOR J I : M S 3 1 1 2 E I 2 - I O P ~ 3 7 1 - 2 1 5 6 - O O O ) PIN 1
FUNCTION
MATES WITH 3 7 1 - 6 4 1 1 - 0 0 0 A I t 2 R V D C INPUT ( I AMP MAX]
J2: 252-0042-010 POWER GROUND
MATES WITH 2 6 1 - 0 0 5 4 - 0 1 0 115 V A C LIGHTING BUS
J 3 : 252-OOLl3-010 5 V A C LIGHTING BUS
MATES WITH 2 6 1 - 0 0 5 4 - 0 1 0 MASTER
5. DIMENSIONS INDICATED ARE FOR MOUNTING PURPOSES ONLY. GROUND
6 . THIS INSTALLATION CONTROL DRAWING IS FOR A REMOTE CONTROL 622-9403-OOX. LIGHTING BUS COMMON
SPARE
28 VDC LIGHTING BUS
5 VDC LIGHTING BUS
I CONNECTOR J3 (TRANSMITTER) O U T 1
r
9 . 5 2 [ .375] REF 1 2 7 . 0 0 [ 5 . O 0 0 ] REF
7 1 . I[2.8O]APPROX
1 7 5 8 . 4 [ 2 . 3 0 ] APPROX
APPROX
1 4 . 1 0 [ . 5 5 5 ] REF, 2 PL
SEE NOTE 5 I .57[.062] REF
REF, 2 PL 4
-
SEE NOTE 5 SEE NOTE 5 I *p- 1 . 6 0 [ . 0 6 3 ] REF 4 10.2[.110] UAX I I
-
146.56[5.770] MAX 5
MAX
63.50[2.500] REF
89.54[3.525] REF
65 1-473 !
Radio Set Control HF-9012,

Figure 2-19
2-7312-74
installation
NOTES:
1 . DIMENSIONS ARE I N MILL1 M E T R E S UNCHES] .
2. WEIGHT: 0.68kg [l.5 LE] M A X .
3. @ DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY.
4. SPACE REOUIRED TO REMOVE U N I T OVER

HOLDDOWN WINGNUTS. SR9CE NOT REOUIRED
I F CLEARANCE PROVIDED FOR WINGNUTS TO
PIVOT DOWN.
23.62t0.76
r.930-c.0301
A
44.4520.51-1 i-
L1.750+.020]
238'76'0*81
c9.4002 .O32]
4- \,d 714 1.2811,
4 MOUNTING HOLES
r-i---==i-
215.4
[8.48]
NOTE 4
I
1
P
HF-9030
--7
RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER
I
I
209.6
[8.25] MAX
149.9
L5.901 MAX
4 L 330.2
[13.00]
398.8
115.703 M A X
TP0-1027 -014
Electrical Equipment Mounting Base MT-9030,

Figure 2-20
2-7512-76
installation_
NOTES :
r
1. DIMENSIONS ARE IN M I L L I M E T R E S [INCHES].
2. WEIGHT: 0.99 kg [2.2 LE] M A X .

I II 34.92
3. @ DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY. 101.6 20.51 [1.3751,2 Pi-4
L4.000 t .020] II ~
17.45
L.6871, 2 PL
*
--
: .
-1 1. 1
I
23.6220.76 1 p, 4.34 c.1711,
4 MOUNTING HOLE
r.930-f.0301 A
44.45 2 0.51 238.7620.81
[1.750+ .020] c9.400 2.0321 $ 39.67 11.5621
DETAIL A
.
4 PL
r r r------------
K
400.0
' ?$'$2CEc1
-- I
--
I
7.6 [.SO]
I I
SWAY SPACE
I
I I
I ' I I I
4 231.1
I ~ I O MAX
I
SWAY SPACE
I 209.6
[8.25] MAX
I
I
114.326.4
[4.50+.25]
Ll5.09+0.81
[2.95?
74.926.4
.25J I-
4 L
\ [.594 2.0321
'I
149.9 330.2 MOUNTING SURFACE
L5.901 MAX GROUND STRAPS [I 3.003
( 4 PLACES)
398.8
[15.70] MAX
TPB-1028-014
Electrical Equipment Mounting Base MT-9030A,

Figure 2-21
2-7 712-78
NOTES: I. W E I G H T : 1 . 0 8 KG i 2 . 4 L B ] MAX, MOUNT ONLY.
installation
2 . 8 DENOTES CENTER O F GRAVITY.

3 . T H I S IS THE INSTALLATION CONTROL DRAWING FOR 8 2 2 - 0 5 9 4 - 0 0 1 AN0 8 2 2 - 0 5 9 4 - 1 0 1 .
li.
5 . i t INDICATES HOLE PATTERN DIMENSIONS FOR MOUNTING PLATFORM AND ARE FOR
REFERENCE ONLY.
6 . i INDICATES DIMENSIONS FOR MAX SWAY SPACE AND ARE FOR
REFERENCE ONLY.
7 . INDICATED DIMENSION I S MAX HARDWARE LOCATION FOR EQUIPMENT REMOVAL.
” -
T- I
RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER
1
209.6
i8.251
MAX
I
I
8
I t
I I
I
39. I 6 . 0 f 3.0
REF
[.PI t , 1 2 1
REF
MOUNTING SURFACE
SEE NOTE 7
148.8 f 1.5
[ 5 . 8 6 2 .061 4 t14.5 i . 5 7 1
MOUl.iTING SURFACE
23.6
44.q mm 239.8
[ . 9 3 ] REF
ALTERNATE FRONT VIEW FCR RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER FRONT VIEW FOR RECEIVER/TF’ANSMITTER [ I .751
WIT3 HEATSINK WITHOUT HEATSINK
162. I
16.381
REF
-00I
75 I - 7 S 5 b
Electrical Equipment Mounting Base MT-SOYOB,
Figure 2-22
2-7912-80
installation
WTES: I . 1EiirHT: 1 . E K G [ q . O L a ] M A X , MOUNT ONLY.

2. 0 DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY.
3. THIS I S THE INSTALLATION CONTROL ORAWING FOR 622-9411-001.
4. INDICATED DIMENSION I S M A X HARDWARE LOCATION FOR EQUIPMENT REMOVAL.
5. f f INDICATES HOLE PATTERN DIMENSIONS FOR MOUNTING PLATFORM AN0 ARE FOR
REFERENCE ONLY.
6. € INDICATES DIMENSIONS FOR M A X SWAY SPACE AND ARE F O R
REFERENCE ONLY.
209.6
[8.251
MAX
I
iik 1 I 1
I I I ' I
100. I
[3.941
r.
L l
r J
i
[ 1.541
6 . 1 9 3.0
[ . 2 4 f ,121
I- li
REF REF
MOUNTING SURFACE ' 5.1

[ ,201
SEE NOTE 4 MOUNTING SURFACE
iir1.s [ , 5 7 1
23.6
[ .93] REF
I
REF CONNECTOR MATING CONNECTOR BACKSHELL

DES PART NUMBER PART NUMBER PART NUMBER
JI M531IZEIO-6P MS3'l76Wl0-65 M850~9/52-1-~OW
CONNECTOR P I
SPARE
0 I
SPARE
E l t28 V DC 16 HOLES
1F I SPARE I
-00 I
"49.23 pL
[ I.9381 '
75 1 - 7 4 0 8
Electrical Equipment Mounting Base M'l'-9032B,
Figure 2-23
2-8112-82
installation
HF-9040 ANTENNA COUPLER
I 208.3
I C eh to]
\X
I
214.1
-6
C8.431
NOTE
4
111.3
[4.38]
APPROX
103.6 2 1.5 I 172.7 I

C4.08 2 . O S ]
6 . 7 3 [.265] D I A , 4 MOUNTING HOLES
22.4
NOTES :
1. DIMENSIONS ARE I N MILLIMETRES [INCHES].
2. WEIGHT: 0 . 4 5 kg cl.0 L B S ] M A X .
3. DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY.
4. THIS SPACE REQUIRED TO REMOVE UNIT

OVER HOLDDOWN WINGNUTS. SPACE NOT
REQUIRED IF CLEARANCE PROVIDED FOR
HOLDDOWNS TO PIVOT DOWN.
-
T P B 07l2-0 1 4

Figure 2-24
2-a 3/2-84
installation
208.3
C8.207
MAX
/
I
I
J
h
126.3
[4.97 J
APPROX
I I
I I 0
1 5 . 0 9 2 .81
\GROUND STRAPS
( 4 PLACES)
1. {-
[ 6.801
172.7
APPROX
L 1c.5
2.7 01
c.594 2.0321
103.6 2 1.5 c4.08 2 .OS]
8.9 E.351 M A X SWAY SPACE
8.9 L35] MAX SWAY SPACE
34.92
L1.3751 2 PL $to] 7- 225.6 [B. 8 8 ]
_ j
22.4
17.45L687]2PL
D0
L @4 . 3 4 C.1711 4
ISOLATOR MOUNTING
WTTER N
DETAIL A
c1.5621
39*67
HOLES
NOTES 1
2 . WEIGHT:
DENOTES
0 . 7 7 kp
CENTER OF GRAVITY.
C1.7 LBS] MAX.
4 PL
T P B - 0713- 0 1 4

Figure 2-25
2-8512-86
installation
f.OTES. I . WEIGHT: 4 . 6 KG [ I O . I L E ] MAX, KOUNT AN0 AhTtANA COUPLER, HF-SOqCI, REF.
WEIGHT: . 9 5 KG [ 2 . 1 L B ] MAX, MOUNT ONLY.
3 . T H I S I S THE INSTALLATION CDNTR@L DRAWING FOR 8 2 2 - 0 5 9 5 - 0 0 1 AtiD E Z Z - 0 5 9 5 - 1 0 1 .
4 . ANTENNA COUPLER SHOWN WITH PHANTOM L I N E S IS HF-9040, PN 622-8113-001/002.
5 . ii INDICATES HOLE PATTERN DIMENSIONS FOR MOUNTING PLATFORM AND ARE FOR
REFERENCE ONLY.
6 . i INDICATES DIMENSIONS FOR MAX SWAY SPACE AND ARE FOR
REFERENCE ONLY.
7. INDICATED DIMENSION IS MAX HARDWARE LOCATION FOR EQUIPMENT REMOVAL.
8. -001 IS FOR COUPLERS WITHOUT COAX ADAPTER.
-002 I S FOR COUPLERS WITH COAX ADAPTER INSTALLED.
r-1 I
I I ANTENNA COUPLER
208.3 I 1
[8.20]
MAX
’ I
250.9 8
APPROX
I I/
3 I
13.0 i 3 . 0 -
REF [.51 i . I 2 1
.54]
REF
I- 144”
[5.70]
AP?ROX 4 \
SEE NOTE 7
103.6 t 1.5 . MOUNTING SURFACE
20. I2
[ .792] REF
75 1 - 8 6 6 7
Electrical Equipment Mounting Base MT-9040B,

Figure 2-26
2-8712-88
installation_
r--7 HF-9041
ANTENNA COUPLER 208.3
I
[ 8.203
+-
I
I I I
I
2 1 4.1
C8.431
NOTE 3 I T
I
I
I I
‘ 1102:1 5
C4.34t.061
-4 66.5 MAX
[ 2.621
I_
I-
- I --
171.5
[ 6.75
A nnnnv
mrrnvA
3 i
374.6 [ 14.751MAX 4 4
NOTE:
2. WEIGHT: 0.50 kg C1.1 Le] MAX

: l o : : : f 276.4 [ 10.881
1 3. SPACE REQUIRED TO REMOVE U N I T OVER
HOLDDOWN WINGNUTS. SPACE NOT
REQUIRED IF CLEARANCE PROVIDED FOR
HOLDDOWNS TO PIVOT DOWN.
~ 8 7 1 4. $- DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY.
[ 2.601
4 MOUNTING HOLES TPB-0710-014
Electrical Equipment Mounting Base MT-9041.

Figure 2-27
2-89/2-90
installation
I ' HF - 9041
ANTENNA COUPLER
I
208.3
I
C8.201
MAX
r--
1
-- 1 I
I
I I
I
I I I
i 126.7
[ 4.991
APPROX
227.1
[ 8.941
MAX SWAY
G R O U N D STRAPS
( 4 PLACES)
110.25 I . 5
G4.342.061
374.6 [ 14.751 MAX
4
34.92 [ 1.3751, 2 PL tg::o] 276.4 [ 10.881
0 39.67 NOTES:
[ 1.5621 1. DIMENSIONS A R E IN MILLIMETRES [INCHES].
2. WEIGHT: 0.80 kg [ 1 . 7 5 ] M A X .
i 0 4.34 C.1711
ISOLATOR MOUNTING
APPROX
PATTERN, 4 PL
DETAIL A TPB-0711-014

Figure 2-28
2-9112-92
installation
NOTES: I . WEIGHT: 6 . 4 KG 1 1 4 . 2 L B ] MAX, MOlllvT AN0 ANTENNA COUPLEk, HF-SOqI, REF.

WEIGHT: 1.0 KG [ 2 . 2 L E ] MAX, LSiirNT ONLY.
3. T H I S I S THE INSTALLATION CONTROL D E N I N G FOR 8 2 2 - 0 5 5 6 - 0 0 1 .
'4. ANTENNA COUPLER SHOWN WITH PHANTOM L I N E S I S HF-50'41, PN 6 2 2 - 8 1 1 9 - 0 0 1 .
5. X E INDICATES HOLE PATTERN DIMENSIONS F O R MOUNTING PLATFORM AND ARE FOR
REFERENCE ONLY.
6. i INDICATES DIMENSIONS FOR MAX SWAY SPACE AND ARE FOR
REFERENCE ONLY.
7. INDICATED DIMENSION I S MAX HARDWARE LOCATION FOR EQUIPMENT REMOVAL.
.--I
I
I
ii
I I
208.3
[8.201
MAX
I
I
I
I
ANTENNA COUPLER
L n I n l i t
j2.041
APPROX
APPROX I
12.9 i 3 . 0
7'
I
I
5-
110.2 F 1.54
[9.34 i .06]
SEE NOTE 7 MOUNTING SURFACE
22. I
[.E71 REF
16 HOLES
" 49.23 , pL [.2381'
- I
--00 [ I .9381
75 1-7707
Figure 2-29
2-9312-94
installation
r 2.46 [.097]MAX
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES [INCHES]
[ 1.701
2. WEIGHT: 1.6 ko [5.6 LB] MAX
3. NOMINAL DIMENSION IN THE FREE STATE. IN
INSTALLATION, DO NOT EXCEED t7.62 [*0.3]
EXCURSION OF FEEDLINE.
4, SPACE 19 REQUIRED TO REMOVE UNITS OVER
HOLDDOWN WINGNUTS. SPACE NOT REQUIRED
IF CLEARANCE PROVIDED FOR HOLDDOWNS
0 53.98 [ 2.1 251 TO PIVOT DOWN,
” 5. CLAMP (139-0929-010) NOT PART OF MOUNT.
L S 4 . 3 4 [.171] 6 HOLES EQL SP 6. GROUNDING RING ADAPTER KIT (685-0349-001).
ON 0 88.90 [3.500] TWO REQUIRED (NOT PART OF MOUNT).
, 478.821.3
[ 1 e.est.os]
433.3t 1 .o
/ [ ,250-28UNF-2B]
V
[ 17.06t.041
I 355.6
t 14.003
FLEXIBLE FEED LINE

12.7t2.5 685-03P6-001 1
[ .50f.10 (NOT PART OF MOUNT)
NOTE 6
I
205.922.0
I
I ‘ 1
I
NOTE 4
I
--
--7
I
[8.1f.O8]
146.0 [S.75].
I-4 I \ 0 6.73 L.2651 MOUNTING
4 PL
HOLES.
109.st 1 .s
14.31 f.061
k----218.9?1.5 [8.62i0.601-]
TPB-0708-014

Figure 2-30
2-951’2-96
installation
104.6
r 2.46 [ ,0973MAX NOTES:
1. DIMENSION9 ARE I N MILLIMETRES [INCHES].

34.92 [ 1.3753 2 PL 2. WEIGHT: 1.9 kg [ 4.2 LB] MAX.
[1.70]
17.45 [ .687], 3. NOMINAL DIMENSION I N THE FREE STATE. I N
2 PL INSTALLATION, DO NOT EXCEED 27.62 [ t0.31
e b9.6T [ 1.5623 EXCURSION OF FEEDLINE.
e 4.34 C.1711 4 HOLES 4. CLAMP (139-0929-010) NOT PART OF MOUNT.

5. GROUNDING RING ADAPTER KIT (685-0349-001).
TWO REQUIRED (NOT PART OF MOUNT).
0 53.98 C2.1251
ISOLATOR
MOUNTING PATTERN
DETAIL A
L e 4 . 3 4 [.171] 6HOLES EQ 9P 4 PL
ON @ 88.90 [3.500]
[ 18.85*.05] J
433.32 1 .o
5
17.062.041 9-
[ ,250-28 UNF-2BI
/
1 - 4.62 [.1821 MAX SWAY
37.6* 1 .O - 5.44 [.214]
[ 1.48*.04] MAX SWAY, 2 PL
t 4.62[.182]MAX SWAY 6 -
FLEXIBLE FEEDLINE
U3 26 0 01
-l
I
(NOT PART OF MOUNT)
1I 263.9
[ 10.391
NOTE 3
1
rNOTE 4
7
221.093.0
[8.70t.12]
12.7 [.SO] GROUND STRAPS

( 4 PLACES) 21
21 8.9 [ 8.623 - TPB-0709-014

Figure 2-31
2-9712-98
installation
NOTES *
1 . DIMENSIONS ARE I N MILLIMETRES [INCHES].
2 . THIS IS AN INSTALLATION CONTROL DRAWING OF
A MT-9043 MOUNT, PART NO 6 2 2 - 8 1 3 5 - 0 0 1 .
3 . WEIGHT: 1 . 1 k g [2.5 Ibs] M A X .
197.6 COUPLER UNIT

[7.78] HF-9040
MAX
I II I
b-+ 5 8 . 7 [ 2 . 3 1 ]MAX
5 0 . 8 [ 2 . 0 0 ] REF
7 MOUNTING
b- 185.9[7.32]MAX d-. 16.8*1.0
[ .66*.04]
2 0 3 . 2 0 [ 8 . 0 0 0 ] REF HOLES REF
2 PL 3 4 0 . 5 1 [ 1 3 . 4 0 6 ] REF
231 .9*1 . 0 [ 9 . 1 3 * . 0 4 ]
TPC-3689-0 1 2 A

Figure 2-32
2-9912-100
installation
NOTES.
1 . DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES [INCHES]
2. THIS IS A N INSTALLATION CONTROL DRAWING OF
r- 1 93.5[7.621MAX
SWAY SPACE REF
r - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
A MT-9044A MOUNT, PART NO 622-9408-001.
--
I
3. WEIGHT: 1.6 k g [3.5 Ibs] MAX. I
I---- I I I I-
!I
I
236.7
[9.32]
REF
0
04 3
38.9[1.53] REF
t 185.9[7.32]MAX 440.7[7.35]MAX
193.0[7.6OIMAX 58.7[2.31]MAX
2.371.0931 REF
26.2[1.03] REF 4.92[1.937] 2 PL REF

\ 06.05[.238]
-1 340.51 [ 13.4063 REF
16 MOUNTING
HOLES REF

Figure 2-33
2- 10112- 102
installation
NOTES :
2 . WEIGHT: 0.9 KG [ 2 . 0 LB] MAX, MT-9077 MOUNT ONLY.
1 . 4 KG [3.0 LB] MAX. MT-9077B MOUNT ONLY.
3. DENOTES CENTER OF G R A V I T Y .
4 . THIS I S THE INSTALLATION CONTROL DRAWING FOR MOUNTING BASE,
822-0096-001 AND 822-0597-001. 0 7 . 1 4 [ .281 3 .
5. DIMENSIONS INDICATED ARE TO THE MOUNTING HOLE PATTERN FOR THE PLATFORM 22. 4 HOLES, WHEN
ISOLATORS NOT
RATHER THAN ON THE MOUNT AND ARE NOT TO BE INSPECTED AT THIS LEVEL. USED
++- I
2381 4 HOLES 31 .5
p- 214.618.451
SWAY SPACE
MAX, REF - 1
l - +- I
I '
24.61[.969],2 PL
I i.3
05 1
49.23[ 1 . 9 3 8 ] , 2 PL 1 REF.
LY
GE
I
DETAIL A
SCALE 1 / 1 I I I 114.3[4.50]
1 APPROX
4 PL
1
1
I
I I I I
2 9 . 0 1.141 I
29.0[
SEE NOTE 5 MAX. 2 PL ----- - - -- - - - -
[W.g
i \
9 2 .
APPROX 7 [ 3 . 6 5 ] r
157.5[6.20]REF
1I -b 152.4[ 6.00 IAPPROX
-330.2[13.00]
4
REF
\ I II t
k-186.7[7.35] MAX-A I I
407.9[16.06] MAX GROUND STRAPS
14.0[.55]
MAX. REF,
4 4 b-S.l[ .20]MAX, REF,
SWAY SPACE SWAY SPACE
TPC-3687-012A
Electrical Equipment Mounting Bases MT-9077 and

MT-9077B, Installation Control Drawing
Figure 2-34
2-10312-104
installation
NOTE :
1. D I M E N S I O N S ARE I N M I L L I M E T R E S [ I N C H E S ] .
2 . WEIGHT: 1 . 4 KG [ 3 . 0 LE] MAX, MOUNT ONLY.
3 . @DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY.
4 . T H I S I S THE I N S T A L L A T I O N CONTROL DRAWING FOR MOUNTING BASE,
822-0097-001.
5. D I M E N S I O N S I N D I C A T E D ARE TO THE MOUNTING HOLE PATTERN FOR THE PLATFORM
RATHER THAN ON THE MOUNT AND ARE NOT TO BE INSPECTED AT T H I S L E V E L .
31 . 5
SEE D E T A I L A
-r 2 1 4 . 6 [ 8 . 4 5 ] MAX, R E F
SWAY SPACE
r - - - - - - - - - - -
‘ I
I
) I I
I
I
I
I
‘ I I I
I
I
I 20 , 6
15 3
I
I (
VIEW 8 - 8
231.1
19.101
/-04.34[.171]. 4 HOLES MAX,
SWAY
SPACE
1% Q [ 2 . 2 01
REF
1 7 . 4 5 [ . 6 8 7 ] , 2 PL
l
I e- --I I I
[3.65] I
GROUND STRAP
34.92[1.3751* 2 PL APPROX
~-k 1 8 6 . 7 [ 7 - 3 5 ] MAX
14.0[.55] 3 3 0 . 2 [ 1 3 . 0 0 ] REF
MAX, R E F , 4 0 7 . 9 [ 1 6 . 0 6 ] MAX
SEE NOTE 5 SWAY SPACE 5.1[.20]MAXt
REF
SWAY SPACE
TPC-3686-012A

Figure 2-35
2- 10512 - 106
installation
NOTES: I . WEIGHT: 1.9 K G ['4.3 L a ] M A X , MOUNT ONLY.

2 . 8 DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY.
3 . T H I S I S THE INSTALLATION CONTROL DRAWING FOR 8 2 2 - 0 0 9 9 - 0 0 1 .
4 . INDICATE0 DIMENSION I S M A X HARDWARE LOCATION FCR ECUIPMENT
REMOVAL.
5 . i INDICATES DIMENSIONS FOR M A X SWAY SPACE AN0 ARE FOR
REFERENCE ONLY. RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER
1.5 [ 16q.6[6.48] APPROXd

.LMOUNTING ,
11
MOUNTING SURFACE
b- 237.5[9.35] MAX 4 t-%.5[.571
[391
REF
' 68.6- - /+
12.701
SEE NOTE 4
4-
3 4 8 . 7 [ 13.731 MAX
SURFACE
'5. I
1.201
JI
CONI\IECTOR
PART NUMBER
MS3 I I ZE I O - 6 P
I MATING CONNECTOR
PART NUMBER
MS3'476W 10-6s
1 BACKSHELL
PART NUMBER
MD50'49/52-I-lOW
1 2 3 . 6 [ ,931 REF
FUNCTI ON
I
B I SPARE
C I GND
D I SPARE I
E I tZ8VDC
1 F I SPARE I
16X @ 6 . 0 5 [ . 2 3 8 ] REF
752-9071-001

Figure 2-36
2- 10712- 108
installation_
53*1 A PPR OX
12.091
r
95.0
c 3.74 I
APPROX
I -[ 3 1 7 . 5 t 1 .O [ 1 2 . 5 0 t . 0 4 1 4220.08 4 48.3 I-
.562.03] [ 1.901
pp 33O.t: 1.O [ 1 3 . 0 0 t . 0 4 1 4
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONS ARE I N MILLMETRES [INCHES] J1 P I N FUNCTION CHART J1 P I N FUNCTION CHART (CONT)
2. WEIGHT: 3.54 kg L7.8 L E ] MAX IPIN 1 FUNCTION 1 I PIN -. - _ _
1 FUNCTION
3. POWER REQUIREMENTS: 2 8 V D C I
4. @ INDICATES CENTER O F G R A V I T Y .
A I CONFIGURATION A P EXT E L F
B I CONFIGURATION B R CONFIGURATION GND
. _
CONNECTOR I N F O R M A T I O N CONNECTOR STRAl N RELl EF

C I CONFIGURATION C S 1 SPARE
D I D U A L +28 V DC IN
~ L
T
-
I SPARE
-. . .. .-
CONNECTOR FUNCTION TYPE NO PART NO MATING MATING TYPE NO. PART NO. E STATUS A U EXT E L +28 V DC
NO TYPE NO PART NO. F STATUS B V +28 V DC I N P U T ( 2 A MAX)
J1 POWER MSJl12E14-19P 3 7 1 -8203-000 MS3476L14-19S 359-7504-080 MS3417-14N 359 -7007 -0 IO G POWER GND
J2 CONTROL, F I B E R HONEYWELL 252-0042-01 0 SPECTRAN 261-0054-010 - -
O P T I C RCV HFD3801-002 CM-230-1.8
J3 CONTROL, F I B E R HONEYWELL 252-0043-01 0 SPECTRAN 261-0054-010 - -
OPTIC XMT HFE4811-002 CM -230- 1.8
J4 R F INPUT SPECIALTY 2 6 1 -0017-01 0 M39012/16-0101 357-9292-000 M 1 EXT EL D

28JS215-1 N 1 EXT EL E T P B - 0 7 0 2 -014
Antenna Coupler HF-9040,

Figure 2-37
2-109/2-110
+
installation
- 69.8
12.751 7 177.8
67.3 t2.651- C 7.00 1
Z-I
0
APPROX APPROX
35.8 C 1.411 -
:
PRESSURE
;K:
AIR
7
PRESSURE
VALVE \
I
114.3
r4.501
7-
75.4
12.971
192.0t0.8
17.56t.031
R APPROX t 76.2
[ 3.00]
2
[ 1.751
- 51.6 ,
-I:
13.5 [.53] 76.2 [ 3 . 0 0 ] 4 368,3tl .O [ 14.50*.04]
[ 2.031
2 PL
51.6 [2.03]- 4 [ 1.003 MAX

25.4
372.1 62.90 [ 14.6522.01 23
381.0tl.O [ 15.00t.041
+ 1 388.0421.5 [15.277+.06]
1 0 3 . 1 t 1 . 0 [4.06+ .04
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONS ARE I N M I L L I M E T R E S C I N C H E S I .
2 . WEIGHT: 5.44 kg ( 1 2 . 0 L E ) MAX FOR H F - 9 0 4 1 , 5.67 kg ( 1 2 . 5 L B ) MAX FOR H F - 9 0 4 2 . J l P I N FUNCTION CHART J 1 P I N FUNCTION CHART (CONT)
PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION
A CONFIGURATION A R CONFIGURATION GND
-B CONFIGURATION B S SPARE
C CONFIGURATION C T SPARE
CONNECTOR INFORMATION CONNECTOR STRAIN RELIEF
D D U A L +28 V DC I N U EXT E L + 2 8 V DC
I CONNECTOR
NO I FUNCTION I TYPE NO
I P A R T No
MATING
T Y P E NO I MATING
PART NO.
I TYPE NO. I P A R T NO.
I E
F
STATUS A
STATUS B
V + 2 8 V DC INPUT ( 2 A MAW
J1 POWER BENDIX 206-0075-01 0 MS3476L14-19S 359-7504-080 MS3417-14N 359-7007-010 G POWER GND

PT07H-14-19P
H I E X T E L GND
- -
J2 CONTROL, F I B E R
OPTIC RCV
HONEYWELL
HFD3837- 901
252-0042-020 SPECTRAN
CM-230-1.8 I 261-0054-010 J
K
IEXT EL A
IEXT EL B
J3 CONTROL, F I B E R HONEYWELL 252-0043-020 S PECTRAN 261-0054-010 - - L I E X T EL C
OPTIC XMT HFE4847- 900 - -
CM 2 3 0 1.8 M EXT E L D
~
J4 RF INPUT SPEC I AL T Y 2 6 1 -001 7 - 0 1 0 M39012/16-0101 357-9292-000 - - N EXT E L E

28JS215-1 P EXT E L F
T P 0 -0700- 0 I 4
Antenna Coupler HF-9041 or HF-9042,

Figure 2-38
2- 111/2-112
h: JTES :
I I r--- 1
installation
I . WEIGHT: 8 . 2 K G [ I 8 POUNDS] M A X . 1I CONNECTOR J 4 (POWER)
I
1I 1I CONNECTOR 3 2 - FUNCTION I
I
2 . @ DENOTES CENTER OF G R A V I T Y . I PIN I FUNCTION I 1 F I B E R O P T I C S RECEIVE I
3 . POWER REQUIREMENTS: 28 V D C .
A + 2 8 VDC INPUT
4. T H I S IS THE I N S T A L L A T I O N CONTROL DRAWING FOR A RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER, B +28 VDC INPUT
622-8112-001/002. C +28 VDC INPUT CONNECTOR 3 3 - FUNCTION
5 . CONNECTOR J I : 371-8625-260 D + 2 8 VDC INPUT
MATES WITH: M S 3 4 7 6 1 2 2 - 5 5 s E POWER GROUND F I B E R O P T I C S TRANSMIT
STRAIN RELIEF: MS3417-22N F POWER GROUND
CONNECTOR J Z : 2 5 2 - 0 0 4 2 - 0 1 0 G POWER GROUND
MATES W I T H : 2 6 1 - 0 0 5 4 - 0 1 0
CONNECTOR J 3 : 2 5 2 - 0 0 4 3 - 0 1 0
MATES WITH: 2 6 1 - 0 0 5 4 - 0 1 0
H
J
K
POWER GROUND
+ 2 8 VDC INPUT
POWER GROUND
1 CONNECTOR J5- FUNCTIO;]
CONNECTOR J 4 : 3 7 1 - 2 1 5 7 - 0 0 0 PA RF INPUT/OUTPUT
MATES WITH: M S 3 4 7 6 L I Z - I O S W
STRAIN R E L I E F : M S 3 4 1 7 - 1 2 N
CONNECTOR J5: 3 5 7 - 7 0 9 3 - 0 0 0
MATES WITH: 3 5 7 - 9 2 9 2 - 0 0 0 CONNECTOR 3 6 - FUNCTION
CONNECTOR 36: 3 5 7 - 7 3 4 7 - 0 1 0
MATES W I T H : 3 5 7 - 9 6 6 6 - 0 0 0 RF INPUT/OUTPUT
CONNECTOR J7: 3 5 7 - 7 5 5 ' 4 - 0 2 0
MATES W I T H : 3 5 7 - 9 6 6 6 - 0 0 0
6 . % ASTERISK DENOTES LOWER CASE CHARACTERS.
7 . 3% DOUBLE ASTERISK DENOTES DIMENSIONS ON FRONT PANEL ONLY.
I 13.021 .5
e !
69.826. 4
1,
[4.452.06] [2.752.25]
CONNECTOR J I (CONTROL) I REF
F UNC T ION PIN 8 7 . 6 2 1 . 5 [ 3 . 4 5 2 . 0 6 ] REF

FUNCTION
33.O+I.5[1.302.06]REF
RECEIVE VOICE 600 OHMS F% TRANSMIT VOICE S H I E L D
RECEIVE VOICE 150 OHMS G% CARBON M I C INPUT H
C RECEIVE VOICE COMMON H% CARBON M I C INPUT L
'I
D DAGC I I% TEST PASS
E SPARE J% SPARE
F SPA RE K%
Mm
RT ADDRESS 2
R'r ADDRESS 3
1 9 3 . 6 8 i O . 50
[7.625+.020] a
NX SPARE
J PTT KEY P% SPARE
f @
K TRANSMIT VOICE 600 OHMS Q% STOP SCAN .5 - I
L TRANSMIT VOICE 150 OHMS RX DAGC3 06 I
M TRANSMIT VOICE COMMON S% DAGCO IO .6i6. 4
N RECEIVE DATA COMMON TX SELCAL RECEIVE AUDIO H 14 002 2 5 1 -
RT ADDRESS 0
n
P U% RETRANSMIT REF
R
S
RT ADDRESS I
RT ADDRESS 4
VX
wm
TRANSMIT DATA COMMON
TRANSMIT DATA 600 OHMS
dl
A
k
F-
T SYSTEX KEY X% TRANSMIT DATA S H I E L D
L
I
1
U TRANSMiT IPjTERLOCK YX RECEIVE DATA 150 OHMS 152.226.4R E F 4
V GROUND ZX RECEIVE DATA 600 OHMS 25.lLl.5[.99+.06]REF [6.002.25]
57.92 I . 5
W RECEIVE VOICE S H I E L D AA RT P A R I T Y 1 0 0 . 3 2 1 . 5 [ 2 . 9 5 + . 0 6 ] REF
X
[ 2 . 2 8 2 . 06 ] 320.0i1.0[12.60+.04] --.
DAGC'4 08 DAGC CS REF
Y DAGC2 cc DAGC CE
Z
A%
0%
C%
COUPLER BYPASS
RECEIVE MUTE
EXT AGC T I M E CONST
SPEECH PROC D I S A B L E
DD
EE
FF
GG
SELCAL RECEIVE AUDIO L
GROUND
RECEIVE DATA S H I E L D
10.2-CO.5[ .4Oi.O21
k-330.2kI . O [ I3.002.04].-4
3.020.8
[ . 12i.031
J
D% TEST ENABLE HH 141 . 0 2 l .OX"
GROUND -00I
EX GROUND [5.55?.04]
659-6302
Receiver-Transmitter HF-9030,
Figure 2-39
2- 11312- 114
installation
Figure 2-40
Change 3 2-115/2-116
installation
1
NCITES:
I . W E I G H T : 8.62 K G [ 1 8 . 8 POUNDS] M A X .
2. @ DENOTES CENTER OF G R A V I T Y .
CONNECTOR J4 (POYIER:l ~ O N N E C T O R J2- F U N C T I O N
3. PCWER REQUIREMENTS: 28 VDC. PIN FUNCTION FISERCPTICS RECEIVE

4. T H I S I S THE I N S T A L L A T I O N CONTROL DRAWING FOR A
A +28 VDC I N P U T
R E C E I V E R / T R A N S M I T T E R , 822-0101-001 AND 822-0101-002.
B +28 VDC I N P U T
5. CONNECTOR J I : 371-8625-260 C +2e VDC INPUT
MATES W I T H : MS3476L22-555 D +28 VDC I N P U T
S T R A I N R E L I E F : MS3417-22N E POWER GROUND F I B E R O P T I C S TRANSMIT
F POWER GROUND
CONNECTOR J2: 252-0042-010 POVCER GROUND
G
MATES W I T H : 261-0054-010 H POWER GROUND
CONNECTOR J3: 252-0043-010 J
K
+28 VDC I N P U T
POWER GROUND
I CONNECTOR J5- F U N C T I O N I
MATES W I T H : 261-0054-010
CONNECTOR J4: MS3II2EI2-IOPW PA RF I N P U T / O U T P U T
MATES W I T H : MS3476L I2-I OSW
S T R A I N R E L I E F : MS3417-12N
CONNECTOR J5: 357-7093-000 I CONNECTOR J6- F U N C T i O N 1
CONNECTOR J6: M39012/28-0018
MA T E S W IT H : M3 90 I 2/ I 6- 0 1 0 I
I RF I N P U T / O U T P U T I
MATES W I T H : M390 l2/26-0I O I
CONNECTOR 37: 357-7554-020 1 CONNECTOR J7- F U N C T I O N I
MATES W I T H : M39012/26-0101
6. f A S T E R I S K DENOTES LOWER CASE CHARACTERS. RF O U T P U T / I N P U T
7. %* DOUBLE A S T E R I S K DENOTES D I M E N S I O N S ON FRONT P A N E L ONLY
CONNECTOR J I ( C O N T R O L )
PIN
A
FUNCTION
-
R E C E I V E V O I C E 600 O H M S
CONNECTOF? J I
PIN
(CONTROL-CONTD)
FUNCTION
33.021.5[1.301.06]REF
t 3 9 6 . 7 [ 15.621 M A X -
Frn TRANSMIT V O I C E S H I E L D
B R E C E I V E V O I C E 150 OHMS Grn CARSON M I C I N P U T H
C R E C E I V E V O I C E COMEION Hf CARSON M I C I N P U T L
D A R I N C 429 I N P U T POF'T C - 8 If TEST PASS
E A R I N C 429 I N P U T PORT C - A JI SPARE
F SDARE K% ~ R I N ? 429 INPUT P O R T A - a
G TUNE-IN PROGRESS Mf A R I N C 429 OUTPUT PORT A - A
194.
[7.6
f
H NORMAL/SECURE Nf SPARE
J P T T KEY PX SPARE
K T R A N S M I T V O I C E 600 OHMS Of STOP SCAN
L T R A N S M I T V O I C E 150 OHMS RX
M T R A N S M I T V O I C E COMMON SX
N R E C E I V E DATA COMMON Tf
P A R I N C 429 I N P U T PORT B - A Ub
R ARINC 429 INPUT PORT a-a Vf
S
T
U
A R I N C 429 I N P U T PORT A - A
SYSTEM KEY
TRANSMIT INTERLOCK
Wf
Xb
Y%
I/ I
i
V
W
X
Y
ARINC SHIELD
RECEIVE VOICE SHIELD
LRU IDENT
A R I N C 429 BURST E N A B L E
2%
AA
BB
CC
R E C E I V E DATA 600 OHMS
A R I N C 429 OUTPUT PORT A - B
AR!NC 429 OUTPUT PORT B - A
A R I N C 429 OUTPUT PORT 0 - 8
57.9i1.5
[2.28t.
061
L6.001
4
152.4 APPROX
2 COUPLER B Y P A S S DO SELCAL R E C E I V E AUDIO L 25.lil.5[.992.06]REF REF 320.0+l.0[12.60t.04]

REF
AX R E C E I V E MUTE EE T R A N S M I T DATA 150 OHMS
"i
BS E X T A G C T I M E CONST FF GROUND 100.I +1.5[3.94+.06]
REF 331.2 [13.0Li] MAX
C f SPEECH PROC D I S A B L E GG R E C E I V E DATA S H I E L D
Df TEST ENABLE HH GROUND .400t0.5[.q0+.02]
REF
Ern GROUND 3.020.8REF
120.6i0.5 REF [ . lZf.031
L4.75t.021
-002
15.591
75 1-4059
Receiver-Transmitter HF-9031A,
Figure 2-41
2- 117/24 18
NOTES installation
I. WEIGHT: 9.5 KG [21 POUNDS] MAX.
2. @ DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY. CONNECTOR J2- FUNCTION
3 . POWER REQUIREMENTS: 28 VDC.
4. THIS IS THE INSTALLATION CONTROL Ct':%WING FOR A
PIN
A
FUNCTION
+28 VDC INPUT
FIBEROPTICS RECEIVE
I
RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER, 622-8128-001/002.
5. CONNECTOR J I : 371-8625-260
B +28 VDC INPUT
C +28 VDC INPUT CONNECTOR 33- FUNCTION
MATES WITH: MS3476L22-555
STRAIN RELIEF: MS3417-22N
CONNECTOR J2: 252-CG42-010
D
E
F
t28 VDC INPUT
POWER GROUND
POWER GROUND
1 FIBEROPTICS TRANSMIT
I
G POWER GROUND
MATES WITH: 26 I -0054-0IO H POWER GROUND
CONNECTOR J3: 252-0043-010 J
K
t28 VDC INPUT
PO!VER GROUND
I CONNECTOR J5- FUNCTION 1
MATES WITH: 261-0054-010
CONNECTOR J q : MS31I2EI2-IOPW PA RF INPUT/OUTPUT
MATES WITH: MS3476LlZ-lOSW
CONNECTOR J5: 357-7093-000
MATES WITH: M39012/16-0101
1 CONNECTOR J6- FUNCTION I
CONNECTOR J 6 : M39012/28-0018 RF INPUT/OUTPUT
MATES WITH: M39012/26-0101
CONNECTOR J7: 357-7554-020 1 CONNECTOR J7- FUNCTION 1
MATES WITH: M39012/26-0101
6. f ASTERISK DENOTES LOWER CASE CHARACTERS.
7 . % X DOUBLE ASTERISK DENOTES DIMENSIONS ON FRONT PANEL ONLY.
RF OUTPUT/INPUT
I
113.0 14.451 REF

87.6 [3.45j REF
3 3 . 0 [ I .30] REF
31.8+1.0
CONNECTOR JI (CONTROL) CONNECTOR JI (CONTROL-CONTD) [ I .25f.04]
A RECEIVE VOICE 6 0 0 OHMS FY TRANSMIT VOICE SHIELD
B RECEIVE VOICE 150 OHMS GX CARSON MIC INPUT H
C RECEIVE VOICE COMMON H* CARBON MIC INPUT L
D DAGC I I* TEST PASS
E JY SPARE
F K% RT ADDRESS 2
G Mf RT ADDRESS 3 193.68iO.5 I
H
J
K
L
M
N
TRANSMIT VOICE 600 OHMS
TRANSMIT VOICE 150 OHMS
TRANSMIT VOICE COMMON
RECEIVE DATA COMMON
N*
PX
OX
RI
SY
TX
SPARE
SPARE
STOP SCAN
DAGC3
DAGCO
SELCAL RECEIVE AUDIO H
[7.625?.020]
I 141.2 t
P RT ADDRESS 0 u* RETRANSMIT
R RT ADDRESS I V% TRANSMIT DATA COMMON
S RT ADDRESS 4 W* TRANSMIT DATA 600 OHMS
T SYSTEM KEY XX TRANSMIT DATA SHIELD
U TRANSMiT INTERLOCK YY RECEIVE DATA 150 OHMS
V
W
X
GROUND
DAGCLI
ZX
AA
BB
RECEIVE DATA 600 OHMS
RT PARITY
DAGC C S
'I
Y
2
AX
8X
CX
DAGC2
COUPLER BYPASS
RECEIVE MUTE
EXT AGC TIME CONST
SPEECH PROC DISABLE
cc
DO
EE
FF
GG
DAGC C E
GROUND
RECEIVE DATA SHIELD
[ .56+.OV]
25. I L.991 REF
100.1 [ 3 . 9 4 ] REF
57.9
L2.28
REF 4 152.4[6.00] REF
DX TEST ENABLE HH GROUND

EX GROUND 3 . 0 f 0 . 8 -I
120.6f0.5 [ . 12t.031
[4.75?.02]
l l ; l . O + i . O *L -00 I
[5.55?.04]
75!-686 1
Figure 2-42
2-11912-120
installation
I . WEIGHT: 10.2 KC; [ 2 2 . 4 POUNOS] M A X .

3 . POWER REQUIREMENTS: 28 VOC.
4. THIS IS THE INSTALLATION CONTROL DRAWING FOR A RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER, 822-0090-001 AND -002
5. UNDERLINED ALPHA CHARACTERS DENOTE LOWER CASE LETTERS.
CONNECTOR PART NUMBER MATES WITH STRAIN RELIEF
JI 371-8625-260 MS3476L22-555
J2 Z52-0042-0IO 261-0054-010 113.0 [4.45] REF
J3 252-00r3-0 IO 261-0054-010
J4 M53112EI2-IOPW MS3476L I2-I OSW 87.6 [3.45] REF
35 357-7093 -000 M390 I 2/ I 6-0I 0 I
J6 M390 12/28-00I 8 M390 I2/26-0IO I
JJL
J7 357-7554-020 M390 l2/26-0IO I 33.0 [ I .30] REF
R3.6[. 141 REF
5.61.221 REF
396.7[15.621 MAX 3
:ONNECTOR JI (CONTROL)
- ZONNECTOR J I (CNTRL-CONTO) IONNECTOR
- J q (POWER ) I
'IF
-
A
FUNCTION
RECEIVE VOICE 600 OHMS
FUNCTION 'I
-h FUNCTION I t
194.3
TRANSMIT VOICE SHIELD A +28 VDC INPUT [7.65]
B RECEIVE VOICE 150 OHMS CARBON MIC INPUT H B + 2 8 VDC INPUT
C RECEIVE VOICE COMMON CARBON MIC INPUT L C +28 VDC INPUT MAX
3
0 DAGC I
E SPARE
F SPARE
G TUNE IN PROGRESS
H NORMAL/BB
TEST PASS
SPARE
(L) ARINC 4 2 9 IN(BUS A
(H)ARINC 429 OUT(BUS B
SPARE
D
E
F
G
H
+28 VOC INPUT
POWER GROUND
POWER GROUND
POWER GROUND
PO'NER GROUND
IT .-
J PTT KEY SPARE J +28 VDC INPUT

K TRANSMIT VOICE 600 OHM: STOP SCAN K PO'NER GROUND [4.001
L TRANSMIT VOICE 150 OHME DAGC3
M TRANSMIT VOICE COMMON DAGCO - L2.281
APPROX
N RECEIVE DATA COMMON
P RT ADDRESS 0
R RT ADDRESS I
S (H) ARIIK 429 IN(BU5 A:
~ E L C A LRECEIVE AUDIO H
RETRANSMIT
TRANSMIT DATA COMMON
6
T SYSTEM KEY TRANSMIT DATA SHIELD CONN J 2 FIBER OPTIC RECEIVE
U TRANSMIT INTERL'OCK
V GROUND
W RECEIVE VOICE SHIELD
X DAGC4
(LIARINC 429 OUT(BUS B
DAGC C S
DAGC CE
CONN J3 FIBER OPTIC TRANSMIT
I CONN J5 PA RF INPUT/OUTPUT 1
1 CONN J6 RF INPUT/OUTPUT
3.3
[ . 131
152.4 L6.001 APPROX
12.601 REF -4
331 .2[ 13.041 MAX
"EL;"'
I
Y DAGCZ
z COUPLER BYPASS SELCAL RECEIVE AUDIO L I REF
-A RECEIVE MUTE
-B EXT AGC TIME CONST
GROUND 1 CONN J7 RF OUTPUT/INPUT I 10.2[,401 REF - -120.6 14.751
REF
-C SPEECH PROC DISABLE RECEIVE DATA SHIELD
-D TEST ENABLE GROUND - -t
-
l4l.0[5.551-
-E GROUND REF 75 1-9666
-
173.7[6.84] MAX-
Figure 2-43
2-12112-122
installation
I . W E I G H T : 1 0 . 2 K G [ 2 2 . 4 POUNDS] M A X .
2. @ CENOTES CENTER OF G R A V I T Y .
3 . POWER R E Q U I R E M E N T S : 28 VDC.
4 . T H I S I S THE I N S T A L L A T I O N CONTROL DRAWING FOR A R E C E I V E R / T R A N S M I T T E R , 822-0102-001 .
5 . U N D E R L I N E D ALPHA CHARACTERS DEqOTE LOWER CASE L E T T E R S .
I
/CONNECTOR PART NUMaER
~ ~~~
I MATES W I T H
37 1 - 8 6 2 5 - 2 5 0 M85049/52- I -22h
252-0042-010 261-0054-010 1 1 3 . 0 [4.45] REF -
252-0043-0 I O 261-0054-010
MS31 I 2 E I Z - I O P W MS3475L12-IOSW M85049/52-I-l2N 87.5 [3.451 REF -
3 5 7 - 7 0 9 3 -000 M 3 9 0 I Z / 16-0 I O I
M39012/28-0018 M3SO 1 2 / 2 5 - 0 I O 1
357-7554-020 M39012/25-0101 3 3 . 0 [ 1 . 3 0 1 REF -
396.7[15.52] MAX z3
ZONNECTOR J I ( C O N T R O L ) :GNNECTOR J I (CNTRL-CONTD) :ONNECTOR J4 (POWER 1 I
.-
'Ih
-- FUNCTION 'IN FUNCTION
-
'IN
- FUNCTION 4 --
-1
154.3
A R E C E I V E V O I C E 6 0 0 OHMS F TRANSMIT VOICE S H i E L D A + 2 S VDC INPUT [7.65!
B R E C E I V E V O I C E I 5 0 OHMS -G CARBON M I C I N P U T H B t28 VDC I N P U T
MAX
C R E C E I V E V O I C E COMMON -H CARBON M I C I N P U T L C +28 VDC I N P U T
D A R I N C 4 2 9 I N P U T PORT C - B -I TEST PASS D +28 VDC I N P U T
G
-Er A R I N C 4 2 9 I N P U T PORT C - A
SPARE
TUNE I N PROGRESS
-
-
K
-
M
J SPARE
A R I N C 429 i N P U T PORT A-E!
A R I N C 429 OUTPUT PORT A - i
E
F
G
POWER GROUND
POWER GROUND
POWER GROUND
I
1
H NORM Ai. / S E C UKE -
N SPARE H POWER GROUND
J P T T KEY -
P SPARE J +28 VCC I N P U T
K T R A N S M I T V O I C E 6 0 0 OHMS -
Q STOP SCAN K POWER GROUND
L T R A N S M I T V O I C E 1 5 0 OHMS -
R A R I N C 4 2 9 A / B SELECT
M T R A N S M I T V O I C E COMMON -
S ARiNC 4 2 9 C SELECT -
N
P
R
R E C E I V E DATA COMMON
A R I N C 429 I N P U T PORT 3 - A
ARIbIC 4 2 9 I N P U T PORT B - @
-
T
U
-
-
RETRANSM I T
T 2 A N S M I T DATA COMMON
d
V
I!
S
V
W
X
Y
z
T
U
-A
A R I N C 429 I N P U T PORT A - A ( H
SYSTEM KEY
?RAN& IT- INTERLCCK
ARINC SHIELD
LRU IDENT
A R I N C 429 BURST E N A B L E
COUPLER BYPASS
R E C E I V E MUTE
-
W
-
X
-
Y
-
Z
AA
88
CC
OD
EE
TRANSr4IT DATA 500 OHMS
T R A N S M I T DATA S H I E L D
R E C E I V E DATA 6 0 0 OHMS
A R I N C 4 2 9 OUTPUT PORT A - E
A R I N C 4 2 9 OUTPUT PORT 5 - 1
A R I N C 4 2 9 OUTPCiT PORT B-E
T R A N S M I T DATA 150 OHMS
1 CONN J 2 F I B E R OPTIC RECEIVE
1 CGNN J 3
I CONN J 5
~~
F I B E R OPTIC TRANSMIT
PA RF iNPUT/OUTPUT
CONN 36 RF INPUT/OUTPUT
______
1
1
1
1 0 . 2 [ , 4 0 1 REF -
7
5I
[ ,991
REF
100. 1 [ 3 . 9 4 ]
REF
-120.6 R E F 4
:3
3 . 3 REF
[ . I31
1 5 2 . 4 [ 5 . 0 0 1 APPROX
3 2 O . O [ l 2 . 6 0 ] REF
3 3 1 . 2 [ 1 3 . 0 4 ] MAX
41 3'EL;1z1
F F GROUND CONN J 7 RF OUTPUT/INPUT
-
B E X T A G C T I M E CONST ~-
[ S . 751
-
C SPEECH PROC D I S A B L E GG R E C E I V E DATA S H I E L D
HH GROUND
D
- TEST E N A B L E l4l.c[5.551-
-
E GROUND REF 7 5 I -9656
-
6- 173.7[6.84] MAX-
Receiver-Transmitter HF-9034A,
Figure 2-44
2-12312-124
in stall ation
WiES
I . W E I G H T : 8 . 2 K G [ I 8 POUNDS] M A X . CONNECTOR J 2 - F U N C T I O N
3 . POWER REQUIRELIENTS: 28 VDC. 1 PIN 1 FUNCTION I
4 . T H I S IS THE I N S T A L L A T I O N CONTROL DRAWING FOR A
A + 2 8 VDC I N P U T
RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER, 6 2 2 - 8 1 2 6 - 0 0 1 / 0 0 2 . B + 2 8 VDC I N P U T
5. CONNECTOR J I : 3 7 1 - 8 6 2 5 - 2 6 0 C +i18 VOC I N P U T 1 CONNECTOR J 3 - F U N C T I O N I
D + 2 8 VOC I N P U T
MATES W I T H : M S 3 4 7 6 L 2 2 - 5 5 S
STRAIN RELIEF: MS3417-22N E POWER GROUND 1 F I B E R O P T I C S TRANSMIT 1
F POWER GROUND
CONNECTOR 3 2 : 2 5 2 - 0 0 4 2 - 0 1 0 G POWER GROUND
MATES W I T H : 2 6 1 - 0 0 5 4 - 0 1 0 H. POWER GROUND
CONNECTOR J 3 : 2 5 2 - 0 0 4 3 - 0 1 0 J + 2 a VDC INPUT I CONNECTOR J 5 - FUNCTION I
MATES W I T H : 2 6 1 - 0 0 5 4 - 0 1 0
CONNECTOR J l i : M S 3 1 I Z E I 2 - I O P W
K POWER GROUND
I PA RF I N P U T / O U T P U T I
MATES W I T H : M S 3 4 7 6 L 1 2 - 1 0 S W
CONNECTOR J 5 : 3 5 7 - 7 0 9 3 - 0 0 0 I CONNECTOR J 6 - FUNCTION 1
MATES W I T H : M 3 9 0 I 2 / 16-0I O I
CONNECTOR J 6 : M 3 9 0 1 2 / 2 8 - 0 0 1 8
MATES W I T H : M 3 9 0 1 2 / 2 6 - 0 1 0 1
CONNECTOR 3 7 : 3 5 7 - 7 5 5 4 - 0 2 0 I CONNECTOR J 7 - F U N C T I O N 1
hlATES W I T H : M 3 9 0 1 2 / 2 6 - 0 1 0 1
( M A T I N G CONNECTORS M A Y B E E Q U I V A L E N T T Y P E . )
I RF O U T P U T / I N P U T I
6. X A S T E R I S K DEKOTES LOWER CASE CHARACTERS.
7 . X x DOUBLE A S T E R I S K DENOTES D I M E N S I O N S ON FRONT P A N E L O N L Y .
Il3.Oll.5[4.45C.O6] REF-
=
87.6i1.5[3.45i.06] REF-
33.0il.5[1.30i.06] REF-
CONNECTOR J I ( C O N T R O L ) I CONNECTOR JI (CONTROL-CONTD)
PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCT I ON

~- ~~~~~
A
B
C
D
R E C E I V E V O I C E 6 0 0 OHMS
R E C E I V E V O I C E 150 OHMS
R E C E I V E V O I C E COMMON
DAGC I
FX
GX
HX
I#
TRANSMIT VOICE S H I E L D
CARBON M I C I N P U T H
CARBON M I C I N P U T L
TEST PASS
t
E
F
SPARE
SPARE
J*
KX
SPARE
RT ADDRESS 2
I ** m
G
H
TUNE I N PROGRESS
N0 R MA L /-
MX
NX
RT ADDRESS 3
SPARE
l 9 3 . 6 8 i O . 50
[7.625i.o2oj
1 4
1
J P T T KEY PX SPARE l41.2t
K T R A N S M I T V O I C E 6 0 0 OHMS Qf STOP SCAN [5.56i
L T R A N S M I T V O I C E 150 OHMS R# OAGC3 REF 6651 I
M T R A N S M I T V O I C E COMMON SX OAGCO
~ ~~~
N R E C E I V E DATA COMMON Tf SELCAL R E C E I V E AUDIO H

P RT ADDRESS 0 Uf RETRANSMIT
R
S
T
U
V
RT ADDRESS I
RT ADDRESS 4
SYSTEM KEY
TRANSMIT INTERLOCK
GROUND
V f
Wf
XX
YX
Z#
T R A N S M I T DATA COMMON
T R A N S M I T DATA 6 0 0 OHMS
T R A N S M I T DATA S H I E L D
R E C E I V E DATA 150 08MS
s ji
'I
W
X
DAGCli
AA
BB
RT P A R I T Y
O A G C CS
152.4i6.4 REF 4
[6.00i.25]
Y DAGC2 cc DAGC CE
2 COUPLER BYPASS DD SELCAL RECEIVE AUDIO L 3 2 0 . 0 f l . O [ 12.60i.OLl1 3
25.1+1.5[.99t.06] REF +
AX R E C E I V E MUTE EE T R A N S M I T DATA 150 OHMS
0% E X T AGC T I M E CONST FF GROUND 100.li1.5[3.94f.06] REF -
CX SPEECH PROC D I S A B L E GG R E C E I V E DATA S H I E L D
DX TEST ENABLE HH GROUND 10.2i0.5[.40i.02]-
3.0i0.8
EX GROIJND 120.6iO.5 I.. 1 2 t . 0 3 1
- [4.75+.021
141.0+1.0~*
[ 5 . 5 5 + . 0'41
= I, -00 I
Figure 2-45
2-12512-126
NOTES :
I . W E I G H T : 8 . 6 2 K G [ I E . 8 POUNDS] M A X .
2. @ DENOTES CENTER OF G R A V I T Y . --
I CONNECTOR J 2 - FLNCT1C;N I installation
3. POWER R E Q U I R E M E N T S : 28 VDC.
4. T H I S IS THE I N S T A L L A T I O N CONTROL DRAWING FOR A
PIN FUNCTION FIBEROPTICS RECEIVE
J
A +28 VDC INPUT
R E C E I V E R / T R A N S M I T T E R , 622-8129-001/002. B +28 VDC INPUT
5 . CONNECTOR J I : 371-8625-260 C +28 VDC INPUT I CONNECTOR J3- F U N C T I O N 1
MATES W I T H : MS3476L22-555
S T R A I N R E L I E F : MS3417-22N
D
E
F
+28 VDC INPUT
POWER GROUND
POWER GROUND
1 F I B E R O P T I C S TRANSMIT I
CONNECTOR J2: 252-0042-010 G POWER GROUND
MATES W I T H : 261-0054-010 H POWER GROUND
CONNECTOR J3: 252-0043-010 J
K
+28 VDC I N P U T
POWER GROUND
I CONNECTOR J5- F U N C T I O N I
MATES W I T H : 261-0054-010
CONNECTOR J 4 : MS3II2EI2-IOPW PA RF I N P U T / O U T P U T
MATES W I T H : MS3476Ll2-IOSW
S T R A I N R E L I E F : MS3417-I N
CONNECTOR J5: 357-7093-000
BUS A 15538
I CONNECTOR J 6 - F U N C T I O N I
MATES W I T H : M39012/16-0 01
RF I N P U T / O U T P U T
CONNECTOR J6: M39012/28-0018
MATES W I T H : M 3 9 0 1 2 / 2 6 - 0 01
CONNECTOR J7: 357-7554-020 1 CONNECTOR J7- F U N C T I O N 1
MATES W I T H : M39012/26-0 01 BUS B 15538
CONNECTOR 38: 357-0622-010
1 RF O U T P U T / I N P U T I
MATES W I T H : 357-0622-030
CONNECTOR J9: 357-0622-010
MATES W I T H : 357-0622-030
6. X A S T E R I S K DENOTES LOWER CASE CHARACTERS.
7. X * DOUBLE A S T E R I S K DENOTES D I M E N S I O N S ON FRONT P A N E L ONLY
113.0i1.5[4.45i.061
REF
87.6 t1.5[3.45+.061
REF
83.1 +1.5[3.27+.051REF
33.0?l.5[1.30t.06]REF
CONNECTOR JI [CONTROLl CONNECTOR JI (CONTROL-CONTD)
PIN FUNCTION PIN F UNC T I ON
A R E C E I V E V O I C E 600 OHMS F* TRANSMIT VOICE S H I E L D

B R E C E I V E V O I C E 150 OHMS Gx: CARDON M I C I N P U T H
C R E C E I V E V O I C E COMMON H‘* CARBON M I C I N P U T L
D DAGC I I* TEST PASS
E SPARE J* SPARE
F SPARE KX RT ADDRESS 2
G TUNE I N PROGRESS MX RT ADDRESS 3
H NORMAL/SECURE NX
J P T T KEY PU
K T R A N S M I T V O I C E 6 0 0 OHMS OX
L T R A N S M I T V O I C E I50 OHMS R*
M T R A N S M I T V O I C E COMMON S#
N R E C E I V E DATA COMMON T*
P RT ADDRESS 0 Ut RETRANSMIT
R RT ADDRESS I VX T R A N S M I T DATA COMMON
-
S R T ADDRESS 4 W% T R A N S M I T DATA 6 0 0 OHMS
T SYSTEM KEY XU T R A N S M I T DATA S H I E L D
U
V
W
X
TRANSMIT INTERLOCK
GROUND
R E C E I V E V O I C E SHIELD
DAGC4
Yt
2%
AA
BB
R E C E I V E CATA 150 O H M S
RT P A R I T Y
DAGC CS
4 152.4i6.4 REF
[6.00i.25]
57.9+-1.5
Y DAGCZ cc DAGC CE [ 2.26i.06 ]
2 COUPLER BYPASS DD SELCAL RECEIVE AUDIO L 25.1 tI.5[.99t.O6]R E F - REF 320.0i1.0[I2.60t.041
AX
6X
CY
Dx:
E*
R E C E I V E MUTE
E X T A G C T I M E CONST
SPEECH PROC D I S A 6 L E
TEST ENABLE
GROUND
EE
F i
GG
HH
GROUND
R E C E I V E DATA S H I E L D
GROUND
lOO.ltl.5[3.94i.O6]R E F -
10.2+O.5[.40+.021 - 120.6iO.5
330.2?1.0[1 3 . 0 0 i . 0 4 1
3.0i0.6 -
-
[ . 12i.031
l4.75i.021
l L + I . O t l . O ~ ~ -00I
15.55i.04 1
75 1-4046
Figure 2-46
2-12712-128
installation
NOTE
2. a
: . W E I G H T : 9 . 5 K G [ 2 1 POUNDS] M A X .
DENOTES CENTER OF G R A V I T Y .
CONNECTOR J 4 (POWER)
FUNCTION
CONNECTOR J 2 - FUNCTION
4 . T H I S IS THE I N S T A L L A T I O N CONTROL DRAWING FOR A

A + 2 8 VDC I N P U T
RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER, 6 2 2 - 8 1 3 2 - 0 0 1 / 0 0 2 .
0 +28 VOC I N P U T
5 . CONNECTOR J I : 3 7 1 - 8 6 2 5 - 2 6 0 C
D
+ 2 8 VDC I N P U T
+ 2 8 VDC I N P U T
I CONNECTOR J 3 - F U N C T I O N 1
MATES W I T H : M S 3 4 7 6 L 2 2 - 5 5 5
STRAIN RELIEF: MS3417-22N E POWER GROUND F I B E R O P T I C S TRANSMIT
F POWER GROUND
CONNECTOR J 2 : 2 5 2 - 0 0 4 2 - 0 1 0 G POWER GROUND
MATES W I T H : 2 6 1 - 0 0 5 4 - 0 1 0 H POWER GROUND
I I
~~
CONNECTOR J 3 : 2 5 2 - 0 0 4 3 - 0 1 0 J + 2 6 VDC I N P U T CONNECTOR J 5 - F U N C T I O N

K POWER GROUND
MATES W I T H : 2 6 1 - 0 0 5 4 - 0 I O
CONNECTOR J 4 : M S 3 1 I 2 E I 2 - l O P W 1 PA RF I N P U T / O U T P U T I
MATES W I T H : M S 3 4 7 6 L I Z - I O S W
CONNECTOR J5: 3 5 7 - 7 0 9 3 - 0 0 0 CONNECTOR 3 6 - FUNCTION
MATES W I T H : M 3 9 0 1 2 / 1 6 - 0 1 0 1
CONNECTOR J 6 : M 3 9 0 1 2 / 2 8 - 0 0 1 8
1 k G z G r - i
MATES W I T H : M 3 9 0 1 Z / 2 6 - 0 1 0 1
CONNECTOR J 7 : 3 5 7 - 7 5 5 q - 0 2 0 1 CONNECTOR 3 7 - F U N C T I O N ]
MATES W I T H : M 3 9 0 1 2 / 2 6 - 0 1 0 1
6 . X A S T E R I S K DENOTES LOWER CASE CHARACTERS. I RF OUTPUT/INPUT I
S . i X DOUBLE A S T E R I S K DENOTES D I M E N S I O N S ON FRONT P A N E L O N L Y .
1 1 3 . 0 1 4 . 4 5 1 REF
8 7 . 6 1 3 . 4 5 1 REF
33.0 [ I .30] REF
CONNECTOR J I (CONTROL) CONNECTOR J I (CONTROL-CONTDI
A
B
C
D
E
R E C E I V E V O I C E 600 OHMS
R E C E I V E V O I C E I 5 0 OHMS
R E C E I V E V O I C E COMMON
DAGC I
F f
G*
Hf
I*
J f
TRANSMIT VOICE SHIELD
CARBON M I C I N P U T H
CARBON M I C I N P U T L
TEST PASS
SPARE
Yi
F KH RT ADDRESS 2
G M% RT ADDRESS 3
H N$ SPAR€
J P* SPARE
K T R A N S M I T V O I C E 6 0 0 OHMS Q* STOP SCAN
L T R A N S M I T V O I C E I 5 0 OHMS R* DAGC3 113.8
M TRANSMIT VOICE COMMON SX DAGCO
[4.48]
N
P
R E C E I V E DATA COMMON
RT ADDRESS 0
T*
UH
RETRANSMIT 7- REF
R RT ADDRESS I V$ T R A N S M I T DATA COMMON
L I t
-
S RT ADDRESS 4 W* T R A N S M I T DATA 600 OHMS
T SYSTEM KEY X* T R A N S M I T DATA S H I E L D a-
Y I R E C E I V E DATA 150 OHMS
iP
U TRANSMIT INTERLOCK
V GROUND 2% R E C E I V E DATA 6 0 0 OHMS
W RECEIVE VOICE SHIELD AA
X
Y
DAGC4
DAGC2
08
cc [ .56+.04]
57.9 '- 152.4 [ 6 . 0 0 ] REF-
E=-
2 COUPLER 0 Y P A S S DD [2.28] 3ZO.OiI.O[ 12.60i.041
A t R E C E I V E MUTE EE 25. I C.991 REF REF
0% E X T A G C T I M E CONST FF 330.2+1 .O[ 1 3 . 0 0 i . 0 4 1
C* GG R E C E I V E DATA S H I E L D 100. I [ 3 . 9 4 ] REF
SPEECH PROC D I S A B L E
D* TEST ENABLE HH GROUND l0.2i0.5[.40i.02]
E* GROUND 3.0i0.8
lZ0.6i0.5 [ . 12t.031
[4.75i.021
141.011.0 *Y -00 I
[5.55f.O4]
75 1-6860
Figure 2-47
2 - 12912- 130
installation
I. WEIGHT: 10.2 K G L22.4 POUNDS] MAX.

4 . T H I S IS THE I N S T A L L A T I O N CONTROL DRAWING FOR A R E C E I V E R / T R A N S M I T T E R , 622-9424-001 AND 6 2 2 - 3 4 2 4 - 0 0 2 .
5 . U N D E R L I N E D ALPHA CHARACTERS DENOTE LOWER CASE L E T T E R S .
:ONNECTOF; P A R T NUMBER MATES W I T H
JI 37 1 - 8 6 2 5 - 2 6 0 MS3476LZZ-55S M85049/52-I-22N 114.8 [ 4 . 5 2 ] REF

J2 252-0042-0 I O 261-0054-010 1 1 3 . 0 L 4 . 4 5 1 REF
J3 252-0043-0 IO 2 6 I -0054 - 0 I 0
JY MS3lIZEIZ-IOPW MS3476LIZ-IOSW M850Y9/5Z-I-I2N 87.6[3.45] REF
35 357-7093-000 M 3 9 0 1 2 / 16-0101
J6 M39012/28-0018 M390 I 2 / 2 6 - 0 I O I
83. I [ 3 . 2 7 ] REF -11
J7 357-7554-020 M39012/26-0101 3 3 . 0 [ I .301
J8
J9
357-0622-010
357-0622-010
357-0622-030
357-0622-030
k-396.71
~ 3 . 6 [ .1 4 1 REF
5.6[.22]
1 5 . 6 2 1 MAX
REF i L 3
:ONNECTOR J I ICONTROLl :OF!NECTOR JI (CNTRL-CONTD) :ONNECTOR J Y (POWER)
- -
-
'Ib FUNCTION FUNCTION 'Ib
- FUNCTION
194.3
A R E C E I V E V O I C E 6 0 0 OHMS TRANSMIT V O I C E S H I E L D A + 2 8 VDC I N P U T
a R E C E I V E V O I C E 150 OHMS CARBON M I C I N P U T H B t 2 e VDC I N P U T 17.651
MAX 183.9
C R
- .E-C_
E I V E V O I C E COMMON CARBON M I C I N P U T L C t28 VDC I N P U T L7.241
D I
UALL I TEST PASS 0 +28 VDC I N P U T
E SPARE SPARE E POWER GROUND I
F SPARE RT ADDRESS 2 F POWER GROUND
G TUNE I N PROGRESS RT ADDRESS 3 G FOWER GROUND
H NORMAI/BB SPARE H POWER GROUND
J P T T KEY SPARE J +28 VDC I N P U T 101.6
K STOP SCAN K POWER GROUND
L DAGC3 [4.001 -
M DAGCO - REF
N
P
a
S
RETRANSMIT
T R A N S M I T DATA COMMON
L i
T T R A N S M I T DATA S H I E L D CONN J2 F I B E R OPTIC RECEIVE
/-s- 25. I
U
V
TRANSMIT INTERLOCK
GROUND
R E C E I V E DATA 1 5 0 OHMS
R E C E I V E DATA 600 OHMS 1 CONN 33 F I B E R OPTIC TRANSMIT I [ .991 152.4 1 6 . 0 0 1 REF-
3 . O [ . 121
REF
W
X
DAGCY
RT P A R I T Y
DAGC CS 1 CONN 35 PA R i INPUT/OUTPUT 1 100.1[3.941
3.3 320.01 1 2 . 6 0 1 REF REF
Y
z
DAGCZ
COUPLER BYPASS
DAGC CE
SELCAL RECEIVE AUDIO L 1 CONN 36 RF INPUT/OUTFUT 1 REF
[ . 131 L = = 3 3 0 . 2 t l . O [ 13.OOk.O4]
-
A R E C E I V E MUTE T R A N S M I T DATA 150 OHMS
-
lO.Z[.YO]-
-
B EXT A G C T I M E CONST GROUND
-
C SPEECH PROC D I S A B L E R E C E I V E DATA S H I E L D
C3NN J8 BUS A M I L - S T D - 1 5 5 3 3
D
- TEST E N A B L E GROUND
-
141 . 0 [ 5 . 5 5 ]
-
E GROUND
REF 7 5 1-9667
-
1 7 3 . 7 1 6 . 8 4 1 MAX-
Figure 2-48
2-13112-132
installation
This Figure Deleted
Figure 2-49
Change 3 2-133/2-134
in stallation
152.4[6.00] REF
l13.0[4.'l5] REF
100.3[3.95] REF
87.6[3.q5] REF
33.3[ I . 3 I I R E F
25. I [ .99] REF
/
R 3 . 6 [ . I4]REF 1 4 5.6[ . 2 2 ] REF
1
194.3
[7.65]
MAX
L I
114.8
[4.52]
REF 57.9
t
t
10.2[ .4O]REF
1
Fn
t
E
& 157.5[6.20]REF A
-
101.6
[r.o03
APPROX
L
*
I-
-k
152. q [ 6 . OOIAPPROX
331.2[ I3.041MAX
396.7[ 15.621 MAX

I
i7
178.8[7.OLl]MAX
752-9403-88 I
2- 13512 - 136
installation
NOTES :
I . WEIGHT: 8.9 KG [20.0 POUNDS] M A X .
3. POWER REQUIREMENTS: 28 VDC
4 . THIS I S THE INSTALLATION CONTROL DRAWING
FOR A RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER,
HF-9080, 822-0108-001.
5. f ASTERISK DENOTES LOWER CASE CHARACTERS.
CONNECTOR J I [CONTROL! CONNECTOR J I [CONTROL- CONTD) CONN J2 F I B E R OPTIC RECEIVE

PIN I FUNCTION -P I N FUNCTION
- -
~~
F f TRANSMIT VOICE SHIELD

Gf CARBON M I C INPUT H I
H f CARBON M I C INPUT LO
I t FAULT
E I SPARE J f SPARE
F SPARE K f RT ADDRESS 2
G TUNE I N PROGRESS M I RT ADDRESS 3 CONNECTOR J4 [POWER)
H NORMALISECURE N f RS 232 CONTROL 6
J PTT KEY P t RS 232 MONITOR B PIN FUNCTTDN
K TRANSMIT VOICE 600 OHMS Q f STOP SCAN A t28 VDC INPUT
L TRANSMIT VOICE 150 OHMS R f CALL ALERT 8 t28 VDC INPUT
M TRANSMIT VOICE COMMON Sf L I N K E D I L ~ C t28 VDC INPUT
N RECEIVE DATA COMMON T f SELCAL RECEIVE AUDIO H I 0 t28 VDC INPUT
P AT ADDRESS 0 U f RETRANSMIT E POWER GROUND
R RT ADDRESS I V f TRANSMIT DATA COMMON F POWER GROUND
S RT ADDRESS 4 Wf TRANSMIT DATA 600 OHMS G POWER GROUND
T SYSTEM KEY Xf TRANSMIT DATA SHIELD H POWER GROUND
U TRANSMIT INTERLOCK Y f RECEIVE DATA 150 OHMS J t28 VDC INPUT
V GROUND Z f RECEIVE DATA 600 OHMS K POWER GROUND
W A A RT PARITY
X BB CHANNEL BUSY CONNECTOR JIO BATTERY BACKUP
Y cc SEND/RCV DATA SYNC
Z OD SELCAL RECEIVE AUDIO LO
AX EE TRANSMIT DATA 150 OHMS
6% FF GROUND RS 232 CONTROL A
Cf GG RECEIVE DATA SHIELD RS 232 MONITOR A
Dt HH GROUND
Ef GROUND
-
2-13712-138
installation
NOTES:
I . WEIGHT: 9 . 3 KG [ 2 1 . 0 POUNDS] MAX.
2 . @ DENOTES CENTER OF GRAVITY.
3 . POMER REGUIREMENTS: 28 VDC
4 . TGIS I S THE INSTALLATION CONTRCL DRA'h'ING
HF-9081, 622-0109-001.
5. iy ASTERISK DENOTES LOWER CASE CHARACTERS.
ir
8 8 . 9L3.50 ]REF
152.Ll[5.00] REF
I 1 4 . 6 [ 4 . 5 2 ] REF
I13.O[ii.Ll5] REF
100.3[3.95] REF c
8 7 . 6 [ 3 . 4 5 ] REF
83. 113.271 REF
33.3[1.3l]REF
25. I [ ,991 REF
J9 R 3 . 6 [ , Itl]REF 2 4 - 5.6[ . 2 2 ] REF
-
cob ECTOR
Pih
-
A
6
C
D
J l (CONTROL) - -
CGN
-
PiN
FX
GX
HX
IX
7 FmBil
I "
dl
E JX
F KX
G MX
H NX
J P%
K TRANSMIT
VOICE 600 oii M S GI
L VOICE i 5 0 Oii M S
TRANSMIT RX
M TRANSMIT VOICE COMMCI\i St C t 2 8 VDC INPUT
N RECEIVE DATA COMMON TX 0 t 2 8 VDC INPUT
P RT ADDRESS 0 UX E POWER GROUND
R RT ACLEESS I VX TRANSMIT DATA COMMON F POWER GROUND
S RT AOCiiESS 4 WX TRANSMIT DATA 600 OMAS G PO'IXR GROUND
T SYSTEM K E Y XI TRANSMIT OATA
DATA SHIELD H POWER GROUND
U TRANSMIT INTERLOCK YX RECEIVE DATA 150-&k(S
150 OHMS J t 2 8 VDC INPUT
I 152.4[6.00]APPRCX 4
--
V GROUND ZX RECEIVE DCTA 600 OHMS K POWER GROUND
w RECEIVE VCICE SiiIELD AA RT PARITY
-
X RETCRN TO SCAN 6B CHAhVEL 6USY } ~ 3 3 I . Z [ I 3 . 0 4 ] M A X
Y PROCESSED KEY
2 CCSPLER BYPASS
cc
OD
SEND/RCV DATA SYNC
SELCAL RECEIVE AUDIO LO
10.2[ .SCjREF & 157.5[6.2O]REF ~-1 396.7[15.62] MAX
AX RECEIVE MUTE EE TRANSMIT DATA 150
150 OHMS .
~ OPMS . I78.8[7.OLl]MAX
6X EXT AGC T I M E CONST FF GROUND RS 2 3 2 CONTROL A
CX SPEEC? PRCC DISABLE GG RECEIVE DATA SGIELD RS 2 3 2 MONITOR A
0% m T ENABLE HH GROUND
EX GROUND
- -
752-9404-00 I
In stallation Control Drawing
Figure 2-51
2-13912-140
installation
I.CITES:
I . WEIGHT: 1 0 . 2 KG L23.0 POUNDS] M A X .
3 . PO\I'ER REQUIREMENTS: 2 8 VDC
4 . THiS IS THE INSTALLATION CONTROL DRAWING
HF-9062, 822-01 IO-001.
5 . 3 ASTERISK DENOTES LOWER CASE CHARACTERS.
152.'4[6.00] REF
113.0['4.'45] REF
-
1 0 0 . 3 [ 3 . 9 5 ] REF
8 7 . 6 i 3 . 4 5 1 REF
33.3[1.31]
25. I [ .993
R 3 . 6 [ . I4]REF 4 5 . 6 [ , 2 2 1 REF
c Oh ECTOR
- J I [CONTROL] CONNECTOR J I (CONTROL- CONTD
-
-
PIh FUNCTION -
P I b FUNCTION
A RECEIVE VOICE 600 OHMS F i TRANSMIT VOICE SHIELD
B
C
RECEIVE VOICE 150 OHMS
RECEIVE VOICE COh!%3N
G f CARBON M I C INPUT H I
Hr CARBON MIC INPUT LO
I dl
D NON AUTO Rm 1% FAULT
94.3
7.651
/I
E J i SPARE
F
G
H
K* RT ADDRESS 2
Mi RT ADDRESS 3
N i RS 2 3 2 CONTROL B CONNECTOR JG (POWER) M AI X 4 7
J PX RS 2 3 2 MONITOR 6 P I N FUNCTION
K O f STOP SCAN A t 2 8 VDC INPL1T 9i.6
L R i CALL ALERT B t 2 6 VGC INPUT 101.6
M S i LINKED/LINKING [3.92] 3.0[.121 [ii,Oo]
C t 2 6 VOC INPUT
N T% SELCAL RECEIVE AUDIO H I D t 2 8 VDC INPUT REF REF
i
REF APPROX
2
R RT ADD9ESS I
U i RETRANSMIT
V i TRANSMIT DATA COUMON
E POWER GROUND
F POWER GROUND
I I
S RT ADD9ESS 4 WX TRANSMIT DATA 600 OHdS G POWER GRCUND
T SYSTEY KEY X i TRANSMIT DATA SHIELD H POWER GROUNC
U TRANSMIT INTERLOCK YX RECEIVE DATA 150 OHMS J t28-VGC INPUT
V GROUND
-
2 % RECEIVE DATA 600 OHMS K POWER GRCUNO
W EECE IVE VO I C E S H I E L D A A RT PARITY
14.21 . 5 6 ] REF A
-
X RETURN TO SCAN BB CrlANNEL BUSY 331.2[ 13.OLI]MAX
Y PJCCESSEO KEY cc SEND/RCV DATA SYNC
-
2 COUPLER BYPASS 1O.2[ .4O]REF . l57.5[ 6.20 ]REF
OD SELCAL RECEIVE AUDIO LO m 3 9 6 . 7 [ 15.621 MAX
A i RECEIVE MUTE EE TRANSMIT DATA 150 OHUS 177.81 7. OOIREF
Bi EXT A G C TIME CONST FF GROUW RS 2 3 2 CONTROL A
Ci SPEECH PROC DISABLE GG RECEIVE DATA SHIELD RS 232 MONITOR A 210.8[8.3O]MAX
Di TEST ENABLE HH GROUND
Ei :ROUND
- -
752-9405-001
Figure 2-52
2- 14112-142
installation
152.4[6.00] REF 4 c
I 1 4 . 8 [ 4 . 5 2 ] REF -- m
I13.0[4.45] REF -* C
100.3[3.95] REF -A
c
- -
87.6[3.45] REF
-
A
-
83. I [ 3 - 2 7 ] REF -
A
c
33.3[ I . 3 I I R E F
25. I [ .99] REF
R3.6[. Iq]REF 4 5.6[ .22] REF
8
I t
t-
162. I [ 6.381APPROX
331.21 I3.04lMAX
* 396.7[ 15.621 MAX
752-9406-001
Figure 2-53 (Sheet 1 of 2 )
2- 14312 - 144
installation
NOTES :
I . WEIGHT: 10.7 KG [ 2 4 . 0 POUNDS] MAX.
3 . POWER REQUIREMENTS: 28 VDC
4 . T H I S I S THE INSTALLATION CONTROL DRAWING
HF-9084, 822-0 I I 1-00 I .
5 . X ASTERISK DENOTES LOWER CASE CHARACTERS.
CONNECTOR J I ICONTROL I cob

- ECTOR J I (CONTROL- CONTD
-PIN FUNCTION -
PIb FUNCTION
~~
A RECEIVE VOICE 600 OHMS Ff TRANSMIT VOICE SHIELD

8 RECEIVE VOICE 150 OHMS Gf CARBON M I C INPUT H I CONN J6 PWR AMPL INPUT/OUTPUT
C RECEIVE VOICE COMMON Hf CARBON M I C INPUT LO
D NON AUTO RESP If .FAULT
E SPARE Jf SPARE
F SPARE Kf RT ADDRESS 2
3 CONN J9 BUS 8 MIL-STD-15538
G TUNE IN PROGRESS Mf
H NORMAL/SECURE Nt RS 2 3 2 CONTROL 8
J PTT KEY Pt RS 2 3 2 MONITOR 8 P I N FUNCTION
K TRANSMIT VOICE 600 OHMS Qt STOP SCAN A t 2 8 VDC INPUT
L TRANSMIT VOICE 150 OHMS Rf CALL ALERT t 2 8 VDC INPUT
M TRANSMIT VOICE COMMON Sf L I N K E D I L I N K ING t28 VDC INPUT
N RECEIVE DATA COMMON Tf SELCAL RECEIVE AUDIO H I t 2 8 VDC INPUT
P RT ADDRESS 0 Uf RETRANSMIT POWER GROUND
R RT ADDRESS I V t TRANSMIT DATA COMMON POWER GROUND
S RT ADDRESS 4 Wf TRANSMIT DATA 600 OHMS POWER GROUND
T SYSTEM KEY Xf TRANSMIT DATA SHIELD POWER GROUND
U TRANSMIT INTERLOCK
~ ~_._ Yf RECEIVE DATA 150 OHMS t28 VDC INPUT
V GROUND Zt RECEIVE DATA 600 OHMS POWER GROUND
W RECEIVE VOICE SHIELD AA RT PARITY
X RETURN TO SCAN 88 CHANNEL B u s y CONNECTOR JIO (BATTERY BACKUP)
Y PROCESSED KEY cc SEND/RCV DATA SYNC A BACKUP VCC
Z COUPLER BYPASS DD SELCAL RECEIVE AUDIO LO
A t RECEIVE MUTE EE TRANSMIT DATA 150 OHMS 8 GROUND
8% EXT AGC TIME CONST FF GROUND C RS 232 CONTROL A
C t SPEECH PROC DISABLE GG RECEIVE DATA SHIELD D RS 232 MONITOR A
D t TEST ENABLE HH GROUND
E f ;ROUND
-
2-14512-146
I Section 3 Operation
SECTION 3
OPERATION
3.1 GENERAL
This section provides operation and checkout procedures for HF-9000 systems equipped with Radio Set
Control HF-9010 or Radio Set Control HF-9012. For HF-9000 systems operating from external control
buses (Aeronautical Radio, Inc. (ARINC) 429 o r MIL-STD-l553B), consult the aircraft manual. Operation
of Radio Set Control HF-9010 and Radio Set Control HF-9012 is identical when controlling HF-9000
systems not having automatic link establishment (ALE) capability, although some switches and controls
have different names. Radio Set Control HF-9012 is required for HF-9000 systems having ALE capability.
WARNING
WARNING
insulated feed through, or the antenna itself while the microphone is keyed or while the
HF-9000 system is in transmit self-test. Serious RF burns can result from direct contact
with the above items when the HF-9000 system is transmitting.
WARNING
If the HF-9000 system is equipped with an ALE control processor, it sounds (transmits a
short tone burst) and responds to ALE calls automatically (without operator intervention).
Anytime local regulations prohibit hf emissions, ensure HF-9000 system is set for silent
operation or is in standby mode.
CAUTION
During operation or built-in test (BIT), the HF-9000 system may detect an abnormal
condition which requires operator attention but does not inhibit use of the HF-9000 system.
The radio set control displays MSG 3040 (high vswr) for a defective antenna system,
MSG 3020 for antenna coupler high temperature, or MSG 5016 for power amplifier high
temperature. An MSG 3020 or MSG 5016 condition causes HF-9000 system performance
degradation if not corrected.
3.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

All of the HF-9000 system operating controls and displays are located on Radio Set Control HF-9010 or
Radio Set Control HF-9012. Radio Set Control HF-9010 controls and indicators are shown in figure 3-1
and described in table 3-1. Radio Set Control HF-9012 controls and indicators are shown in figure 3-2 and
described in table 3-2.
Change 3 3-1
operation
+
VALU
I
12 11 10 9 0 7 6
Radio Set Control HF-9010, Controls and Indicators

Figure 3-1
Table 3-1. Radio Set Control HF-9010, Controls and Indicators

INDEX CONTROL OR FUNCTION
NO [NDI CAT0R
1 Cursor I'he cursor is a segmented line display that is positioned (using the CUR-
SOR control) under the field (OPR, MODE, FREQKHAN, and PWR) t o be
:hanged. After selecting the desired function, the value displayed may be
:hanged (incremented or decremented) by rotating the appropriate control
left or right. Use the CHAN or VALUE control for CHN mode and VALUE
:ontrol for all other functions.
3-2
operation
Table 3-1. Radio Set Control HF-9010, Controls and Indicators (Cont)
NDEX 2ONTROL OR FUNCTION
(0 NDICATOR
IPR field I'hree alphanumeric characters display the HF-9000 system operating mode
selected by the VALUE control. The HF-9000 system makes available the
iperating modes as follows:
M A N - Manual mode; discrete frequency
2HN - Channel mode; user-programmed preset channel
3CN - Scan mode; user-programmed preset channel receive scan
MAR - Maritime mode; preprogrammed preset channel
I'ST - Test mode; BIT
PGM - Program mode; user-programmable preset channel program
EMR - Emergency mode; preprogrammed preset channel
EXT - External mode; HF-9000 system control
3BY - Standby mode
FLT (fault) or MSG (message) is displayed if a fault or abnormal condition
iccurs in the HF-9000 system. Momentarily displays VOL (volume) or SQL
:squelch) when either the VOL or SQL control setting is changed. The VOL
ir SQL level is displayed at the same time in the FREQ/CHAN field
display.
VIODE field Two alphanumeric characters display the HF-9000 system RF emission
mode selected by the VALUE control. The HF-9000 system makes available
the following RF emission types.
AM - Amplitude modulation equivalent

CW - Continuous wave
LD - Lower sideband data
LV - Lower sideband voice
UD - Upper sideband data
LTV - Upper sideband voice
If a fault or message occurs in the HF-9000 system, MODE field characters

indicate the HF-9000 system unit in which the fault or abnormal condition
occurred. MODE field displays CU for antenna coupler, FL for bandpass
filter, FO for fiber-optic system, R for radio set control, RT for
receiver-transmitter, and - - (two blanks) for a n external system malfunc-
tion.
FREQ/CHAN Up t o six numeric characters display frequency data and channel number
'leld for normal operation of unit, module/circuit card failure during the TST
mode. Frequency is changed (incremented or decremented) using the
VALUE control and is displayed in all six digits plus a decimal point.
Channel selection is accomplished with the CHAN or VALUE control.
3-3
operation
Table 3-1. Radio Set Control HF-9010, Controls and Indicators (Cont)
NO INDICATOR
4 (Cont) When selecting user-programmed preset channel operation, when the OPR
Seld displays CHN and the CHAN control is rotated, the channel number is
lisplayed for 3 seconds. The receive RF emission type and frequency are
;hen displayed. Key the microphone and press the FREQ/LD switch t o
display the transmit R F emission type and frequency. Press the FREQLD
switch to cause the channel number and frequency display cycle to be
repeated. When the OPR field displays EMR or MAR, only the channel
lumber is displayed in the FREQKHAN field. To view the receive frequen-
:y, press the FREQ/LD switch. To view the transmit frequency, key the
microphone while pressing the FREQ/LD switch. The FREWCHAN field
also displays volume level (0 thru 7) and squelch level (0 thru 3) when the
respective VOL and SQL control settings are changed.
-3 PWR field 13-level bar indicator for selectable output power levels (bottom bar for low
power, bottom two bars for medium power, and all three bars for high
Dower). The output power level is selected by the VALUE control.
6 VALUE control rhis control increments o r decrements the function (OPR, MODE, FREQ/
C)HAN, or PWR) selected by the cursor.
7 CURSOR Phis control moves the cursor left o r right for selecting the field to be
control :hanged.
s FREQLD When in PGM mode, press this switch to load desired receive-transmit
switch 3mission type, frequency, and channel data into receiver-transmitter
nonvolatile memory for the 99 user-programmable preset channels for
simplex operation. For half-duplex operation, the FREQ/LD switch and
microphone key must be pressed t o load transmit data. By pressing this
switch, the channel and frequency display recycle in CHN mode, and the
2mergency (receive and transmit) or maritime (receive) frequency are
iisplayed when operating in EMR or MAR mode. To view the maritime
transmit frequency, press this switch while keying the microphone. When in
rST mode and if the HF-9000 system has failed, press this switch t o run
Lhrough a sequence of fault diagnostic codes.
9 CHAN control rhis control provides selection of all maritime and emergency
preprogrammed preset channels and user-programmed preset channels.
Rotating the CHAN control increments or decrements the channels by one,
regardless of where the cursor is positioned. To change channels by a large
amount, position the cursor under the channel digit t o be changed, then
rotate the VALUE control.
10 DSBL switch Press this switch t o disable the squelch circuit, enabling the user t o deter-
mine if there is traffic on the selected frequency without adjusting the SQL
:ontrol. Press this switch in PGM mode to erase the currently selected
2hannel and set the channel frequency t o zero. In CHAN mode, the erased
:hannel number is not displayed.
3-4
operation
Table 3-1. Radio Set HF-9010, Controls and Indicators (Cont)

NO INDICATOR
11 SQL control The squelch control is set to squelch (silence) undesired background noise
when voice communication is not present. The proper squelch setting is
made by rotating the SQL control counterclockwise to disable (SQL 0) and
then clockwise one click (SQL 1). The receiver squelches after a short delay.
If intermittent noise persists, advance the SQL control clockwise one more
click (SQL 2). If intermittent noise persists, advance the SQL control one
more click clockwise (SQL 3). The SQL control has no effect when in TST,
PGM, EXT, and SBY modes. The squelch level is momentarily displayed in
the FREQ/CHAN field after each change of the SQL control.
12 VOL control The volume control adjusts the audio level as desired by the user. Clockwise
rotation increases volume; counterclockwise rotation decreases volume. The
volume level is momentarily displayed in the FREQ/CHAN field after each
change of the VOL control.
Radio Set Control HF-9012, Controls and Indicators

Figure 3-2
Change 3 3-5
operation
Table 3-2. Radio Set HF-9012, Controls and Indicators

NO INDICATOR
1 Cursor The cursor is a segmented line display that is positioned (using CURSOR
control) under the field (OPR, MODE, INFO, and PWR) to be changed. After
selecting the desired field, the value displayed may be changed (incre-
mented or decremented) from the current value by rotating the appropriate
control left or right. Use the ADR/CHAN o r VALUE control for CHN mode
and VALUE control for all other functions.
2 OPR field Three alphanumeric characters display the HF-9000 system operating mode
selected by the VALUE control. The HF-9000 system makes available the
operating modes as follows:
ALE — ALE mode; indicates ALE operation is selected

CHN — Channel mode; allows selection of user-programmed channels
EMR — Emergency mode; allows selection of preprogrammed emergency
channels
EXT — External mode; selects external HF-9000 system control
LRN — Learn mode; data is learned when CALLJLD switch is pressed
MAN — Manual mode; allows selection of a discreet frequency and mode
MAR — Maritime mode; allows selection of built-in maritime channels
PGA — Program mode; allows ALE self-addresses to be programmed
PGM — Program mode; allows channels to be programmed
SBY — Standby mode
SCN — Scan mode; allows scanning (reception) of user-programmed
channels
TST — Test mode; selects BIT
ZER — Zeroize mode; deletes keys when CALLLD switch is pressed
3 MODE field FLT (fault) or MSG (message) is displayed if a fault or abnormal condition
occurs in the HF-9000 system. Momentarily displays VOL (volume) or SQL
(squelch) when either the VOL or SQL control setting is changed. The VOL
or SQL level is displayed at the same time in the INFO field display.
Two alphanumeric characters display the HF-9000 system RF emission type

selected by the VALUE control or HF-9000 system state in ALE mode. The
HF-9000 system makes available the RF emission types and system states
as follows:
RF EMISSION TYPES SYSTEM STATES
AM — Amplitude modulation LK — Link

equivalent SD — Sound mode; used with
CW — Continuous wave CALIJLD switch to force ALE
LD — Lower sideband data sounding
LV — Lower sideband voice CL — Indicates a call attempt is in
UD — Upper sideband data process (CALL/LD switch has
UV — Upper sideband voice been pressed)
3-6 Change 3
operation
Table 3-2. Radio Set HF-9012, Controls and Indicators (cont)

NO INDICATOR
3 (Cont) If a fault or message occurs in the HF-9000 system, MODE field characters
indicate the HF-9000 system unit in which the fault or abnormal condition
occurred. MODE field displays CU for antenna coupler, FL for bandpass filter,
FO for fiber-optic system, R for radio set control, RT for
receiver-transmitter, and - - (two blanks) for an external HF-9000 system
malfunction.
4 INFO field The INFO field displays ALE addresses, scan lists, channel number,
frequency data, volume, or squelch levels. The frequency is displayed using
all six digits and a decimal point. The frequency may be changed in manual
mode (MAN) or program mode (PGM) using the CURSOR and VALUE
controls. The volume levels (0 thru 7) and squelch level (0 thru 3) are dis-
played in the INFO field when the respective (VOL or SQL control) settings
are changed. The INFO field displays unit, module/circuit card failure
during BIT.
In ALE mode (OPR field displays ALE), the ALE address is displayed using
all six digits of the INFO field. Preprogrammed addresses are selected by
rotating the ADR/CHAN control. The CURSOR and VALUE controls are used
to enter addresses not programmed into memory. The scan list number is
displayed at the far right of the INFO field. To change the scan list number,
position the cursor under the scan list number and then use the VALUE
control to select desired scan list. The INFO field displays S-D when
sounding operation is selected. Normally in ALE mode, the audio is gated
off until a link is established to reduce operator fatigue. However, if the
INFO field displays M OFF, the audio is enabled. Change the squelch
setting to squelch the audio.
In channel mode (OPR field displays CHN), rotate the ADR/CHAN control to
display the channel number for 3 seconds. After the channel number is no
longer displayed, the receive RF emission mode and frequency are displayed
in MODE and INFO fields respectively. Key the microphone and press the
DSPL switch to view the transmit RF emission mode and frequency. Press the
CALL/LD switch to repeat the channel number and frequency display cycle.
In emergency or maritime mode, (OPR field displays EMR or MAR), only

the channel number is displayed in the INFO field. Press the DSPL switch
to view the receive frequency. Key the microphone and press the DSPL
switch to view the transmit frequency.
Information Deleted
Change 3 3-7
operation

NO INDICATOR
5 PWR field The PWR field includes a silent (SIL) indicator and a 3-level bar indicator
that displays the selected RF output power (bottom bar for low power, bot-
tom two bars for medium power, and all three bars for high power). The
SIL indicator indicates no RF emissions are allowed in any mode. The output
power level is selected by the VALUE control.
WARNING
If the HF-9000 system is equipped with an ALE control processor, it

sounds (transmits a short tone burst) and responds to ALE calls
automatically (without operator intervention). Anytime local regula-
tions prohibit hf emissions, ensure the HF-9000 system is set for
silent operation or is in standby mode..
6 VALUE This control increments or decrements the field (OPR, MODE, INFO, or
control PWR) selected by the cursor.
7 CURSOR The CURSOR control moves the cursor left or right to select the field to be
control changed.
8 CALL/LD Press the CALL/LD switch when an ALE address is displayed in the INFO
switch field to place a call to the selected address. Press the CALL/LD switch while
a call is in process to abort the call. Press the CALL/LD switch after a link
is established to terminate the link.
For simplex operation, press the CALLLD switch when PGM is displayed
in the OPR field to load the desired receive-transmit emission mode,
frequency, and channel data into the receiver-transmitter’s nonvolatile
memory for the 99 user-programmable channels.
For half-duplex operation, the CALL/LD switch and microphone key must
both be pressed to load transmit data.
In PGM mode, press this switch to load desired receive-transmit emission

type, frequency, and channel data into receiver-transmitter’s nonvolatile
memory for the 99 user-programmable preset channels for simplex opera-
tion.
9 ADR/CHAN The ADR/CHAN control provides selection of all preprogrammed ALE

control addresses or channels (user-programmed, maritime, emergency). Rotate the
ADR/CHAN control to sequentially change (increment or decrement) the
current address or channel number regardless of the cursor position.
10 DSPL switch In ALE mode (OPR field displays ALE), press the DSPL switch once to
display the ALE channels being scanned in the INFO field. Press the switch
a second time to display the frequency and emission mode (of the scanned
channels) to be displayed in the INFO and MODE fields.
3-8 Change 3
operation

NO INDICATOR
10 In channel mode (OPR field displays CHN), press the DSPL switch once to
(Cont) display the frequency and emission mode of the current channel in the
INFO and MODE fields. Press the switch a second time to display the
currently-selected ALE address and place the radio in channel ALE mode.
Use the SELECT control t o change the address, or use the CURSOR control
to position the cursor in the INFO field, then use the VALUE control to
select the desired channel.
In manual mode (OPR field displays MAN), press the DSPL switch once to
display the currently-selected ALE address in the INFO field and place the
radio in manual ALE mode. Use the ADR/CHAN control t o change the
address, or position the cursor in the INFO field and then use the VALUE
control to select the desired address.
NOTE
In ALE, channel, or manual mode, press the DSPL switch to return
to the initial displays.
In test mode (OPR field displays TST), press DSPL switch t o sequence
through any existing HF-9000 system fault diagnostic codes.
In scan mode (OPR field displays SCN), press DSPL switch t o display
emission modes and frequencies of scanned channels.
In emergency or maritime mode (OPR field displays EMR or MAR), press

DSPL switch to display frequency and emission mode of selected channel.
In program mode (OPR field displays PGM), press DSPL switch to erase the
selected preset channel.
11 SQL control The squelch control is set to squelch (silence) undesired background noise
when voice communication is not present. The proper squelch setting is
made by rotating the SQL control counterclockwise to disable (SQL 0) and
then clockwise one click (SQL 1). The receiver squelches after a short delay.
If intermittent noise persists, advance the SQL control clockwise one more
click (SQL 2). If intermittent noise persists, again advance the SQL control
one more click clockwise (SQL 3). The SQL control has no effect when in
TST, PGM, EXT, or SBY mode. The squelch level is momentarily displayed
in the INFO field after each change of the SQL control.
12 VOL control The volume control adjusts the audio level as desired by the user. Clockwise
rotation increases volume; counterclockwise rotation decreases volume. The
volume level is momentarily displayed in the INFO field after each change
of the VOL control.
Change 3 3-9
operation
3.3 RADIO SET CONTROL HF-9010 OPERATING PROCEDURES
3.3.1 General
The following operating procedures are divided into the nine HF-9000 system operating modes: self-test
(paragraph 3.3.3); manual mode (paragraph 3.3.4); program mode (paragraph 3.3.5); channel mode
(paragraph 3.3.6); emergency mode (paragraph 3.3.7); scan mode (paragraph 3.3.8); standby mode
(paragraph 3.3.9); maritime mode (paragraph 3.3.10); and external mode (pa.ragraph 3.3.11).
During operation or BIT, the HF-9000 system may detect an abnormal condition which
requires operator attention but does not inhibit use of the HF-9000 system. The radio set
control displays MSG 3040 (high vswr) for a defective antenna system, MSG 3020 for
antenna coupler high temperature, or MSG 5016 for power amplifier high temperature. An
MSG 3020 or MSG 5016 condition causes HF-9000 system performance degradation if not
corrected.
3.3.2 Preliminary Procedures
NOTE
The HF-9000 system is fully operational when HF-9000 system circuit breakers are
engaged on the aircraft or when primary power is applied to the test setup in a shop
situation.
Before proceeding with actual operation of the HF-9000 system, check all cable connectors t o be sure of
proper mating, and be sure an antenna is connected to the associated antenna coupler.
3.3.3 Self-Test Mode
HF-9000 system self-test can be initiated manually from the radio set control by selecting TST OPR mode.
Upon selection of TST mode, the self-test command is transmitted by the fiber-optic bus t o all units in the
HF-9000 system. Each unit then conducts its individual self-test routine and interacts with the other units
t o test the interface between the specific units. Self-test results are reported to the receiver-transmitter,
which then sends the test results t o the radio set control t o be displayed. Upon TST initiation, only the
receive self-tests are conducted, after which the transmit self-tests may be initiated. Procedures are
provided for initiating both self-tests.
3.3.3.1 Receive Self-Test
Initiate receive self-tests as follows:
a. Use CURSOR control t o position the cursor in OPR field. Use VALUE control to select TST.
NOTE
Self-test cannot be stopped after OPR displays TST for 3 seconds or more. Rotating a
control after self-test has begun may cause a fault t o be momentarily displayed but does
not affect final self-test results.
b. After a 3-second delay, MODE displays RT (receiver-transmitter self-test). The receiver-transmitter

test takes approximately 10 seconds.
3-10
operation
c. On completion of receiver-transmitter test, MODE displays CU (antenna coupler self-test). The

antenna coupler test takes approximately 3 seconds.
d. On completion of antenna coupler test, MODE displays R (radio set control self-test). The radio set
control test takes approximately 2 seconds.
e. On completion of the radio set control test, the radio set control display reads as follows:
1. If all units pass receive self-test, the OPR field displays TST and MODE field displays OK Proceed
t o transmit self-test, paragraph 3.3.3.2.
2. If one or more units fail receive self-test, the OPR field displays either FLT or MSG and MODE
field displays the code for suspected unit (CU for antenna coupler, FL for bandpass filter, FO for
fiber optics, R for radio set control, RT for receiver-transmitter, or - - (two blanks) for external
failure). To determine if the suspected unit has more than one fault, or if more than one unit has
failed, press the FREQLD switch t o sequence through all suspected faults. Refer t o the mainte-
nance section for fault code definitions. To continue with transmit self-test, proceed t o trans-
mit-only self-te st, paragraph 3.3.3.3.
NOTE
During normal operation, the OPR field may display TST and MODE field may display FO
(fiber optic). This is an indication that the fiber-optic control link has failed. Refer t o
section 5 for fiber-optic troubleshooting procedures.
3.3.3.2 Transmit Self-Test
Transmit self-test of the HF-9000 system tests the transmit path after a successful receive self-test (TST
OK displayed). Initiate transmit self-test as follows:
Be sure all personnel are clear of the hf antenna when performing transmit self-test. Do
not touch the RF output terminal on the antenna coupler, the antenna lead-in wire, the
insulated feedthrough, or the antenna itself while the HF-9000 system is in transmit
self-test. Serious RF burns can result from direct contact with the above items when the
HF-9000 system is transmitting.
a. Momentarily key the microphone or press the push-to-talk (ptt) key.

b. The OPR field continues t o display TST and MODE field displays TX for approximately 1 second.
c. When the antenna coupler test starts, MODE field displays CU. The antenna coupler test takes
approximately 7 seconds.
NOTE
The radio set control is tested during receive self-test and is not retested.
d. On completion of antenna coupler test, the radio set control display reads as follows:
1. If all units pass transmit self-test, the OPR field displays TST and MODE field displays OK
2. If one or more units fail transmit self-test, the OPR field displays either FLT or MSG and MODE
field displays the suspected unit (CU, FL, FO, RT, or - - (two blanks)). To determine if the
suspected unit has more than one fault, or if more than one unit has failed, press the FREQ/LD
switch to sequence through all detected faults. Refer to the maintenance section for fault code
definitions.
3-11
operation
3.3.3.3 Transmit-Only Self-Test
Use the transmit-only self-test if a unit fails receive self-test or if it is desired t o bypass the receive
self-test. Initiate transmit-only self-test as follows:
a. Use CURSOR control to position the cursor in OPR field. Use VALUE control t o select PGM.
b. Key microphone or press the ptt key and then rotate VALUE control until OPR field displays TST.
c. After approximately 2 seconds, MODE displays TX t o indicate transmit self-test has been initiated.
d. After approximately 1 second, MODE displays CU. The antenna coupler test takes approximately 7
seconds.
e. On completion of antenna coupler test, the radio set control display reads a s follows:
1. If all units pass transmit-only self-test, OPR displays TST and MODE displays OK.
2. If one or more of the units fail transmit-only self-test, OPR displays FLT or MSG and MODE
displays suspected unit (CU, FL, FO, RT, or - - (two blanks)). To determine if the suspected unit
h a s more than one fault, or if more than one unit has failed, press the FREQLD switch t o
sequence through all detected faults. Refer t o the maintenance section for fault code definitions.
f. Unkey the HF-9000 system.
3.3.4 Manual Mode
Manual mode is for simplex operation only (same transmit and receive frequency). The following
paragraphs detail voice, data, and CW communication in manual mode.
1 WARNING 1
insulated feedthrough, or the antenna itself while the microphone is keyed (after the
tuning cycle is complete). Serious RF burns can result from direct contact with the above
items when the HF-9000 system is transmitting.
Perform manual mode operation as follows:
a. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in OPR field and then rotate VALUE control until MAN is
displayed.
b. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in MODE field and then rotate VALUE control until desired
mode (W,LV, AM, LD, UD, or CW) is displayed.
c. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in FREQ/CHAN field (under frequency digit t o be changed).
Rotate VALUE control to change FREQ/CHAN t o desired frequency. Repeat as necessary for each
frequency digit to be changed.
d. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in PWR field. Rotate VALUE control to select desired output
power level (bottom bar for low power, bottom two bars for medium power, all three bars for high
power).
3-12
operation
e. If squelch operation is desired, rotate SQL control counterclockwise t o disable (SQL 0) and then rotate
SQL control clockwise one click (SQL 1). Receiver squelches after a short delay. If intermittent noise
persists, advance SQL control clockwise one more click (SQL 2). If intermittent noise persists, again
advance SQL control one more click clockwise (SQL 3).
NOTE
Setting the squelch control t o o far clockwise (SQL 3) can result in blocking out weak
signals. At times (depending on prevailing conditions), it may be necessary t o leave the
squelch control in the counterclockwise position (SQL 0) t o maintain satisfactory reception.
To avoid missed communications, always operate the squelch at the minimum level
providing satisfactory communications under current propagation conditions. There is no
sidetone or squelch control in data mode.
f. Momentarily key the microphone t o tune the antenna coupler. The antenna coupler tunes automatical-
ly. A steady 1000-Hz tune tone is heard in the headset or speaker during the tune cycle. The average
tune cycle is approximately 30 milliseconds (ms), provided the frequency is already tuned and tuning
data is already stored in memory. Automatic tuning t o a new frequency takes nominally less than 1
second. At completion of the tune cycle, the steady tune tone disappears.
NOTE
If a fault occurs during the tune cycle, the steady tune tone changes t o a beeping tone and
the radio set control displays FLT CU 3010. Change any field on the radio set control and
return it t o the desired setting to clear a fault. Momentarily key the microphone to attempt
another tune cycle. If fault condition persists, refer t o fault clearing procedure in paragraph
3.3.12.
g. If the preceding steps are completed with no fault indications, communication may begin.
NOTE
To avoid poor reception and missed calls in single system installations, always key the
microphone after selecting a new frequency to initiate an antenna coupler tune cycle.
NOTE
The presence of sidetone in the headset or speaker during transmit operation indicates
transmitter output. A lack of sidetone indicates the absence of a transmit signal.
h. Adjust VOL control for desired audio level.
3.3.5 Program Mode
PGM mode is used for loading channel data into one or more of the 99 user-programmable preset channels
available. Program either simplex or half-duplex operation as follows:
a. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in OPR field and then rotate VALUE control until PGM is
displayed.
b. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in MODE field and then rotate VALUE control t o display
desired RF emission type (UV, LV, UD, LD, AM, or CW).
C. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in rightmost digits of FREQKHAN field. Rotate VALUE or
CHAN control t o display desired channel.
3-13
operation
NOTE
User-programmed preset channels 1 through 99 are displayed in the second and third
digits from the right. The CHAN control increments or decrements the channel number by
one for each click without regard t o cursor setting. The VALUE control is only effective
with the proper cursor setting. The selected channel number display disappears after 3
seconds, at which time the desired frequency may be selected.
d. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in FREQKHAN field (under frequency digit t o be changed).
Rotate VALUE control t o display desired frequency. Repeat as required for each frequency digit t o be
changed.
e. For simplex operation (same transmit and receive frequencies), press FREQ/LD switch t o load data.
f. For half-duplex operation (different transmit and receive frequencies), press FREQ/LD switch t o load
receive frequency first. Then, while continuously keying microphone, use CURSOR and VALUE control
t o select desired RF emission type and transmit frequency. Finally, press FREQLD switch to load
transmit frequency. Release microphone key.
NOTE
Transmitter does not key and no signal is transmitted when HF-9000 system is in PGM
mode.
NOTE
If additional preset channels are t o be programmed, repeat steps b through f.
NOTE
To erase a user-programmed preset channel frequency, select PGM in OPR field, select
preset channel t o be erased, and press DSBL (squelch disable) switch (refer t o paragraph
3.3.13).
3.3.6 Channel Mode
If the selected user-programmed preset channel is already programmed for half-duplex operation (separate
frequency for transmit and receive) or simplex operation (same frequency for transmit and receive), radio
set control MODE displays RF emission type and FREQEHAN displays channel number of selected
user-programmed preset channel. M e r approximately 3 seconds, preset channel number selected
disappears and FREQ/CHAN displays preset frequency. Unprogrammed channels are not displayed.
Perform user-programmed preset channel operation as follows:
.a. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in OPR field then rotate VALUE control to display CHN.
b. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in rightmost digits of FREQ/CHAN field (under channel digit
t o be changed). Rotate CHAN or VALUE control t o display the desired preset channel.
NOTE
To observe preset transmit frequency for half-duplex operation, press FREQ/LD switch
while keying microphone.
c. Voice, data, and CW communications are as previously discussed for manual operation.
3- 14
operation
NOTE
microphone after selecting a new preset channel t o initiate an antenna coupler tune cycle.
3.3.7 Emergency Mode
International distress frequencies of 2.1820, 4.1250, 6.2150, 8.2910, 12.2900, and 16.4200 MHz are
preprogrammed into receiver-transmitter nonvolatile memory. These six emergency frequencies are
displayed on the radio set control as EMRl (2182 kHz), EMR2 (4125 kHz), EMR3 (6215 kHz), EMR4
(8291 kHz), EMR5 (12290 kHz), and EMR6 (16420 kHz). Perform emergency operation as follows:
a. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in OPR field and then rotate VALUE control to display EMR.
b. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in rightmost digit of FREQ/CHAN field (under digit t o be
changed). Rotate CHAN or VALUE control t o select desired emergency channel.
c. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in PWR field and then rotate VALUE control t o select
maximum output power (all three bars).
NOTE
microphone after selecting an emergency channel t o initiate an antenna coupler tune cycle.
d. Transmit emergency communication.
3.3.8 Scan Mode
Scan mode provides receiver scanning of user-programmed preset channels 1 through 10. Each of the first
10 channels is scanned for traffic with a dwell time of 0.5 second on each channel. The FREQ/CHAN
displays the channel number being scanned. Perform scan mode operation as follows:
a. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in OPR field and then rotate VALUE control to display SCN.
b. Rotate SQL control counterclockwise to disable (SQL 0) and then clockwise one click (SQL 1).Receiver
squelches and starts scanning after a short delay. If intermittent stop-scan operation occurs, advance
SQL control clockwise one more click (SQL 2). If intermittent stop-scan operation still occurs, again
advance SQL control clockwise one more click (SQL 3).
NOTE
Squelch settings control scan operation only if receiver-transmitter connector J1-q (stop
scan) is connected t o J1-u (retransmit). Connecting these two pins causes the receiver t o
stop scanning when voice communication is detected on the channel.
c. Adjust VOL control for desired audio level.
3.3.9 Standby Mode
To enter standby mode, muting HF-9000 system audio, use the CURSOR control t o position the cursor in
the OPR field and then rotate the VALUE control to display SBY.
3-15
operation
3.3.10 Maritime Mode
All of the 249 International Telecommunication Union (ITU) public correspondence channels (receive and
transmit frequencies plus RF emission type) in the maritime radiotelephone network are preprogrammed
into receiver-transmitter nonvolatile memory. The 249 ITU channels operate half duplex in the UV RF
emission type. Perform maritime mode operation as follows:
a. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in OPR field and then rotate VALUE control t o display MAR.
b. Refer t o the HF-9000 High-Frequency Communications System Operator’s Manual, part number
523-0774344, for a listing of preprogrammed ITU maritime radiotelephone channels.
C. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in rightmost digits of FREQ/CHAN field (under channel digit
to be changed). Rotate CHAN or VALUE control t o display desired ITU channel.
d. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in PWR field and then rotate VALUE control to select desired
output power level (bottom bar for low power, bottom two bars for medium power, all three bars for
high power).
e. If squelch operation is desired, rotate SQL control counterclockwise to disable (SQL 0) and then
clockwise one click (SQL 1).Receiver squelches after a short delay. If intermittent noise persists,
advance SQL control clockwise one more click (SQL 2). If intermittent noise persists, again advance
SQL control one more click clockwise (SQL 3).
f. Momentarily key microphone t o tune antenna coupler. Antenna coupler tunes automatically. A steady
1000-Hz tune tone is heard in headset or speaker during tune cycle. Average tune cycle time is
approximately 30 ms if channel is already tuned. Automatic tuning of a new frequency takes
nominally less than 1 second. After completion of tune cycle, steady tune tone disappears.
NOTE
return it t o the desired setting t o clear a fault. Momentarily key the microphone t o attempt
another tune cycle. If a fault condition persists, refer t o fault clearing procedure in
paragraph 3.3.12.
€5 If the previous steps are completed with no fault indications, voice transmissions may be made using
the microphone. The presence of sidetone in the headset or speaker during transmit operation
indicates transmitter output. A lack of sidetone indicates the absence of a transmit signal.
NOTE
In maritime operation, only a selected ITU channel is displayed in radio set control
FREQKHAN field. To observe receive frequency, press FREQLD switch. To observe
transmit frequency, press FREQ/LD switch while keying microphone. After approximately
3 seconds, frequency disappears and previously selected ITU channel number reappears in
radio set control FREQ/CHAN field.
NOTE
To avoid poor reception or missed calls, always momentarily key the microphone aRer
selecting a new ITU channel t o initiate antenna coupler tune cycle.
3.3.1 1 External Mode
The external mode of operation is reserved for future HF-9000 system operational configurations. It is
currently not used.
3-16
operation
3.3.12 Fault Clearing Procedure
When the antenna coupler tune cycle is completed, the steady 1000-Hz tune tone in the headset or speaker
stops. If the tune cycle is not completed within approximately 6 seconds (nominally 1 second for a new
frequency or 30 ms for a previously tuned preset channel), the steady tune tone begins to beep and the
radio set control OPR field displays FLT CU 3010. The beeping 1000-Hz tune tone is enabled by an input
from the antenna coupler, indicating that it is unable to complete its tune cycle. If no RF is generated, the
tune sequence stops.
To clear the fault, change any field on the radio set control and reset to desired setting. Momentarily key the
microphone to attempt another tune cycle. The steady 1000-Hz tune tone should again be present and then
disappear at the end of the tune cycle. If the beeping tone continues, repeat the clearing procedure
and then perform a transmit self-test or try operation on a different frequency.
3.3.13 User-Programmed Preset Channel Erase or Change
User-programmed preset channels are the only preset channels that may be changed or cleared from
receiver-transmitter nonvolatile memory. Erase or change user-programmed preset channels as follows:
a. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in OPR field and then rotate VALUE control to display PGM.
b. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in rightmost digits of FREQ/CHAN field and then rotate
CHAN or VALUE control to display desired channel for erasure or change. Proceed to step c to change
preset frequency/frequencies or step f to erase user-programmed preset channel
c. After 3 seconds, FREQ/CHAN displays receive and transmit frequency (simplex) or receive frequency
(half duplex).
d. For simplex, use cursor and VALUE control to select new frequency. Press FREQLD switch.
e. For half duplex, receive frequency programming is the same as for simplex. For transmit frequency,
press and hold ptt key while using CURSOR and VALUE controls to select new transmit frequency.
Press FREQ/LD switch. Release ptt key.
f. For erasure, after selecting channel to be erased, press DSBL (squelch disable) switch.
3.4 RADIO SET CONTROL HF-9012 OPERATING PROCEDURES
3.4.1 General
The following operating procedures are divided into the 12 operating modes of the HF-9000 system: self-
test mode (paragraph 3.4.3); automatic ALE mode (paragraph 3.4.4); manual ALE mode (paragraph 3.4.5);
manual mode (paragraph 3.4.6); program mode (paragraph 3.4.7); channel mode (paragraph 3.4.8);
emergency mode (paragraph 3.4.9); scan mode (paragraph 3.4.10); standby mode (paragraph 3.4.11);
maritime mode (paragraph 3.4.12); and external mode (paragraph 3.4.13).
CAUTION
During operation or BIT, the HF-9000 system may detect an abnormal condition which
requires operator attention but does not inhibit use of the HF-9000 system. The radio set
control displays MSG 3040 (high vswr) for a defective antenna system, MSG 3020 for
antenna coupler high temperature, or MSG 5016 for power amplifier high temperature. An
MSG 3020 or MSG 5016 condition causes HF-9000 system performance degradation if not
corrected.
Change 3 3-17
operation
NOTE
The HF-9000 system is operational when HF-9000 system circuit breakers are engaged on
the aircraft or when primary power is applied t o the test setup in a shop situation.
However, the receiver-transmitter must be loaded with a valid ALE datafill before ALE
operation is possible.
Before proceeding with actual operation of the HF-9000 system, check all cable connectors t o be sure of
proper mating, and be sure an antenna is connected t o the associated antenna coupler.
The HF-9000 system self-test can be initiated manually from the radio set control by selecting TST OPR
mode. Upon selection of TST mode, the self-test command is transmitted by the fiber-optic bus t o all units
in the HF-9000 system. Each unit then conducts its individual self-test routine and interacts with the
other units t o test the interface between the specific units. Self-test results are reported t o the
receiver-transmitter, which then sends the test results t o the radio set control t o be displayed. Upon TST
initiation, only the receive self-tests are conducted, after which the transmit self-tests may be initiated.
Procedures are provided for initiating both self-tests.
3.4.3.1 Receive Self-Test
Initiate receive self-test as follows:
a. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in OPR field and then rotate VALUE control t o display TST.
NOTE
Self-test cannot be stopped after OPR displays TST for 3 seconds or more. Rotating a
control after self-test has begun may cause a fault t o be momentarily displayed but does
not affect final self-test results.
b. After a 3-second delay, MODE displays RT (receiver-transmitter self-test). The receiver-transmitter

test takes approximately 10 seconds.
c. On completion of receiver-transmitter test, MODE displays CU (antenna coupler self-test). The
antenna coupler test takes approximately 3 seconds.
d. On completion of antenna coupler test, MODE displays R (radio set control self-test). The radio set
control test takes approximately 2 seconds.
e. On completion of the radio set control test, the radio set control display reads as follows:
1. If all units pass receive self-test, OPR displays TST and MODE displays OK Proceed t o transmit
self-test, paragraph 3.4.3.2.
2. If one or more units fail the receive self-test, OPR displays FLT and MODE displays code for
suspected unit (CU for antenna coupler, FL for bandpass filter, R for radio set control, RT for
receiver-transmitter, or - - (two blanks) for external failure). To determine if suspected unit has
more than one fault or if more than one unit has failed, press the DSPL switch to display fault
code or sequence through all suspected faults. Refer t o the maintenance section for fault code
definitions. To continue with transmit self-test, proceed t o transmit-only self-test, paragraph
3.4.3.3.
3-18
operation
NOTE
During normal operation, OPR may display TST and MODE may display FO. This is an
indication that the fiber-optic control link has failed. Refer to paragraph 5.3.2.3 for fiber-
optic cable troubleshooting procedures.
3.4.3.2 Transmit Self-Test
The transmit self-test of the HF-9000 system tests the transmit path after a successful receive self-test
(TST OK displayed). Initiate transmit self-test as follows:
a. Momentarily key the microphone or press ptt key. The OPR field continues t o display TST and MODE
field continues t o display TX for approximately 1 second.
b. When the antenna coupler test starts, MODE field displays CU. The antenna coupler test takes
approximately 7 seconds.
NOTE
The radio set control was tested during the receive self-test. The test is not repeated.
c. On completion of antenna coupler test, the radio set control display reads as follows:
1. If all units pass the transmit self-test, OPR displays TST and MODE displays OK.
2. If one or more units fail the transmit self-test, OPR displays FLT or MSG and MODE displays
suspected unit (CU, FL, FO, RT, or - - (two blanks)). To determine if the suspected unit has more
than one fault or if more than one unit has failed, press the DSPL switch t o sequence through all
detected faults. Refer t o the maintenance section for fault code definitions.
3.4.3.3 Transmit-Only Self-Test
Use transmit-only self-test if a unit has failed the receive self-test or if it is desired t o bypass the receive
self-test. Initiate transmit-only self-test as follows:
a. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in OPR field and then rotate VALUE control t o display PGM.
b. Key the microphone or press the ptt key and then rotate VALUE control to select TST.
c. After approximately 2 seconds, MODE field displays TX, indicating transmit self-test has been
initiated.
3-19
operation
d. After approximately 1 second, MODE field displays CU. The antenna coupler test takes approximately
7 seconds.
e. On completion of antenna coupler test, the radio set control display reads as follows:
1. If all units pass the transmit-only self-test, OPR displays TST and MODE displays OK
2. If one or more of the units fail the transmit-only self-test, OPR displays FLT or MSG and MODE
displays suspected unit (CU, FL, FO, RT, or - - (two blanks)). To determine if the suspected unit
has more than one fault, or if more than one unit has failed, press the DSPL switch t o sequence
through all detected faults. Refer t o the maintenance section for fault code definitions.
f. Unkey the HF-9000 system.
3.4.4 Automatic ALE Mode
If the HF-9000 system is equipped with an ALE control processor, it sounds (transmits a
short tone burst) and responds t o ALE calls automatically (without operator intervention).
Anytime local regulations prohibit hf emissions, ensure the HF-9000 system is set for silent
Automatic ALE mode is the preferred operating mode for HF-9000 systems that include this option. When
operating in this mode, the HF-9000 system can perform all ALE functions available with the least
amount of operator interaction. ALE operations include placing a call t o the address displayed on the radio
set control, scanning all channels in use for incoming calls, periodically sounding all scanned channels
(datafill defined), and collecting sounding information (link quality analysis (LQA) data). The receiver-
transmitter must be loaded with a valid ALE datafill before ALE operation is possible.
The ALE control processor may be internal t o the HF-9000 system receiver-transmitter, or the HF-9000
system may use an external ALE control processor, such as the ALE Control Processor 309M-1.
NOTE
If the HF-9000 system does not include the hardware required t o perform ALE, Radio Set
Control HF-9012 displays appear the same as Radio Set Control HF-9010 displays; ALE-
related displays do not appear.
3.4.4.1 Scan List Selection
When a scan list is selected, the HF-9000 system scans the channels programmed into the selected list.
The HF-9000 system stops scanning when ALE activity is detected on a channel. The HF-9000 system
listens on the channel t o determine if the ALE tones are an incoming call or LQA data. If tones are an
incoming call, the HF-9000 system enables the audio and MODE field displays LK when a link has been
established. Once a link is established, normal communications can begin. If the HF-9000 system
determines the ALE tones were not an incoming call, it automatically resumes scanning.
Select a scan list as follows:
a. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in OPR field and then use VALUE control t o select ALE.
b. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in right-most digits in INFO field and then use VALUE control
t o select desired scan list.
NOTE
Normal convention is calling station t o talk first.
3-20
operation
NOTE
Press the CALIJLD switch to force the HF-9000 system to drop link (return immediately to
scan mode).
NOTE
When placing ALE calls, the first call to an address must be initiated using the CALULD
switch. After the initial call, the ptt key may be used for normal communication. After the
ALE link is broken, press the ptt key to initiate a call to the last address with which a link
was established (regardless of the ALE address selected on the radio set control).
3.4.4.2 Silent Operation
Silent operation prohibits the HF-9000 system from emitting any RF energy for all modes.
Refer to figure 3-3. Select silent operation as follows:
a. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in OPR field and then use VALUE control to select ALE.
b. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in PWR field and then rotate VALUE control counterclockwise
until PWR field displays SIL.
Silent Operation
Figure 3-3
Change 3 3-21
operation
3.4.4.3 Sounding
WARNING
Sounding transmits a short tone burst of RF energy. Anytime local regulations prohibit hf
emissions, ensure the HF-9000 system is set for silent operation or is in standby mode.
Sounding is an ALE function and is only available on HF-9000 systems that have ALE capability.
Sounding is used to update other ALE stations’ LQA data to ensure the best propagating channel is tried
first for call attempts. Sounding is described in more detail in the theory section of this instruction book. If
operating in automatic ALE mode (ALE displayed in OPR field), it is possible to force the HF-9000 system
to sound. During a sounding sequence, the HF-9000 system returns to scan mode after each channel is
sounded. This allows the HF-9000 system to listen on all channels being scanned before sounding on the
next channel. If a response from another station is received, the HF-9000 system sends a reply to the
station. To force the HF-9000 system to sound while scanning, refer to figure 3-4 and perform the
following:
a. While the INFO field is displaying an ALE address, rotate the ADR/CHAN switch until INFO field
displays S--D.
b. Momentarily press CALL/LD switch. The MODE field displays SD when the HF-9000 system sounds.
Sounding
Figure 3-4
3.4.4.4 Channel ALE Operations
Operating in ALE channel mode allows calls to be sent and received on a specific channel. The prepro-
grammed channel parameters (frequency and RF emission mode) control HF-9000 system operation.
Communication can only be established on the frequency and RF emission mode of the selected channel;
the HF-9000 system is not taking full advantage of the ALE capabilities. The channel parameters can be
programmed either manually, using the procedures included in paragraph 3.4.7.1, or during HF-9000
system datafill.
NOTE
Channel ALE operation is the same as conventional channel operation, except it is possible
to select an ALE address by repeatedly pressing DSPL switch.
3-22 Change 3
operation
To enter ALE channel mode, refer to figure 3-5 and perform the following:
Channel ALE Operation

Figure 3-5
a. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in OPR field and then use VALUE control to select CHN.
b. Select desired channel by rotating ADR/CHAN control, or use CURSOR control to position cursor
under a channel digit. Use VALUE control to select desired channel digit (repeat for both channel
digits if required).
c. Repeatedly press DSPL switch until OPR and INFO fields display CHN XXX (where XXX is an ALE
address).
d. Rotate ADR/CHAN control to scroll through preset ALE addresses, or use CURSOR and VALUE controls
to select any other address.
The HF-9000 system is now in channel ALE mode. An ALE call to your station's address on this channel
is received. If a link is established, MODE field displays LK and the INFO field displays the address with
whom a link is established.
e. Momentarily press CALL/LD switch to place an ALE call to selected address.
NOTE
In channel ALE mode, the HF-9000 system only tries to place a call once. If a link is not
established, there are no further automatic attempts. To attempt another link, press the
CALULD switch again.
Change 3 3-23
operation
3.4.5 Manual ALE Operation
It is possible to send and receive calls on a specific frequency while operating in manual ALE mode.
Communications can only be established on the selected frequency; the HF-9000 system is not taking full
advantage of the ALE capabilities.
NOTE
Manual ALE operation is the same as conventional manual operation, except it is possible
to select an ALE address by repeatedly pressing the DSPL switch.
To initiate a call in ALE manual mode, refer to figure 3-6 and perform the following:
Manual ALE Operation

Figure 3-6
a. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in OPR field and then use VALUE control to select MAN.
b. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in MODE field and then use VALUE control to select desired
emission mode.
c. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in INFO field and then use VALUE control to select desired
frequency.
d. Momentarily press DSPL switch until OPR and INFO fields display MAN XXX (where XXX is address
of station to be called). If desired address is not displayed, use ADR/CHAN control or CURSOR and
VALUE controls to select desired address.
e. Momentarily press CALLLD switch. The OPR and MODE fields display MAN CL.
f. If a link is established, the OPR field displays MAN and the INFO field displays LK XXX (where XXX
is the address of the station with whom a link is established). Use microphone ptt key to communicate
with linked station.
3-24 Change 3
operation
Receive a call in ALE manual mode as follows:
a. Press DSPL switch until OPR and INFO fields display MAN XXX (where XXX is any ALE address).
b. Any successful link resulting from an incoming call causes MAN LK XXX (where XXX is the address of
the calling station) t o be displayed and squelch to be broken.
c. Communicate normally using ptt key switch.
3.4.6 Manual Mode
Manual mode is for simplex operation only (same transmit and receive frequency). The following
paragraphs detail voice, data, and CW communication in manual mode.
Be sure all personnel are clear of hf antenna when performing radio checks. Do not touch
the RF output terminal on the antenna coupler, the antenna lead-in wire, the insulated
feedthrough, or the antenna itself while the microphone is keyed (after the tuning cycle is
complete). Serious RF burns can result from direct contact with the above items when the
Perform manual mode operation as follows:
a. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in OPR field and then rotate VALUE control t o display MAN.
b. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in MODE field and then rotate VALUE control t o display
desired RF emission mode (W,LV, AM, UD, LD, or CW).
C. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in INFO field (under frequency digit t o be changed). Rotate
VALUE control t o display desired frequency (repeat as necessary for all digits t o be changed).
d. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in PWR field. Rotate VALUE control t o select desired output
power).
NOTE
Setting the squelch control too far clockwise (SQL 3) can result in blocking out weak
signals. At times (depending on prevailing conditions), i t may be necessary t o leave the
squelch control in the counterclockwise position (SQL 0) to maintain satisfactory reception.
To avoid missed communications, always operate the squelch at the minimum level
providing satisfactory communications under current propagation conditions. There is no
squelch or sidetone control in data modes.
f. Momentarily key the microphone t o tune the antenna coupler. The antenna coupler tunes automatical-
ly. A steady 1000-Hz tune tone is heard in the headset or speaker during the tune cycle. The average
tune cycle is approximately 30 ms, provided the frequency is already tuned and tuning data is already
stored in memory. Automatic tuning t o a new frequency takes nominally less than 1 second. After
completion of the tune cycle, the steady tune tone disappears and receiver noise is heard.
3-25
operation
NOTE
return it to the desired setting to clear a fault. Momentarily key the microphone to attempt
another tune cycle. If fault condition persists, refer to fault clearing procedure in paragraph
3.4.14.
g. If the preceding steps are completed with no fault indications, communication can begin.
NOTE
microphone after selecting a new frequency to initiate an antenna coupler tune cycle.
NOTE
The presence of sidetone in the headset or speaker during transmit operation indicates
h. Adjust VOL control for desired audio level.
3.4.7 Program Mode
PGM mode is used t o load channel data into one or more of the 99 user-programmable preset channels
available. These channels are used for scanning, channel, and ALE operation. Channels 1 through 10,
make up ALE scan list number 01. Either simplex or half-duplex operation can be programmed.
3.4.7.1 Programming Preset or ALE Channels
The procedure included in this paragraph allows channels to be programmed for frequency and RF
emission mode.
NOTE
Additional channels cannot be programmed if the HF-9000 system datafill did not enable
PGM RADIO CONFIGURATION.
To program simplex ALE channels into the HF-9000 system, refer t o figure 3-7 and perform the following:
a. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in OPR field and then use VALUE control to select PGM.
b. The frequency is initially displayed in the INFO field. Rotate the ADR/CHAN control t o display/select
desired channel number.
NOTE
User-programmed preset channels 1 through 99 are displayed in the second and third
digits from the right. The ADR/CHAN control increments or decrements the channel number
by one for each click without regard for cursor setting. The selected channel number
display disappears after 3 seconds, a t which time the desired frequency may be selected.
3-26 Change 3
operation
Programming Preset or ALE Channels

Figure 3-7
c. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in MODE field and then use VALUE control to select desired
emission mode.
d. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in INFO field and then use VALUE control to select desired
frequency (repeat as necessary for each frequency digit).
e. Momentarily press CALLAD switch and observe INFO field display blinks. This indicates the channel
is programmed.
NOTE
If additional preset channels are t o be programmed, repeat steps b through e.
To program a half-duplex channel into the HF-9000 system, perform the following:
a. Perform steps a through d of the above procedure t o program the receive frequency.
b. Press and hold microphone ptt key switch.
NOTE
Receiver-transmitter does not key and no signal is transmitted when HF-9000 system is in
PGM mode.
c. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in MODE field and then use VALUE control t o select desired
emission mode.
d. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in INFO field and then use VALUE control t o select desired
frequency.
e. Momentarily press CALLAD switch and observe INFO field display blinks. This indicates the channel
is programmed.
f. Release microphone ptt key switch.
Change 3 3-27
operation
3.4.7.2 Programming ALE Self-Address
The ALE self-address is an identifier used to screen incoming calls and provide your station’s LQA
identity. The HF-9000 system’s own self-address may be datafilled or programmed via the radio set
control. To program an ALE self-address, refer to figure 3-8 and perform the following:
Programming ALE Self-Address

Figure 3-8
NOTE
ALE addresses may be up to 15 characters in length; however, the radio set control can
only program and display the first three characters. If addresses longer than three
characters are used, it is beneficial to HF-9000 system operation if the first three charac-
ters of each address are unique.
a. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in OPR field and then use VALUE control to select PGA. The
current self-address is displayed in the INFO field.
b. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in INFO field and then use VALUE control t o set in desired
self-address.
c. Momentarily press CALLLD switch. Observe INFO field display blinks t o indicate self-address is
programmed.
3-28 Change 3
operation
3.4.8 Channel Mode
If the selected user-programmed preset channel is already programmed for half-duplex operation (separate
frequency for transmit and receive) or simplex operation (same frequency for transmit and receive), radio
set control MODE displays RF emission type and INFO displays channel number of selected
user-programmed preset channel. After approximately 3 seconds, preset channel number selected
disappears and INFO displays preset frequency. Unprogrammed channels are not displayed. Perform
user-programmed preset channel operation as follows:
a. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in OPR field and then rotate VALUE control t o display CHN.
b. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in INFO field (under channel digit to be changed). Rotate
ADR/CHAN or VALUE control to display the desired preset channel.
NOTE
Press DSPL switch once t o view receive frequency. Transmit frequency and mode are
displayed with the microphone is keyed.
c. Voice, data, and CW communications are as previously discussed for manual operation.
NOTE
microphone after selecting a new preset channel to initiate an antenna coupler tune cycle.
3.4.9 Emergency Mode
NOTE
Receiver-Transmitters HF-9080, HF-9081, HF-9082, and HF-9084 do not use emergency
mode.
International distress frequencies of 2.1820, 4.1250, 6.2150, 8.2910, 12.2900, and 16.4200 MHz are
displayed on the radio set control as EMR1 (2182 kHz), EMR2 (4125 kHz), EMR3 (6215 kHz), EMR4 (8291
kHz), EMR5 (12290 kHz), and EMR6 (16420 kHz). Perform emergency operation as follows:
a. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in OPR field and then rotate VALUE control t o display EMR.
b. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in INFO field (under digit t o be changed). Rotate ADR/CHAN
or VALUE control to select desired emergency channel.
c. Use CURSOR control t o position cursor in PWR field and then rotate VALUE control to select
maximum output power (all three bars).
NOTE
microphone after selecting an emergency channel t o initiate an antenna coupler tune cycle.
Change 3 3-29
operation
3.4.10 Scan Mode
Scan mode provides receiver scanning of user-programmed preset channels 1 through 10. Each of the first
10 channels is scanned for traffic with a dwell time of 0.5 second on each channel. The INFO field displays
the channel number being scanned. Operate in scan mode as follows:
a. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in OPR field and then rotate VALUE control to display SCN.
b. Rotate SQL control counterclockwise to disable (SQL 0) and then clockwise one click (SQL 1). Receiver
squelches and starts scanning after a short delay. If intermittent stop-scan operation occurs, advance
SQL control clockwise one more click (SQL 2). If intermittent stop-scan operation still occurs, again,
advance SQL control clockwise one more click (SQL 3).
NOTE
Squelch settings control scan operation only if receiver-transmitter connector J1-q (stop
scan) is connected t o J1-u (retransmit). Connecting these two pins causes the receiver to
stop scanning when voice communication is detected on the channel and also inhibits ALE
scanning.
c. Adjust VOL control for desired audio level.
3.4.11 Standby Mode
In standby mode, audio is muted and the HF-9000 system does not sound or reply to ALE calls. To enter
standby mode, use CURSOR control to position cursor in OPR field and then rotate VALUE control to
display SBY.
3.4.12 Maritime Mode
NOTE
Receiver-Transmitters HF-9080, HF-9081, HF-9082, and HF-9084 do not use maritime mode.
All 249 ITU public correspondence channels (receive and transmit frequencies plus RF emission type) in
the maritime radiotelephone network are preprogrammed into receiver-transmitter nonvolatile memory.
The 249 ITU channels operate half duplex in the UV RF emission type. Operate in maritime mode as
follows:
a. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in OPR field and then rotate VALUE control to display MAR
b. Refer to the HF-9000 High-Frequency Communications System Operator’s Manual, part number
c. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in INFO field (under channel digit t o be changed). Rotate
ADR/CHAN or VALUE control t o display desired ITU channel.
d. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in PWR field. Rotate VALUE control to select desired output
power).
clockwise one click (SQL 1). Receiver squelches after a short delay. If intermittent noise persists,
3-30 Change 3
operation
f. Momentarily key microphone t o tune antenna coupler. Antenna coupler tunes automatically. A steady
1000-Hz tune tone is heard in headset or speaker during tune cycle. Average tune cycle time is
approximately 30 ms if channel is already tuned. Automatic tuning of a new frequency takes
nominally less than 1 second. After completion of tune cycle, steady tune tone disappears and receiver
noise is heard.
NOTE
If a fault occurs during the tune cycle, the steady tune tone changes to a beeping tone and
return it to the desired setting t o clear a fault. Momentarily key the microphone t o attempt
another tune cycle. If a fault condition persists, refer t o fault clearing proceciure in
paragraph 3.4.14.
g, If the previous steps are completed with no fault indications, voice transmissions may be made using
the microphone. The presence of sidetone in the headset or speaker during transmit operation
indicates transmitter output. A lack of sidetone indicates the absence of a transmit signal.
NOTE
In maritime operation, only a selected ITU channel is displayed in radio set control INFO
field. Press CALL/LD switch t o observe receive frequency. Press CALL/LD switch while
keying microphone t o observe transmit frequency. After approximately 3 seconds, frequency
disappears and previously selected ITU channel number reappears in radio set control
INFO field.
NOTE
To avoid poor reception or missed calls, always momentarily key the microphone after
selecting a new ITU channel t o initiate an antenna coupler tune cycle.
3.4.13 External Mode
The external mode of operation is reserved for future HF-9000 system operational configurations. I t is
currently not used.
3.4.14 Fault Clearing Procedure
When the antenna coupler tune cycle is completed, the steady 1000-Hz tune tone in the headset or speaker
stops. If the tune cycle is not completed within approximately 6 seconds (nominally 1 second for a new
frequency and 30 ms for a previously tuned preset channel), the steady tune tone begins t o beep and the
radio set control OPR field displays FLT CU 3010. The beeping 1000-Hz tune tone is enabled by an input
from the antenna coupler indicating that it is unable to complete its tune cycle. If no RF is generated, the
tune sequence stops.
To clear the fault, change any field on the radio set control and reset to desired setting. Momentarily key
the microphone to attempt another tune cycle. The steady 1000-Hz tune tone should again be present and
then disappear at the end of the tuning cycle. If the beeping tone continues, repeat the clearing procedure
and then perform a transmit self-test o r try operation on a different frequency.
3-31
operation
3.4.15 Information Deleted
3.5 DUAL SYSTEM OPERATION
A dual system using a single hf antenna has five discrete operating states (table 3-3). Procedures for
operating each subsystem depends on the then-current operating state of the HF-9000 system. All
procedures described in paragraphs 3.3 through 3.4 apply for each half of the dual system. Additional
procedures for dual system management are as follows:
a. To reach XMT from DUAL RCV, key the desired subsystem (1 or 2). The keyed subsystem is connected
to the antenna and has a normal control display. The opposite subsystem is disconnected from the
antenna and has MSG 0090 displayed on the radio set control. If the opposite subsystem is keyed while
the other subsystem is still transmitting, the radio set control display changes t o MSG 0080.
This means transmission is not possible until the other subsystem is unkeyed.
b. To reach XMT from RTC (receive through tuned coupler), key the desired subsystem (1 or 2). HF-9000
system operation is as described in step a.
c. To reach DUAL RCV from XMT or RTC, unkey both subsystems and change either frequency or
emission mode on either radio set control. Both radio set control displays are normal and both
subsystems receive through bypassed antenna couplers
d. To reach RTC from XMT, unkey the transmitting subsystem (1 o r 2). This places that subsystem in
the RTC state. The radio set control display is normal. The opposite subsystem is disconnected from
the antenna and the opposite radio set control display shows MSG 0090.
3-32 Change 3
oDeration
NOTE
Receive audio may be heard from the disconnected receiver if the second transmitter is
operating on a nearby frequency.
NOTE
The RTC state can be reached only from an XMT state. Key the receiving subsystem
momentarily to reach the RTC state. I n the dual system configuration, the RTC state
provides optimum signal reception. This is especially useful when weak or noisy signals are
being received.
Table 3-3. Dual-System Operating States
STATE SUBSYSTEM 1 CONTROL 1 SUBSYSTEM 2 CONTROL 2
~~~~ ~ ~ ~
I
I
DUAL RCV Receive Normal Receive Normal

XMT 1 Transmit Normal Disconnected MSG 0090
from antenna MSG 0080*
RTC 1 Receive through Normal Disconnected MSG 0090
tuned coupler from antenna
XMT 2 Disconnected MSG 0090 Transmit Normal
from antenna MSG 0800"
RTC 2 Disconnected MSG 0090 Receive through Normal
from antenna tuned coupler
*MSG 0080 means opposite subsystem is keyed.
Under some circumstances in a dual system, a fault in one half of the system may inhibit
operation of both halves of the system. If this should happen, the nonfaulted half of the
system probably indicates fault code 0070. This is to protect the faulted half of the system
from possible damage resulting from transmission by the nonfaulted half of the system. If
this should occur, attempt to restore normal dual system operation by retuning the faulted
half of the system. If the fault does not clear, turn off the circuit breaker for the faulted half
of the system. Do not reset the circuit breaker until maintenance action has resolved the
cause of the fault.
3.6 REMOTE TERMINAL ALE OPERATION

I t is possible to operate the HF-9000 system in ALE mode using a remote terminal to control the HF-9000
system. The remote terminal communicates with the HF-9000 system via the receiver-transmitter's RS-232
bus. The remote terminal may be either a dumb terminal or a personal computer. To allow the remote
terminal to communicate with the receiver-transmitter, the remote terminal must be configured as follows:
1200 baud, 7-data bits, 1-stop bit, and odd parity.
NOTE
Procedures in this paragraph apply to HF-9000 system receiver-transmitters with internal

ALE capability. If using an external ALE control processor, such as the ALE Control
Processor 309M-1, refer to the intermediate maintenance manual for that equipment (523-
0776622) for remote terminal operating procedures.
Change 1 3-33
oDeration
NOTE
Only test, ALE, and standby modes of operation are possible using the remote terminal to
control the HF-9000 system. When using the remote terminal, manual, channel, maritime,
and emergency modes of operation cannot be used. Use the radio set control to operate in
these modes.
When using a remote terminal to control the HF-9000 system, a radio set control is not required. However,
the radio set control tests always fail when a BIT is performed. If a radio set control is used in conjunction
with the remote terminal, the radio set control cannot be used to monitor radio set operation because its
displays may not accurately depict HF-9000 system operation.
NOTE
Not all remote terminals and datafill devices have keys as labeled herein. Some individual
deduction may be necessary. For example, on some terminals the RETURN key may be
labeled ENTER or CARRIAGE RETURN.
NOTE
All commands to the remote terminal must be entered exactly as explained in these
procedures, including spaces.
I n the following paragraphs, items shown inside brackets [ ] are optional. Words in uppercase letters are
called key words. Key words denote a specific piece of information in the command. Every command begins
with a key word. Use these key words as references to underlying functions that they address. To ease
operator entry, key words may be abbreviated. The portion of the key word underlined is the minimum set of
characters that must be typed for the key word to be recognized (for example, AL CA or ALLC can be entered
for ALL CALL). When spaces are underlined, they also must be entered. Items shown in italics denote where
other information must be substituted into this field. Usually the information content can be seen from the
term name. A slash (0means either/or. Choose one of the items separated by the slash
(ENABLED/DISABLED indicates either enable or disable may be selected; but not both). After becoming
familiar with entering ALE keyboard commands, table 3-13 a t the end of this section can be used as a quick
reference.
The HF-9000 system must have a datafill performed before ALE operation is possible. ALE systems must be
programmed with compatible presets and operational parameters prior to operation to fully utilize their
automatic capabilities and ensure proper HF-9000 system operation. Refer to paragraph 2.6 in the
installation section of this instruction book for datafill requirements.
a. Configure the remote terminal as explained in paragraph 3.6.

b. Refer to figure 2-9 and connect the remote terminal RS-232 bus t o the receiver-transmitter RS-232 bus
(J10).
c. Apply primary power to the HF-9000 system and remote terminal.
3.6.2 Unsolicited Responses
When power is applied to the HF-9000 system and the remote terminal, a display containing the following
information appears on the remote terminal screen.
<timestamp mode state last-addr <mode and state dependent information>
3-34
operation
This type of display is called an unsolicited response because it appears without any operator action. The
HF-9000 system outputs messages t o inform the operator whenever a detectable state change has occurred
in HF-9000 system operation.
After executing each command, and each time the HF-9000 system status changes, the HF-9000 system
issues a status response indicating the current state of the HF-9000 system. The status response is
dependent upon current HF-9000 system operation. Information included in the HF-9000 system status
line is defined in table 3-4.
Another type of unsolicited response is LQA reports. This information is output only if the HF-9000
system parameter LQA Output System Index 2 is enabled. Each time an LQA value is heard from a
station, an unsolicited response is generated. This response contains the essential information that is
recorded for ranking the channels. The basic form is shown below.
timestamp LQA from unit Channel chun BER=ber SINAD=SIN LQA=uaZue
Table 3-4. HF-9000 System Status Line Definitions

I TERM IEFINITION
Time stamp Zurrent time of day in the unit presented a s a 24-hour clock in the form
iour:minute:second (for example, 02:35:16 is 2:35 am, and
L4:35:16 is 2:35 pm).
Mode 3ne of the following key words is CHAN, MAN, AUTO, or TEST.
State Zontains the state of the unit with respect to placing and receiving ALE calls.
Key words in this field are listed in table 3-5.
Last address l'he last called address.
rhis parameter varies depending on mode and the state values. Unless noted in
iescription of the state (table 3-5), when mode is MAN or CHAN, this h a s the
talue of channel, frequency, and emission mode.
When the unit is in scan mode and listening state, the information displayed is
determined by the following precedence of operation.
a. All transmission inhibited - unit cannot be keyed.

b. Auto response disabled - unit is keyable only by operator action.
:. Auto sound disabled - unit does not sound automatically.
3. Auto sound enabled - unit is fully automatic and places sounds at the
required intervals.
Unless noted in the above states, all other mode and state combinations result
in displaying the radio channel, frequency, and mode. If the channel is a duplex
channel, the information is displayed as follows:
RECEIVE TRANSMIT
CHANNEL FREQUENCYMODE FREQUENCYMODE
Ch 4 R:11408.00 USB T:12408.00 USB
3-35
operation
Table 3-5. State, Key Words

STATE VALUE DESCRIPTION
Changing Unit is in the process of going t o the listening state but some lengthy processes are
occurring such as sending a link termination.
Answering Unit is answering a call from the last address.
Call failed The call attempted on this channel has failed. In scan mode, additional channels may
be tried.
Call failed on all No other information is presented.
call channels
Calling Unit is placing a call t o the last address.
Call initiated as Followed by the self-address used for this call attempt.
Linked Unit is currently linked t o the last address.
Listening Unit is monitoring the channel(s) for incoming ALE traffic.
Sounding Unit is placing a sound on the channel specified.
Dor man t All resources for placing and receiving ALE calls have been removed from ALE.
Database commands may still be entered. However, attempting t o command the unit
t o different channels or t o place calls results in the undetermined operation.
CALL in inhibit The last address contains an incoming call from that unit but it cannot be answered
automatic without operator intervention.
responses (IAR)
The time-stamp parameter is the current time of day in the unit presented as a 24-hour clock. The unit
parameter is the address of the unit that was heard on the channel. This may be the result of a sound
from the unit, a call by the unit t o another address, or an incoming call t o the unit. The chan parameter
contains the active channel number of the unit. The BER parameter contains the bit error rate (BER) in
49 bits of data received. The larger the number, the more errors were corrected in the 2-of-3 voter defined
by MIL-STD-188-141A. This number ranges from 0 t o 30 (ie, no bit errors t o 30 bit errors detected). The
S/N parameter contains the signal-to-noise ratio of the ALE tones. The smaller the number, the weaker
the signal. Range is from 0 t o 30. The value parameter contains the calculated value of BER and the S / N
to yield the LQA value of that particular received signal. This number ranges from 50 t o 0, with 50 being
a perfect score of no bit errors and the highest signal-to-noise ratio. The low number is a HF-9000 system
parameter that is preset t o zero. The following is an example of an LQA report.
09:43:28 LQA from AAA Channel 25 BER= 0 SINAD= 23 LQA=4O
In the above example, an ALE signal was detected on channel 25 a t 09:43:28 from station M A . No bit
errors were detected and the signal strength was very good. The resultant LQA value of 40 is recorded
into the LQA table for this channel and address for future call placement.
The quantity of unsolicited responses displayed on the remote terminal can be filtered using the host
verbose command. A value of one is the default that displays the minimum amount of unsolicited
responses. Currently, only verbose levels one and two are supported; level two is completely unfiltered. To
view the current verbose level, enter HOST VERBOSE and then press Enter. To change the verbose level,
enter HOST VERBOSE [value] (eg, HO VE 1)and then press Enter.
3-36
operation
3.6.3 Operating Procedures
Procedures in the following paragraphs assume the procedures in paragraph 3.6.1, Preliminary Proce-
dures, are already performed.
NOTE
Frequencies entered in kilohertz must be followed by a space and the letter K. Frequencies
entered in megahertz must be followed by a space and the letter M.
Enter HOST SET W A V E F O R M m D E TST and then press Enter. If a radio set control is part of the HF-
900 system, the OPR field displays TST. At the conclusion of the receive test, the remote terminal displays
OK or a fault code. The fault codes are described in the maintenance section of this instruction book. After
successfully completing the receive self-test, momentarily key the HF-9000 system to perform a transmit
self-test. At the conclusion of the transmit test, the remote terminal displays OK or a fault code.
Initiate transmit-only self-test as follows:

1
a. Press and hold the ptt key.

b. Enter HOST SET WAVEFORM MODE TST and then press Enter.
c. Release the ptt key when the test routine starts. At the conclusion of the transmit test, the remote
terminal displays OK or a fault code.
3.6.5 ALE Mode
I[ WARNING 1
This HF-9000 system is equipped with an ALE control processor. It sounds (transmits a
short tone burst) and responds t o ALE calls automatically (without operator intervention).
Anytime local regulations prohibit hf emissions, ensure the HF-9000 system is set for silent
To enter automatic ALE mode, enter HOST SET W A V E F O R M m D E ALE and then press Enter. If a
radio set control is part of the HF-9000 system, the OPR field displays ALE. Enable or disable sounding as
described in paragraph 3.6.5.6.
3.6.5.1 Automatic Scan Mode
To place the receiver-transmitter in automatic scan mode, enter =AN [scan list index / scan list name]
(eg, SC 1)and then press Enter.
One t o 20 scan lists may be selected t o be active in scan mode. A scan list may be specified either by its
number or its name. However, the combination of name a n d o r number must not exceed 20 entries. Use of
this command results in the composite scan list becoming operative. The composite scan list is deselected
when a new composite scan list is input. If no scan lists are given, the previously declared scan list is
scanned. The scan list name is a 1-t o 4-character string representing the name of a scan list. It may be
3-37
operation
used to reference a scan list by name. The scan list name is used in place of a scan list index t o invoke
scanning a particular list. The first character of a legal scan list name must be an alphabetical character
(ie, A t o 2). Enter %an without parameters t o cause the set of enabled scan lists to be scanned. If an ALE
call is received from another station, a bell sounds within the remote terminal and the display indicates
that a link has been established. Proceed with normal voice or data communication.
Enter MU E N and then press Enter t o enable positive muting. Refer t o table 3-7 and use the squelch (SQ)
command t o adjust the squelch t o the desired level.
3.6.5.2 Placing a Station-to-Station (Individual), Group, or Net Cali
To make a call, enter CALL [adrs [<operator>ll (eg, CALL J O E ) and then press Enter.
Use the call command t o initiate individual (station-to-station), group, or net calls. The operator receives
feedback via the remote terminal when the call starts, changes channels, answers, completes, o r is
abandoned. In the example given, the adrs represents an ASCII character string of 1 t o 15 characters com-
posing a valid MIL-STD-188-141A calling address. This may be an individual, net, or group address. If the
current address is to be specified, insert a hyphen (-1 instead of the current address. The <operator> can be
[NOLINK], [LQAI, [AMD qualifier], a n d o r [USING <scan id>].The operator, NOLINK, LQA, and AMD
may be specified together, and in any order. When the NOLINK option is invoked, the transmission is
terminated with a THIS WAS and a link is not established. If the NOLINK option is not selected, the
receiver-transmitter enters a link state after the call transmission is completed. LQA is a value attributed
t o the automatic measurement of the quality of the signal strength between the called and the calling
station. If AMD is selected, an AMD message number must be selected. The qualifier represents a message
selection of one of four individual messages. The scan identifier (id) can be a scan list index or a scan list
name. The scan list index is a number ranging from 1 t o 20. It represents the scan list the call is made
from. The scan list name is a 1-t o 4-character string representing the current name of a scan list. This
scan list name can be used in place of the scan list number when placing a call. The first character of a
scan list must be an alphabetical character (ie, A t o 2). Optional parameters may be used to specify a
station, group, or star net or t o specify a specific scan list. Other optional parameters specify an ALE
command t o be sent in the calling portion of the command or t o specify an AMD block of data. If none of
the options are selected (eg, CALL), a call is placed t o the last address used, whether that address is an
individual, net, or group address.
When a link is established with another station, a bell is sounded within the remote terminal and the
display indicates that a link is established. Proceed with normal voice or data communication.
3.6.5.3 Placing an All Call
To make an all call, enter ALL CALL [aZZ_caZZ_address~es)3

[<operator>] or ALLCALL ~aZZ_caZZ_address(es)1
[<operator>] (eg, ALL CA A B)and then press Enter.
Use the all call command t o initiate a general broadcast transmission that does not request responses, and
does not designate any specific address. Use this command during emergencies, sounding, data exchanges,
and propagation and connectivity tracking. An all call address may be specified. All call addresses consist
of one t o five single-character address indicators. The indicator is the last character of each address called.
Each indicator is separated by a space. In the example provided, an all call is placed t o each address
within the net whose last address character is either A or B. When an address is specified, i t is known as
a selective all call. If no addresses are indicated, a global all call is placed and all stations in the net are
called.
The operator option can be [NOLINK], [LQAI, [AMD qualifier],and/or [USING <scan-id>!. The operators
may be specified together and in any order. When the NOLINK option is invoked, the transmission is
terminated with a THIS WAS and a link is not established. If the NOLINK option is not selected, the
3-38
operation
receiver-transmitter enters a link state after the ALL CALL transmission is completed. If AMD is selected,
an AMD message number must be provided in the qualifier. This form is most useful when the command
is used t o send a message t o a large group of users. The qualifier represents a message selection of 1t o 10
individual messages. The scan id can be a scan list index or a scan list name.
When a link is established with another station, a bell is sounded within the remote terminal and the
display indicates that a link is established. Proceed with normal voice or data communication.
3.6.5.4 Placing an Any Call
To make an any call, enter ANY CALL [any_caZZ_uddress(es~l[<operator>] or ANYCALL [any, or

ANYCALL [any-caZZ_address(es)1 [<operator>] (eg, and then press Enter.
Use the any call command t o receive responses from unspecified stations t o identify new stations and
connectivities. Use the any call command for emergencies, reconstitution of HF-9000 systems, and creation
of new networks. Any call addresses may be specified. Any call addresses consist of one t o five single-
character or double-character address indicators. These indicators are the last one or two characters of
each address called. Each indicator is separated by a space. In the example provided, an any call is placed
t o each address within the net whose last address character is A, B, or C. If any call addresses are
specified, this is known as a selective any call. If no address is indicated, all stations in the net are called.
In the any call command, the operator can be [NOLINK], [LQAI, [AMD qualifier], and/or [USING <scan
id>]. In the operator field, NOLINK, LQA, USING, and AMD may be specified together and in any order.
When the NOLINK option is invoked, the transmission is terminated with a THIS WAS and a link is not
established. This option is most useful when the command is used to send a message t o a large group of
users. In the absence of the NOLINK option, the unit enters a link state after the any call transmission is
completed. If AMD is selected, the user must provide an AMD message number in the qualifier. The
qualifier represents a message selection of 1 t o 10 individual messages. The scan id can be a scan list
index or a scan list name.
When a link is established with another station, a bell sounds within the remote terminal and the display
indicates that a link is established. Proceed with normal voice or data communication.
3.6.5.5 Breaking a Link
To break an established link and return t o idle state of the current mode, enter DISCONNECT and then
press Enter.
Use the disconnect command t o abort the current activity and enter the listening state. Disconnect is used
t o force the HF-9000 system t o a known state without knowing if the unit has been operating in scan,
channel, or manual mode.
3.6.5.6 Sounding
To enable or disable all automatic soundings, enter ~ U N D ~ ~ L E / ’ D D S A Band

L Ethen press Enter.
To mark all channels in the active scan set t o sound as soon as possible, enter S O U N D X W and then
press Enter. If automatic sounding is disabled and the sound now command is entered, the unit attempts
t o sound all channels in the active scan set once.
NOTE
Entering a sound disable, automatic responses disable, or all transmissions disabled

command aborts sounding.
3-39
operation
To specify a channel t o sound immediately, enter SOUND CHANNEL number [sounding duration]
(eg, SO CH 5) and then press Enter. The number is the channel number to be sounded. The range is 1 t o
100. The sound duration is the sounding duration in seconds (0 t o 30). If a sounding duration is not
specified, the sounding duration is as specified in the datafilled channel table. If the duration in the
channel table is zero, then it defaults t o the configuration table.
To cause a delay before normal sounding is activated, enter N U N D B L A Y [number] and then press
Enter. After the delay, the HF-9000 system resumes normal sounding activity. The number is the delay
time in minutes before normal sounding is resumed. The range is 0 t o 30 minutes. If no number is
specified with the command, the default sound delay is 30 minutes.
Sound commands are mutually exclusive. For example, SOUND NOW CHANNEL 5 is not permitted.
Refer t o table 3-6, Sound Command Context Dependencies.
Table 3-6. Sound Command Context Dependencies

HF-9000
SYSTEM
MODE -
SOUNDmW -
SOUNDCHANNEL number -
SOUNDENABLEDIDSABLE
Scan Schedules all channels Switches into channel mode. Goes Enables or disables automatic
in the active scan list t o the channel number specified sounding in scan mode
for sounding and sounds the channel. HF-9000
system remains in channel mode
on the new channel specified.
Channel Sounds this channel Goes t o specified channel number No sounds emitted o r sched-
and stays in channel and sounds the channel. HF-9000 uled. When returning t o scan
mode system remains in channel mode mode, the HF-9000 system
on the new channel specified. sounds based on the most
recent enable/disable.
Manual Sounds on current Switches into channel mode. Goes No sounds emitted or sched-
frequency. No channel t o the channel numbers specified uled. When returning t o scan
is marked a s sounded, and sounds the channel. HF-9000 mode, the HF-9000 system
even if the frequency system remains in channel mode sounds based on the most
does map t o one of the on the new channel specified. recent enable/disable.
programmed channels.
3.6.5.7 Channel ALE Mode
Enter CHANNEL- (eg, CH)and then press Enter t o return to the channel last selected in channel mode.
Enter CHANNEL [number] (eg, CH 10)and then press Enter to select a different channel number.
Channel number values range from 1t o 100. In channel ALE mode, the HF-9000 system automatically
responds t o an incoming call.
Making a call in channel ALE mode is the same as making a call in automatic ALE mode. Refer t o
paragraph 3.6.5.2, Placing a Station-to-Station (Individual), Group, or Net Call. A call is made t o the
specified address on the current channel.
3-40
operation
3.6.5.8 Manual ALE Mode
To enter manual ALE mode, receive state, enter MANUAL (eg, MA) and then press Enter. The receiver-
transmitter returns t o the frequency and emission mode last used in manual mode. In manual ALE mode,
the HF-9000 system automatically responds t o an incoming call.
To enter manual mode using the parameters of a specified channel number (1t o 100) as the initial manual
state, enter W U A L [channel number] (eg, MA 10) and then press Enter.
Making a call in manual ALE mode is the same as making a call in automatic ALE mode. Refer t o
paragraph 3.6.5.2, Placing a Station-to-Station (Individual), Group, o r Net Call. A call is made t o the
specified address using the current frequency and emission mode.
To place a manual (non-ALE) call on the selected mode and frequency, simply press the ptt key instead of
placing an ALE call as described in paragraph 3.6.5.2.
3.6.5.9 Supplemental Operating Commands
Besides the commands previously described, several other remote terminal commands are available that
modify or enhance the HF-9000 system operation. These commands are referred t o as supplemental
operating commands and are listed and briefly described in table 3-7.
Table 3-7. Supplemental Operating Commands

ZOMMAND INPUT FORMAT DESCRIPTION
411 transmission 4LL TRANSMISSION~ABLE/D_LSABLE Use this command t o enable/disable
receiver-transmitter transmit opera-
tion. When the all transmission com-
mand is disabled, the receiver-trans-
mitter inhibits all transmissions
until it is again enabled.
4udio -10- <audio mode> Use this command in channel or
manual ALE mode t o change receiv-
l'he audio mode can be VOICE, U T A , o r &E. er-transmitter operation. As a result
of this command, the receiver-trans-
NOTE mitter is optimized t o process the
signal in the indicated manner. Enter
The receiver-transmitter may include VOICE when audio traffic is expected
more than these three audio modes. To t o be voice. Enter DATA when audio
view all available modes, use the LIST traffic is expected t o be data, such
RADIO AUDIO command. that the audio signal is available for
a modem. Enter ALE when the audio
is t o be processed by the internal
ALE modem used t o perform hand-
shake activities using the MIL-STD-
188-1418 protocols. When this com-
mand is entered, i t overrides any
audio mode that the HF-9000 system
automatically set when selecting a
channel o r placing a call.
3-41
operation
Table 3-7. Supplemental

__ Operating:
- Commands (Cont)
>OMMAND INPUT FORMAT DESCRIPTION
4udio receive W D I O RECEIVE <audio mode> Use this command in channel or
manual ALE mode to optimize receiv-
rhe audio mode can be VOICE, U T A , or &E. ?r-transmitter receive audio circuits.
4udio transmit m I O TRANSMIT <audio mode> Use this command in channel or
manual ALE mode to optimize receiv-
Phe audio mode can be VOICE, U T A , or &E. ?r-transmitter audio circuits to pro-
:ess the signal in the indicated man-
ier.
4utomatic m e n automatic response is disabled,
-esponse ;he receiver-transmitter does not
automatically sound or respond t o
4LE link requests until the operator
[nitiates a response by pressing the
Dtt key. When automatic response is
?nabled, the receiver-transmitter
?erforms these transmission func-
;ions automatically.
zonverse CONVERSE <1 to 90 characters of text> Use this command t o send and re-
:eive real-time data messages be-
NOTE ;ween two linked HF-9000 systems.
9 link must be established before en-
This feature is unique t o ALE and may ;ering this command. When an oper-
not be compatible with other ALE ator wishes t o converse with another
equipment . statioc, the message is typed and
;hen Enter is pressed. The message
NOTE is immediately transmitted t o the
ither linked station. Use converse
Conversing helps communication during :ommunication t o minimize airway
marginal signal propagation conditions. time.
Data DATA Use this command in channel or
manual ALE mode t o change the
radio mode from voice t o data.
Frequency F&EQUENCYmCEIVE/T€JANSMITl Use this command in channel o r
-<frequency-vaZue> manual ALE mode t o vary the trans-
mit and receive frequency.
Enter the frequency value as nnnnn.n [EHZI
)r nn.nnnn MHZ
Valid frequency range is 2000.00 t o 29999.99

. default form is kHz. If the optional
~ H ZThe
iey word denoting frequency type (ie, TR o r
RE) is omitted, the entered frequency is sent as
;he transmit and receive frequency. Fractional
Frequency notation is not permitted (ie, 12.5642
kHz is equal t o 12564.2 Hz). An error message
is issued if a fractional frequency value is in-
put.
3-42
operation
Table 3-7. Supplemental Operating Commands (Cont)

2OMMAND [NPUT FORMAT DESCRIPTION
Mode MODE_<:mode-se lection > Use this command in channel or
rhe mode selection can be transmit and receive emission mode.
LJSB/LSB/MFM*/CW.
*Reserved
Mode receive MODE RECEIVE-<mode selection> Use this command in channel or
rhe mode selection can be receive mode.
USB/LSB/AM/FM*/CW.
*Reserved
Mode transmit MODE TRANSMITJmode selection] Use this command in channel or
rhe mode selection can be transmit mode. If no mode is speci-
USB/LSB/MFM*/CW. fied, the default mode is USB.
*Reserved
~ ~ ~ ~
Monitor data MONITOR DATA ENABLEDISABLE Use the monitor data command t o
enable or disable the MS-ALE data-
monitor function. While the radio is
in ALE scan mode, the radio audio is
in the data mode until a channel
connection is established. Only after
the link is complete does the unit
switch to the respective mode called
out in the channel table.
The radio is in data mode during the
following conditions.
a. When receiving ALE tones

b. When output is muted
c. When radio i s scanning
d. When expecting ALE signals as
part of a handshake
e. When the channel-busy input is
enabled
Monitor voice Use this command t o enable o r dis-
able voice monitoring functions. In
ALE scan mode when monitor voice
is enabled, the radio stops scanning
and monitors received voice signals.
3-43
operation
Table 3-7. Supplemental Operating Commands (Cont)

COMMAND INPUT FORMAT DESCRIPTION
Mute MUTE ENABLEDDSABLE Use this command t o enable or dis-
able receive audio positive muting
ENABLE enables positive muting, DISABLE while the unit is scanning. Positive
disables positive muting. muting can be enabled in modes
other than scan; however, the mute
function is not asserted until scan
mode is entered.
PA PA OFF/ON/STANDBY Use this command to enable/disable
the receiver-transmitter’s transmit
operation. In channel ALE or manual
mode, the PA command controls
transmit operation. This command
allows direct control of transmit
operation. OFF and STANDBY both
inhibit transmit output; ON enables
the transmit output.
~~
PA power PA POWER LOWIMEDIUWHHGH/number Use this command in channel or

manual ALE mode to control the
Levels are low, medium, and high; or 1 to receiver-transmitter output power.
100%. The command allows the user to
select the current receiver-
The number can be any value between 1 and transmitter operating power level.
100; 0 to 34 is low, 35 t o 67 is medium, and 68 This value overrides any preconfig-
to 100 is high. ured value in the channel table (ie, if
the site is t o operate in low-power
output and an active channel has a
programmed value of high power, the
receiver-transmitter remains in low
power).
Select default S E L E C T m F A U L T default-address Use this command t o specify the
default calling address.
The default-address is the specified default
address.
Squelch m U E L C H sensitivity-level Use this command t o enter a squelch
setting. The larger the squelch num-
ber, the greater the audio signal
strength required t o break the
squelch. The sensitivity level is a
decimal number from 0 to 9 repre-
senting the level of squelch sensi-
tivity. An entry of zero indicates no
squelch action (the squelch function
is disabled).
3-44
operation
- Commands (Cont)
Table 3-7. Supplemental Operating
* *
COMMAND :NPUT FORMAT DESCRIPTION

Transmit Use this command in channel or
manual ALE mode to key the receiv-
er-transmitter. If a transmit time is
not indicated, the receiver-transmit-
ter is keyed continuously (for 3 min-
utes).
Enter a specific transmit time t o

indicate the time the receiver-trans-
mitter is to remain keyed (maximum
key-time is 120 minutes). Enter the
RE command t o interrupt the timed
key and return the HF-9000 system
t o receive state.
Tune NNE Use this command in channel o r
manual ALE mode t o tune the receiv-
er-transmitter and antenna coupler
to the frequency associated with the
channel.
Version @RSION Use this command t o display the
ALE software version.
Voice WICE Use this command in channel or
manual ALE mode to change the
receiver-transmitter mode from data
t o voice.
Volume W U M E - u o hme-le vel Use this command t o enter a volume
setting (for radios equipped with
Fhe volume level is a decimal number from digital remote volume control).
cero t o nine representing the level of sound
Jolume. An entry of zero t o nine sets the vol-
ime level.
Where is W E R E 3 name Use this command t o determine the
presence of a known call address.
rhe name is the name (address) appearing in This command initiates a search for
me of the following types of records: group, net, the name string. The first occurrence
ir other (floating or programmed). of the name string generates a re-
port. The report states the table
name together with the index num-
ber in the table.
3-45
operation
3.6.6 Standby Mode
To enter standby mode, enter HOST SET W A V E F O R M B D E $BY and then press Enter. In standby
mode, the audio is muted and the HF-9000 system does not sound or reply to ALE calls.
3.6.7 Fault Reports
Fault reports are generated whenever a detectable hardware failure occurs in the radio. Any of the
following reports are generated approximately every minute for as long as the fault persists. Radio fault
messages are listed in table 5-1.
3.6.8 Edit Commands
Use the edit commands t o modify the parameters loaded by the datafill. When these commands are
entered, the current value for a particular parameter is displayed, together with a prompt for a new-item
value. If no item change is required, press Enter to advance t o the next item in the parameter list (until
the end of the item list is reached).
If all edits are completed before reaching the end of the list, <CTRL-J> or <CTRL-Z> saves the changes
made and exits the editing session. Pressing <CTRL-C> aborts the editing session without saving any
changes.
The edit commands are listed in table 3-8.
3.6.9 Host Commands
The two types of host commands are list and load. The list command does not change variables but allows
the operator t o view the datafill contents. The response t o an unknown host list command consists of an
echoing of the command followed by three question marks and the standard HF-9000 system status line.
The load command changes the value of certain operational variables. Use host commands t o control the
functions listed below. The commands are described in detail in table 3-9.
Radio control data rate

Remote control data rate
9 Remote control flow control
3.6.10 List Commands
Use list commands t o display equipment operating parameters and variables. The list commands do not
change the parameters or variables. A <CNTRL-C> aborts the listing, <CNTRL-S> stops the output t o the
remote terminal. After a <CNTRL-S>, <CNTRL-Q> restarts the output.
The list commands are described in table 3-10.
3-46
operation
Table 3-8. Edit Commands

Edit channel -
EDIT-
CHANNEL-channel-index Use this command t o edit channel in-
formation. If the receive frequency is
The channel index range is 1 t o 100. modified, the receiver-transmitter
zeroizes the LQA entries for that chan-
nel. If the radio is capable of perform-
ing dual-frequency operation, the user
is prompted t o enter if this channel is
a dual-frequency channel.
Edit configu- -
EDIT-
CONFIGURATION_[config~rration-indexl Use this command t o edit the configu-
ration ration parameters (table 3-12).
Edit date -
EDIT-
DATE Use this command t o change the
HF-9000 system date.
Edit group -
EDIT-
GROUP Use this command t o edit ALE groups.
This command is used in sending and
receiving group calls.
~~~
Edit message -
EDIT-
MESSAGE-message-index Use this command t o edit stored AMD
messages.
Edit net -
EDIT-
NET-net-index Use this command t o edit the selected
ALE net. If this parameter is edited,
the HF-9000 system returns t o the
previous unlinked state.
Edit other -
EDIT-
OTHER-other-index Use this command t o edit addresses.
Other index range is 1 t o 100.

Edit scan -
EDIT&X.N-<SCAN_id> Use this command t o edit a scan list.
The scan id can be a scan list index or a scan

list name. The scan list index range is 1 t o 20.
Edit self -
EDIT~LF-self-address-index Use this command t o edit the HF-9000
system self-address. If the self-address
The self-address index range is 1 to 20. is edited, the HF-9000 system may re-
turn t o the previous unlinked state.
~~~~~ ~~ ~~~~~
Edit systern -
EDIT -
SYSTEM-[system-indexl Use this command t o edit the HF-9000
system configuration. Refer t o LOAD
SYSTEM in table 3-11.
Edit time -
EDITXME Use this command t o edit the HF-9000
system ALE time.
3-47
operation
Table 3-9. Host Commands

Host list HOSTLJST Use this command t o ex-
amine the current value of
variables that determine
how the functions listed in
paragraph 3.6.9 operate.
Host list -
H O S T X S T E M O T E DATA RATE Use this command t o ex-
remote data amine the current value of
rate a function.
~~
Host list -
HOSTUSTBLSCAN Use this command t o list
SELSCAP whether the S E L S C N
waveform is enabled or dis-
abled.
~~
Host load -
HOST LOAD R E M O T E ~ T A ~ T E - b a u d - r a t e Use this command t o
remote data change the value of vari-
rate The baud rate can be 300, 1200,2400,4800, or 9600. ables that control the oper-
ation of the functions listed
in oaramaoh 3.6.9.
Host load -
HOSTUADfiLSCANEABLEDDSABLE Use this command t o de-
SELSCAP termine if the HF-9000
system recognizes the
SE LS CAPwaveform.
~~
Host set -
HOST- -
SET WAVEFORMmDE-<operator> Use this command t o enter
waveform standby, test, and ALE
mode The operator can be SBY, TST, or ALE. modes of operation.
In SBY, the radio is offline and cannot transmit or receive

calls.
In m,the radio is placed in self-test mode.

In the radio is placed in ALE mode.
Table 3-10. List Commands

(COMMAND
~ ~~
:NPUT FORMAT DESCRIPTION

List abort UST&ORT Use this command t o
abort the current listing
when the output is empty
and outputs the HF-9000
system status.
3-48
operation
Table 3-10. List Commands (Cont)

2OMMAND [NPUT FORMAT DESCRIPTION
List channel L I S T ~ ~ N E L _ [ c h a n n e Z _ i n d e xorl . Use this command to list
L I S T ~ ~ N E L _ ~ c h u n n e Z _ s t u r t i n [channeZ-end-indexIl
dex the channel-record pa-
rameters within the spec-
Phe channel index lists the single channel record requested ified index ranges. If no
?om 1 to 100. index range is given, all
channel records are list-
rhe channel start index indicates one (of 1 t o 100) channel ed.
record. When using the list channel command, this field
represents the lower range of a block of channels t o be
listed. This field, when set t o the default value, indicates
;hat all 100 channel records are listed.
rhe channel end index indicates one (of 2 t o 100) channel

record. When using the list channel command, this field
represents the upper range of a block of channels t o be
listed. When this field is set to the default value, the first
field in this data structure indicates the record or records t o
3e listed. When not used, channel end index field is default-
2d.
List configu- - -
LIST CONFIGURATION~[configuration_~tem~indexl Use this command t o list
ration the configuration parame-
ters. Specify a single item
t o be listed by including
an index number with the
list configuration com-
mand. If an index number
is not specified, all pa-
rameters are displayed.
List date USTBTE Use this command to list
the current (machine)
date.
List fault ESTBULT Use this command to
retrieve data showing all
fault types, occurrences,
and current disposition.
After faults are listed,
fault counts are reset t o
zero.
3-49
operation

ZOMMAND [NPUT FORMAT DESCRIPTION
List group BSTBOUP LJse this command t o list
;he members of an ALE
TOUP.
List LQA LJse this command t o

iutput the recorded LQA
The search filter can be &DRESS (address/CEJA”EL iata. The user can specify
[channel number)/’AN (scan id)). 3 specific scan list, chan-
nel, other address, or all
The LQA score filter is E L or minimum score. :hannels.
The scan id is the scan list index or scan list name.
Optional fields, search filter and LQA score filter, reduce the
number of LQA entries t o those of interest. When the search
filter is omitted, all channels with any LQA entries are
reported. When the LQA score filter is omitted, only the
LQA entries whose decayed LQA score is greater than or
equal t o the LQA THRESHOLD configuration parameter are
reported. When the key word ALL is used, the LQA
THRESHOLD value is ignored and all LQA entries that
have not exceeded MAX LQA AGE are reported.
The address is a 1-t o 15-character address that may be in

the LQA table.
The channel number is the channel number used to display

LQA entries.
The scan list index is the scan list number (1 t o 20) used t o
display LQA entries.
The scan list name is a 1-t o 4-character string representing

the name of a scan list. It may be used t o reference a scan
list by name. The scan list name can be used in place of the
scan list index t o invoke scanning of a particular list. The
first character of a scan list name must be an alphabetical
character (A t o Z).
The minimum score is the minimum value that an entry

must have before it is displayed. This ranges from 0 t o 50.
3-50
operation

JOMWD INPUT FORMAT DESCRIPTION
i s t message Use this command t o list
;he requested message or
The “LAST’ option outputs the last message received or messages stored in the
programmed. receiver-tran smitter.
i s t net -
LIST-NET
- - [ADDRESS] [netindex] Use this command t o
iutput the contents of the
ADDRESS is an optional command-indicator that may make net address table t o the
the command easier t o use. remote terminal. This
:ommand outputs t o the
The net index is the record index that allows the user t o remote terminal all pro-
select a specific net record. grammed information for
a specific net address or
all net addresses.
List other -
LIST-
OTHER-[A.JDRESSl [other adrs index1 Use this command t o list
the other address that
The ADDRESS is an optional command indicator that may was either preloaded (by
make the command easier t o use. the datafill operator) o r
the address of the unit
The others adrs index is the record index allowing the user heard during operation. If
t o select a specific other-address record. one of the options is not
specified, all other ad-
dresses are listed.
List radio Use this command to
output the radio capabili-
The operator may be [ALL], [AJDIOI, [ ~ A B I L I T I E S I , ties reported by the radio.
[E3JISSIONl, [IDENTIFIER], or [MODEL].
List radio -
LIST-
RADIO-[SJATUSI Use this command t o
status output the radio status
The status is an optional command indicator that may make reported by the radio.
the command easier t o use.
The output is in a free-
text format.
~
List response -
LISTSSPONSE Use this command t o list
addresses of the
respondees of the last net
o r group call.
3-51
operation

~~

List scan list Use this command t o
output all attributes in a
The scan id can be the scan list index or the scan list name. scan list. If no accompa-
nying parameters are
The scan list index is a number ranging from 1 to 20 repre- given, all scan lists are
senting the scan list t o be displayed. listed.
The scan list name is a 1- t o 4-character string representing

the current name of a scan list. This scan list name can be
used in place of a scan list number when listing a scan list.
The first character of a scan list name must be an alphabeti-
cal letter (A t o Z).
When the DETAIL option is selected, the detail channel data

is output together with the channel numberb).
List self U S T B L F [ADDRESS] [self-address-index1 Use this command t o
output the contents of the
Address is an optional command-indicator that may make self-address table t o the
the command easier t o use. remote terminal. This
command outputs t o the
The self-address index is a number ranging from 1t o 20 remote terminal all pro-
representing the self-address to be displayed. grammed information for
a specific self-address, or
all self-addresses.
List status -
LISTBATUS Use this command t o
output the radio status
reported by the radio t o
the remote terminal. Ra-
dio status reports all
levels and equipment
settings.
List system Use this command t o list
the HF-9000 system pa-
The system parameter index is the system parameter whose rameters. The user has
value is t o be displayed. the option of specifying a
single item t o be listed by
selecting an index num-
ber t o accompany the list
system command. If an
index number is not spec-
ified, all parameters are
displayed.
List time -
LISTXME Use this command t o list
the current (machine)
time.
3-52
operation
3.6.1 1 Datafill Commands
Use datafill commands t o progradchange all of the items for particular record in the MS-ALE database.
Datafill commands are used within the datafill file t o initially program the entire database and are not
used for normal operation. The datafill commands are described in table 3-11.
Table 3-11. Datafill Commands

ClOMMAND INPUT FORMAT DESCRIPTION
Use this command t o en-
able or disable the data-
fill operation mode. Both
operational mode
commands and editing
commands produce not
acknowledged (NAK) res-
ponses to the datafill
device. If datafill is en-
abled, it inhibits regular
responses and replies
only with an acknowledge
(ACK)/NAK. Exit the
datafill mode with a data-
fill disabled command.
Load channel DADCHANNEL-channel-index Use this command t o load
transmit frequency all attributes of a channel
transmit-emission-mode record. The load channel
transmit-audio-mode command enables the
transmitqower-level user t o load all of the
sound-enable specified channel attrib-
receive-only-enable utes.
receive-emission-mode
receive-audio-mode Some radio systems do
sounding-interval not support duplex opera-
sounding-duration tion. In these cases, the
voice-monitor-enable frequency, emission mode,
antenna-number" and audio mode must be
antenna-direction" the same for transmit and
linkqrotection-enable" receive. To check the
frequencydesignator" capabilities of the radio in
use, enter LI M A L L
All items, including those designat. 1 as r served, must be and then press Enter.
specified in the order listed above. Reserved items require a
"dummy" value t o be entered. The above command parame-
ters are entered and separated using a delimiter (comma or
space).
Channel index is index number in channel table. Range is 1

t o 100.
"Reserved for future use. Reserved items require a "dummy" value t o be entered.
3-53
operation
Table 3-11. Datafill Commands (Cont)

ZOMMAND INPUT FORMAT IESCRIPTION
Load channel Transmit frequency represents the transmit frequency.
:Cant) Sounding duration is the duration of sounding, or the time
that sounding is active, for a particular channel (range is 0
t o 30 sec).
Voice monitor enable is the indicator to determine if the

voice monitor capability should be active for a certain chan-
nel (range is enable/disable).
Antenna number selects an optimal antenna configuration.

From 0 t o 9 may be selected indicating 1 of 10 antenna
configurations.”
Antenna direction selects the heading or azimuth, or from 0

t o 359 degrees.*
Link protection enable enables or disables the link protec-

tion.*
Frequency designator is a 2-character designator used t o

indicate a particular frequency.*
Sound enable enables or disables sounding for a particular

channel.
Receive only enable configures the indicated channel for

receive only operations (range is enable/disable).
Receive frequency is the receive frequency. If the receive

frequency is modified, the receiver-transmitter zeroizes the
LQA entries for that channel.
Receive emission mode sets the receive emission mode (ie,

USB, LSB, AM, CW, or ISB).
Receive audio mode sets the receive audio routing from the
receiver-transmitter (voice, data, or ALE). For receive and
transmit audio modes, ALE mode is reserved for future use.
ALE mode is used for data block transmissions.
Sounding interval is the interval sounding that occurs as

indicated in the channel record (range is 1 t o 180 min).
*Reserved for future use. Reserved items require a “dummy” value t o be entered.
3-54
operation

Load configu- -
LOADCONFIGURATION-<INDEX> This command is a root
ration -<associatedgarameter-val ue > command. Many com-
mands are formed from
INDEX is index number and associated parameter value. the j.LJADBNFIGUFL4-
TION command. Receiv-
Index number and associated parameter value are a set of er-transmitter operati on
paired values having the relationship shown in table 3-12. may be tailored to meet
Index numbers are shown in parenthesis in the following your needs using the
paragraphs. programmable configura-
I tion parameters.
The adaptive sounding parameter (1)enables the adaptive
sounding feature. Adaptive sounding dynamically adjusts
the sound interval, sound duration, and call duration, depen-
dent upon channel activity. Adaptive sounding defaults to
disabled.
NOTE
Adaptive sounding is unique t o Rockwell Collins,

Inc., ALE equipment.
If the any call parameter (2) is enabled, any calls may be

received. This parameter defaults t o enabled.
The call alert parameter (3) is reserved. It defaults t o en-

abled.
The call duration parameter (4) is a real value representing

the length of time in seconds a call is attempted (1t o 200
seconds) as specified in MIL-STD-188-141A, figure A-5A.
This parameter defaults to 8.
The call reject duration parameter (5) defines the maximum

time the receiver-transmitter stays on a channel waiting for
a “THIS IS” or “THIS WAS” conclusion section. Range is 5 t o
300 seconds with a default of 30 seconds.
The command LQA parameter (6) causes the receiver-trans-

mitter t o perform command LQA automatically when en-
abled. Default is disabled.
The data monitor duration parameter (7) causes the receiv-

er-transmitter t o stop scanning for MIL-STD-188-141A
traffic for duration specified. Range is 5 t o 600 seconds with
a default of 60 seconds.
The data monitor hang-time parameter (8) causes the receiv-

er-transmitter t o exit monitor mode if null traffic exceeds
specified hang time. Range is 1 t o 100 seconds with a default
of 10 seconds.
3-55
operation

2OMMAND DESCRIPTION
Load configu- [f the delay power on sounding parameter (9) is enabled, it
-ation (Cont) inhibits all automatic soundings for at least 5 minutes after
a long-term power outage. Defaults t o enabled.
If the initiate call with ptt parameter (10) is enabled, keying

the ptt initiates a call from scan mode. Defaults to enabled.
The keep-alive transmission parameter (11)maintains the

link when the transmission time if one of the linked stations
exceeds the return t o scan (system parameter 4)time. The
range is from 5 t o 1000 seconds with a default of 25 seconds.
This feature can be disabled when set to a value of 10 or
less.
NOTE
The keep-alive transmission parameter is unique t o

ALE equipment, and may not be compatible with
other vendors’ ALE equipment.
The listen before call time parameter (12) sets the duration
the receiver-transmitter listens on a channel, before placing
a call, t o determine if channel is busy. Entry is in millisec-
onds, range is 100 t o 10 000 ms, and default is 2200 ms.
The LQA degrade interval parameter (13) sets the frequency

the LQA scores are degraded. Range is 1 t o 60 minutes with
a default time of 2 minutes.
The LQA degrade method (14) determines the method used

to determine the LQA score. The range is 0 or 1;0 disables
degrading, 1 enables linear degrading per degrade interval.
Default is 1.
The LQA max age parameter (15) determines the maximum

age of LQA information before it is disregarded. The range is
1 t o 6000 minutes with a default of 180 minutes.
The LQA reject threshold level parameter (16) has a range of

0 t o 50, with default of one. When a scanning call is placed
and the LQA value of the response is less than the set value,
the caller transmits a “THIS WAS” in the acknowledge part
of the handshake. This signals the responding station to
return t o scan and not attempt to link on another channel.
This parameter also filters the output when listing LQA.
Values less than this parameter are not output, unless the
[‘scorefilter” option is used with the list LQA command.
3-56
operation

Load configu- NOTE
ration (Cont)
The LQA reject threshold level parameter has no
effect on incoming calls o r on calls placed from chan-
nel or manual modes.
The LQA sounding parameter (17) has a range of 0 t o 1000.

Default is 0. MIL-STD-188-141A specifies sounding at 0 t o 9.
Values from 10 t o 1000 specify a sounding interval in min-
utes. All scanned channels are sounded within this interval.
The max adrs characters parameter (18) designates the

maximum number of characters in the conclusion section
that are accepted when receiving a sound (1t o 15 charac-
ters). Default is 9 characters.
The max call attempts parameter (19) determines the maxi-

mum number of call attempts. The range is 1 t o 99 with a
default of 10.
The network tune time parameter (20) determines the time

given t o a called station t o respond. This parameter allows
for transmitter tuning or antenna rotation and response
time. The range is 0 t o 100 seconds with a default of 12
seconds.
If the power on in IAFi parameter (21) is enabled, it inhibits

MS-ALE automatic transmit functions after power on. De-
fault is disabled.
The rank order parameter (22) determines the method of

ranking channels within a scan list without LQA scores. The
range is 1 t o 6 with a default of 3.
The RCU programming parameter* (23) enables or disables

programming of the database from a remote control unit.
This field is defaulted t o enable.
The scan min dwell time parameter (24) sets the minimum
time spent on each channel during scanning. The range is
100 t o 10 000 ms with a default of 500 ms.
If the scanning between sounds parameter (25) is enabled, a

complete scan cycle between each sounding transmission is
performed. Default is enabled.
The sounding duration parameter (26) determines the

sounding duration. It has a range form 0 t o 30 seconds, with
a default of 8 seconds.
3-57
operation

Load configu- The sounding retry time parameter (27) indicates the inter-
ration (Cont) val of sounding retry if the sounded channel is busy. The
range is 0 t o 100 minutes with a default of 4 minutes.
If the terminate link xmt parameter (28) is enabled, the

receiver-transmitter sends a leading call and a “THIS WAS”
conclusion section before terminating a link. This causes the
other station(s) t o drop from the link. Default is disabled.
NOTE
The terminate link xmt parameter is unique t o ALE

equipment, and may not be compatible with other
vendors’ ALE equipment.
If the amd in ack parameter (29) is enabled, AMD messages

are transmitted in the acknowledgement of the handshake.
Default is disabled.
The received LQA process method parameter (30) deter-

mines the method used t o process LQA data as listed in the
following tabulation. The range is 0 t o 3 with a default of 3.
0 Uses the last reading exclusively

1 Uses the peak LQA value collected during a 5-minute
period. Age is determined by the LQA entry method.
2 Uses the highest of the low LQA values collected during
a 5-minute period. Age is determined by the LQA entry
used.
3 Uses average LQA during a 5-minute period. Age is
determined as the earliest LQA entry used.
The all call parameter (31) indicates if all calls can be re-
ceived. Default is enabled.
The call alert duration parameter* (32) indicates the maxi-

mum time in seconds of how long the external call alert is
signaled. If ptt is enabled while the external call alert is
signaled, the call alert stops. Range is 1 t o 60 with a default
Df 3.
3-58
operation

:OMMAND INPUT FORMAT DESCRIPTION
,oad date -
LOAD-TE-date-value I‘his parameter loads the
mtered date. Returned
The date value field contains the date represented in ASCII late is always in the form
format. Valid date value is one of the following forms. DD-MMM-YYYY.
DD-MMM-YYYY or DD/MM/YYYY
MMM-DD-YYW or MMM/DD/YYYY
MM-DD-YYYY or MM/DD/YY?’Y
The DD is the ASCII day of month (1 t o 31). I t must be valid

for month and year specified and may be one o r two charac-
ters.
The MM is the ASCII nuneric month of year (1to 12) and

may be one o r two characters.
The MMM is the ASCII alpha month of year;

JANUARY/~RUARY/MARCH/AF’RILJMAYIJUNE/
- -
JULY/AUGUST/~EMBER/OCTOBER/NOVEMBEW
DECEMBER. As shown above, at least three characters
must be entered for an alpha month.
The YYYY is the ASCII year (0 t o 9999) and may be one t o

four characters. If only one or two characters are entered a
leadinc “19” is assumed. _ _ _ _ ~
~
Load group -
LOmmOUPgroup-name member-list This command loads the
ALE group and defines
The group name is the name of the group. This name is used the group membership.
in the call command t o initiate a group call. The name must
be 1 t o 15 characters.
The member list is a list of addresses. Each address is a

string of 1 to 15 characters. Allowable address combinations
must adhere to the following rules.
a. The member list may contain up to 12 total words. A

word is defined as up to three characters in the string.
For example, an address with one t o three characters,
such as ABC, is defined as one word. An address com-
posed of four to six characters equals two words, etc.
b. The member list cannot exceed five unique first words. If
a member list is comprised of 3-character addresses, the
member list may contain up t o five addresses. However,
if this same list contains a 15-character address and its
first word is common to one of the first five addresses,
the member list then contains six addresses. This dupli-
cation of first address words in the group member list
can go on as long as 12 total words are not exceeded.
3-59
operation

Load LQA Reserved for future use.
Load message -
LOADmSSAGE-message-index message This parameter allows
the user to load any AMD
The LOAD MESSAGE command is used t o load or add a message stored in the
message. The message index range is 1 to 10. receiver-transmitter's
buffer memory.
The buffer memory can

contain up t o ten 90-char-
acter messages. Reserve
at least one of the 10
buffer locations for an
incoming message. The
number of buffers used t o
store incoming messages
versus the number of
messages programmed is
dynamic. For example, if
only one message is pro-
grammed, the other nine
buffers store incoming
messages.
Load net -
LOAD NET n e t - i n d e x m I C
net-address max-slot This parameter loads the
max-Tw -before-ack net address table.
antenna-number"
antennadirection"/
-
RESPONDENT
slot-number
respondent-address
Both the basic and the respondent parts of the net address
must be entered t o create a valid net address. The basic part
identifies the net address and the timing parameters. The
respondent part identifies the stations included in the net
and the slots in which they respond.
The scan id is the scan list index number or scan list name.
The net index is the index number assigned to the net. Up t o

20 star net records are available for use.
The net address may contain up t o 15 characters from the

authorized list of 36 characters.
*Reserved for future use. Reserved items require a "dummy" value t o be entered.
3-60
operation

COMMAND [NPUT FORMAT IESCRIPTION
Load net rhe max slot is an integer that can be set from 0 t o 24.
(Cont)
rhe Max Tw before ack defines the maximum number of
wait times (Tw) before the acknowledgement is sent. Setting
;his parameter t o zero causes the HF-9000 system to per-
norm a nonslotted NET call to net-address. This feature
dlows all parties hearing the call to stop, but they are not
required t o answer their given slot. The HF-9000 system
mtomatically advances t o the linked state after placing the
:all t o the net address.
The scan list index is a number ranging from 0 t o 20, that

represents the scan list from which the call is made. Zero
indicates the address is valid for all scan lists.

list by name. The scan list name can be used in place of a
wan list index t o invoke scanning of a particular list. The
first character of a legal scan list name must be an alphabet-
ical character (ie, A t o Z).
The antenna number parameter* is used t o select an anten-

na. The range is from zero t o nine, with zero being the de-
Fault.
The antenna direction parameter* is used to aim the select-

ed antenna. The range is from 0 t o 359 degrees, with zero as
the default.
The slot number parameter identifies the slot the respondent

answered in. The range is 1 to 24.
The respondent address can be up t o 15 alphanumeric char-

acters from the authorized list of 36 characters.
3-61
operation

INPUT FORMAT IESCRIPTION
L&ADaHER-ot he r-ind ex 'his command programs
other-address mother address entry so
scan-id h e HF-9000 system al-
remote-station-t une-time vays keeps the other
antenna-number" iddress, even if no LQA
antennadirection" :ntries have been collect-
waveform :d or they expire due t o
call-duration 6AX LQA AGE. The
hher address is the ALE
The scan id can be the scan list index or the scan list name. dentifier with which this
itation may wish t o com-
The other index parameter indicates the other-addre.ss- nunicate.
record t o be referenced in this record. The range is 1 t o 100.
The other address parameter consists of 1 t o 15 characters

within the list of 36 characters. An alternate wave-form
address must be three characters in length. If the other
address is changed through this command, the LQA values
associated with the previous address are zeroized.
The scan list index is a number ranging from 0 t o 20, and

represents the scan list from which the call is made. If set t o
zero, any scan list may be used.

the name of a scan list. It is used t o reference a scan list by
name. The scan list name can be used in place of a scan list
index t o invoke scanning a particular list. The first character
of a legal scan list name must be a n alphabetical character
(ie, A to Z). When the scan list index is the default value,
the name appearing in this field is used to look up the scan
list index for the command.
The remote station tune time parameter is the time in sec-

onds it takes the station t o tune for a response. The range is
0 t o 100 seconds with a default of 0 seconds. With 0 seconds
selected, the unit uses the network tune time parameter in
the configuration parameter table.
use. Reserved items require a "dummy" value t o be entered.
3-62
operation

2OMi"D INPUT FORMAT DESCRIPTION
Load other The antenna number parameter* is used to select an anten-
:Cent) na. The range is zero to nine with a default of zero.
The antenna direction parameter* is used t o aim the select-

ed antenna. The range is 0 to 359 degrees with a default of
zero.
The waveform parameter selects either PRIMARY or AL-

TERNATE waveform. Primary is MIL-STD-188-141A and
alternate is SELSCAN?
The call duration determines the amount of time the HF-
9000 system tries t o place a call. The range is 0 to 200 sec-
onds. Floating addresses are not loaded. If 0 seconds is
selected, the radio system uses the call duration specified in
the scan list used t o place the call. If 0 seconds is selected
for call duration in the scan list, the unit uses the call dura-
tion specified in the configuration parameter table.
*Reserved for future use. Reserved items require a "dummy"

value to be entered.
Load scan LOAD SCAN scan-list-index Phis parameter loads the
scanlist-name ;can table entries.
sound-duration
scan-call-duration
sounding-enable
scan-enable
list-of-channels
call-duration
The scan list index is a number ranging from 0 t o 20 and

represents the scan list being programmed.
The scan list name is a 1-to 4-character string representing

the name of a scan list. I t may be used t o reference a scan
scan list index t o invoke scanning of a particular list. The
first character of a legal scan list name must be an alphabet-
ical character (ie, A t o Z). Other characters may be alphanu-
meric.
The sound duration parameter specifies the length of the

sound duration time-frame. The range is 0 to 30 seconds. If
0 seconds is entered, the sound duration specified in the
configuration parameter table is used.
3-63
operation

2OMMAND INPUT FORMAT DESCRIPTION
~~
Load scan The sound call duration parameter selects a call duration of
Cont) 0 t o 200 seconds. If 0 seconds is entered, the unit uses the
call duration specified in the configuration parameter table.
The sounding enable parameter determines whether the

scan list is sounded when scanning is in progress.
The scan enabled parameter selects whether this scan list is

scanned on the next issuance of the SCAN command with no
parameters.
The list of channels parameter identifies a list of channels

scanned when this record is selected. Up t o 20 channels can
be placed within a list of channels. If the list of channels set
is changed, a complete new set of channels must be entered.
Load self BADSELF-self-address-index rhis parameter allows
my-adrs the operator t o load the
net-adrs self-address table. If this
net-response-slot parameter is loaded, the
slot-wait-time HF-9000 system may
max-slot-used return t o the previous
maximum-Tw-before-ACK unlinked state.
scan-id
waveform
The scan id is the scan list index or the scan list name.
The self-address index is a number between 1 and 20.
The my adrs parameter is an ASCII character string of t o A
15 alphanumeric characters. Alternate waveform addresses

must be three characters in length.
The net adrs is an ASCII character string of 1 t o 15 alpha-

numeric characters composing a valid MIL-STD-188-141A
calling address used by the radio-group whenever an ALE
link is attempted. This is the address of the radio group.
the net response slot identifies the slot this respondent is t o

use in responding t o a certain net call. The range is 1 t o 24.
The slot wait time is the number of Tw before slotted re-

sponse.
3-64
operation

Load self The max slot used parameter is the max slot used. The
Cont) range is 0 t o 24.
The maximum Tw before ACK parameter is the number of

Tw the unit awaits for an acknowledge to be received. A
value of zero indicates that no response is transmitted and
no acknowledgment should be expected.
The scan list index is a number ranging from 0 t o 20, repre-

senting the self-address t o be used, based upon the scan list
from which the call is made.
The scan list name is a 1-t o 4-character string representing

scan list index t o invoke scanning a particular list. The first
character of a legal scan list name must be an alphabetical
character (ie, A t o Z).
The waveform parameter gives the user the option of select-

ing a primary or alternate waveform. Primary is MIL-STD-
188-141A and alternate is S E L S C M .
Load system Use this command t o load
all HF-9000 system pa-
The index# and associated parameter value are a set of rameters.
paired values having the following relationship.
ASSOCIATED VALUE
INDEX PARAMETER (VALID RANGES)
-1 call-alert-bells -1 t o 1 0
-2 LQA-ou tp u t -En able/asabl e
-3 priority-override -En able/asabl e
-4 return-to-scan-time -10 t o seconds
-5 voice-monitor-duration 5 t o j.2J seconds
-6 automatic-sounding -
Enable/Esable
7 all-transmissions -
En able/&isable
P A (state) - -
OFF/STANDBY/~
P A Power Level ---
HI/LO/MED/L to 100
The call alert bells parameter specifies the number of bell

characters sent t o the remote terminal t o alert the operator
that a link is established. Also adjusts the call alert output
on the receiver-transmitter.
The LQA output parameter enableddisables the automatic

output of heard LQA values t o the remote terminal.
3-65
operation

NPUT FORMAT IESCRIF'TION
rhe priority override parameter enableddisables the listen
Iefore call time function. When priority override is enabled,
;he listed before call function is disabled.
rhe return t o scan time parameter specifies the amount of

?lapsed time needed since the last MS-ALE transmission or
xtivity, before signaling a return t o scan.
&%en monitoring for voice, the voice monitor duration pa-

Sameter specified the maximum break in voice activity
iefore the MS-ALE signals a return t o scan.
rhe automatic sounding parameter enableddisables the

iutomatic sounding function during operation and following
ilong-term power outage.
rhe all transmissions parameter enables/disables the ALE

system from attempting t o key the HF-9000 system. If MS-
4LE has control of the radio system, and the operator at-
;empts t o key the HF-9000 system, this parameter prevents
;he keying when it is enabled.
rhe pa (state) parameter enableddisables the transmit

?ortion of the receiver-transmitter. OFF and STANDBY both
inhibit transmit output. ON enables transmit operation.
rhe pa power level parameter is used t o select the transmit

mtput power. Levels are LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH, or
100%; 0 t o 34 is LOW, 35 t o 67 is MEDIUM, and 68 t o 100
is HIGH.
LOADTJMEtime-value lTse this command t o load
;he time of day clock t o
The time value parameter contains the time represented in Teflect the new time of
ASCII format. Time is entered in hours:minutes:seconds: lay.
tenths of seconds; but, seconds a n d o r tenths of seconds may
be omitted.
3-66
operation
Table 3-11. Datafill Commands (Cont) ~ _ _ _ ~ ~
>OMMAND INPUT FORMAT DESCRIPTION

!ero -
ZERO LQA [CHANNEL numberY[mDRESS address] Use this command t o
return HF-9000 system
~RO~NEL-[numberl programmed table(s) t o
factory presets. When the
-
ZE R O S N F I GURATI 0N configuration is zeroed, it
zeros both configuration
-
ZEROflHER and HF-9000 system
parameters. When a
-
ZEROBAN channel is zeroized, all
LQA entries associated
-
ZEROBLF with the channel are also
removed.
The address is the other address (1-t o 15-character string).
The number is the decimal number of the channel. Range is

1 t o 100. ~
Zero all -
ZEROAJL Use this command t o zero
all other and net address-
es, channels, LQA data,
scan lists, and AMD mes-
sages.
Self-addresses, configura-
tion, and HF-9000 system
parameters are set t o
their default values.
3-67
operation
Table 3-12. Configuration Parameters

INDEX $SSOCIATED PARAMETER VALUE (VALID RANGES)
1 rdapt ive-sound ing EnableIDisable
3 rny-call mable/J&able
3 :all-alert Enable/l&able
i :all-duration -1t o Zoo seconds
1 :all-reject-duration 5 t o 300 seconds
?I :ommandLQA %able/&sable
7 iata-monitor-d uration 5 t o 600 seconds
3 iata-monitor-hang-time -1to 100 seconds
3 ielayqower-on-sounding &able/IJsable
10 :nitiate-call_withptt &able/I&able
11 keep-alive-transmission 3 to seconds
12 'isten-before-call-time - 100 t o 10000 ms
13 LQA-degrade-interval -1t o 60 seconds
14 LQA-degrade-method -0 t o 1
15 LQA-max-age -1 t o minutes
16 LQA-reject-threshold-level -0 tom
17 LQA-sound ing -0 t o m
18 nux-adrs-characters -1t o 15characters
19 nux-call-attempts -1t o 99
20 petwork-tune-time -0 t o 100 seconds
21 Dower-onin-iar -Enable/Gsable
22 ra nk-o rd e r -P tog
23* rcujrogramming -
Enable/asable
24 scan-min-dwell-time -
100 t o 10000 ms
25 scanning-between-sounds -Enabl e/Esable
26 sounding-d uration -0 t o 30 seconds
27 soundingretry-time -0 t o 100 minutes
28 terminate-link-xmt - Enable/asable
29 amd-in-ack -Enable/Esable
30 receivedLQAqrocess-method -0 t o 3
31 all-call -Enable/&able
32 call-alert-duration -1 t o 60 seconds
33" wassword -
Enable
*Reserved for future use. Reserved items require a "dummy" value t o be entered.
3-68
operation
Table 3-13. Remote Terminal Command Summary

COMMAND COMMAND
ALL CALL or ALLCALLJall call address(es)l ESTLJSTBLS CAN
_[<operator>]
ALL TRANSMISSION-[EJAl3LE/DDSABLEl W S T U m B M O T E DATA RATE
-----
[300/1200/2400/96001
ANY CALL or ANYCALL-[any call address] HOST LOAD SELSCAN-[mAl3LE/DDSABLEl
_[<operator>]
AUDIO-WVIC E/DDTA/&El HOST SET W A V E F O R M M D E [SBY/TST/ALEl
--
AUDIO REC EIVE-WVIC E/DDTN&El -
HOST-
VERBOSE-[L/@mnel
AUDI 0 TRANSMIT-WVIC E/DDTN&El LJSTBORT
~OMATICRESPONSE-[ENAl3LE/DDSABLEl L J S T B A N N E L J I to 100/noneI or [channel index
startl-[channeZ index end1
-
CALLJadd re ssI-[< op e ra to r >1 LJST-NFIGURATION-[I to 33 /none1
-
C H A " E L J 1 to 100/ nonel LJST-TE
-
CONVERSE-[<I to 90 text characters>l -
LI S T Z U L T
DATA -
LISTBOUP
DATA.FILL-[EJAB LE/'DDSABLEl -
LISTuA-[<search filter> / nonel-[d,QA score fil-
ter>/nonel
DISCONNECT -
LISTmSSAGE-[message number /&ST/ nonel
E D I T W N E L - [ I to 1001 LIST---
- NET [ADDRESS/none]-[l to 20/nonel
EDIT~NFIGURATION_[<configurationindex>] -
LIST~HER_[ADDRESS/nonel-[Zto 100 / nonel
EDITUTE -
L I S T m I O _ [ < o p e r a t o r >/ nonel
WITBOUP -
LIST~IO-[<~ATUS>/noneI
EDITmSSAGE-[I to 101 -
LIST- RESPONSE
-
EDIT-
NETJ to 201 -
L I S T E A N J 1 to 20/scan list index nameinonel
--[DETAIL/nonel
-
EDIT-
0THER-U to 1001 -
LIST~LF-[ADDRESS/nonel_[lto 20/nonel
-
EDIT-SCANJI to 20/scan list name] -
L I S T B A T U S or <CR>
-
EDIT-SELFJ1 to 201 -
LISTSJSTEMJ to 9 / nonel
-
EDITSJSTEMJI to 91 -
LISTTJME
-
EDITTJME -
L O A D W N E L - [ c h a n n e Z record datal
-
FREQUENCYJnone /RECEIVE I K W S M I T I -
L O m D N F I G U R A T I O N - [ I to 33l-[~parameter
-[<frequency value>] uaZue>l
-
HOSTXST -
LOAD-TE-Ldd / mm /yyI
-
H O S T X S T B M O T E DATA RATE -
LOADBOUP-[group namel-[member address
list1
3-69
operation
Table 3-13. Remote Terminal Command Summarv (Cont)

COMMAND COMMAND
-
LOAD~A~[hh:mm:ssl_[addressl~[channell -
RECEIVE
-[Rxberl-[Rx sinadl-[Tx ber1JTx sinadl
LOAD-
- MESSAGEJI to 101-[<1 to 90 text -
SCAN_[I to 20/scan list namelnonel
characters>]
&Q4D NET [<net info>] -
S ELECTBFAULT-[defa ult address]
L O A D B H E R J a t h e r info>] -
SOUND-[EJABLE/DDSAB LEI
~ f l D S C A N - [ < s c a ninfo>] -
SOUNDBANNEL-[I to 1001-[sound duration
(min)l
mADBLF-[<seZf address info>I -
SOUND~LAY_[minutes/none(30)l
XADSJSTEM-[I to 9l-[<uaZue>l -
SOUNDmW
- -
LOAD TIME_[hh:mm:ss.sl S&UELCH-[O to 91
W U A L J I to 100/nonel T&ANSMIT-[minutes / none (3)l
MODE [USB/LSB/AM/CWl TUNE
MODE RECEIVE [USB/LSB/AM/CWl VERSION
MODE TRANSMIT [USB/LSB/AM/CWl VOICE
MONITOR~TA-[~Al3LE/DDSAl3LEl m U M E - [ O to 91
MONITO R E I C E-[EJABLE/DDSABLE] WHE RE&[addre ss nam e1
~TE-[EJAl3LE/DDSAl3LEl ZERO ALL
PA [OFF/ON/STAND BY] ZERO [table]
PA POWER [LOW/MED/HJGWI to 1001
3-70
I Section 4 Theory
SECTION 4
THEORY
4.1 GENERAL
This section contains information describing overall operating principles of the HF-9000 system. For
detailed theory about the units comprising the HF-9000 system, refer t o the applicable instruction book
listed in table 1-8.
4.2 SINGLE SYSTEM
As shown in figure 4-1, the single HF-9000 system is composed of a radio set control, a receiver-trans-
mitter, and an antenna coupler interconnected by one RF coaxial cable and three fiber-optic cables. All
control and status information is transferred serially between units via the fiber-optic cables. Transmit
and receive RF signals are supported by the RF coaxial cable.
The radio set control provides the operator interface for selection of operating mode, emission mode,
emission power level, and operating frequency. Displayed information includes HF-9000 system status and
fault diagnostics.
As shown in figure 4-1, the radio set control consists of a display, power supply, and microprocessor.
Operator inputs from front-panel controls are routed t o the HF-9000 system over a fiber-optic link. Status
information from the HF-9000 system is returned to the radio set control over a fiber-optic link and
displayed on the radio set control display.
The receiver-transmitter provides the signal processing required t o translate signals between the RF and
audio spectrums.
Refer t o figure 4-1. The receiver-transmitter consists of a chassis and several major modules, depending on
the unit. The modules may include control, power supply/audio, receivedexciter, power amplifier,
waveform control, and for an externally-controlled HF-9000 system, either an Aeronautical Radio, Inc.
(ARINC) 429 interface or a MIL-STD-1553B interface. The control module contains a microprocessor
system including read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), nonvolatile memory, timers,
and parallel inpub'output (I/O) devices. The control module has access t o control and status lines to/from
all other modules. On command from the radio set control (or from an external bus such as ARINC 429),
the control module configures the receiver-transmitter and the HF-9000 system for the selected frequency
and mode of operation.
The RF/IF portion of the receiver-exciter module employs a dual-conversion frequency scheme t o translate
signals between the audio spectrum and the desired RF frequency. The frequency synthesizer portion of
the receiver-exciter module provides all injection frequencies required for RF-to-audio and audio-to-RF
frequency translation. The microprocessor-compensated frequency standard provides a stable time base
reference for the frequency synthesizer.
The power supply portion of the power supply/audio module converts the +28-V dc primary power input t o
regulated voltages required by other receiver-transmitter modules.
The ARINC 429 or MIL-STD-1553B interface modules receive control data from an external bus, reformat
the data, and apply it t o the control module. The control module treats the data as if it came from the
HF-9000 system radio set control and issues system commands over the fiber-optic bus. Monitor data from
the receiver-transmitter modules and from the rest of the HF-9000 system is sent by the control module t o
the interface module. The interface module formats the data and applies it t o the external bus.
4- 1
theory
As shown in figure 4-1, the HF Antenna Coupler HF-9040 consists of the discriminator, RF tuner, and
radio set control. HF Antenna Coupler HF-9041 h a s an additional external element t o aid in tuning shunt
and long-wire antennas. The microprocessor in the control module is directed by software to configure the
RF tuner for proper phasing and minimum voltage signal-wave radio (vswr) in response to command
signals from the receiver-transmitter and error signals from the discriminator. Tuning data for previously
tuned frequencies is stored by the microprocessor memory and used to minimize future tuning times when
that frequency is used again.
4.3 DUAL SYSTEM
As shown in figure 4-2, the dual HF-9000 system is composed of two single HF-9000 systems sharing a
common hf antenna.
In dual receive operation, both HF-9000 systems can receive using the same antenna with the receive
signals bypassing both antenna couplers. With one of the HF-9000 systems in transmit mode, the other
HF-9000 system is disconnected from the antenna and is unable t o receive or transmit. The radio set
control of the disconnected HF-9000 system displays MSG 0090, indicating to the operator that this
HF-9000 system cannot use the antenna at this time. If the operator tries t o transmit while the other
HF-9000 system is transmitting, the radio set control displays MSG 0080, indicating that transmission is
not possible while the other HF-9000 system is still transmitting.
NOTE
Receive audio may be heard from the disconnected receiver if the second transmitter is
operating on a nearby frequency.
In order t o change back t o dual receive operation from transmit or from receive through tuned coupler, the
frequency or emission mode of either radio set control must be changed. This causes both antenna couplers
t o be bypassed so the received signal is applied directly from the antenna to both receivers.
NOTE
Optimum signal reception in a dual system is achieved by momentarily keying the

receiving HF-9000 system t o tune the antenna coupler t o the received frequency. However,
this disconnects the second HF-9000 system from the antenna.
Table 4-1 shows the five possible dual system operating states. The HF-9000 system can only be in one of
the five states at any one time. Table 4-1 shows each HF-9000 system function for each operating state
and each radio set control status display for each operating state.
In the dual receive state, both receivers are connected to the antenna and the respective antenna and the
respective antenna coupler tuning networks are bypassed so the received signals are applied directly t o
each receiver. Each radio set control display is normal. To reach the dual receive state, both parts of the
dual system must be unkeyed (operating in receive-through-coupler 1 or 2) and either the frequency or
emission mode of either radio set control must be changed.
To reach the transmit (xmt) state, the push-to-talk (ptt) key of the desired HF-9000 system must be
pushed. The transmit state can be reached from the dual receive state or from either of the
receive-through-coupler states. In the transmit state, the keyed transmitter is connected to the antenna
and its radio set control display is normal. The opposite HF-9000 system is disconnected from the antenna
and its radio set control display shows MSG 0090. Should the opposite HF-9000 system be keyed, the radio
set control display changes t o MSG 0080, indicating that the other HF-9000 system is transmitting.
4-2
theory
Typical HF-900 System, Block Diagram

Figure 4-1
Change 3 4-3/4-4
theory
ANTENNA
RADIO SET
CONTROL --
RECEIVER-
TRANSMITTER
NO I
--
ANTENNA
COUPLER
NO I
0/6 -
RF COAX
I
1 RADIO SET
CONTROL
NO 2
RECEIVER-
TRANSMITTER
NO2
1- ANTENNA
C$iP>ER
I F - 1
TPB-1264-012
Dual HF-9000 System, Block Diagram

Figure 4-2
Table 4-1. HF-9000 Dual Svstem Operating States

STATE SUBSYSTEM 1 CONTROL 1 SUBSYSTEM 2 CONTROL 2
DUAL Receive Normal Receive Normal
RCV
XMT 1 Transmit Normal Disconnected from antenna MSG 0090
MSG 0080*
RTC 1 Receive-through-tuned Normal Disconnected from antenna MSG 0090
coupler
XMT 2 Disconnected from antenna MSG 0090 Transmit Normal
MSG 0080*
RTC 2 Disconnected from antenna MSG 0090 Receive-through-tuned Normal
coupler
"MSG 0080 means opposite subsystem is keyed.
4-5
theory
The receive-through-tuned coupler state is reached only from the respective transmit state. Unkeying a
transmitting HF-9000 system automatically places that HF-9000 system in the receive-through-tuned
coupler state. The related radio set control display is normal. The opposite HF-9000 system is disconnected
from the antenna and its radio set control displays MSG 0090. If the opposite HF-9000 system is keyed,
the first HF-9000 system radio set control displays show MSG 0090. The receive-through-tuned coupler
state is especially useful when weak o r noisy signals are being received.
A dual system using Receiver-Transmitter HF-9030 with Service Bulletin No 2 installed or using any
other HF-9000 receiver-transmitters, automatically switches from the receive-through-tuned coupler state
t o dual receive within 20 t o 30 seconds after release of ptt key unless the receiver squelch is enabled. If
squelch is enabled, the HF-9000 system remains in receive-through-tuned coupler while squelch is active
and then reverts t o dual receive within 20 to 30 seconds after the receiver is squelched.
Table 4-2 shows the logic level of each HF-9000 system output line for each of the five operating states.
The external element E (Jl-N) output indicates when the HF-9000 system is in the transmit state. This
output is monitored by the status A (Jl-E) input of the opposite HF-9000 system. The external element F
(Jl-P) output indicates when the HF-9000 system is in the dual receive state. This output is monitored by
the status B (Jl-F)input of the opposite HF-9000 system. The external +28-volt (J1-U) output indicates
when +28-volt power is applied t o the HF-9000 system. This output is monitored by the dual c28-volt
(Jl-D) input of the opposite Hf-9000 system. When +28-volt power is removed from one Hf-9000 system,
the external +28-volt output of that Hf-9000 system goes t o logic low and the opposite HF-9000 system
reverts t o normal single-system operation. For this reason, removing power from the faulty half of a dual
system allows the opposite HF-9000 system to operate normally as a single system.
STATE SUBSYSTEM 1 SUBSYSTEM 2
1
ELEFJ1-P
(DRU I EXT 28 J1-U
(PWR1) I ELE E J1-N
(TX.2)
1
ELE F J1-P
(DR2)
EXT 28 J1-U
(PWR2)
DUAL RCV 0 1
XMT 1
RTC 1
XMT 2
0
1
1
1
1
1
I:
I1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
RTC 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
0PPOSITE STATUS A STATUS B 28V IN J1-D STATUS A STATUS B 28V IN
SYSTEM J1-E J1-F J1-E J1-F J1-D
INPUT
SUBSYSTEM 2 I SUBSYSTEM 1
Note: 5-volt logic except for J1-U which is 28-volt logic.
4-6
theow
4.4 AUTOMATIC LINK ESTABLISHMENT
An hf operator’s knowledge of RF signal propagation and the ability to apply that knowledge to select
useable hf frequencies is crucial t o the success of conventional hf communications. Using conventional
methods, an hf operator typically reaches a distant station on the first try less than 30 percent of the time.
Using automatic link establishment (ALE), the success rate for first try connectivity can be improved t o
nearly 90 percent. In addition, ALE operators require no special training or knowledge of hf signal
propagation. ALE improves hf communications quality and connectivity, and reduces operator tasks
required t o communicate under varying propagation conditions. The HF-9000 systems can be used with an
external ALE control processor, such as ALE Control Processor 309M-1, o r several HF-9000 system
receiver-transmitters (listed in table 1-2) include embedded ALE capability.
Many people unfamiliar with ALE may ask how ALE can make such a drastic difference in hf connectivity
and at the same time ease the burden on hf operators. The remainder of this paragraph provides an
overview of ALE and helps answer those questions. The material presented here is intended to provide a
base t o build upon as experience is gained in the day-to-day operation of ALE systems. If already
experienced as an ALE operator, the following pages may serve as a useful review.
ALE is a means of automatically establishing a radio link between two hf stations or a group of stations.
Rockwell Collins, Inc. ALE supports the mandatory requirements of the Interoperability and Performance
Standards for Medium and High Frequency Equipment MIL-STD-188-141A. It is important t o understand
that radios employing ALE still operate in the hf band and all of the characteristics of hf signal
propagation still apply. There are two major differences between conventional hf and ALE hf. Unlike
conventional hf communications, ALE allows selective calling of other similarly-equipped hf stations. ALE
also automatically chooses the best available frequency from a preprogrammed list of frequencies t o make
the call. All that an ALE hf operator needs t o know is:
The addresses (ALE call sign) of other ALE stations with which communications is desired
The scan list(s) t o be used for operation
Establishing ALE communications is similar t o placing calls using a telephone. An operator selects the
desired station address and initiates the call. The ALE system automatically establishes a 2-way
communications link. The calling station’s address is displayed for the receiving station t o indicate who
placed the call. Once a link is established, the ALE hf system operates the same as a conventional hf
system.
4.4.1 Scanning
Although the ALE system can link on a manually-selected frequency (manual ALE operation), or on a
preset channel (channel ALE operation), ALE systems are most effective when operating in automatic
(scanning) ALE mode. During automatic ALE operation, a scan list (typically comprised of 5 t o 10 preset
channels throughout the hf band) is continually scanned at a 2- to 5-channels per second rate. During
scanning, the ALE system listens for soundings or calls from other ALE stations. Receive audio is
automatically muted during scanning t o reduce operator fatigue.
4-7
theory
4.4.2 Sounding and Link Quality Analysis
There are two ALE attributes known as sounding and link quality analysis (LQA) that are used in the
automatic channel selection process. Each ALE station is normally programmed t o periodically transmit
short bursts of data (soundings) on each scanned channel. The soundings contain station identity
information and are used by other ALE stations t o rate the best channel for them to call your station. ALE
stations that receive the soundings use LQA circuits to analyze signal quality and assign it a numerical
LQA value. The resulting LQA value is stored in a database along with the sounding station’s address and
the channel on which the sounding was received. The LQA value is used t o rank the channels for
subsequent calls t o the sounding station’s address. The higher the LQA value, the better the channel. ALE
operators also have the capability t o manually initiate sounding at any time t o allow other stations t o
update their LQA database. When an operator places a call t o another ALE station, the ALE system
automatically picks the best frequency from the scan list (based upon the stored LQA values) t o support
communications between the two stations.
To initiate an ALE call, an operator selects the desired station address and keys the hf system. The ALE
system reviews channel LQA values for the desired address (which represent near-real-time propagation
conditions) and establishes a data handshake between the two stations on the best available channel.
Once the 2-way link is established, receive audio is restored and normal voice or data communications can
begin. If a link attempt is not successful on the first channel selected, or if the channel is busy, alternate
channels are automatically selected. The call is then repeated until either a link is established, all active
channels have been tried a t least once, or the call attempt is aborted by the operator.
4.4.3 Calling Options and Addresses
The station-to-station call (also called point-to-point or individual call) is the simplest form of an ALE call.
Station-to-station calls are intended t o establish a 2-way communications link between two individual ALE
stations on a single, automatically selected channel. Although several other ALE calling options exist,
station-to-station calls represent the majority of ALE traffic. Refer to figure 4-3. Station-to-station calling
is accomplished through a 3-part data handshake between the calling and receiving stations. The data
handshake sequence is automatic and begins when an operator initiates a station-to-station ALE call. The
calling station transmits a call, the receiving station transmits a response, and the calling station
transmits an acknowledgement t o confirm 2-way communications capability. The call, response, and
acknowledgement are short frequency shift keying (FSK) transmissions that identify the address of the
station being called, as well as the address of the calling station. Once the link is established, both
operators are alerted that communications can begin. After the operators have been alerted that
communications can begin, the operator that placed the call should initiate the conversation. This prevents
both operators from attempting t o transmit a t the same time.
There are three types of addresses associated with station-to-station calls; self-addresses, other station
addresses, and floating addresses. A self-address is essentially an ALE call sign that allows other ALE
stations t o place ALE calls t o your station. It also serves as the calling station identifier when placing ALE
calls. Another station address is the self-address of other stations with which communications is desired.
Self-addresses and other station addresses are normally preprogrammed into your ALE system.
Whenever your station links with a station that is not preprogrammed into your other station address
table, that station’s address (referred t o as a floating address) is automatically stored for future recall.
Most ALE addresses consist of 3-alphanumeric characters even though addresses up to 15 characters in
length may be used.
4-8
theory
,
STATION BBB RECEIVER
SCANNING 10 CHANNELS
AIRCRAFT AAA
(2 CHANNEL PER SECOND)
INITIATES CALL
LEADING C A L U
SCANNING CALL -~ CONCLUSION_1
8.0 SEC 1.176 SEC
(CALL DURATION)
0CALL TO
BBB
TO
BBB
TO
BBB
TO
BBB
THIS
ISAAA
1 1
392ms 392ms 1392ms 392ms i ’ 1 1
392ms 392ms 392ms I
@ RESPONSE
I
~
AAA
TO
1 I THIS
IS BBB
I
@ ACKNOWLEDGEMENT I I I
TPC-29434 11T
Station-To-Station Automatic Link Establishment

Figure 4-3
In addition t o station-to-station calls, automatic communications links may be established using any of the
hf ALE calling options listed below. Differences between the following types of ALE calls consist primarily
of how many stations are t o be contacted and how those stations are expected t o respond. All of the calling
options listed below attempt t o call a number of ALE stations with a single call on a single channel. It
should be noted that propagation might not support communications between the entire grouping. This is
due t o differences in propagation conditions between muItiple stations’ locations.
4.4.4 All Calls
An all call allows you to call all ALE stations in your network with no response transmissions expected
from the other stations. The all call establishes a 1-way communications path t o many stations on one
channel. All stations that receive an all call stop scanning and listen for your message without tuning or
keying their transmitters on that channel. A practical application of an all call might involve a situation
where you want t o broadcast an emergency message t o as many stations as possible and you do not expect
or need a response from those stations. The all call address is permanently stored in your ALE system
memory.
4-9
theory
4.4.5 Any Calls
An any call allows you t o call all ALE stations in your network and requires a randomly-timed response
from every station that hears the call. An any call establishes several 2-way communication paths
simultaneously on one channel. The any call does not guarantee all responding stations successfully link
due t o possible random response collisions. The any call address is permanently stored in your ALE
system memory.
4.4.6 Group Calls
A group call allows you t o call a group of stations using a shared group name. When a group call is placed,
the ALE system sequentially transmits the self-addresses of each station in the group. Group stations
respond t o the group call, one at a time, in reverse order from the calling sequence. A group call attempts
t o establish several 2-way communication paths simultaneously on one channel. Unlike net calls, which
require prior coordination by a network manager, group calls allow you to contact a group of stations
knowing only their self-addresses and scan list. Although group call parameters can be preprogrammed,
group calls are usually impromptu, requiring quick edit capability t o compile group call parameters. For
this reason, group calls are normally originated by stations that utilize remote terminals for HF-9000
system operation rather than cockpit hf controls.
4.4.7 Net Call
A net call allows you t o call a predefined group of stations with a single shared net address and require
them t o respond, one at a time, in a predefined order. A net call establishes a communications path t o
several stations simultaneously. A no response net call is a variation of the net call. As the name implies,
a no response net call allows you t o call a predefined group of stations with a single shared net address
but does not require them t o respond. Configuring ALE stations for net calls requires detailed coordination
by the network manager for all net stations.
4.4.8 Silent Operation
During non-ALE operation, when the operator must key the HF-9000 system to cause it t o transmit, silent
operation prevents emission of RF energy.
4.4.9 System Programming
The type of information preprogrammed (datafilled) into your ALE system prior t o use varies depending
on the overall communications plan for your network. Simple ALE networks may only involve station-to-
station ALE calls on a limited number of channels, and therefore require a relatively simple datafill. More
complex ALE networks might involve numerous stations and more advanced calling options, such as net
calls, and therefore require a relatively large datafill. The majority of programmed information contained
in a typical datafill file is common t o all stations in a network. There are a few self-address and net
response parameters that are different for each station. As a result, each station requires a unique datafill
file. In a simple network, only the self-address information may need t o be unique for each station. In
more complex networks, numerous other presets and parameters could be varied on a station-by-station
basis, depending on mission requirements. In a simple network, all stations may operate within the same
communications net using a single scan list. In a more complex network, one or more aircraft assigned to a
local net may have a requirement t o fly t o a distant location. Those aircraft must be assigned more than
one net address so they can assume a new net identity when they leave the coverage area of their local
net. Additionally, the aircraft must activate a different scan list containing different channels.
4-10
theory
Regardless of the complexity of your ALE communications network plan, there is a certain amount of
information that must be loaded into each ALE system to allow that system t o operate efficiently with
other ALE systems. Typically, one person (a network manager) is responsible for configuring and
managing the ALE network; for assigning station addresses, channel frequencies, and other system
parameters. These preprogrammed parameters determine the operational characteristics of the ALE
system on a network-wide basis. The network manager generates or edits a datafill file using an IBM-
compatible personal computer (PC). These files are downloaded from the host PC to a portable (palmtop or
laptop) PC. The portable computer is used t o transport the datafill files to the operational station and to
electronically transfer the datafill files to the receiver-transmitter. This preliminary setup activity is
normally accomplished without operator involvement.
ALE represents a quantum leap in hf communications technology in terms of communications quality,

connectivity, and ease of operation. These improvements far outweigh the added network planning and
datafill requirements not present in conventional hf systems.
4.4.10 Datafill Operation
HF-9000 system datafill is required prior to ALE operation. The type and amount of information in a
typical datafill varies depending on the overall communications plan. Datafill can be accomplished using
three different methods, depending on HF-9000 system configuration. An external data transfer device
(DTD) connected to J11 on the receiver-transmitter front panel can be used for datafill. Datafill can be
accomplished using an IBM-compatible portable computer connected t o RS-232 interface port J10 on the
receiver-transmitter front panel. Aircraft having integrated cockpit systems can download datafill
information t o the HF-9000 system over the MIL-STD-1553B data bus. Datafill information is stored in
memory within the receiver-transmitter.
4.4.11 Zeroize Operation
Datafill information can be zeroized (erased) by three different methods. The ZEROIZE switch
on the receiver-transmitter front panel erases datafill and keyfill information whether o r not power is
applied t o the HF-9000 system. When the HF-9000 system is operating, the zeroize command can
originate from the radio set control or be sent to the receiver-transmitter via the MIL-STD-1553B data
bus.
4.5 INFORMATION DELETED
Information deleted from page 4-11 and moved from page 4-12 to page 4-11.
Change 3 4-11/4-12
I Section 5 Maintenance
SECTION 5
MAINTENANCE
5.1 GENERAL
The HF-9000 system contains a radio frequency receiver-transmitter. When operated into an
antenna, it may produce electromagnetic fields near the antenna that exceed Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) recommended maximum limits.
Be sure all personnel are clear of the hf antenna when performing radio checks. Do not touch
the antenna coupler RF output terminal, antenna lead-in wire, insulated feedthrough, or the
antenna itself while the microphone is keyed or while the HF-9000 system is in transmit self-
test. Serious RF burns can result from direct contact with the above items when the HF-9000
system is transmitting.
If your HF-9000 system is equipped with an automatic link establishment (ALE) control
processor, it sounds (transmits a short tone burst) and responds to ALE calls automatically
(without operator intervention). Anytime local regulations prohibit hf emissions, ensure HF-
9000 system is in standby mode.
1-
This equipment contains electrostatic discharge sensitive (ESDS) devices. Use special
handling methods and materials t o prevent equipment damage.
Keep protective covers on fiber-optic connectors when interconnect cables are not connected.
Dust and moisture on the internal optical lenses of the connectors degrade HF-9000 system
operation.
During operation or built-in test (BIT), the HF-9000 system may detect an abnormal
condition which requires operator attention but does not inhibit use of the HF-9000 system.
The radio set control displays MSG 3040 (high vswr) for a defective antenna system, MSG
3020 for antenna coupler high temperature, or MSG 5016 for power amplifier high
temperature. A n MSG 3020 or MSG 5016 condition causes HF-9000 system performance
degradation if not corrected.
5-1
maintenance
Hand tighten fiber-optic connectors only. Never use a wrench or spanner t o tighten. Do not
overtighten safety wire. Most automatic safety-wire pliers exert excessive force on the
connectors. Hand tighten safety wire or use extreme caution when using automatic safety-
wire pliers.
The HF-9000 system self-test procedures described in this section verify operation of the complete HF-9000
system and provide fault isolation t o the functional unit, module, or circuit card. Procedures in this section
test all functional units and fiber-optic cables. Refer to the interconnect wiring diagrams in the installation
section of this instruction book t o verify interface wiring between functional units and associated HF-9000
system wiring.
Procedures in this section provide repair to the functional unit level. Refer to the applicable intermediate
maintenance instruction book for circuit card or module replacement procedures, and t o the applicable depot
maintenance instruction book for piece part repair procedures.
5.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
The HF-9000 system requires no preventive maintenance.
5.3 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING
5.3.1 General
The HF-9000 system can be tested in the aircraft or as a complete system in a shop environment. All tests
are performed using the self-test (built-in test equipment (BITE)) capabilities of each unit in the HF-9000
system.
The self-test establishes minimum performance criteria for the HF-9000 system. The contents of paragraph
5.3.2.1, Self-Test FaultMessage Code Interpretation, aid in fault isolation. Test equipment required to test
the HF-9000 system is listed in table 5-1.
If a fault has occurred a t self-test completion, the OPR field displays FLT and MODE field displays a code for
suspected unit: CU for antenna coupler, FL for bandpass filter, FO for fiber optic, R for radio set control, RT
for receiver-transmitter, or - - (two blanks) for external failure. To determine if suspected unit has more than
one fault, or if more than one unit has failed, press the FREQ/LD o r CALLJLD switch (as applicable) t o
sequence through all suspected faults.
If a remote terminal is used, the remote terminal displays all applicable fault codes at the completion of self-
test.
5-2
maintenance
Table 5-1. Test Equipment and Tools
ITEM MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS REPRESENTATIVE TYPE

_ _ _ _ _ _ ~ ~
~ ~ ~ ~~
Carbon microphone 82 R Electro-Voice 205C

Distortion analyzer Measures (s+n)/n, rms voltage, Hewlett-Packard HP 332A
and less than 1% distortion
Oscilloscope Dual trace, 100-MHz bandwidth: Tektronix 465
dual channel; 5 mV to 5 V/div.
delayed sweep, storage capability
Power supply 0 to 40 V, 15.0 amp Sorensen DCS 40-25
Remote terminal (PC) IBM AT, XT, or 100% compatible, IBM-compatible PC
ASCII RS-232 compatible
RF attenuator 6-dB, 50-R input impedance Boonton 80-ZH3
RF load (dummy) 30-dB, 200-W, 50-R input Philco 662A-30
impedance
RF signal generator 2- to 30-MHz output, AM and FM Hewlett-Packard HP 8640B
modulation, 2 V rms into 50 R ,
-100- to +lo-dBm output, internal
counter
Function generator Provides 0.1 Hz to 13 Mhz, Hewlett-Packard HP-8116A
sine/pulse
2-tone signal generator Capable of 1 kHz and 1.3 kHz Racal-Dana 9083
tones at -6 dBm into 600 R load
Thruline RF wattmeter 200-W power capability, with two Bird 42
100-W and one 1000-W elements
Audio load no 1 600 R +1% Fabricate
Audio load no 2 150 R kl% Fabricate
Interconnect wiring and test Fabricate or use the below listed
panel test set available from Rockwell
Collins, Inc.
System test set Includes all software and TE-9200, 622-9418-001 or
interface cables TE-9210, 822-1429-001
OPTIONAL FOR DUAL SYSTEM TESTING ONLY
Radio set control HF-9010, 622-8111-001
Receiver-transmitter HF-9030, 622-8112-001
Antenna coupler HF-9041, 622-8114-001
Change 1 5-3
maintenance
5.3.2 Testingflroubleshooting Procedures
5.3.2.1 Self-Test FaulVMessage Code Interpretation
Faultdmessage codes that may appear in the FREWCHAN or INFO field display of the radio set control unit
and the corresponding repair actions are listed in table 5-2. The displays are initiated by internal
programming, manipulation of front panel controls, and/or a fault in a HF-9000 system element.
5.3.2.2 Self-Test Procedures
The following tabulation lists the paragraph numbers in the operation section of this instruction book where
procedures to perform various self-tests can be found.
SELF-TEST HF-9010 HF-9012 REMOTE TERMINAL
Self-test mode 3.3.3 3.4.3 3.6.4

Receiver self-test 3.3.3.1 3.4.3.1
Transmit self-test 3.3.3.2 3.4.3.2
Transmit-only self-test 3.3.3.3 3.4.3.3
The antenna coupler performs only a receive BIT. If the antenna coupler fails, the fault is reported to the
receiver-transmitter. The receiver-transmitter determines the fault code t o be displayed. During transmit
BIT, the antenna coupler only tunes t o the selected operating frequency. If the antenna coupler fails to tune,
a tune fault occurs.
The radio set control also performs only a receive BIT. At the conclusion of the radio set control BIT, a status
message is sent via the fiber-optic loop to the receiver-transmitter. The receiver-transmitter determines the
fault code to be displayed.
Table 5-2. Fault/Message Code Display and Repair Action

DESCRIPTION REPAIR ACTION
0020
~~ ~
System
System
T U - -
Could not be determined (FAULT)
Operating error (WARNING)
1 RF stuck on (FAULT)
MI
~1
Replace antenna coupler
0030 I CU I No R F received (FAULT) Replace antenna coupler I
0040
0040
II cu
FL
Interlock error
1 In-band overvoltage (advisory)

Check antenna coupler
interlockheplace antenna coupler
Checkheplace bandpass filter I

0050 FL Out-of-band overcurrent (advisory) Checkheplace bandpass filter I
0050 cu RF interlock open (FAULT) Check RF coaxheplace antenna
coupler
5-4
maintenance
Table 5-2. Fault/Message Code Display and Repair Action (Cont)
CODE UNIT DESCRIPTION REPAIR ACTION
0055 RT Serial datafill warning Check datafill cabling/replace

receiver-transmitter
0060 System RF overvoltage (FAULT); monitored Check antenna

continuously
0060 CU RF overvoltage (FAULT); monitored Replace antenna coupler

continuously
0065 RT Reserved (waiting for alternate key) None
0070 System Improper dual system response Replace CU 1 or CU 2

(FAULT)
0080 System Other system keyed warning (dual None

system)
0090 System Receive inhibited warning (dual None

system)
1010 CU Power supply fault Replace antenna coupler
1011 R Central processing unit (CPU) Replace radio set control

malfunction (FAULT)
1011 RT Central processing unit (CPU) Replace receiver-transmitter

malfunction (FAULT)
1011 CU Low pressure (WARNING); Repressurize/replace coupler

monitored continuously
1011 FL Central processing unit (CPU) Check/replace bandpass filter

malfunction (FAULT)
1012 R Program checksum erasable Replace radio set control

programmable read-only memory
(EPROM) (WARNING)
1012 RT Program checksum erasable Replace receiver-transmitter

(EPROM) (FAULT)
Change 3 5-5
maintenance
Table 5-2.FaultNessage Code Display and Repair Action (Cont)

CODE 1 UNIT DESCRIPTION REPAIR ACTION
1012 FL Program checksum erasable Replace bandpass filter

(EPROM) (WARNING)
1013
IR Random access memory (RAM) test
error (WARNING)
Replace radio set control
1013
1 RT
Random access memory (RAM)test
error (FAULT)
Replace receiver-transmitter
1013
I FL
Random access memory (RAM)test
error (WARNING)
Nonvolatile random access memory

Replace bandpass filter
(NVRAM) system status storage
(FAULT)
Input out of range (WARNING) Replace radio set control
1015 RT Erasable programmable read-only Replace receiver-transmitter

memory (EPROM) preset storage
error (FAULT)
1015 FL Electrically erasable programmable Replace bandpass filter

read-only memory (EEPROM)
(FAULT)
1021 RT Interrupt control (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
1031 RT Time base (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
Timer (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
Fiber-optic control (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
1034 I RT Synthesizer control (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
Parallel circuit (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
Loss of lock interrupt enable Replace receiver-transmitter

(FAULT)
1042 RT Dc continuity interrupt enable Replace receiver-transmitter

(FAULT)
1043 RT RF interlock interrupt enable Replace receiver-transmitter

(FAULT)
1044 RT Power amplifier (PA) fault interrupt Replace receiver-transmitter

enable control
5-6
maintenance
Table 5-2. Fault/Message Code Display and Re: iir Action (Cont)
UNIT DESCRIPTION REPAIR ACTION
RT Power supply (PS)fault interrupt Replace receiver-transmitter

enable control
RT Power amplifier (PA) filter 1control Replace receiver-transmitter

(FAULT)
RT Power amplifier (PA) filter 2 control Replace receiver-transmitter

(FAULT)
~ ~~
RT Power amplifier (PA) filter 3 control Replace receiver-transmitter

(FAULT)
Ijlojo
1049
RT
RT
Power amplifier (PA) filter control
enable (FAULT)
Power amplifier (PA) low-power

control (FAULT)
RT Power amplifier (PA) medium power Replace receiver-transmitter

control (FAULT)
RT Power amplifier key control (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
I1053 RT 1553/ARINC 429 control (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
RT Audio mute control (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
RT Sidetone gate control (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
1056 RT Tune tone control (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
RT Speech processor control (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
RT Voice gate control (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
RT Data gate control (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
RT Continuous wave (CW) gate control Replace receiver-transmitter

:FAULT)
RT Continuous wave (CW)key control Replace receiver-transmitter

:FAULT)
1 1062
1063
RT
RT
3-dB volume attenuate control
:FAULT)

:FAULT)
5-7
maintenance
CODE I UNIT DESCRIPTION

I
REPAIR ACTION
1064
I RT
(FAULT)
1065 I RT
Squelch level 1control (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
Squelch level 2 control (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
RF-IF TIP control (FAULT) I Replace receiver-transmitter

1068
I RT
RF-IF receive mode enable control
(FAULT)
RF-IF transmit mode enable control

(FAULT)
1070 I RT Reserved Replace receiver-transmitter
1070
I FL
High insertion loss in filter module
(FAULT)
Reserved
RF-IF sideband transmit control Replace receiver-transmitter

(FAULT)
1073
_____~ ~
I RT
RF-IF RF enable control (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
1074 RT RF-IF automatic gain control (AGC) Replace receiver-transmitter

time constant control (FAULT)
~~ ~
1075 RT RF-IF sideband filter control Replace receiver-transmitter

(FAULT)
1076 RT RF-IF sideband AF gate control Replace receiver-transmitter

(FAULT)
1077 I RT
I
RF-IF AM filter control (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
1078
IRT RF-IF AM AF audio gate control
(FAULT)
1079
I RT
RF-IF carrier reinsertion control
(FAULT)
1080 I RT
RF-IF rechannel control (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
System key control (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
Fault indicator control (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
5-8
maintenance
Table 5-2. FaulWessage Code Display and Repair Action (Cont)

CODE UNIT 1 DESCRIPTION REPAIR ACTION
1083 RT Single sideband tone select 1control Replace receiver-transmitter

(FAULT)
1084 RT Single sideband tone select 2 control Replace receiver-transmitter

(FAULT)
~
1085 RT Single sideband gate control Replace receiver-transmitter

(FAULT)
2010 RT Input power loss; monitored Check input power

continuously (FAULT)
~~ ~ ~ ~
2010 cu No RF received at discriminator Check antenna coupler or system

(FAULT) coax
2011 FL Central processing unit (CPU) Replace bandpass filter

malfunction
2012 FL Erasable programmable read-only Replace bandpass filter

memory (EPROM) program
checksum
2013 Random access memory (RAM)test Replace bandpass filter
2015 Erasable programmable read-only Replace bandpass filter

memory (EPROM) test (FAULT)
~~ ~~ ~~ ~ ~~ ~ ~~
2020 RT Power supply (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
2030 RT Tone oscillator (WARNING) Replace receiver-transmitter
2040 RT I Speech processor (WARNING) Replace receiver-transmitter
I Squelch (WARNING)
~
2050 RT Replace receiver-transmitter

I
2060 RT I Modem (FAULT)

I
3010 cu Tune fault; coupler does not tune Retune systemheplace antenna
currently selected frequency coupler
3020 cu RF module overtemperature fault; Limit transmit timeheplace antenna

monitored continuously (WARNING) coupler
3030 RF relay malfunction (WARNING) Replace antenna coupler
3030 RF relay malfunction (WARNING) Replace bandpass filter
5-9
maintenance

CODE UNIT DESCRIPTION I REPAIR ACTION
3040 cu High latched vswr condition; Retune systemheplace antenna
monitored continuously (WARNING) coupler
3110 RT Lock monitor (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
3210 RT Transmit test (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
3220 RT Receive test (WARNING) Replace receiver-transmitter
4010 RT 1553 control assembly (FAULT) I Replace receiver-transmitter

4011 cu Central processing unit (CPU) Replace antenna coupler
malfunction (WARNING)
4012 cu Erasable programmable read-only Replace antenna coupler

memory (EPROM) program
checksum (WARNING)
4013 cu Random access memory (RAM)test Replace antenna coupler

(WARNING)
4015 cu Erasable programmable read-only Replace antenna coupler

memory (EPROM) preset storage
error (WARNING)
4016 cu Fiber-optic control (FAULT) Check fiber-optic cablesheplace

antenna coupler
~
4016 FL Loss of pressure Repressurizeheplace bandpass filter
4020 RT ARINC 429 control assembly Replace receiver-transmitter

(FAULT)
4020 FL High temperature (FAULT) Replace bandpass filter
5011 RT Dc continuity (FAULT); monitored Replace receiver-transmitter

continuously
5012 RT Pa over/undervoltage (FAULT); Check input powerkmit transmit

monitored continuously timeheplace receiver-transmitter
5013 RT RF interlock (open coax) (FAULT); Check RF coaxheplace receiver-

monitored continuously transmitter
5014 RT
(FAULT)
5-10
maintenance
5015 RT Power amplifier (PA) monitor Replace receiver-transmitter

(FAULT)
5016 RT Power amplifier (PA) high- Limit transmit time/replace receiver-

temperature (WARNING); monitored transmitter
continuously
6010 RT Front panel (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
6020 RT Microprocessor frequency standard Replace receiver-transmitter

(FAULT)
7001 RT Waveform (FAULT) Replace receiver-transmitter
7002 RT Datafill (FAULT) Perform new datafill/replace

7003 RT No MSALE list (WARNING) Replace receiver-transmitter
7007 RT Waveform no response (FAULT) None
7008 RT Bad parameter in datafill Perform new datafill/replace

8010 RT Time of day (FAULT) Check GPS connection
9002 CU External fiber-optic data (FAULT) Check fiber-optic cables and

connectors replace antenna coupler
9002 RT External fiber-optic data (FAULT) Check fiber-optic cables and

connectors/replace receiver-
transmitter
9002 R External fiber-optic data (FAULT) Check fiber-optic cables and

connectors/replace radio set control
9002 FL External fiber-optic data (FAULT) Check fiber-optic cables and

connectors/replace bandpass filter
9002 FO External fiber-optic cables (FAULT) Check fiber-optic cables and

connectors. Refer t o paragraph
5.3.2.3
Change 3 5-11
maintenance
Table 5-2. Fault/Message Code Display and Re] air Action (Cont)
9003 cu Fiber-optic maximum data error Check fiber-optic cables and

count exceeded (FAULT); monitored connectorsheplace antenna coupler
continuously
9003 R Fiber-optic maximum data error Check fiber-optic cables and

count exceeded (FAULT); monitored connectorsh-eplaceradio set control
continuously
~~
9003 RT Fiber-optic maximum data error Check fiber-optic cables and

count exceeded (FAULT); monitored connectorsheplace receiver-
continuously transmitter
9003 FL Fiber-optic maximum data error Check fiber-optic cables and

count exceeded (FAULT); monitored connectors/replace bandpass filter
continuously
9004 System Invalid data received Check fiber-optic cables and

connectors
~~
9004 RT Invalid data received Check fiber-optic cables and

connectorsheplace receiver-
transmitter
9004 FL Invalid data received Check fiber-optic cables and

connectorsheplace bandpass filter
9005 cu No fiber-optic data received Check fiber-optic cables or other

(FAULT); no response from coupler unitsheplace antenna coupler
9005 R No fiber-optic data received (FAULT) Check fiber-optic cables or other

units/replace radio set control
9005 RT No fiber-optic data received Check fiber-optic cables or other

(FAULT); no response from receiver- unitsheplace receiver-transmitter
transmitter
9005 FL No fiber-optic data received (FAULT) Check fiber-optic cables or other

unitsheplace bandpass filter
If a fault has occurred at the completion of self-test, the OPR field displays FLT and MODE field displays a
code (CU for antenna coupler, FL for bandpass filter, FO for fiber optic, R for radio set control, RT for
receiver-transmitter, or - - (two blanks) for external failure) for suspected unit. To determine if suspected
unit has more than one fault, or if more than one unit has failed, press the FREQLD or CALL/LD switch (as
applicable) t o sequence through all suspected faults.
If a remote terminal is used, the remote terminal displays all applicable fault codes a t the completion of self-
test.
Refer to table 5-2 for faultlmessage code definitions.
5-12
maintenance
5.3.2.3 Fiber-optic Cable Troubleshooting
This procedure helps isolate a fiber-optic fault (fault code FO 9002) to one of the HF-9000 system units or to
one of the fiber-optic cables.
It must first be determined if the units are connected in a clockwise or counterclockwise configuration. Refer
to figures 5-1 and 5-2. In the clockwise configuration, figure 5-1, the fiber-optic cable is routed from the radio
set control t o the antenna coupler, then to the receiver-transmitter, and finally back to the radio set control.
In the counterclockwise configuration, figure 5-2, the fiber-optic cable is routed from the radio set control to
the receiver-transmitter, then t o the antenna coupler, and finally back t o the radio set control. Use figures
5-1 and 5-2, as appropriate to your installation, as a guideline when using these procedures. In each of the
fault indications in figures 5-1 and 5-2, the initial fault indication is FLT FO 9002, indicating a fiber-optic
fault. Isolate the fault to a unit or cable as follows:
a. Recycle power to the HF-9000 system. Upon power up, built-in diagnostics ensure all units are
responding.
b. If a fiber-optic fault is still indicated, momentarily press the radio set control FREQLD or CALIAD
switch (as applicable). A second fault code is displayed. Use figure 5-1 or 5-2 as a guide t o identify the
failed fiber-optic link. In figures 5-1 and 5-2, the failed link is identified by a dashed line.
For example, if the tested HF-9000 system is in clockwise configuration and power is recycled, pressing
the FREQLD switch reveals the fault code RCV FO 9030. As shown in figure 5-1, section B, the
suspected failed fiber-optic link is between the antenna coupler and receiver-transmitter.
1. If the installation is a dual installation, or if k n o w n good spare units are available, exchange the
suspected units one at a time to see if the fault is removed. In the example above, the suspected units
are the antenna coupler and receiver-transmitter.
2. If the fault persists, the most likely fault is the fiber-optic cable between the two units. Refer t o the
fiber-optic continuity test procedure in the following paragraph.
When the HF-9000 system units are eliminated as the source of a fiber-optic fault error code, or when a new
fiber-optic cable is terminated, use this fiber-optic continuity procedure. From fiber-optic repair kit,
752-5993-004, use the light power meter, light source, splice to join two cables together, and a calibration
cable. The light meter measures the power of light in decibels referenced to 1milliwatt (dBm). The light
source is not calibrated, so a reference must be established. This is accomplished using a calibration cable.
5.3.2.4 Calibration Cable Preparation
Prepare a calibration cable as follows:
a. Prepare and carefully terminate two cables 2 ft long.

b. When assembly is completed, test each cable by attaching one end of the cable to the light source and the
other end to the light power meter. Record the results and compare the readings of the two cables. The
readings for the two cables should be within a few tenths of a dB.
NOTE
Be sure neither the light source nor the light power meter has a low battery indication.
5-13
maintenance
J3 J2 J3 J2 J3 J2
HF-901X HF-903X/7X HF -904 X
RADIO SET RECEIVER- ANTENNA
CONTROL TRANSMITTER COUPLER
J3 J2 J3 J2 J3 J2
HF-90 1X HF-903X/7X HF-904X
RADIO SET RECE IVER- ANTENNA
I I I
FAULT I N D I C A T I O N
F L T FO 9002
I I RCV FO 9030
RCV FO 9040
HF-90 1X HF-903X/7X HF-904X

C
TPC-3761-011C
Fiber-optic Fault Indications, Clockwise Configuration (Radio Set Control to

Antenna Coupler to Receiver-Transmitter)
Figure 5-1
5-14
maintenance
F I B E R OPTIC L I N K FAULT F L T FO 9 0 0 2
r------- RCV FO (BLANK)
I I
IN IN OUT IN OUT
J2 J3 J2 J3
HF-90 1 X HF-903X/7X HF-904X
F I B E R OPTIC L I N K FAULT FLT FO 9002
r------ RCV FO 9 0 4 0
IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT
J2 J3 J2 J3 J2 J3
J2 J3 J2 J3 J2 J3
HF-90 1 X HF-903X/7X HF-904X
R A D I O SET RECEIVER- ANTENNA
C TPC-3762-011C
Fiber-optic Fault Indications, Counterclockwise Configuration (Radio Set Control to

Receiver-Transmitter to Antenna Coupler)
Figure 5-2
5-15
maintenance
c. If the readings are not within a few tenths of a dB, carefully prepare another cable and compare the
results. ' h o of the readings should produce higher (or less negative) readings on the light power meter
than the suspect cable. Choose one of the good cables and remeasure the power reading. Record this
reading and mark the cable at the light source end with the reading in dBm with a piece of tape. Always
use the same marked end at the light source for subsequent tests. This calibrated cable becomes part of
the cable test kit, and is now referred to as the calibration cable.
5.3.2.5 Fiber-optic Cable Test Procedure
If the cable in the suspected fiber-optic link has a splice or bulkhead fitting, test each section separately. If
this is not possible, allow l-dBm loss for each splice.
To calculate the loss of the cable under test, take the calibrated reading of the calibration cable and light
source, subtract 1dB for the splice; then take the algebraic difference of the source/calibration cable/splice
and the result as read on the light meter.
Refer to figure 5-3. To test a new cable, connect a splice or bulkhead connector to the calibration cable
attached to the light source. Connect the cable under test to the other end of the splice and t o the light power
meter. The cable should have less than 3-dB loss. A loss of 3 dB indicates a less than desirable assembly, and
one that may fail at some future time. If there is more than 3-dB loss, reverse the cable under test and
repeat the test. The suspect connector is the one at the light source end when a lower reading is indicated.
To test a cable in an existing installation, look for obvious irregularity of the reading or losses much greater
than 3 dB. Otherwise, the procedure is the same as previously described. A reading of 3.5 dB does not
necessarily indicate a bad cable. For example, a new cable is tested; a calibration cable is calibrated with a
reading of -3.7 dBm. Subtracting 1dB t o allow for loss in the splice gives a starting reference of -4.7 dBm.
The light power meter reads -5.9 dBm. This indicates a cable loss of 1.2 dB (-3.7 minus 1= -4.7; minus -5.9 =
1.2). The cable passes the test. Any reading within the range of -4.7 t o -7.7 dBm (0 to 3 dB loss) is considered
good for a new cable.
Table 5-3represents the calculations outlined in the previous example.
Table 5-3. Example Test Procedure
TEST
~
I SPECTRAN SPECIALTY OPTICS (dBm)
Calibration cable -3.7
Splice -1.0
Cable mismatch 0
Total -4.7
Good reading on meter (0 to 3-dB loss) -4.7 to -7.8
5-16
CABLE UNDER TEST
-SPLICE
\
maintenance
CALIBRATION CABLE
\ /
LIGHT SOURCE
\
LIGHT POWER METER TPC-3760-01 1 A
Fiber-optic Fault Cable Test Setup Diagram

Figure 5-3
5-17
maintenance
5.3.3 Minimum Performance Test
Performance testing includes only testing that can be accomplished using standard test equipment and a
minimum amount of disassembly (removal of covers). This testing includes accessible test points, input and
output voltages, signal levels, and a minimum performance test of the assembled unit.
Establish standard test setup conditions as follows:
a. Perform test setup shown in figure 5-4. Set switches as directed in table 5-4.
b. Connect the HF-9041 t o the appropriate signal source during receive operation or to a 50-ohm load and
required test measurement equipment during transmit
c. Connect a 6-dB attenuator in series with the signal generator output during receive test measurements.
All signal levels listed in these steps are those displayed on the signal generator.
d. Set all test set switches to the down/inactive position.
e. Connect +28 V dc power source to test set red and black banana jacks located lower-left front of TE-9200
and lower-right back of TE-9210.
f. Set power source and test equipment power to on. Adjust power supply for +28 V dc. Set radio set control
setting as listed in table 5-4.
g. Perform minimum performance test procedures in table 5-5.
WARNING
WARNING
insulated feedthrough, or the antenna itself while the microphone is keyed or while the
HF-9000 system is in transmit self-test. Serious RF burns can result from direct contact
with the above items when the HF-9000 system is transmitting.
CAUTION
Do NOT key the receiver-transmitter during receive tests o r damage to test equipment will
result.
NOTE
Any references to a test set in the following test procedures apply to both TE-9200 and
TE-9210 unless specified otherwise.
NOTE
If a failure is detected during the tests listed in table 5-5, replace the modules listed at the
beginning of each test as most suspect.
5-18 Change 3
maintenance
Table 5-4. Pretest Switch Setup

EQUIPMENT SWITCH NOMENCLATURE SWITCH POSITION
TE-9200 RT ADDRESS
4
3
2
1
0
P
CONFIG
A
B
C
STATUS
A 1
B 1
+28V 1
SCAN OFF
MUTE OFF
CPLR BYP OFF
SPD OFF
AGC OFF
XMT INTLK OFF
TEST PTT OFF
SPEAKER OFF
t 2 8 VDC POWER 3FF
Panel Lighting Set for desired display lighting of
radio set control
TE-9210 R/T 1553 ADDRESS
4
3
2
Change 1 5-19
maintenance
Table 5-4. Pretest Switch SetuB (Cant)

EQUIPMENT SWITCH NOMENCLATURE SWITCH POSITION
1
0
P
CONFIGURATION
A
B
C
STATUS
A 1
B 1
28V IN EXT
STOP SCAN 1
RCV, MUTEINORM NORM
CPLR BYPASSNORM NORM
SPCH PROC ENBL
AGC T/C 1
W I T INHBT OFF
PTT UNKEY
SPEAKER, SOURCE 3FF
28 V POWER 3FF
CONTROL PANEL LIGHTING Set for desired display lighting of
radio set control.
SYSTEM TYPE, ARINC 429 OR J s e ARINC 429 position only for
NORMAL :eceiver-transmitters without
ILE or 1553B capability. Refer to
;able 1-2.
IF-9OXX 3PERATION MODE ?RESET CHANNEL (CHN)
SQUELCH 3ISABLE (SQL 0)
VOLUME W I M U M (VOL 7)
?OWER W I M U M (3 BARS)
5-20 Change 1
maintenance
STEP PROCEDURE NORMAL IF INDICATION

INDICATION IS ABNORMAL
Loading the following data overwrites any channel data currently in the receiver-
transmitter. If the channel data in the receiver-transmitter is to be reprogrammed upon
completion of test, record the data on a sheet of paper and reprogram the channel data upon
completion of testing.
Load programmable preset channels with the

following information using Program Mode (PGM).
For the HF-9010 radio set control refer to
paragraph 3.3.5. For the HF-9012 radio set control
refer to paragraph 3.4.7.
CHANNEL EMISSION
NO N H z ) MODE FREQ.UENCY
01 W 2.0000
02 W 15.0000
03 W 29.9999
04 LV 5.0000
05 LV 10.0000
06 LV 20.0000
07 AM 5.0000
08 AM 15.0000
09 AM 25.0000
10 cw 2.0000
11 UD 2.0000
12 cw 15.0000
13 AM 2.0000
14 LD 5.0000
15 UD 17.0000
I SELF-TEST
1.1 I presented
Perform self-test procedures and fault analysis a s I Self-test that 1 Remove and replace unit
in paragraphs 5.3.2.1 through 5.3.2.3. indicated by self-test as
all units pass.
faulty.
1.2 1 Proceed to step 2. I I

2 RECEIVE SENSITIVITY TEST
2.1 Establish the standard test conditions and test

equipment setup of figure 5-4.
Change 1 5-20N5-20B
maintenance
Table 5-5. Performance Test Procedures (Cont)

2 RECEIVER SENSITIVITY TEST (Cont)
2.2 Connect distortion analyzer and 60042 load to

test set RECEIVE AUDIO 600-R DATA or VOICE
jacks as specified by emission mode in the
following note.
2.3 Apply an RF signal input to the antenna coupler Signal-to-noise Replace in order: receiver-
RF output connector. Adjust signal generator to ratio is within transmitter, antenna
the frequency and level given below. Select tolerance (NLT coupler, radio set control.
channel shown on the radio set control. Measure 8 dB).
signal-to-noise ratio at each frequency with the
distortion analyzer.
NOTE
Use the test set RECEIVE AUDIO VOICE 60042 output jacks for UV, LV, CW, and AM
emission modes. Use the RECEIVE AUDIO DATA (TE-9200) or DATA 1 (TE-9210) 60042
output jacks for UD and LD modes. Connect the 60042 audio load when making these
measurements.
RF SIGNAL
CHANNEL MISSION FREQUENCY RF SIGNAL
NO . MODE . (MHz) . LEVEL (µV)
01 UV 2.0010 1.0
11 UD 2.0010 1.0
02 UV 15.0010 1.0
03 UV 30.0009 1.0
04 LV 4.9990 1.0
14 LD 4.9990 1.0
05 LV 9.9990 1.0
06 LV 19.9990 1.0
07 AM* 5.0000 6.0
08 AM* 15.0000 6.0
09 AM* 25.0000 6.0
01# AM* 2.0000 6.0
10 CW 2.0010 1.0
MAR 407 UV 4.3770 1.0
MAR2201 UV 22.6970 1.0
EMR 1 UV 2.1830 1.0
EMR 2 UV 4.1260 1.0
*AM is modulated 30% with 1 kHz

#Use test set RECEIVE AUDIO SECAL™ output jacks and 600-( load.
Change 3 5-21
maintenance

STEP PROCEDURE NORMAL I F INDICATION
3 RECEIVE AUDIO OUTPUT LEVEL TEST

3.2 Select channel 02 on the radio set control and

adjust volume control to maximum (VOL 7). Set
TE-9200 test set SPEAKER switch to OFF or
TE-9210 test set SPEAKER SOURCE switch to
OFF.
3.3 Using the signal generator, apply a n RF signal of

15.0010 MHz a t a level of 1 mV to antenna coupler
RF output terminal.
3.4 Connect 600-R load across test set RECEIVE Voltage is Replace in order: receiver-
AUDIO 60042 VOICE jacks and verify voltage ietween 6.90 xansmitter, antenna
output is between 6.90 and 8.70 V ac. md 8.70 V ac. :oupler
3.5 Connect 150-22load across test set RECEIVE Voltage is Replace in order: receiver-
AUDIO 1 5 0 4 VOICE jacks and verify the voltage ietween 3.45 xansmitter, antenna
3.6 Reduce the output level of signal generator to

10 pv.
3.7 Connect 600-i-2load across TE-9200 test set v'oltage is 3eplace in order: receiver-
RECEIVE AUDIO 600-R DATA jacks or TE-9210 ietween 0.62 xansmitter, antenna
test set RECEIVE AUDIO 60042 DATA 1jacks md 0.88 V ac. :oupler
and verify the voltage output is between 0.62 and
0.88 V ac.
3.8 Connect 150-22load across TE-9200 test set Joltage is 3eplace in order: receiver-
RECEIVE AUDIO 15042 DATA jacks or TE-9210 ietween 0.31 xansmitter, antenna
test set RECEIVE AUDIO 15042 DATA 1jacks md 0.44 V ac. :oupler
and verify the voltage output is between 0.31 and
0.44 V ac.

adjust volume control to maximum (VOL 7).

15.0010 MHz at a level of 1 mV to antenna coupler
RF output terminal.
3.11 Connect 600-22 load across test set RECEIVE Joltage is 3eplace in order: receiver-
AUDIO 60042 VOICE jacks and verify the voltage ietween 6.90 iransmitter, antenna
5-22 Change 1
maintenance
STEP 1
I
PROCEDURE
I
NORMAL
INDICATION
I
I IS ABNORMAL
IF INDICATION
3 RECEIVE AUDIO OUTPUT LEVEL TEST (Cont)

adjust volume control to maximum (VOL 7 ) .

15.0000 MHz a t a level of 1mV AM modulated
90% with 1 kHz to antenna coupler RF output
terminal.
3.14 Connect 60042 load across test set RECEIVE Voltage is Replace in order: receiver-
AUDIO 60042 VOICE jacks and verify the voltage between 6.90 transmitter, antenna
output is between 6.90 and 8.70 V ac. and 8.70 V ac. coupler
3.15 Connect 6 0 0 4 load across test set RECEIVE Voltage is Replace in order: receiver-
AUDIO SELCAL jacks. Verify the voltage output between 0.55 transmitter, antenna
is between 0.55 and 1.10 V ac. and 1.10 V ac. coupler
3.16 Decrease signal generator output to 30 pV. Voltage is Replace in order: receiver-
between 0.50 transmitter, antenna
and 1.10 V ac. coupler
4 AUDIO VOLUME CONTROL TEST


adjust volume control to maximum (VOL 7 ) .

15.0010 MHz a t a level of 5 pV to antenna coupler
RF output terminal.
4.4 Connect distortion analyzer and 60042 load to test D-dB reference
set RECEIVE AUDIO 60042 VOICE jacks and
adjust for 0-dB reference.
Change 1 5-23
maintenance

~ ~~

~_________
4.5 On the radio set control, select each of the volume Signal change Replace in order: radio set
levels below and verify the change in signal level is between control, receiver-transmit-
on the distortion analyzer. limits. ter
VOLUME SETTING SIGNAL LEVEL
VOL 7 (maximum) O-dB reference

VOL 6 4 to -8 dB
VOL 5 10 to -14dB
VOL 4 15 to -21 dB
VOL 3 21 to -27 dB
VOL 2 26 to -34dB
VOL 1 32 to -40dB
VOL 0 (minimum) 40 dB minimum
~ ~~
5 SQUELCH

equipment setup of figure 5-4.Set TE-9200
speaker switch to ON position or set TE-9210
speaker source switch to VOICE position.
5.2 Apply a receiver RF input signal of 15.0006 MHz

a t 2 pV, pulse modulated with 10 Hz t o the
antenna coupler RF output terminal.
5.3 On the radio set control, select squelch level ‘ 0 and Audio is Replace in order: receiver-
verlfy the presence of audio. present. transmitter, radio set
control
5.4 Select next higher squelch level and increase RF Audio is Replace in order: receiver-
signal generator output level until audio is heard. present. transmitter, radio set
control
i.5 Repeat step 5.4 for remaining squelch level

settings.
i.6 Reduce the RF input signal to zero (0). Verify no No noise Replace in order: receiver-
audio (noise) at all positions of squelch control present except transmitter, radio set
2xcept minimum (SQL 0). at SQL 0. zontrol
TRANSMIT AUDIO INPUT TEST
i.1 Establish the standard test conditions and test

2quipment setup of figure 5-5.
5-24 Change 1
maintenance
STEP I
I
I
PROCEDURE
I
I
NORMAL
INDICATION
I
I
IS ABNORMAL
IIF INDICATION
J TRANSMIT AUDIO INPUT TEST (Cont)
3.2 Select channel 01, power level maximum on the

radio set control.
3.3 Connect a wattmeter to receiver- transmitter jack

J5. Connect a voltmeter to test set RECEIVE
AUDIO 60042 VOICE jacks. Set TE-9200 test set
CPLR BYP switch to ON or set TE-9210 test set
CPLR BYPASSNORM switch to BYPASS.
3.4 Using a function generator, apply a 1000-Hz signal

at a level of 0.78 V to the test set TRANSMIT
AUDIO 60042 VOICE jacks.
3.5 Set TE-9200 test set TEST PTT switch to ON or Output power ieplace in order: receiver-
set TE-9210 test set PTT switch to KEY. is 39 to 63 W ;ransmitter, antenna
(79 to 126 W for :oupler, radio set control
all 100-w
average
receiver-
transmitters as
listed in table
1-2). Voltage on
the test set
RECEIVE
AUDIO 600-R
VOICE jacks is
between 2.74
and 5.50 V ac.
3.6 Set TE-9200 test set TEST PTT switch to OFF or

set TE-9210 test set PTT switch to UNKEY.
5.7 Repeat steps 6.4 thru 6.6 using a level of 2.47 V for Same as step
the 1000-Hz signal. 6.5
5.8 Repeat steps 6.4 thru 6.6 using a level of 0.25 V for Same as step
the 1000-Hz signal. 6.5

radio set control.

at a level of 0.39 V to the test set TRANSMIT
AUDIO 15042 VOICE jacks.
Change 1 5-25
maintenance

6 TRANSMIT AUDIO INPUT TEST (Cont)
6.11 Set TE-9200 test set TEST PTT switch to ON or Output power Replace in order: receiver-
set TE-9210 test set PTT switch to KEY. is 39 to 63 W transmitter, antenna
(79 to 126 W for coupler, radio set control
all 100-W
average
receiver-
transmitters as
listed in table
1-2).


radio set control.

at a level of 0.78 V to the TE-9200 test set
TRANSMIT AUDIO 60042 DATA jacks or TE-9210
test set TRANSMIT AUDIO 6 0 0 4 DATA 1jacks.
6.15 Set TE-9200 test set TEST PTT switch to ON or Same as step Replace in order: receiver-
set TE-9210 test set PTT switch to KEY. s.11 transmitter, antenna
coupler, radio set control


radio set control.

at a level of 0.39 V to the TE-9200 test set
TRANSMIT AUDIO 150-a DATA jacks or TE-9210
test set TRANSMIT AUDIO 1 5 0 4 DATA 1jacks.
6.19 Set TE-9200 test set TEST PTT switch to ON or same as step Replace in order: receiver-
set TE-9210 test set PTT switch to KEY. 3.11 transmitter, antenna
:oupler, radio set control.

6.21 Disconnect the signal input to TE-9200 test set

TRANSMIT AUDIO 15042 DATA jacks or TE-9210
test set TRANSMIT AUDIO 15042 DATA 1jacks.
5-26 Change 1
maintenance

7 TRANSMIT POWER OUTPUT TEST


radio set control. Connect 2-tone signal generator
output to test set TRANSMIT AUDIO 600 L?voice
jacks. Set 2-tone signal generator for 1kHz and
1.3 kHz at a level of -6 dBm.
7.3 Connect a wattmeter to receiver- transmitter jack

55. Connect an oscilloscope in parallel with the
wattmeter.
7.4 Set TE-9200 test set TEST PTT switch to ON or Output voltage Replace in order: receiver-
set TE-9210 test set PTT switch to KEY. Verify is 118V xansmitter, antenna
receiver-transmitter output voltage is 118 V minimum. :oupler, radio set control
minimum as viewed on the oscilloscope.

Disconnect test set TRANSMIT AUDIO 600-L-2
voice jack connections.
7.6 Select channel 09, power level medium on the

radio set control.
7.7 Set TE-9200 test set TEST PTT switch to ON or Output is 3eplace in order: radio set
set TE-9210 test set PTT switch to KEY. Verify between 39 and :ontrol, receiver-
receiver-transmitter output is between 39 and 63 W. iransmitter, antenna
63 W. :oupler

7.9 Select channel 09, power level low on the radio set
2ontrol.
7.10 Set TE-9200 test set TEST PTT switch to ON or Output is ieplace in order: antenna
set TE-9210 test set PTT switch to KEY. Verify between 8 and :oupler, receiver-
receiver-transmitter output is between 8 and 13 W. iransmitter, radio set
13 W. :ontrol

;et TE-9210 test set PTT switch to UNKEY.
Change 1 5-27
maintenance

7 TRANSMIT POWER OUTPUT TEST (Cont)
7.12 Connect receiver-transmitter jack 55 to input of

antenna coupler jack 54. Connect output of
antenna coupler t o wattmeter and load. Set
TE-9200 test set CPLR BYP switch to OFF or set
TE-9210 test set CPLR BYPASSNORM switch to
NORM.
7.13 Repeat step 7.2.
7.14 Set TE-9200 test set TEST PTT switch to ON or Wattmeter Replace in order: receiver-
set TE-9210 test set PTT switch t o KEY. deflects transmitter, antenna
indicating coupler, radio set control
power out.
8 CW KEY AND SIDETONE TEST


adjust volume control t o maximum (VOL 7). Set
radio set control power level t o maximum. Set
TE-9200 test set CPLR BYP switch to ON or set
TE-9210 test 'set CPRLR BYF'ASS/NORM switch t o
BYPASS.
8.2 Connect a wattmeter t o receiver-transmitter jack

55. Connect distortion analyzer to test set
RECEIVE AUDIO 60042 VOICE jacks.
8.3 Set TE-9200 test set TEST PTT switch to ON or Wattage is Replace in order: receiver-
set TE-9210 test set PTT switch t o KEY. Verify between 39 and ;ransmitter, antenna
receiver-transmitter output is between 39 and 63 W. Voltage :oupler, radio set control
63 W. Verify voltage at test set RECEIVE AUDIO is between 2.74
60042 VOICE jacks is between 2.74 and 5.50 V ac. and 5.50 V ac.
8.4 Unkey the receiver-transmitter.
5-28 Change 1
maintenance
I

9 DUAL SYSTEM TEST
NOTE
Perform the following test only if the HF-9000 system is to be installed in a dual system
installation.

9.2 Select channel 01 on radio set control.
9.3 Set TE-9200 test set +28V switch to 0 position or TE-9210 test
TE-9210 test set 28 V IN switch to upward set 28V IN
position. indicator lights.
9.4 Set test set STATUS A switch to 0 and STATUS B Radio set Replace in order: receiver-
switch to 1. Observe radio control set displays control displays transmitter, antenna
“MSG 0090.” TE-9210 test set STATUS A (TX2) “MSG 0090.’’ coupler, radio set control
indicator lights. TE-92 10 test
set STATUS A
(TX2) indicator
lights.
9.5 Set TE-9200 test set TEST PTT switch to ON or Radio set Replace in order: receiver-
set TE-9210 test set PTT switch to KEY. Observe control displays transmitter, antenna
radio control set displays “MSG 0080.” “MSG 0080.” coupler, radio set control
9.6 Unkey the receiver-transmitter.
9.7 Set test set STATUS A switch to 1 and STATUS B TE-9210 test Replace in order: receiver-
switch to 0. Observe TE-9210 test set STATUS A set STATUS A transmitter, antenna
(TX2) indicator goes out. Test set EXTERNAL (TX2) indicator coupler, radio set control
ELEMENT F indicator lights. goes out. Test
set EXTERNAL
ELEMENT F
indicator lights.
9.8 Set test unit STATUS A and STATUS B switches Test set Replace in order: receiver-
to 1. Observe test set EXTERNAL ELEMENT F EXTERNAL transmitter, antenna
indicator goes out. ELEMENT F coupler, radio set control
indicator goes
out.
9.9 Set TE-9200 test set TEST PTT switch to ON or Test set Replace in order: receiver-
set TE-9210 test set PTT switch to KEY. Observe EXTERNAL transmitter antenna
test set EXTERNAL ELEMENT E indicator lights. ELEMENT E coupler, radio set control
indicator lights.
Change 1 5-29
maintenance

3 DUAL SYSTEM TEST (Cont)
3.10 Unkey the receiver-transmitter. Observe test set Test set Replace in order; receiver-
EXTERNAL ELEMENT E indicator goes out. EXTERNAL transmitter, antenna
ELEMENT E coupler, radio set control
indicator goes
out.
3.11 Return TE-9200 test set +28V switch to position 1 Observe test Replace in order: receiver-
or TE-9210 test set 28V IN switch to EXT position. set EXTERNAL transmitter, antenna
ELEMENT F coupler, radio set control
indicator lights.
TE-9210 test
set 28V I N
indicator goes
out.
LO ALE TEST (for ALE equipped receiver-transmitters as listed in table 1-2)
NOTE
HF-9000 Automatic Link Establishment (ALE) requires a radio receiver-transmitter loaded

with valid ALE operational datafill files, and a n HF-9012 radio set control. Refer to Datafill
Requirements paragraph 2.6. The following test procedure requires two HF-9000 systems
with ALE capability and compatible datafills.
10.1 Connect equipment as shown in figure 5-6. Apply

power to equipment.
10.2 Determine each systems ALE self address by Radio set Replace in order: receiver-
setting the radio set control OPR field to PGA. To control displays transmitter, radio set
select a new self address, refer to paragraph ALE self zontrol
3.4.7.2. address at left
side of INFO
field.
10.3 Set both systems radio set control OPR field to Radio set Replace in order: receiver-
ALE, INFO field to a matching scan list number, control transmitter, radio set
and rotate SQL control two detents from fully indicates ALE zontrol
counter clockwise (SQL 1). Ensure M OFF is not mode, ALE call
displayed in INFO field so audio will be gated off address, scan
until a communications link is established. list number
selected, and
audio is gated
off.
5-30 Change 1
maintenance
Table 5-5. Performance Test Procedures

STEP PROCEDURE N O R W I F INDICATION
10 ALE TEST (for ALE equipped receiver-transmitters as listed in table 1-2) (Cont)
NOTE
The squelch setting is momentarily displayed in the radio set control MODE field after
setting is changed.
10.4 On the calling system, set the ALE address (at the The calling Replace in order: receiver-
left side of radio set control INFO field) to the system radio transmitter, radio set
2pposite systems ALE self address. set control zontrol
INFO field
displays
opposite
systems ALE
address.
10.5 Using the calling system radio set control, initiate The calling Replace in order: receiver-
m ALE call by momentarily pressing the system radio transmitter, radio set
ZALULD switch. Verify receiver-transmitter set control :ontrol
stablishes a communications link. mode field
indicates CL
while call is in
progress. Both
systems MODE
fields display
LK when a link
is established.
The INFO field
displays the
ALE address of
the system
linked to.
Headset audio
is restored and
zommunication
is possible.
10.6 Jsing the HF-9012 radio set control, terminate the Radio set Xeplace in order: receiver-
stablished communications link by momentarily :ontrol MODE ransmitter, radio set
xessing CALLILD switch. System indicates a field loses LK :ontrol
Beturn to scanning by removing the LK display in iisplay
,he MODE field. indicating a
return to
scanning of
?repro-
grammed
:hannels. Audio
.s gated off.
Change 1 5-30A
maintenance

10 ALE TEST (for ALE equipped receiver-transmitters as listed in table 1-2) (Cont)
10.7 Designate the other system as the calling system

and repeat steps 10.4 through 10.6.
10.8 Set all power switches to OFF, disconnect all test
equipment. Test is complete.
5.5 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Refer to applicable intermediate-level maintenance instruction book for instructions to disassemble or

assemble units comprising the HF-9000 system.
5-30B Change 1
maintenance
RADIO SET :ONT POWER

-
J2
CONTROL
TEST SET
?T ( T E - 9 2 0 0 )
TO RT J1 ( T E - 9 2 1 0 )
FIBER
OPTIC RECEIVER/ i'T POWER AUDIC AUDIO
CABLES TRANSMITTER OUT LOADS
DISTORTION
ANALYZER
J3 d h J4
CPLR POWER
I
-
FUNCTION
GENERATOR
Receive Test Setup Diagram

Figure 5-4
Change 1 5-31
maintenance
:ONT POWER
TEST SET
AUDIO I N
GENERATOR
I
I hJ 1 1T ( T E - 9 2 0 0 )
'0 RT J 1 ( T E - 9 2 1 0 )
FIBER HF-9OXX
OPT I C RECE IV E R I 1T POWER AUDIO
CABLES TRANSMITTER
I
DISTORTION
ANALYZER
J3 - J4
-
HF-9041
ANTENNA
-
_-Jl
J2 COUPLER - RF 1/0
-
I
OSCILLO-
SCOPE
I - WATT METER -
I
LOAD/
ATTENUATOR
I
Transmit Test Setup Diagram

Figure 5-5
5-32 Change 1
maintenance
J3
-
HF-90XX
RADIO SET
CONT POWER
J2 CONTROL
4 #1
TEST SET
Jl
RT ( T E - 9 2 0 0 )
J3
CHF-9OXX TO RT J1 ( T E - 9 2 1 0 )
FIBER
RECEIVER/ J4
OPTIC
CABLES J2
TRANSMITTER 7 RT POWER
C#1 J5
J3 1 HF-9041
ANTENNA
z
-
J4
J1
COUPLER - RF
-
CPLR POWER
J2 1 #1 - 1/0
1
LOAD/
ATTENUATOR
LOAD/
ATTENUATOR
HF-904 1
- I
J2
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
COUPLER
=
-
RF 1/0
J1
CPLR POWER
I I I
TEST SET
HF-9OXX
FIBER J2
RECEIVER/
OPT I C RT POWER
TRANSMITTER J4
CABLES
#2
J3
RT ( T E - 9 2 0 0 )
J1
TO RT J l ( T E - 9 2 1 0 )
HF-90XX
J2 RADIO SET
CONT POWER
CONTROL 'Jl
6 #2
NOTE :
SET BOTH SYSTEM LOAD/ATTENUATORS
S I D E BY S I D E DURING T E S T I N G .
ALE Test Setup Diagram

Figure 5-6
Change 1
SECTION 6
PARTS LIST
6.1 INTRODUCTION
6.1.1 General
The purpose of this parts list, prepared by Collins Avionics & Communications Division of Rockwell
Collins, Inc., (manufacturer code 13499), is for identification and requisition of parts.
Parts listed meet critical equipment design specification requirements. Use only part numbers specified in
this parts list for replacement of parts.
6.1.2 Group Assembly Parts List
FIG-ITEM Column - Digits preceding the first dash are section numbers. Digits following the first dash
are figure numbers within the section. Digits following the second dash are item numbers assigned in
sequence to correspond with item numbers on the illustrations.
PART NO Column - Listed are military standard o r vendor part numbers.
INDENT Column - Items are coded 1, 2, 3, etc, t o indicate the relationship to the next higher assembly
DESCRIPTION Column - Listed are the noun name, modifier, descriptive information, manufacturers’
code (in the absence of a code, the part number is a prime contractor’s (13499) part), reference designation,
attaching part (AP), reference t o other figures, and effectivities.
Attaching parts are identified by (AP)following the part or parts they attach.
Effectivities are identified by the following methods: Manufacturing Control Number (MCN), 101 and up;
Revision Letter Identifier (REV LTR) dash (-1 denotes original, letter A first change, letter B second
change, etc. One of the above identifiers is listed on each chassis o r replaceable assembly. Service bulletins
are identified by SB 1, SB 2, etc.
UNITS PER ASSY Column - Quantities specified are according t o the item number. Letters AR denote
the selection of parts as required. Letters REF indicate the part number is for reference only. Part may be
assembled elsewhere in the parts list or may be nonprocurable. A figure reference or note is included in
the description.
USABLE ON CODE Column - Part variations within a group of equipment are indicated by a letter code
(A, B, C, etc). The absence of a code indicates the part applies to all configurations covered by the
breakdown.
6.1.3 Numerical Index
PART NUMBER Column - Part numbers are listed in alphanumeric sequence.
FIG-ITEM Column - Digits preceding the first dash are section numbers. Digits following the first dash
are figure numbers within the section. Digits following the second dash are item numbers.
TTL REQ Column - Listed is the total required quantity of parts or assemblies covered in the group
assembly parts list.
6-1
parts list
6.1.4 How To Use This Parts List

To locate a part number if the assembly in which the part is used is known, turn t o the list of illustrations
and find the page number for the assembly in which the part is used. Locate the part and its item number
on the figure and find the item number in the group assembly parts list t o determine its description and
part number.
To locate the figure for a part if the part number is known, refer t o the numerical index and find the part
number. Turn t o the first figure and item number indicated in the index. If this figure shows the part in a
section or system of the equipment other than the one desired, refer t o the other figure numbers listed in
the numerical index.
6-2
parts list
6.2 GROUP ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
HF-9010
HF-9012
HF 9040 I I F-9041
I I F-9042
AT-9090
T P C - 3374-027
HF-9000 High-Frequency Communications System, Parts Location Diagram

6-3
parts list
HF-9000 High-Frequency Communications System, Parts Location Diagram

6-4 Change 3
parts list
I UNITS USABLE
FIG- PART NO N DESCRIPTION PER ON
ITEM D ASSY CODE
6-1- NO NUMBER 1 HF-9000 HIGHFREQUENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM REF

-1 622-8111-001 2 CONTROL, REMOTE HF-9010 1
-2 622-9409-001 2 CONTROL, RADIO SET HF-9012 1
-3 622-8113-002 2 COUPLER, HF ANTENNA HF 9040 1
-3 685-0365-001 2 COUPLER, HF ANTENNA HF 9040 (WITH COAX ADAPTER) 1
-4 685-0350-002 2 COUPLER, HF ANTENNA HF 9041 (WITH COAX ADAPTER) 1
-6 013-1923-010 2 ANTENNA, HF MONOPOLE AT-9090 1
-7 218-0153-010 2 ANTENNA ARRAY, HF (TOWEL BAR ANTENNA) (NOT 1
ILLUSTRATED)
-7 218-0153-020 2 ANTENNA ARRAY, HF (TOWEL BAR ANTENNA) (NOT 1
ILLUSTRATED)
-8 622-8112-001 2 RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER, RADIO HF-9030 1
-10 822-0101-001 2 RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER, RADIO HF-9031A 1
Change 3 6-5
parts list
TPC-3915-04lA[ 1 )
HF-9000 High-Frequency Communications System Mounts, Parts Location Diagram

Figure 6-2 (Sheet 1 o f 4 )
6-6
parts list
10

6-7
parts list
11
/
13
TPC -391 5 - 0 4 1 A I 3 1

6-8
parts list
14
16
17
18
U U
TPC -391 5 - 0 4 1 A I 4 I

6-9
parts list
I UNITS USABLE
FIG- PART NO N DESCRIPTION PER ON
ITEM D ASSY CODE
6-2- NO NUMBER 1 HF-9000 HIGH-FREQUENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM REF

MOUNTS
-1 622-8115-001 2 MOUNTING BASE, ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MT-9030 1
-2 622-8116-001 2 MOUNTIPIG BASE , ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MT-9030A 1
-3 822-0594-001 2 MOUNTING BASE, ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MT-9030B 1
-6 622-8118-00i 2 MOUNTING BASE, ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MT-9040A 1
-9 622-8122-001 2 MOUNTING BASE, ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MT-9041A 1
-11 622-8123-001 2 MOUNT, DUAL COUPLER MT-9042 1
-12 622-8124-001 2 MOUNT, DUAL COUPLER MT-9042A 1
-13 622-8135-001 2 MOUP.ITING BASE, ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MT-9043 1
-14 622-9408-001 2 ,
MOUNTING BASE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MT-9044A 1
-15 822-0096-001 2 MOUNTING BASE , ELECTRICAL EQUIPPENT MT-9077 1
-16 822-0097-001 2 MOUNTING BASE, ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MT-9077A 1
-18 822-0099-001 2 MOUNT, ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MT-9079B 1
6-10
parts list
6.3 NUMERICAL INDEX
PART NUMBER FIG- TTL PART NUMBER FIG- TTL

ITEM REQ ITEM REQ
NO NUMBER 6-1- REF 622-8132-003 6-1-15 1

6-2- REF 622-8135-001 6-2-13 1
013-1923-010 6-1-6 1 622-9405-001 6-1-5 1
013-1923-020 6-1-6 1 622-9405-002 6-1-5 1
013-1923-030 6-1-6 1 622-9405-003 6-1-5 1
218-0153-010 6-1-7 1 622-9408-001 6-1-14 1
218-0153-020 6-1-7 1 622-9409-001 6-1-2 1
622-8111-001 6-1-1 1 622-9409-002 6-1-2 1
622-8111-002 6-1-1 1 622-9409-003 6-1-2 1
622-8111-003 6-1-1 1 622-9409-004 6-1-2 1
622-8111-004 6-1-1 1 622-9411-001 6-2-4 1
622-8111-005 6-1-1 1 622-9424-002 6-1-17 1
622-8111-006 6-1-1 1 622-9424-003 6-1-17 1
622-8112-001 6-1-8 1 685-0350-002 6-1-4 1
622-8112-002 6-1-8 1 685-0365-001 6-1-3 1
622-8112-003 6-1-8 1 822-0090-002 6-1-13 1
622-8113-002 6-1-3 1 822-0096-001 6-2-15 1
622-8113-003 6-1-3 1 822-0097-001 6-2-16 1
622-8114-001 6-1-4 1 822-0099-001 6-2-18 1
622-8114-002 6-1-4 1 822-0101-001 6-1-10 1
622-8115-001 6-2-1 1 822-0101-002 6-1-10 1
622-8116-001 6-2-2 1 822-0102-001 6-1-14 1
622-8117-001 6-2-5 1 822-0108-001 6-1-18 1
622-8118-001 6-2-6 1 822-0109-001 6-1-20 1
622-8121-001 6-2-8 1 822-0110-001 6-1-19 1
622-8122-001 6-2-9 1 822-0111-001 6-1-21 1
622-8123-001 6-2-11 1 822-0594-001 6-2-3 1
622-8124-001 6-2-12 1 822-0595-001 6-2-7 1
622-8125-001 6-1-9 1 822-0596-001 6-2-10 1
622-8125-002 6-1-9 1 822-0597-001 6-2-17 1
622-8126-001 6-1-11 1
622-8126-002 6-1-11 1
622-8126-003 6-1-11 1
622-8128-001 6-1-12 1
622-8128-002 6-1-12 1
622-8128-003 6-1-12 1
622-8129-001 6-1-12 1
622-8129-002 6-1-16 1
622-8129-003 6-1-16 1
622-8132-001 6-1-16 1
622-8132-002 6-1-15 1
Change 3 6-11/6-12
I Section 7 Diagrams
SECTION 7
DIAGRAMS
Refer t o the applicable intermediate-level maintenance instruction book for chassis interconnect diagrams
and the applicable depot-level maintenance instruction book for schematic diagrams of the circuit cards
and modules comprising the HF-9000 system.
7-117-2
I Section 8 Supplement
523-0778856-202211
2nd Edition, 15 October 1999
Change 2, 27 January 2004
HF-9000D High-Frequency
supplement
1. DESCRIPTION
This document provides supplemental information on the HF-9000D High-Frequency Communications
System (referred to as HF-9000D system). The HF-9000D system is comprised of the Radio Set Control
HF-9012D and Receiver Transmitter HF-9087D, refer to figure 1, as well as Antenna Coupler HF-904X.
These system units intercommunicate via a fiber optic cable that routes serial data in a simple loop
configuration. Up to 35 user-programmed preset channels/nets are stored with frequency, RF emission
mode, and modem selection data in nonvolatile memory. The HF-9000D system receives and transmits voice
or data messages in upper sideband (USB), lower sideband (LSB), Amplitude Modulation Equivalent (AME),
Continuous Wave (CW), Enhanced USB, Enhanced LSB, and Enhanced independent sideband (ISB) (data)
emission modes in simplex or half-duplex operation. Both data modem and automatic link establishment
(ALE) capabilities are imbedded inside the Receiver-Transmitter HF-9087D.
This document highlights the differences and added capabilities of the HF-9000D system in comparison to
prior systems. The Radio Set Control HF-9012 and newer HF-9012D share most operations. HF-9012D
exceptions are noted herein. Therefore, for complete system instruction, use this supplement along with the
HF-9000 High-Frequency Communications System Operation and Organizational Maintenance Instruction
Book, part number 523-0806627 (referred to as the instruction book).
Receiver-Transmitter HF-9087D and Radio Set Control HF-9012D

Figure 1
Change 2 1
sumdement 523-0778856
1.1 Equipment Supplied
Information about available equipment statuses for the HF-9000D system is listed in tables 1-1and 1-2.
Table 1. Radio Set Control Equipment Supplied
I 822-1071-004 1 X X
*Night vision goggles
**Automatic link establishment
1
~
TYPE PART REMOTE

NUMBER NUMBER (PEP/AVG") CONTROL**
HF-9087D 822-1069-001 X I ( x 1 x 1 X X
*Peak envelope power and average
**Unit can be manually controlled with Radio Set Control HF-9012D. The HF-9000D system may also be
controlled by a MIL-STD-1553B data bus (additional information available upon request).
***Aeronautical Radio, Inc.
1.2 Associated Equipment
The HF-9000D system uses any one of the antenna couplers and their mounts listed in tables 1-3 and 1-4,
respectfully, of the instruction book. Receiver-Transmitter HF-9087D uses Equipment Mount MT-9030B.
Also, refer t o the instruction book for Installation Hardware (table 1-5)and Antenna Options (table 1-6).
1.3 Equipment Specifications
Applicable new specifications for the HF-9000D system configuration are provided in supplement table 3.
2
supplement 523-0778856
Table 3. HF-9000D System Equipment Added Specifications

CHARACTERISTICS SPECIFICATION
Electrical
Channel, Preset
35 User programmable
Power Consumption 606 W maximum at 28 V dc, transmit (HF-9087D, HF-9012D,
and HF-904X)
186 W maximum at 28 V dc, receive (HF-9087D, HF-9012D, and
HF-904X)
Operating modes
Enhanced USB Enhanced upper sideband data
Enhanced LSB Enhanced lower sideband data
Enhanced ISB Enhanced independent sideband data
Multimode Data Modem Embedded modem (HF-9087D) per MIL-STD-188-110A.
(embedded)
Receive
Sensitivity
SSB 0.63 µV maximum (-111 dBm) maximum for 10 dB (s+n)/n
Audio output
Voice 100-mW (+20 dBm), 600-Ω balanced, 150-Ω center tap, with 1
mV (-47 dBm) RF input 100% modulated at 1 kHz
Data 1 1-mW (0 dBm), 600-Ω balanced, 150-Ω center tap, with 1 mV
and (-47 dBm) RF input at (F0 + 1 kHz)
Data 2
Transmit
Power output Selectable to three levels
Low power 10 W ±1.5 dB pep and average into 50 ohms
Medium power 50 W ±1.5 dB pep and average
High power 200 W ±1.5 dB pep, 100 W average
Audio input
Data 1 0 dBm into 600-Ω balanced or 150-Ω center tapped
and
Data 2
Environmental
Temperature -40 to +55 °C (-40 to +131 °F)
1.4 Related Publications
This document is a supplement for the HF-9000 High-Frequency Communications System Organizational
Maintenance Instruction Book, part number 523-0806627.
Change 2 3
sumlement 523-0778856
1.5 Difference Data
System operational differences are covered in section 3, Operation. Table 3 highlights general electrical and
environmental specifications that differentiate the HF-9000D system from prior systems. Refer to table 1-7
of the instruction book for additional specifications.
2. INSTALLATION
RF and fiber-optic control cabling are required between units of the HF-9000D system. RF cabling is
required between the receiver-transmitter, antenna coupler, antenna, and filter when installed. Fiber optic
control linking cable is required between all system units except the antenna. Audio cabling between the
HF-9000D system and audio devices is also required. Refer to the system interconnect diagram, figure 2, for
to-from information. For HF-9000D system installation control drawings, refer to figures 3 and 4. Observe all
precautions and information detailed in section 2, Installation of the instruction book.
4
P/O HF-9087D PI0

ANTENNA
J
P/O
-10 RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER
RCV VOICE 600 OHMS RCV VOICE
J DATA KEY ( + 6 V I
RCV VOICE 150 OHMS AUDIO OUT
K RS-232 CONTROL I N
RCV VOICE COM (NOTE 5 I
L RS-232 MONITOR
RCV VOICE SHLD
M RS-232 SHLD J RCV DATA 1 600 OHMS RCV DATA 1 HF-9040/9041/9042
t
- SELCAL CALL ALE T
N DST TX DATA A
RCV DATA 1 150 OHMS AUDIO OUT
( 3 A MAXI
ANTENNA COUPLER
RCV DATA 1 COM N (NOTES 5 6 61
P DST TX DATA B PWR GND
RCV DATA 1 SHLD GG
R DST RX DATA A
S DST RX DATA B SELCAL AUDIO OUT
f CONFIG A
SELCAL RCV H
T DST RTS A
SELCAL RCV L DD (NOTE 81 RF 1/0
U DST RTS B
V DST RX CLK A (CONFIG G N D i R
DATA XMT VOICE 600 OHMS XMT VOICE
W DST RX CLK B
TERMINAL XMT VOICE 150 OHMS AUDIO I N +28 V DC EXT ELEMENT PWR U
X DST TX CLK A EXT ELEMENT PWR GND H
XMT VOICE COM M (NOTES 5 6 71
Y DST TX CLK B DUAL +28 V DC I N D
XMT VOICE SHLD f J
z DST CTS A
XMT DATA 1 600 OHMS
n P+ n
XMT DATA 1 STATUS A E
a DST CTS B STATUS B F
XMT DATA 1 150 OHMS AUDIO I N
b DST VDP A EXT ELEMENT A J RESERVED
XMT DATA 1 COM V (NOTES 5 6 61 '
-
C DST VDP B EXT ELEMENT B K
XMT DATA 1 SHLD X J
-
P DST GND EXT ELEMENT C L
CARBON MIC H CARBON MIC I N
-i RS-422 OUT A
h [NOTE 71 EXT ELEMENT D M
J RS-422 OUT B - EXT ELEMENT E N
h RS-422 OUT SHLt EXT ELEMENT F P
RESERVED P/O
m
-n
RS-422 I N A
RS-422 I N B SPARE { S
T
-kV RS-422 I N SHLD RCV DATA 2 600 OHMS
RCV DATA 2 150 OHMS
RCV DATA 2
AUDIO OUT
L
- BACKUP VCC
-
W BACKUP VCC RTN RCV DATA 2 COM (NOTES 5 C 61
r
- RESERVED RCV DATA 2 SHLD
GPS TOD DATA XMT DATA 2 600 OHMS XMT DATA 2
-
Y
XMT DATA 2 150 OHMS AUDIO I N
-
Z GPS TOD GND
AA GPS POSITION DATA A XMT DATA 2 COM G (NOTES 5 6 6 ) HF-90 12D +28 V DC INPUT ( 1 A MAXI
BB GPS POSITION DATA B XMT DATA 2 SHLD H
cc GPS DATA SHIELD BLOWER ON/OFF RADIO SET PWR GND
115 V AC LIGHTING BUS RESERVED
/
J11
7
LOGIC REFERENCE
ENHANCED DATA
GND
CONTROL
(NOTE 161
G
MASTER/SLAVE GND
LIGHTING BUS COMMON
>
MASTER/SLAVE
NOTE 14
BALANCED L I N E ( + I H SPARE
BALANCED L I N E ( - 1 J 28 V DC LIGHTING
(NOTE 91 5 V DC LIGHTING BUS
J3 J2
D SPARES (NCI
FIBER OPTIC L I N K J3 J2
FBR OPT OUT FBR OPT I N
FIBER OPTIC L I N K
FBR OPT OUT FBR OPT 4
I I
LOGIC REFERENCE J2 J3
BALANCED L I N E [ + I 1 FIBER OPTIC L I N K NOTE 1 1 I
FBR OPT I N FBR OPT OUT
RESERVED BALANCED L I N E ( - 1
(NOTE 1 0 I J5 J4
SPARES (NCI RG-400/U
A n
I RF 110 RF 110
I I
TPD-1975-032Clll
Typical Interconnect Diagram for HF-9000D

Figure 2 (Sheet 1of 3)
5/6
P/O HF-9087D '10

P/O J1
RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER
-1
r
I
;1
b AGC TIME CONSTANT
SPARES
-
C SPEECH PROC DSBL
d TEST ENBL-RESERVED
-i SYSTEM FAULT
G TUNE I N PROGRESS PTT KEY
T SYSTEM KEY STOP SCAN -
U XMT I N H I B I T RETRANSMIT /uO
'-
H NORMAL/DATA I N
F B U I L T I N TEST
e GROUND Jll
HH GROUND
CDU SELECT u
-
FF GROUND
CDU I N A ivlM
a RCV MUTE
CDU I N B UN
Z CPLR BYPASS iH
CDU I N SHLD
1
P RT ADDRESS 0
CDU OUT A JJ
R RT ADDRESS 1
CDU OUT B <K
k
- RT ADDRESS 2
CDU OUT SHLD -L
m RT ADDRESS 3 NOTE 4
TEST RESULTSZEROIZE
TO CDU 3D
S RT ADDRESS 4
fE
AA RT PARITY
GND -F
V CHASSIS GND
ON/STANDBY 3G
PROG ENABLE -
X
D ALE NON-AUTO RESPONSE
f CONFIG 0 d
BB ALE CHANNEL BUSY
CONFIG 1 e
cc SEND/RCV DATA SYNC
CONFIG 2 f
Y PROCESSED KEY
X RETURN TO SCAN
( CONFIG 3 9
-
\
r ALE CALL ALERT
/
-S ALE LINKEDILINKING 16
AMPL
RF 110
NOTE 3 J8
L >A BUS RCVR/EXCTR
A BUS RF 1/0 D T E 2
L
J4
1
NOTE 3 2
B BUS
"
L }B BUS
+28 V DC INPUT
L (20 A MAX)
NOTE 1
H PWR GND
K NOTE 1

Figure 2 (Sheet 2 of 3)
NOTES : 17 I MATING CONNECTORS :

1 USE NO. 10 AWG (MINIMUM) WIRE FROM AIRCRAFT 28 V DC BUS TO WITHIN 0 , 3 METERS MILITARY
UNIT CONNECTOR COMMERIAL
( 1 2 INCHES) FROM THE RECEIVER TRANSMITTER, CONNECT THE 28 V DC POSITIVE CONNECTOR STRAIN RELIEF
WIRE TO AN EIGHT STUD TERMINAL BLOCK (PN 376-0810-080, MS 27212-1-81 OR 371-6411-000 359-7504-040 359-7007-010 PN
EQUIVALENT. USE BUS BAR (PN 367-0810-050, MS 25266-2-61 OR EQUIVALENT AND Jl
PT06AlZ-lOS(SR) MS3476L12-10S MS3417-12N TYPE
COVER [PN 367-0809-080, MS 18029-19-81 OR EQUIVALENT, USE F I V E NO, 20 AWG
WIRES, LENGTH NOT TO EXCEED 0 , 4 6 METER ( 1 8 INCHES), FROM THE BUSSED 261-0054-010 PN
TERMINALS TO J4 P I N S A , B, C, D, AND J OF THE RECEIVER TRANSMITTER. J2/J3
SPECTRAN
TYPE
USE F I V E NO. 20 AWG WIRES, LENGTH NOT TO EXCEED 0 . 4 6 METER (18 INCHES), CM-230-1 .8
FROM J 4 P I N S E, F, G, H, AND K TO AN AIRCRAFT GROUND TERMINAL,
371-8625-260 359-7504-250 M85049/52-1-22N PN
USE A 2 5 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR THE RECEIVER TRANSMITTER, A SINGLE 5 J1
MS3476L22-55S TYPE
AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER MAY BE USED FOR THE RADIO SET CONTROL AND ANTENNA
COUPLER COMBINED. 252-0042-010 261-0054-010 PN
J2
ALL OTHER WIRES ARE NO, 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, TYPE
252-0043-010 261-0054-010 PN
2 , COAXIAL JUMPER SUPPLIED, J3
TYPE
3. USE MIL-C-17/176-0002 TRIAX CABLE OR EQUIVALENT,
4,
5,
CONNECT ADDRESS AND PARITY P I N S TO J1 P I N V CHASSIS GROUND AS REQUIRED
CONNECT EITHER 150 OHM OR 600 OHM BALANCED AUDIO, NOT BOTH, I J4
371-2157-000
MS3112E12-10PW
359-7504-290
MS3467L12-10SW
M85049/52-1-12N PN
TYPE
6.
7.
CONNECT DATA AUDIO I F REQUIRED.
CONNECT EITHER XMT VOICE AUDIO INPUT OR CARBON MIC INPUT, NOT BOTH. I J5
357-7093-000
357-7347-010
357-9292-000
M39012/16-0101
357-9666-000
PN
TYPE
PN
8. CONNECT SELCAL AUDIO I F REQUIRED,
M39012/28-0018 M39012/16-0101 TYPE
9. NSA-DS-lO1D INTERFACE PORT. EXTERNAL DATA TRANSFER DEVICE USED TO LOAD DATA. HF-9087D
357-0199-010 357-9666-000 PN
1 0 , RESERVED FOR KEYFILL
I
1
J7
11 I USE FIBER OPTIC CABLE SPECTRAN SPECIALITY OPTICS HCP-M0200T-D01FS-10
1 M39012/16-0101 1 TYPE
(PN 216-0029-010) OR EQUIVALENT.
1 2 . USE NO. 20 AWG WIRE FROM AIRCRAFT 28 V OC BUS FOR COUPLER POWER. I J8
357-0622-140 357-0622-030 PN
TYPE
13 I ANTENNA COUPLER CONFIGURATION STRAPPING TABLE

I J9
357-0622-140 357-0622-030 PN
TYPE
ANTENNA TYPE
CONFIGURATION
STRAPPING
0 = GND ( J l - R I
1 J10
371-8625-200 359-7504-160
MS3476L24-61S
M85049/52-1-24N PN
TYPE
GROUNDED TUBE/GROUNDED WIRE

-
1 = ( -
-
J1-A
1
EN
J1-B
1
-
Jl-C
1
I J11
369-0110-070 369-0108-010 PN
TYPE
TUBE: 3 - 6 6 M ( 1 2 F T ) MINIMUM
WIRE: 3 . 0 5 M ( 1 0 F T ) MINIMUM
SHUNT ANTENNAS/SHORT GROUNDED 1 0 1
I J12
369-0110-070 369-0108-010 PN
TYPE
TUBES (HF-9041 ONLY) 371-8087-000 359-7504-080 359-7007-010 PN
WHIP/OPEN ANTENNAS (HF-9042) 1 1 0
I HF-9040 1 I PT06A1419S(SR) I MS3476L14-19S I MS3417-14N I TYPE
OPEN ANTENNAS (WITH EXTERNAL 0 1 1 261-0054-010 PN
ELEMENT 1
--- HF-904 1 J2/J3
SPECTRAN
CM-230-1 .8
TYPE
1 4 , CONNECT P I N S E AND F TOGETHER FOR SINGLE CONTROL OPERATION. 357-9292-000 PN

J4
1 5 . CONNECT 28 V OR 5 V PANEL LIGHTING CONTROL AS REQUIRED. MIL-C-39012/16-0101 TYPE
1 6 . USE OF RADIO SET CONTROL I S OPTIONAL WHEN MIL-STD-1553B CONTROL I S USED.
I F CONTROL I S NOT USED, CONNECT FIBER OPTIC L I N K FROM R/T J 3 TO COUPLER J 2 ,

9/10
Radio Set Control HF-9012D,

Figure 3
Change 1 11/12
sutmlement 523-0778856
COF J10 (CONTROL) NOTES:
-
CON :CTOR J 1 (CONTROL) CONN J2 F I B E R O P T I C RECEIVE I N
P I F FUNCT I ON
-
A DATA 2 RECEIVE AUDIO OUT 600 OHMS
1.
2.
U N I T WEIGHT 9 . 5 KG 1 2 1 . 0 L B S ] MAX.
-@ DENOTES APPROXIMATE CENTER OF GRAVITY.
3 FUNCT I ON B
C
DATA 2 RECEIVE AUDIO OUT 150 OHMS
DATA 2 RECEIVE AUDIO OUT COMMON
3.
4.
POWER REQUIREMENTS: 28 VDC.
T H I S I S THE INSTALLATION DRAWING FOR RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER, HF-9087D. 822-1069-001
A VOICE RCV AUDIO OUT 600 OHMS CONN J3 F I B E R O P T I C TRANSMIT OUT
D DATA 2 RECEIVE AUDIO OUT S H I E L D 5. ALPHA CHARACTERS FOLLOWED BY ASTERISK DENOTE LOWER CASE LETTERS.
B VOICE RCV AUDIO OUT 150 OHMS
E DATA 2 TRANSMIT AUDIO I N 600 OHMS
i
C VOICE RCV AUDIO OUT COMMON J4 (POWER)
D ALE NON-AUTO RESPONSE I N FUNCT I ON F DATA 2 TRANSMIT AUDIO I N 150 OHMS
E SPARE G DATA 2 TRANSMIT AUDIO I N COMMON
+28 VDC
F B U I L T I N TEST OUT H DATA 2 TRANSMIT AUDIO I N S H I E L D
+28 VDC
G TUNE I N PROGRESS ( T I P ) OUT + 2 8 VDC J + 6 VOLT KEY I N
H NORMAL/DATA I N K RESERVED (RS-232 CONTROL I N )
+ 2 8 VDC
J PUSH TO TALK (PTT) KEY I N +28 VDC RETURN L RESERVED (RS-232 MONITOR OUT)
K VOICE TRANSMIT AUDIO I N 600 OHMS F M RESERVED (RS-232 S H I E L D )
+28 VDC RETURN
L VOICE TRANSMIT AUDIO I N 150 OHMS N DST SEND DATA A I N
G +28 VDC RETURN
M VOICE TRANSMIT AUDIO I N COMMON H +28 VDC RETURN P DST SEND DATA B I N
N R DST RECEIVE DATA A OUT
DATA 1 RECEIVE AUDIO OUT COMMON J +28 VDC
P MIL-STD-1553B RT ADDRESS 0 I N K +28 VDC RETURN S DST RECEIVE DATA B OUT
R MIL-STD-1553B RT ADDRESS 1 I N T DST REQUEST TO SEND (RTS) A I N B BALANCED L I N E ( + )
S MIL-STD-1553B RT ADDRESS 4 I N U DST REQUEST TO SEND (RTS) B I N C SPARE
CONN J5 RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER RF
T SYSTEM KEY OUT V DST RECEIVE T I M I N G CLK A OUT D SPARE
W DST RECEIVE T I M I N G CLK B OUT E BALANCED L I N E (-)
U TRANSMIT I N H I B I T I N I CONN J6 PA RF CONNECTOR I X DST SEND T I M I N G CLK A I N F SPARE
V GROUND
w VOICE RCV AUDIO OUT S H I E L D Y DST SEND T I M I N G CLK B I N
X RETURN TO SCAN I N
CONN J 7 RECEIVER/EXCITER RF
I 2 DST CLEAR TO SEND (CTS) A OUT
A* DST CLEAR TO SEND ( C I S ) B OUT
Y PROCESSED KEY OUT I CONN J8 MIL-STD-1553B BUS A I B* DST V A L I D DATA PRESENT (VDP) A OUT
2 COUPLER BYPASS I N
C* ST V A L I D DATA PRESENT (VDP) B OUT B BALANCED L I N E ( + )
A * VOICE RCV MUTE I N
B * AGC T I M E CONSTANT SELECT I N
CONN J 9 MIL-STD-1553B BUS B
I D* RESERVED (CONFIG 0 I N ) C SPARE
C * SPEECH PROCESSING D I S A B L E I N E* RESERVED (CONFIG 1 I N ) D SPARE
D * RESERVED (TEST ENABLE I N ) F* RESERVED (CONFIG 2 I N ) E BALANCED L I N E (-)
E * GROUND G* RESERVED (CONFIG 3 I N ) F SPARE
F * VOICE TRANSMIT AUDIO I N S H I E L D H. RESERVED (RS-422 OUT S H I E L D )
G* CARBON M I C TRANSMIT AUDIO I N H I G H I* RESERVED (RS-422 OUT A)
H I CARBON M I C TRANSMIT AUDIO I N LOW J* RESERVED (RS-422 OUT E )
I * SYSTEM FAULT OUT K* RESERVED (RS-422 I N S H I E L D )
J * SPARE M* RESERVED (RS-422 I N A)
K * MIL-STD-1553B RT ADDRESS 2 I N N* RESERVED (RS-422 I N E )
M * MIL-STD-1553B RT ADDRESS 3 I N P* DST SIGNAL GND
N * SPARE Q* BLOWER ON/OFF OUT
P * SPARE R* RESERVED
Q* STOP SCAN I N S* ENHANCED DATA MODE OUT
R* ALE CALL ALERT OUT T* SELCAL CALL ALERT OUT
S* ALE L I N K E D / L I N K I N G U*
V*
CDU SELECT I N
BACKUP VCC I N
CONNECTOR 11 MATING CONNECTOR I STRA!N RELIEF
T * SELCAL RECEIVE AUDIO OUT H I G H I PART
U * VOICE RETRANSMIT OUT W* BACKUP VCC RTN REF DES NUMBER 11
I,
PART NUMBER I
I
PART NUMBER
V * DATA 1 TRANSMIT AUDIO I N COMMON X* PROGRAM LOAD ENABLE J1 I 3 7 1- 8 6 2 5 - 2 6 0 I] M S 3 4 7 6 L 2 2 - 5 5 5 (359-7504-250) I M85049/52-1-22N
W* DATA 1 TRANSMIT AUDIO I N 600 OHMS Y. GPS TIME OF DAY (TOD) DATA I N J2 252-0042-010 2 6 1-0054-01 0
X * DATA 1 TRANSMIT AUDIO I N S H I E L D Z* GPS TIME OF DAY (TOD) GROUND
33 252-0043-01 0 261-0054-010
Y * DATA 1 RECEIVE AUDIO OUT 150 OHMS AA GPS POSTION DATA A I N
’
BB GPS P O S I T I O N DATA E I N J4 MS3112E12-10PW ( 3 7 1 - 2 1 5 7 - 0 0 0 ) MS3467L12-iOSW ( 3 5 9 - 7 5 0 4 - 2 9 0 ) M85049/52-1-12N
z * DATA 1 RECEIVE AUDIO OUT 600 OHMS
AA MIL-STD-1553B RT P A R I T Y I N cc GPS DATA SHIELD 35 357-7093-000 M39012/16-D101 (357-9292-000)
BB ALE CHANNEL BUSY I N DO TEST RESULT TO CDU OUT J6 M39012/28-0018 (357-7347-010) M39012/26-0101 (357-9666-000)
cc SEND/RCV SYNC OUT EE ZEROIZE I N
J7 357-0199-010 M39012/26-0101 (357-9666-000)
DD SELCAL RECEIVE AUDIO OUT LOW FF GROUND
GG ON/STANDBY I N J8 357-0622-140 357-0622-030
EE DATA 1 TRANSMIT AUDIO I N 1 5 0 OHMS
F F GROUND HH CDU CONTROL DATA I N S H I E L D 39 357-0622-140 357-0622-030
GG DATA 1 RECEIVE AUDIO OUT SHIELD JJ CDU CONTROL DATA OUT A J10 371-8625-200 MS3476L24-61S (359-7504-160) M85029/52-1-24N
-HH CHASSIS GND KK
LL
CDU CONTROL DATA OUT B
CDU CONTROL DATA OUT S H I E L D
J 11 369-01 10-070 369-0108-010
MM CDU CONTROL DATA I N A J 12 369-01 10-070 369-0108-010 I
NN CDU CONTROL DATA I N B
PP GROUND
Receiver-Transmitter HF-9087D,
Installation Control Diagram
Figure 4 (Sheet 1of 2)
13/14
1 1 REF
81. 131 REF
b
- 1 5 2 . 4 [ 6.003 REF-4
I 1
194.3
L7.651
MAX
-7
1 0 1 . 6 [ 4 ~ 0 0 1 REF
1 3 . 7 [ . 5 4 1 REF
3 4 4 . 3 [ 1 3 . 1 6 1 MAX
9 . 5 2 [ . 3 7 5 ] REF -Ct L 3 . 181:. ,251 REF
1 1 3 % . 7 [ 1 5 . 6 2 1 MAX
TPD-1974-0221(2)
Receiver-Transmitter HF-9087D,
Installation Control Diagram
15/16
suDplement 523-0778856
3. OPERATION
3.1 General
Operation of the HF-9000D system is the same as covered in the instruction book with the exception of four
operating modes, Program SELCAL Address (PGS), Link Protection (LP), Program Timemate (PGT),
Timemate (TIM), and several new features of the Radio Set Control HF-9012D. The new features include
modem selection in Program Mode (PGM) and Manual Mode (MAN), HF-9000D system unit software part
numbers displayed while in Standby Mode (SBY), 15-character ALE addresses, and SELCAL detection.
Three new emission modes have been added: Enhanced Upper Sideband (EU), Enhanced Lower Sideband
(EL), and Enhanced Independent Sideband (EI).
The operational modes PGT and TIM were not included in the instruction book and are, therefore, included
in this supplement. They are existing modes of the HF-9012D.
3.2 Controls and Indicators
Controls and indicators for the HF-9012D are the same as the HF-9012 in the instruction book except as
detailed in table 4.Refer to figure 5 .
12 11 10 9 8 7 6
TPD-2023-0111
Radio Set Control HF-9012D Controls and Indicators
Figure 5
17
Table 4. Radio Set Control HF-9012D Controls and Indicators

NO INDICATOR
1 CURSOR In PGM mode (OPR field displays PGM) toggles between modem and
frequency settings by moving the cursor past display extreme left or right
2 OPR field Three alphanumeric characters display the HF-9000D system-operating

mode selected by the VALUE control. The HF-9012D radio set control
does not utilize HF-9012 operating modes LRN (learn), A J (anti jam),
and SCN (scan) (ALE Scan is used). The HF-9012D radio set control
provides the following operating modes in addition to those found in the
instruction book for the HF-9012.
PGS -Program SELCAL address mode; indicates the status and/or
allows modification of SELCAL operating parameters
LP -Link protection mode; indicates the status and/or allows enabling
or disabling of link protection
TIM -Time mode; provides indication of current system clock status
(also used by HF-9012)
PGT -Program time mode; provides indication of current system clock
status and allows modification of system clock time and date
(also used by HF-9012)
ZER - Zeroize mode; used t o zeroize ALE link protection keys (or AJ
keys for the HF-9012)
3 MODE field Two alpha characters display the HF-9000D system RF emissions
selected by the VALUE control or HF-system state. The HF-9000D
system makes available the following system states and RF emission
types in addition t o those listed in the instruction book.
Svstem States
EN -Enables link protection in LP mode or SELCAL detection in PGS
mode
DI -Disables link protection in LP mode or SELCAL detection in PGS
mode
HD -ALE hold link
US -ALE system is not time synchronized, LP enabled
SY -ALE system is time synchronized, LP enabled
SL -SELCAL link has been established
OK- Indicates no faults have been detected during built-in test when in
TST mode (also applies t o HF-9012)
TM -Indicates time while in the TIM or PGT mode (also applies to HF-
9012)
DT -Indicates date while in the TIM or PGT mode (also applies to
HF-9012)
18
supdement 523-0778856
Table 4. Radio Set Control HF-9012D Controls and Indicators (Cont)

NO INDICATOR
3 Cont SD - Indicates ALE sounding
CL - Indicates a call attempt is in process (CALL/LD switch has been
pressed)
RF Emission k e s
EU - Enhanced USB
EL - Enhanced LSB
E1 - Enhanced ISB
~~ ~~~
4 INFO field In ALE mode, ALE call and self-addresses of up t o 15 alphanumeric

characters can be viewed 3 characters at a time using the CURSOR
control. The VALUE control can be used t o reprogram ALE call addresses
in MAN ALE, CHN ALE, and ALE Scan modes. The ALE self-address can
be programmed in PGA mode using ADWCHAN control and CALULD
switch.
~~
5 PWR field NOTE: When system is first powered up, it retains the same RF power
output level as when it was turned off.
Refer t o the instruction book table 3-2.
6 VALUE control Refer to the instruction book table 3-2.
7 CURSOR control Refer t o the instruction book table 3-2.
~~~ ~ ~ ~
8 CALULD switch In an ALE mode, press the CALULD switch when an ALE call address is
(HF-9012 and displayed in the INFO field t o place a call t o selected address. Press the
HF-9012D) CALULD switch before a link is established t o terminate the call. Press
the CALL/LD switch after a link is established to terminate the link
(HF-9012) or hold the link (HF-9012D).When the display reads S D , press
the switch t o cause the HF-9000D system to sound on the active channels
as soon as possible.
HF-9012D Onlv: In ALE mode, press the CALULD switch after a link is
established t o hold the link. Press the CALULD switch after a hold has
been established to release hold (return t o scan). Press the CALULD
switch after a link (or link held) has been established and a new call
address has been selected t o initiate a new call.
In PGM mode, press this switch t o load desired receive-transmit emission
type, frequency (and modem selection for HF-9012D) channel data into
receiver-transmitter nonvolatile memory for the 99 (35 for HF-9012D)
user-programmable preset channels for simplex operation. Press the
CALULD switch while the PTT key is pressed t o program the displayed
frequency as a transmit frequency.
In PGA mode, press CALULD switch t o program self-address.
19

NO INDICATOR
8 Cont In PGT mode, press the CALL/LD switch to program time or date.
In ZER mode, press CALLnD switch to perform zeroize operation.
In CHN and MAN modes, press the CALLLD switch after a SELCAL link
has been established to return to SELCAL detection.
In PGS mode (enabled), press the CALLLD switch t o program a SELCAL
address.
In SBY mode, press CALLAD switch t o set the OPR field t o OFF. When
set to off, the control reinitializes when a n interrupt is received.
9 ADWCHAN The ADWCHAN control provides selection of all preprogrammed ALE
control addresses or channels. Rotate the ADWCHAN control t o sequentially
change (increment or decrement) the current address or channeunet
number regardless of the cursor position. An ALE channel sound may be
initiated by using ADWCHAN to acquire the “S-D” call address display
and pressing CALLnD switch.
In CHN mode, allows selection of the 1 or 2 digit channeynet number.
In EMR mode, allows selection of the l-digit maritime emergency channel
numbers.
In PGM mode, allows selection of program preset c h a n n e h e t number.
Also, allows selection of alternate modem when the alternate modem
display is active.
In MAN mode, allows selection of a frequency up to six digits in length.
Can select modem when the alternate modem display is active.
In MAR mode, allows selection of the 4-digit maritime channel number.
In PGA mode, allows selection of ALE self-address.
10 DSPL switch In SBY mode, press the switch once to display the radio set control
software part number starting in the second position of the OPR field.
Press the switch a second time t o display the receiver-transmitter software
part number starting in the second position of the OPR field. Pressing the
switch a third time displays the digital signal processor (DSP) software
part number starting in the second position of the OPR field. Pressing the
switch a fourth time returns the display t o the SBY screen.
In MAN mode, allows alternating the display between the frequency
number, ALE address (Manual ALE enabled), and modem.
In MAR mode, allows alternating the display between the 4-digit channel
number and frequency number.
In CHN mode, allows alternating the display between c h a n n e h e t number,
frequency number, and ALE address.
20

NO INDICATOR
10 Cont In PGM mode, sets the frequency display t o all zeros and programs the
preset channelhet. This c h a n n e h e t then becomes inoperable in CHN
mode and cannot be selected.
In PGT and TIM modes, allows alternating the display between time and
date formats (also applies t o HF-9012).
If system fails t o initialize properly, pressing DSPL switch initiates a
system loop test.
11 SQL control Refer t o the instruction book table 3-2.
12 VOL control Refer t o the instruction book table 3-2.
3.3 Operation
Operational commands covered in the instruction book are applicable to the HF-9000D system configuration
except for the addition of initialization display, operating modes Link Protection (LP), Program SELCAL
(PGS), Timemate (TIM), Program Timemate (PGT), and updates t o ALE Scan (ALE), Channel ALE (CHN),
Emergency Mode (EMR), Manual ALE O") ,
Maritime Mode (MAR), Program Mode (PGM), Program ALE
Self-Address Mode (PGA), Standby Mode (SBY), and Test Mode (TST).
NOTE
Channel (CHN) mode operates on channehets. The 35 channehets contain a channel
(frequency and RF emission mode) and may have an optional modem selection. The 35 channel
and ALE channeunets are programmed in Program Channel (PGM) mode or during datafill.
3.3.1 I nitialization Display
During initialization, internal system test messages are being sent. Momentarily, the OPR field displays
FLT, the MODE field displays FO, and the INFO field displays fault number 9002.
When initialization loop test is passed, the MODE field displays HF and the INFO field displays -9000 until
initialization data is received from the receiver-transmitter. Receiver-transmitter current operating mode
and parameters are then displayed.
If the system fails to initialize, a new loop test should be initiated by pressing the DSPL switch. The OPR
field displays RCV and the MODE field displays FO. The INFO field displays unit designations for those
units sending messages t o the HF-9012D. Unit designations are RSC (radio set control), EXT (external
(HF-9012 only)), RT (receiver-transmitter), CU (coupler), and FILT (filter).
3.3.2 Link Protection (LP) Operation
Link protection operation provides ALE address security and prevents an intruder from disrupting ALE
communications. Ingredients essential to this operation are LP keys and time synchronization. These
ingredients must be datafilled into the system and are not programmable by the operator. Link protection
operation requires the communication systems have the LP datafill and LP operation enabled by the
operator. This mode of operation provides the operator with indication and selection of ALE link protection
status. Perform LP operation as follows:
a. Use the CURSOR control t o position cursor in OPR field then rotate VALUE control to display LP.
21
NOTE
The INFO and PWR fields are blanked and inaccessible via the CURSOR and VALUE
controls.
b. Use the CURSOR control to position the cursor in the MODE field and then use the VALUE control t o
EN (enable) or DI (disable) link protection. When link protection is enabled for ALE Scan, ALE CHN,
and ALE MAN modes, a display of US in the Mode field indicates the system is not time synchronized in
accordance with MIL-STD-141A. Conversely, a display of SY in the Mode field indicates the system is
time synchronized.
3.3.3 Program SELCAL Address (PGS) Operation
PGS provides the operator with an indication of the current SELCAL detection status. PGS also allows the
operator to modify the operating parameters of the SELCAL detection operating mode and program
SELCAL address. Perform PGS operation as follows:
a. Use the CURSOR control t o position cursor in OPR field then rotate VALUE control to display PGS. The
SELCAL address is displayed in the INFO field.
b. Use the CURSOR and VALUE controls to select the 4-character SELCAL address.
NOTE
The MODE field is not accessible until the SELCAL address contains no dashes.
C. Use the CURSOR and VALUE controls t o enable (EN) or disable (DI) SELCAL detection via the MODE
field. Setting EN in the MODE field initiates a fiber-optic message t o the receiver-transmitter indicating
a SELCAL address is t o be programmed and SELCAL detection is t o be enabled. Setting DI in the
MODE field initiates a fiber-optic message t o the receiver-transmitter indicating SELCAL detection is t o
disable and the currently programmed address is to be displayed.
d. Press the CALL/LD switch t o program a SELCAL address in accordance with EN displayed in the
MODE field. Observe INFO field display blinks t o indicate SELCAL address is programmed.
3.3.4 ALE Operation
The HF-9000D system receiver-transmitter is equipped with ALE software. It sounds

(transmits a short tone burst) and responds t o ALE calls automatically (without operator
intervention). Anytime local regulations prohibit HF emissions, ensure the HF-9000D system
is set for silent operation or in standby mode.
When operating in this mode, the HF-9000D system can perform all ALE functions available with the least
amount of operator interaction. ALE operations include placing a call t o the address displayed on the radio
set control, scanning all channels in use for incoming calls, periodically sounding channels, and collecting
sounding information (link quality analysis (LQA) data). The receiver-transmitter must be loaded with a
valid ALE datafill before ALE operations are possible. The HF-9000D system displays the ALE call address
in 3-character blocks. Each of 15 characters is accessible using the CURSOR and VALUE controls. ALE link
protection may be applied. Refer to paragraph 3.3.2, Link Protection (LP) Operation.
SELCAL detection is temporarily disabled while in an ALE mode.
22
3.3.4.1 ALE Scan (ALE)Operation
When an ALE scan listlscan net is selected, the HF-9000D system scans the programmed scan-list channels.
The HF-9000D system stops scanning when the ALE activity is detected on a channel. The HF-9000D system
listens on the channel to determine if the ALE tones are an incoming call or LQA data. If the HF-9000D
system determines the ALE tones are not an incoming call, the scanning resumes. If tones are an incoming
call, the HF-9000D system unmutes the audio and the MODE field displays LK when a link has been
established. Once a link is established, normal communications can begin.
Select a scan listhcan net as follows:
a. Use the CURSOR control t o position cursor in OPR field and then use VALUE control to select ALE.
b. Use the CURSOR control t o position cursor in right-most digits in INFO field and then use VALUE
control to select desired scan listlscan net.
An established link may be held as follows:
a. Press the CALLJLD switch. Link held is indicated by a display of HD in the MODE field.
b. Press the CALLJLD switch again t o release the link held, clear the HD display, and return t o scan.
NOTE
Pressing CALLAD switch after a link or link held has been established and a new call
address is selected initiates a new call. Pressing C A L U D before the new call link is
established terminates the call.
Link held is an individual system function. To prevent a link time-out, both communicating
systems should establish link held.
Link protection may be applied. Refer to paragraph 3.3.2, Link Protection (LP) Operation.
3.3.4.2 Sounding
Sounding transmits a short tone burst of RF energy. Anytime local regulations prohibit HF
emissions, ensure the HF-9000D system is set for silent operation or is in standby mode.
Sounding is an ALE function used to update other ALE stations’ LQA data to ensure the best propagating
channel is tried. Sounding is described in more detail in the theory section of the instruction book. If
operating in ALE Scan mode (ALE displayed in OPR field), it is possible to force the HF-9000D system to
sound. During a sounding sequence, the HF9000D system returns to scan mode after each channel is
sounded. This allows the HF-9000D system t o listen on all channels being scanned before sounding on the
next channel. If a response from another station is received, the HF-9000D system sends a reply to the
station. To force the HF-9000D system to sound while scanning, perform the following steps.
a. While the INFO field is displaying an ALE address, rotate the ADWCHAN switch until INFO 3eld
displays S-D.
b. Momentarily press CALLLD switch. The MODE field displays SD during transmit portion of sounding.
23
3.3.4.3 Channel ALE (CHN) Operation
Operating in ALE channel mode allows calls to be sent and received on a specific channelhet. The
preprogrammed channelhet parameters (frequency, RF emission mode, and modem) control HF-9000D
system operation. Communication can only be established on the frequency and RF emission mode of the
selected channeynet; the HF-9000D system is not taking full advantage of the ALE capabilities. The
channelhet parameters can be programmed either manually, using the procedure included in paragraph
3.3.7 of this supplement, or during HF-9000D system datafill.
NOTE
Channel ALE operation is the same as conventional channel operation, except it is possible to
select an ALE address and establish an ALE link.
To initiate a call in channel ALE mode, perform the following steps.
a. Use the CURSOR control t o position cursor in OPR field and then use VALUE control t o select CHN.
b. Select the desired channelhet number by rotating ADWCHAN control or use CURSOR control to
position cursor under a channeYnet digit at far right-side of display. Use VALUE control to select desired
digit (repeat for both c h a n n e h e t digits as required).
C. Press the DSPL switch until OPR and INFO fields display CHN XXX (where XXX is an ALE address).
The HF-9000D system is now in channel ALE mode.
NOTE
The DSPL switch allows alternating between channellnet number, frequency, and channel
ALE address (channel ALE enabled) in the INFO field. Receive frequency is displayed unless
the radio is keyed to display transmit frequency.
d. Rotate the ADWCHAN control to scroll through preset ALE addresses, or use CURSOR and VALUE
controls t o select any other address.
e. Momentarily press CALL/LD switch t o place an ALE call t o the selected address. The OPR and MODE
fields display CHN CL. When a link is established, the MODE field displays LK and the INFO field
displays XXX (where XXX is the address of the station with which a link is established). Use the
microphone PTT key t o communicate with the linked station.
NOTE
In channel ALE mode, the HF-9000D system only tries t o place a call once (there is only one
channelhet). If a link is not established, there are no further automatic attempts. To attempt
another link, press the CALLLD switch again.
SELCAL detection is temporarily disabled while in a n ALE mode.
Receive a call in channel ALE as follows:
a. Press the DSPL switch until OPR and INFO fields display CHN XXX (where XXX is any ALE address).
b. Any successful link resulting from an incoming call causes CHN LK XXX (where XXX is the address of
the calling station) to be displayed and squelch to be broken. Communicate normally using the PTT key.
a. Press the CALIAD switch. Link held is indicated by a display of HD in the MODE field.
b. Press the CALIAD switch again t o release the link held and clear the HD display.
24
NOTE
Pressing the CALLLD control after a link or link held has been established and a new call
address is selected initiates a new call. Pressing CALL/LD before the new call link is
Link held is an individual system function. To prevent a link time-out, both communicating
systems should establish link held
Link protection may be applied. Refer to paragraph 3.3.2, Link Protection (LP) Operation.
3.3.4.4 Manual ALE (MAN) Operation
Manual ALE operation provides the capability to send and receive calls on a specific frequency.
Communications can only be established on the selected frequency; the HF-9000D system is not taking full
advantage of the ALE capabilities.
NOTE
Manual ALE operation is the same as conventional manual operation, except it is possible to
select an ALE address and establish an ALE link.
To initiate a call in manual ALE, perform the following steps.
a. Use the CURSOR control to position cursor in OPR field and then use VALUE control t o select MAN.
b. Use the CURSOR control to position cursor in MODE field and then use VALUE control to select desired
emission mode.
C. Use the CURSOR control to position cursor in INFO field and then use VALUE control o r ADWCHAN
switch t o select desired frequency. Six frequency digits are accessible.
d. Momentarily press DSPL switch until OPR and INFO fields display MAN XXX (where XXX is an ALE
address). The HF-9000D system is now in manual ALE mode. If the desired address is not displayed, use
ADWCHAN control o r CURSOR and VALUE controls to select desired address.
NOTE
The DSPL switch allows alternating the display between the frequency number, ALE address
(Manual ALE enabled), and modem. With a 4-character modem name displayed in the INFO
field, a modem may be selected via the CURSOR, VALUE, and ADWCHAN controls.
e. Momentarily press the CALULD switch. The OPR and MODE fields display MAN CL.
f. When a link is established, the MODE field displays LK and the INFO field displays XXX (where XXX is
the address of the station with which a link is established). Use microphone PTT key to communicate
with the linked station.
NOTE
In manual ALE mode, the HF-9000D system only tries t o place a call once (there is only one
channel). If a link is not established, there are no further automatic attempts. To attempt
another link, press the CALL/LD switch again.
SELCAL detection is temporarily disabled while in an ALE mode.
25
Receive a call in manual ALE as follows:
a. Press the DSPL switch until OPR and INFO fields display MAN XXX (where XXX is any ALE address).
b. Any successful link resulting from an incoming call causes MAN LK XXX (where XXX is the address of
the calling station) t o be displayed and squelch t o be broken.
c. Communicate normally using the PTT key.
a. Press the C A L U D switch. Link held is indicated by a display of HD in the MODE field.
b. Press the C A L U D switch again to release the link held and clear the HD display.
NOTE
Pressing CALL/LD switch after a link or link held has been established and a new call
address is selected initiates a new call. Pressing CALL/LD before the new call link is
Link held is an individual system function. To prevent a link time-out, both communication
systems should establish a link held.
Link protection may be applied. Refer t o paragraph 3.3.2, Link Protection (LP) Operation.
3.3.5 Maritime Mode (MAR) Operation
All 249 ITU public correspondence channels (receive and transmit frequencies plus RF emission type) in the
maritime radiotelephone network are preprogrammed into receiver-transmitter nonvolatile memory. The
249 ITU channels operate half duplex in the Upper Sideband Voice (UV)R F emission type.
Operate in maritime mode as follows:
a. Use the CURSOR control t o position cursor in OPR field and then rotate VALUE control t o display MAR.
b. Refer t o the HF-9000 High-Frequency Communications System Operator's Manual, part number
C. Use the CURSOR control to position cursor in INFO field under channel digit to be changed. Of the four
channel digits, only the three least significant digits are accessible. Rotate ADWCHAN or VALUE
control t o display desired ITU channel. Press the DSPL switch to view the channel receive frequency.
Key the microphone t o view the transmit frequency.
d. Use the CURSOR control t o position cursor in PWR field. Rotate VALUE control to select desired output
power level (bottom bar for low power, bottom two bars for medium power, all three bars for high power).
e. If squelch operation is desired, rotate SQL control counterclockwise t o disable (SQL 0) and then
advance SQL control clockwise one more click (SQL 2). If intermittent noise persists, again advance SQL
control one more click clockwise (SQL 3).
NOTE
After rotating SQL control clockwise t o a new position, allow receiver a few moments t o
squelch before continuing rotation.
f. If the previous steps are completed with no fault indications, voice transmissions may be made using the
microphone. The presence of sidetone in the headset o r speaker during transmit operation indicates
26
NOTE
In maritime operation, only a selected ITU channel is displayed in radio set control INFO
field. Press the DSPL switch to observe the receive frequency. Key the radio t o observe the
transmit frequency.
To avoid poor reception or missed calls, always momentarily key the microphone after
selecting a new ITU channel to initiate an antenna coupler tune cycle.
3.3.6 Emergency Mode (EMR) Operation
International distress frequencies of 2.1820,4.1250, 6.2150, 8.2910, 12.2900, and 16.4200 MHz are
displayed on the radio set control as EMRl(2182 kHz), EMR2 (4125 kHz), EMR3 (6215 kHz), EMR4 (8291
kHz), EMR5 (12290 kHz), and EMR6 (16420 kHz). The RF emission mode is UV.
Perform emergency operation as follows:
a. Use the CURSOR control to position the cursor in the OPR field and then rotate the VALUE control t o
display EMR.
b. Select the desired emergency channel by rotating the ADWCHAN control. As an alternative, use the
CURSOR and VALUE controls t o position the cursor in the INFO field (under digit t o be changed) and
select the emergency channel.
NOTE
To avoid poor reception and missed calls in single-system installations, always key the
microphone after selecting an emergency channel to initiate an antenna coupler tune cycle.
c. Use the CURSOR control to position the cursor in the PWR field and then rotate the VALUE control t o
select maximum output power (all three bars).
3.3.7 Program Mode
PGM mode is used t o load channelhet data into one o r more of the 35 user-programmable preset
channeldnets available. These channehets are used for channel (CHN) and channel ALE (CHN) operation.
Either simplex or half-duplex operation can be programmed.
3.3.7.1 Programming Preset or ALE ChanneldNets (PGM)
The following procedure allows preset channels or preset ALE channelhets t o be programmed with
frequency, RF emission mode, and modem selection. Either simplex or half-duplex operation c a n be
programmed.
To program a simplex channeynet into the HF-9000D system, perform the following steps.
a. Use the CURSOR control to position cursor in OPR field and then use VALUE control t o select PGM.
b. The channeynet number is initially displayed in the INFO field. After approximately 2 seconds, the
frequency is displayed. Rotate the ADWCHAN control to select desired channeynet number.
NOTE
User-programmed preset channeynet numbers 1through 35 are displayed in the INFO field
the second and third digits from the right.
27
suuulement 523-0778856
C. Use the CURSOR control to position cursor in MODE field, and then use VALUE control t o select desired
emission mode.
d. Use the CURSOR control to position cursor in INFO field and then use VALUE control to select desired
frequency (repeat as necessary for each frequency digit). Pressing the DSPL switch sets the frequency
display t o all zeros and loads the channelhet.
NOTE
When the DSPL switch is used t o set the frequency display t o all zeros and load the
c h a n n e h e t , the channevnet is inoperable during CHN operation and cannot be selected.
e. Use the CURSOR control to toggle between the modem and frequency displays by moving the cursor
position past extreme left or right of the display. With the 4-character modem name displayed in the
INFO field, a modem may be selected via the CURSOR, VALUE, or ADRICHAN control.
f. Momentarily press CALJJLD switch and observe INFO field display blinks. This indicates the channel
(and any modem selection) is programmed.
NOTE
If additional preset channelshets are to be programmed, repeat steps b through f.
To program a half-duplex channelhet into the HF-9000D system, perform the following steps.
a. Perform steps a through f of the previous procedure to program the receive frequency. Perform the
following steps to program the transmit frequency.
b. Press and hold microphone PTT key.
NOTE
The receiver-transmitter does not key and no signal is transmitted when HF-9000D system is
in PGM mode.
c. Use the CURSOR control t o position the cursor in the MODE field and then use the VALUE control t o
select the desired emission mode.
d. Use the CURSOR control t o position the cursor in the INFO field and then use the VALUE control t o
select the desired frequency.
e. Momentarily press CALLLD switch and observe INFO field display blinks. This indicates the
c h a n n e h e t has been programmed.
f. Release microphone PTT key.
3.3.7.2 Programming ALE Self-Address Mode (PGA)
The ALE self-address is an identifier used t o screen incoming calls and provides the station LQA identity.
The HF-9000D system's own self-address may be datafilled or programmed via the radio set control.
To program an ALE self-address, perform the following steps.

NOTE
ALE addresses may be up t o 15 characters in length; however, the radio set control displays
three characters at a time. Longer self-addresses may be viewed by using the cursor control.
a. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in OPR field and then use VALUE control t o select PGA. The
current self-address is displayed in the INFO field.
b. Use the ADWCHAN control to select a desired self-address.
C. Momentarily press CALJJLD switch. Observe INFO field display blinks to indicate self-address is
programmed.
28
3.3.8 Program Time Mode (PGT)
This mode provides the capability of viewing and modifying parameters of the system clock (also used by the
HF-9012). Operate program time mode as follows:
a. Use the CURSOR control t o position cursor in OPR field and then use VALUE control to select PGT. The
current clock time is displayed in the INFO field in HH:MM:SS format. The MODE field indicates time
(TM). If not, press DSPL switch to toggle between date (DT) and TM.
b. Use the CURSOR control to position cursor in INFO field and then use VALUE control to set the desired
clock setting.
c. Momentarily press CALLnD switch and observe the INFO field display blinks. This indicates the time is
programmed.
d. Press DSPL switch t o toggle the INFO field to display date in DD:MM:YY format. The MODE field
indicates DT.
e. Use the CURSOR control to position cursor in INFO field and then use VALUE control t o set the desired
date setting.
f. Momentarily press C A L U D switch and observe the INFO field display blinks. This indicates the date is
programmed.
3.3.9 Time Mode (TIM)
This mode provides the capability of viewing parameters of the system clock (also used by the HF-9012).
NOTE
The INFO field display of time and date will match that of Program Time Mode except that
the clock will be running and seconds advancing.
Operate time mode as follows:
a. Use the CURSOR control to position cursor in OPR field and then use VALUE control t o select TIM. The
current clock time is displayed in the INFO field in HH:MM:SS format. The MODE display indicates TM.
b. Press the DSPL switch t o toggle the INFO field to display date in DD:MM:YY format. The MODE display
indicates DT.
3.3.10 Standby Mode (SBY)
In standby mode, the system is basically turned off. The audio is muted, control unit is disabled, and the HF-
9000D system does not sound nor reply to ALE calls.
To enter standby mode use the CURSOR control to position cursor in OPR field and then use VALUE control
to select SBY. The remainder of the display is blanked and the cursor is locked under OPR field.
In addition, after entering SBY mode, the HF-9012D allows viewing of unit software part numbers on the
display as follows:
a. Press the DSPL switch t o display the radio set control (RSC) software part number starting in the second
position of the OPR field.
b. Press the DSPL switch a second time to display the receiver-transmitter (R/T) software part number
starting in the second position of the OPR field.
c. Press the DSPL switch a third time t o display the digital signal processor (DSP) software part number
starting in the second position of the OPR field.
d. Press the DSPL switch a fourth time to return to the main SBY screen.
29
Press the CALIAD switch with SBY displayed in the OPR field t o set the OPR field to OFF. When the OPR
field is set to OFF, the radio set control reinitializes when an interrupt is received.
3.3.11 Test Mode (TST)
The HF-9000D system self-test can be initiated manually from the radio set control by selecting TST mode.
Upon selection of TST mode, each HF-9000D system unit conducts a self-test routine and interacts with the
other units to test the interface between the specific units. Self-test results are reported t o the receiver-
transmitter, which then sends the test results to the radio set control for display. Upon TST initiation, only
receive self-test is conducted; after which a transmit self-test may be initiated. Perform test mode as follows:
a. Use CURSOR control to position cursor in OPR field and then use VALUE control to select TST. After
selecting TST, approximately 5 seconds elapses before TST is activated.
NOTE
TST mode does not allow access t o the PWR field.
Rotating a control after self-test starts may cause a fault to be momentarily displayed but
does not affect final self-test results.
Refer t o the instruction book paragraphs 3.4.3.1 and 3.4.3.2 for complete self-test procedures.
b. When faults are detected, the module number or fault code is displayed in the INFO field. When more
than one fault is detected, pressing the DSPL switch displays additional module numbers or fault codes.
A complete listing of fault code descriptions is found in section 5 of this supplement.
4. THEORY
4.1 General
This section describes overall operating principles of the HF-9000D system.
4.2 Single System
As shown in figure 6, the single HF-9000D system is composed of a Radio Set Control HF-9012D, Receiver-
Transmitter HF-9087D, and Antenna Coupler HF-904X interconnected by one RF coaxial cable and three
fiber-optic cables. All control and status information is transferred serially between units via the fiber-optic
cables. Transmit and receive RF signals are supported by the RF coaxial cable.
The Radio Set Control HF-9012D provides the operator interface for selection of operating mode, emission
mode, emission power level, and operating frequency. Displayed information includes HF-9000D system
status and fault diagnostics.
As shown in figure 6, the radio set control consists of a display, power supply, and microprocessor. Operator
inputs from the front panel controls are routed to the HF-9000D system over a fiber-optic link. Status
information from the HF-9000D system is returned to the radio set control over a fiber-optic link and
displayed on the radio set control display.
The Receiver-Transmitter HF-9087D provides the signal processing required t o translate signals between
the R F and audio spectrums. It also provides the embedded processing and coding/decoding required to
perform ALE, data modem, and ARINC SELCAL functions.
Referring to figure 6, the Receiver-Transmitter HF-9087D consists of a chassis and several major modules
including the power supply/control, receiver/exciter/DSP, radio-frequency interference (RFI) filter, interface,
30
and power amplifier. The power supply/control module (All provides the internal, regulated operating
voltages for the receiver-transmitter modules. The power supply/control module also contains the
microprocessor system including read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), nonvolatile
memory, and timers used t o configure, control, and monitor the HF-9000D system. This control circuitry has
access t o control and status lines to/from all other modules and the fiber-optic bus to/from other units in the
system. On command from the Radio Set Control HF-9012D or from an external MIL-STD-1553B data bus,
the control circuitry configures the receiver-transmitter and the HF-9000D system for the selected frequency
and mode of operation. The control circuitry continuously monitors the operation of the receiver-transmitter
and the HF-9000D system and provides necessary operator indications via the Radio Set Control HF-9012D
and MIL-STD-1553B data bus.
The RFI filter module (A4) provides EMI/RFI filtering on almost all serial and parallel input/output lines
coming into and leaving the receiver-transmitter. This filtering protects the receiver-transmitter from
externally generated spurious signals on the I/O lines and prevents the receiver-transmitter from inducing
external spurious signals on these lines.
The interface (A21 module contains the circuitry necessary t o buffer, capture, and format the signals
entering and leaving the receiver-transmitter. The interface module contains serial data transmitters and
receivers to send and receive serial digital data. Discrete inputs and outputs are reaagenerated with parallel
I/O devices. Both the serial and parallel 110 devices are controlled by the microprocessor circuitry in the
power supply/control module.
The receiver/exciter/DSP module (A31 contains the translator, synthesizer, and modem functions. The
module translates signals from the selected R F frequency to audio baseband signals in the receive mode.
Audio baseband signals are translated to the selected RF frequency and passed t o the power amplifier
module in the transmit mode. The frequency synthesizer portion of the module provides all of the signal
injections necessary for the frequency translation function. The DSP based modem circuitry provides the
modulation and demodulation functions for all voice and data modes of the receiver-transmitter.
The power amplifier module (A51 amplifies the low level RF signal provided by the receiver/exciter/DSP
module t o the full 200-watt RF output power level. The power amplifier also provides filtering of the R F
output signal to reduce harmonic and spurious signals in the RF output signal.
The HF-9000D system uses any of the existing HF-9000 antenna couplers. Operation of the HF-9000
antenna couplers is the same as in a HF-9000 system.
4.3 Dual System Operation
Dual system operation of HF-9000D systems is identical t o dual system operation of HF-9000 systems. Refer
to instruction book section 4.3.
4.4 Automatic Link Establishment (ALE)
The HF-9000D system using the Receiver-Transmitter HF-9087D provides embedded ALE operation in
accordance with MIL-STD-188-141A7appendix A, as do some HF-9000 systems. The Radio Set Control
HF-9012D provides the ALE control interface in nonbussed installations.
4.5 Electronic Counter-Countermeasures (ECCM) Operation
The HF-9000D system using the Receiver-Transmitter HF-9087D does not provide ECCM operation.
31
4.6 ARINC SELCAL
The HF-9000D system using the Receiver-Transmitter HF-9087D provides embedded detection and decoding
(receive only) of ARINC SELCAL signals. The Radio Set Control HF-9012D provides the operator SELCAL
interface in nonbussed installations. A call alert signal is provided from the receiver-transmitter to alert the
operator to a call received.
4.7 Modem Functions
The HF-9000D system using the Receiver-Transmitter HF-9087D provides the following MIL-STD-188-11OA
modem modes:
Narrow-shift FSK (frequency-shift keying) and Wide- shift FSK

HF Mode (Single Tone) including NATO mode
FSK for Voice Frequency (VF) Channel Operation
The Radio Set Control HF-9012D provides the data modem control interface in nonbussed installations.
32
I ANTENNA COUPLER II
RCV I
FIBER OPTICS I I
I CONTROL I
FIBER OPTICS
XMT I A4 I
I I
I
............................. +28 V DC
I
1
I * I
I I
r HF-9087D RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER
1
I
I I
I
DISPLAY I I HF
I I DISCRIMINATOR
I I A2
I A1 I
1
POWER I I L
CONTROL
SUPPLY/
I I I
//
I FRONT CONTROL 3
REGULATED I I I
I VOLTAGES
PANEL
CONTROLS
TO OTHER I RF TUNER 1
I I MODULES
I
A3 I
I I I I
I I I EXTERNAL I
I I I ELEMENT I
A5 (NOTE 1)
I I I I I
RCV A4 A2
I MICROPROCESSOR RFI INTERFACE I I I
I FILTER I L-- ,---,,------l
I I FIBER OPTICS I I
I I
I I I
E 1
I I I
I +5 V DC I I
+28 V DC qTl-l
I
I
FILTER
POWER
SUPPLY
A1A2
+28 V DC HTR
-24 V DC
1 1 5 V AC,
400 Hz
I
I
I
I
?WR/
EXCTR/
DSP
I
I
I
I
L-----------------l
- RF 1
I
RF 1/0
I
SERIAL 1/0
I
II /
I
I
--
PARALLEL 1/0
I NOTES:
I: A L I
1. HF-9041 AND HF-9042.
AUDIO 1/0 AU 0
4 I
1 I
+28 V DC I t I
1 I
TPD-2675-012U
Typical HF-9000D System, Block Diagram

Figure 6
33/34
suDplement 523-0778856
5. MAINTENANCE
Refer t o section 5 of the instruction book for maintenance information and procedures. Observe all warnings
and cautions of the instruction book.
NOTE
The HF-9000D system requires the TE-9210 test set and HF-9012D radio set control be used
for performance test procedures.
NOTE
Instruction book table 5-5, step 10.6; HF-9012D requires the CALLLD switch be pressed
twice t o terminate the established communications link for the HF-9000D system. See
supplement paragraph 3.3.4.1 for more information.
Refer to table 5 of this supplement for HF-9000D system faultdmessage code display and repair action.
0020 cu RF stuck on Replace coupler

0030 cu No RF received Replace coupler
I 0040 I CU I Interiockerror I Replace coupler I
0040 FL In-band overvoltage advisory Replace bandpass filter
0050 cu RF interlock open Replace coupler
0050 FL Out-of-band overcurrent advisory Replace bandpass filter
0060 cu RF overvoltage; monitored continuously Replace coupler
0070 cu Improper dual system response Replace coupler 1or coupler 2
0080 System Other system keyed MSG (dual system) None
~
F[/Sys-ve inhibited MSG (dual system) None

0101 RT DS-101 Datafill Replace receiver-transmitter
0102 RT DS-101 Copy Comm Fail Replace receiver-transmitter
I 0103 I RT I FODualPort I Replace receiver-transmitter I
0104 RT FO UART Replace receiver-transmitter
0105 RT FO Microcontroller Replace receiver-transmitter
0106 RT FO Device Comm Replace receiver-transmitter
0107 RT FO Invalid Data Received Replace receiver-transmitter
TReplace receiver-transmitter I
0232 RT RS-232 Replace receiver-transmitter
1011 cu Low pressure warning; monitored continuously Repressurizeh-eplace coupler
I 1012 ~~
1 Programchecksumerror [Replace radio set control
35
Table 5. HF-9000D Faulthlessage Code Display and Repair Action (Cont)

1 REPAIR ACTION I
1012 FL Program checksum error Replace bandpas filter
1013 FL RAM test error Replace bandpass filter
1013 R RAM test error Replace radio set control
1015 FL EEPROM fault Replace bandpass filter
1070 FL High insertion loss in filter module Replace bandpass filter
1 1090 1 RT I I960iWM I Replace receiver-transmitter I
1091 RT I960 Flash Replace receiver-transmitter
1092 RT I960 I/O Replace receiver-transmitter
1 1 0 9 3 I RT 1 I960Interrupt 1 Replace receiver-transmitter I
I 1094 I RT I I960RS-232port 1 Replace receiver-transmitter I
1 1095 I RT II960RAM I Replace receiver-transmitter
1096 RT I960 Serial Port Replace receiver-transmitter
1097 RT I960 Timers Replace receiver-transmitter
1098 RT I960 TOD Replace receiver-transmitter
1099 RT I960 Watchdog Replace receiver-transmitter
\1100 I RT 1 Replace receiver-transmitter I
1101 RT DSP Loop back Replace receiver-transmitter
1102 RT DSP Power Supply Replace receiver-transmitter
1103 RT DSP Processor Replace receiver-transmitter
1104 RT DSP Interrupt Replace receiver-transmitter
I1105 I RT T D S P u a l Port I Replace receiver-transmitter I
1106 RT DSP RF output Replace receiver-transmitter
1107 RT DSP Comm Fail Replace receiver-transmitter
1108 RT Synthesizer LOL Replace receiver-transmitter
1109 RT Frequency Standard Replace receiver-transmitter
1 1200 1 RT R)E= 1 Replace receiver-transmitter I
1201 RT RE-Exciter Replace receiver-transmitter
1202 RT RE Receive Overload Replace receiver-transmitter
1 RE Translator 1 Replace receiver-transmitter I
~~
1553 RT MS1553 Comm Replace receiver-transmitter

2011 FL Central processing unit (CPU) malfunction Replace bandpass filter
(20201R T 1 Power supply fault 1 Replace receiver-transmitter I
36
Table 5. HF-9000D Fault/Message

- Code Display and Repair Action (Cont)
Tune fault; coupler does not tune currently Retune system
selected frequency
~
RF module overtemperature; monitored Limit transmit time

continuously
~
RF relay malfunction Replace coupler

I3030 I FL R F relay malfunction ~~
~~
I 3040
3110
II cu
I
RT
High latched vswr condition; monitored
continuously
Loss of lock fault
~~
Retune system
1 4010 1 RT 1553 control assembly fault Replace receiver-transmitter
Central processing unit (CPU) malfunction Replace coupler
Program checksum error Replace coupler
RAM test error Replace coupler
~~
Preset memory storage error Replace coupler

14016 1 CU Fiber-optic control fault Replace coupler
1 4016
4020
II
I
FL
FL
Loss of pressure
~~
Temperature fault
Repressurize/replace bandpass
filter
15011 I RT Dc continuity fault Replace module
~~ ~~
1 5012
5013
II
I
RT
RT
Pa ovedunder voltage/overtemperature
RF interlock open
Check input powerAimit transmit
time
Check RF coax
15014 I RT Pa 5 watt threshold fault Replace receiver-transmitter
~
I5016 I RT Pa high temperature fault Limit transmit time

18010 IRT GPS Time of Day Replace receiver-transmitter
GPS Position Replace receiver-transmitter
~ ~~
External fiber-optic data fault Check fiber-optic cables and

connectors
connectors
P2
I
I R External fiber-optic data fault Check fiber-optic cables and
connectors
9002
I FL
connectors
I 9002 I Fo
connectors
37
9004 System Invalid data received fault Check fiber-optic cables and
connectors
9004 R Invalid data received fault Check fiber-optic cables and
I
connectors
Invalid data received fault Check fiber-optic cables and
1~ CU I Invalid data received fault

connectors
Check fiber-optic cables and
connectors
1 9005 1 FL I No fiber-optic data received Check fiber-optic cables or other
units
9005 cu No fiber-optic data received; no response from Check fiber-optic cables or other
cu units
9005 RT No fiber-optic data received Check fiber-optic cables o r other
units
38
6. PARTS LIST
Refer t o section 6 of the instruction book as needed for detailed information on using the group assembly
parts list. HF-9000D parts are shown in figure 7 and listed below.
TPD-1970-0111
HF-9000D High-Frequency Communications System, Parts Location Diagram

Figure 7
'" ITEM
7- 1
PART NO
NO NUMBER 1
DESCRIPTION 1 UNITS
PER
ASSY
I USABLE
ON
CODE
1
-1 822-1069-001 2
-2 822-1071-001 2 Control, Radio Set HF-9012D
7. DIAGRAMS
Refer t o figure 2 through 4 of this supplement for HF-9000D typical interconnect and installation control
diagrams. Refer t o figure 6 for HF-9000D system block diagram and figure 7 for parts location diagram.
APPENDIX A - ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION DATA

This data is required for FAA TSO certified systems and is not a requirement for the HF-9000D system.
39/40
Appendix A Environmental Qualification Data
APPENDIX A
ENVIRONMENTAL QUAL1FICATION DATA
NOMENCLATURE: REMOTE CONTROL HF-9010
PART NO: 622-8111-001/-002/-003/-004/-005/-006 TSO NUMBER: C31d, C32d
EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION: 670-3154-001
MANUFACTURER: ROCKWELL COLLINS, INC.

ADDRESS: COLLINS AVIONICS & COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION
350 COLLINS ROAD NE, CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA 52498
CONDITIONS DO-160B DESCRIPTION O F CONDUCTED TESTS

SE CTIONI
PARAGRAPH NO
TEMPERATURE AND ALTITUDE 4.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY F2
LOW TEMPERATURE 4.5.1
HIGH TEMPERATURE 4.5.3
ALTITUDE 4.6.1
DECOMPRESSION 4.6.2
OVERPRESSURE 4.6.3
TEMPERATURE 5.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY B
HUMIDITY 6.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A
OPERATIONAL SHOCK 7.2 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO 6 Gs
CRASH SAFETY (IMPULSE) 7.3.1 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO 15 Gs
CRASH SAFETY (SUSTAINED) 7.3.2 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO 12 Gs
VIBRATION 8.3.1 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY K,
P, AND S
~
EXPLOSION 9.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY E l

WATERPROOFNESS 10.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY W
FLUIDS SUSCEPTIBILITY 11.0 EQUIPMENT IS CATEGORY X, NOT
APPLICABLE
~~
SAND AND DUST 12.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY D

FUNGUS 13.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY F
(BY ANALYSIS)
SALT SPRAY 14.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY S
MAGNETIC EFFECT 15.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED AS CLASS 2
POWER INPUT 16.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A
VOLTAGE SPIKF: CONDUCTED 17.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A
AUDIO FREQUENCY 18.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY NZ
CONDUCTED SUSCEPTIBILITY
A- 1
appendix A
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION DATA
CONDITIONS DO-160B DESCRIPTION OF CONDUCTED TESTS

SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
INDUCED SIGNAL 19.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY 2
SUSCEPTIBILITY
RADIO FREQUENCY 20.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A / Z
SUSCEPTIBILITY
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSION 21.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A/Z
OTHER TESTS
ACCELERATION EQUIPMENT TESTED TO MIL-STD-810A,
METHOD 513.2. 12 Gs
REMARKS:
1. IN THE CRASH SAFETY TESTS, IMPULSE, SUSTAINED AND ACCELERATION, A WEIGHTED

DUMMY WAS USED IN PLACE OF A LIVE UNIT PER PARAGRAPH 7.3.
2. THE ACCELERATION AND CRASH SAFETY TESTS WERE RUN SIMULTANEOUSLY.
3. THE ACCELERATION TEST WAS CONDUCTED FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY.
A-2
appendix A
NOMENCLATURE: RADIO RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER HF-9030
PART NO: 622-8112-001/-002 TSO NUMBER: C31d, C32d


SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO ~~

ALTITUDE 4.6.1
DECOMPRESSION 4.6.2
OVERPRESSURE 4.6.3
VIBRATION 8.3.1 EQUIPMENT TESTED WITH SHOCK
MOUNTS TO CURVES M, N, AND R
WATERPRO 0FNESS 10.0 EQUIPMENT IS CATEGORY X,
NOT APPLICABLE
APPLICABLE
~ ~ ~~~ ~ ~~~ ~~ ~

(BY ANALYSIS)
MAGNETIC EFFECT 15.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED AS CLASS A
VOLTAGE SPIKE CONDUCTED 17.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A
~~
AUDIO FREQUENCY 18.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A/Z

A-3
appendix A

SECTION/
PARAGFMPH NO
INDUCED SIGNAL 19.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY Z
SUSCEPTIBILITY
RADIO FREQUENCY 20.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A/Z
SUSCEPTIBILITY
OTHER TESTS
METHOD 513.2. 12 Gs
REMARKS:

A-4
appendix A
NOMENCLATURE: H F ANTENNA COUPLER HF-9041


SE CTI0N/
PARAGRAPH NO ~ ~~~

ALTITUDE 4.6.1
DECOMPRESSION 4.6.2
OVERPRESSURE 4.6.3
WATERPROOFNESS 10.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY W;
MEETS CATEGORY R (HERMETICALLY
SEALED)
~~ ~~ ~~~~ ~

APPLICABLE
(BY ANALYSIS)
~~~ ~ ~~ ~~

A-5
appendix A

SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
SUSCEPTIBILITY
RADIO FREQUENCY 20.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY NZ
SUSCEPTIBILITY
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSION 21.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY NZ
OTHER TESTS EQUIPMENT TESTED TO MIL-STD-810A,
ACCELERATION METHOD 513.2. 12 Gs
REMARKS:

DUMMY WAS USED IN PLACE O F A LIVE UNIT PER PARAGRAPH 7 . 3 .
A-6
appendix A
NOMENCLATURE: ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MOUNTING BASE MT-9030A
PART NO: 622-8116-001 TSO NUMBER: C31d, C32d
EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION: N/A

COLLINS AVIONICS & COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION
ADDRESS: 350 COLLINS ROAD NE, CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA 52498

SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
ALTITUDE 4.6.1
DECOMPRESSION 4.6.2
OVERPRESSURE 4.6.3
~ ~

WATERPROOFNESS 10.0 EQUIPMENT IS CATEGORY X, NOT
APPLICABLE
~ ~~~ ~~

APPLICABLE
(BY ANALYSIS)
~~

A-7
appendix A

SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
SUSCEPTIBILITY
SUSCEPTIBILITY
OTHER TESTS
ACCELERATION EQUIPMENT TESTED TO MIL-STD-glOA,
METHOD 513.2. 12 Gs
REMARKS:

2. THE ACCELERATION AND CRASH SAFE,TYTESTS WERE RUN SIMULTANEOUSLY.
A-8
appendix A
NOMENCLATURE: DUAL COUPLER MOUNT MT-9042A


SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
ALTITUDE 4.6.1
DECOMPRESSION 4.6.2
OVERPRESSURE 4.6.3
VI BRAT10N 8.3.1 EQUIPMENT TESTED WITH SHOCK
~~ ~

APPLICABLE
~ ~~

(BY ANALYSIS)
A-9
appendix A

~ _ _

S E CTI0N/
PARAGRAPH NO
INDUCED SIGNAL 19.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY 2
SUSCEPTIBILITY
RADIO FREQUENCY 20.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY MZ
SUSCEPTIBILITY
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSION 21.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A / Z
OTHER TESTS
METHOD 513.2. 12 Gs
REMARKS:

DUMMY WAS USED IN PLACE O F A LIVE UNIT PER PARAGRAPH 7.3.
A- 10
appendix A


SE CTI0N/
PARAGRAPH NO
TEMPERATURE AND ALTITUDE 4.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY C2
ALTITUDE 4.6.1
DECOMPRESSION 4.6.2 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY
A1C2
OVERPRESSURE 4.6.3 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY
A1C2
SINE VIBRATION 8.3.1 EQUIPMENT TESTED WITH SHOCK
MOUNTS TO CURVE R
EXPLOSION 9.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY X
APPLICABLE
(BY ANALYSIS)
MAGNETIC EFFECT 15.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED AS CLASS Z
A-11
appendix A

SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
~

SUSCEPTIBILITY
RADIO FREQUENCY 20.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY AfZ
SUSCEPTIBILITY
OTHER TESTS
AC CE LERATIO N EQUIPMENT TESTED TO MIL-STD-810C,
METHOD 513.2. 12 Gs
REMARKS:
1. THE ACCELERATION TEST WAS CONDUCTED FOR INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES ONLY.
3. CATEGORY X (EXPLOSION PROOFNESS AND FLUIDS SUSCEPTIBILITY) IS NO TEST

REQUIRED.
4. THE FOLLOWING CLIMATIC ENVIRONMENTS ARE QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY TO TESTING

CONDUCTED ON THE HF-9040 COUPLER WHILE INSTALLED IN THE MT-9040A:
TEMPERATURE/ALTITUDE HUMIDITY OVERPRESSURE

TEMPERATURE VARIATION SALT SPRAY DECOMPRESSION
WATERPROOFNESS SAND AND DUST
A- 12
appendix A
NOMENCLATURE: ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MOUNTING BASE MT-9040


SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
ALTITUDE 4.6.1
A1C2
A1C2
SINE VIBRATION 8.3.1 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CURVE 0
(SOLID MOUNTED)
EXPLOSION 9.0 EQUIPMENT IS CATEGORY X, NOT
APPLICABLE
~

APPLICABLE
(BY ANALYSIS)
~~ ~
MAGNETIC EFFECT 15.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY Z

A- 13
appendix A

SE CTI 0N/
PARAGRAPH NO
CONDUCTED SUSCEPTIBILITY ~~

SUSCEPTIBILITY
SUSCEPTIBILITY
OTHER TESTS
ACCELERATION EQUIPMENT TESTED TO MIL-STD-810C,
METHOD 513.2. 12 Gs
REMARKS:
1. THE ACCELERATION TEST WAS CONDUCTED FOR INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES ONLY

REQUIRED.
4. THE FOLLOWING CLIMATIC ENVIRONMENTS ARE QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY TO TESTING

CONDUCTED ON THE HF-9040 COUPLER WHILE INSTALLED IN THE MT-9040A:

WATERPROOFNESS SAND AND DUST
A- 14
appendix A


SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
ALTITUDE 4.6.1
A1C2
A1C2
MOUNTS TO CURVE R
EXPLOSION 9.0 EQUIPMENT IS CATEGORY X, NOT
APPLICABLE
APPLICABLE
(BY ANALYSIS)
MAGNETIC EFFECT 15.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY 2
~~ ~

VOLTAGE SPIKF: CONDUCTED 17.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A
A- 15
appendix A

SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
SUSCEPTIBILITY
SUSCEPTIBILITY
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSION 21.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY AiZ
OTHER TESTS
ACCELERATION EQUIPMENT TESTED TO MIL-STD-810C,
METHOD 513.2. 12 Gs
REMARKS:
2. THE ACCELERATION AND CRASH SAFETY TESTS WERE RUN SIMULTANEOUSLY

REQUIRED.
A- 16
appendix A


SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
ALTITUDE 4.6.1
DECOMPRESSION 4.6.2 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY F2
OVERPRESSURE 4.6.3 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY F2
~~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~

~~ ~~ ~~ ~ ~ ~ ~

(SOLID MOUNTED)
APPLICABLE
~ ~

(BY ANALYSIS)
~~ ~ ~

A-17
appendix A

SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
SUSCEPTIBILITY
SUSCEPTIBILITY
REMARKS:
1. CATEGORY X FOR FLUIDS SUSCEPTIBILITY IS NO TEST REQUIRED.
2. THE FOLLOWING CLIMATIC ENVIRONMENTS ARE QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY TO THE MT-

9041A COUPLER MOUNT:

WATERPROOFNESS SAND AND DUST EXPLOSION
A-18
appendix A

C0NDITIONS DO-160B DESCRIPTION OF CONDUCTED TESTS

SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
ALTITUDE 4.6.1
~

~~

MOUNTS TO CURVE R
APPLICABLE
(BY ANALYSIS)
A-19
appendix A

SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
AUDIO FREQUENCY 18.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY NZ
SUSCEPTIBILITY
SUSCEPTIBILITY
REMARKS:

9042A COUPLER MOUNT:

A-20
appendix A
NOMENCLATURE: DUAL COUPLER MOUNT MT-9042


SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
ALTITUDE 4.6.1
(SOLID MOUNT)
WATERPROOFNESS iO.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY W
APPLICABLE
~~ ~ ~~

(BY ANALYSIS)
A-2 1
appendix A

SE CTI0N/
PARAGRAPH NO
SUSCEPTIBILITY ____

SUSCEPTIBILITY
REMARKS:
2. ACCELERATION AND CRASH SAFETY SUSTAINED TESTS WERE RUN SIMULTANEOUSLY

90428 COUPLER MOUNT:

A-22
appendix A


SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
ALTITUDE 4.6.1
DECOMPRESSION 4.6.2
OVERPRESSURE 4.6.3
(SOLID MOUNT)
APPLICABLE
APPLICABLE
(BY ANALYSIS)
A-23
appendix A

SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
SUSCEPTIBILITY
SUSCEPTIBILITY
OTHER TESTS
METHOD 513.2. 12 Gs
REMARKS:
2. ACCELERATION AND CRASH SAFETY SUSTAINED TESTS WERE RUN SIMULTANEOUSLY.

9030A RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER MOUNT:

EXPLOSION PROOFNESS SAND AND DUST MAGNETIC EFFECTS
POWER INPUT VOLTAGE SPIKE CONDUCTED INDUCED SIGNAL SUSCEPT
RADIO FREQ SUSCEPT RADIO FREQ EMISSION
A-24
appendix A

ADDRESS: C0LLINS AVI 0NI.C S & COMMUNICATIONS DIVISI 0N

SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
TEMPERATURE AND ALTITUDE 4.0, REV 1 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY
TO CATEGORY F2
4.5.24
IN-FLIGHT LOSS OF COOLING 4.5.4
ALTITUDE 4.6.1
DECOMPRESSION 4.6.2
OVERPRESSURE 4.6.3
TEMPERATURE VARIATION 5.0 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY
TO CATEGORY B
HUMIDITY 6.0 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY
TO CATEGORY A
OPERATIONAL SHOCK 7.0 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY
CRASH SAFETY (IMPULSE) 7.2 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY
CRASH SAFETY (SUSTAINED) 7.3 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY

VIBRATION 8.0 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY
TO CURVES M, N, AND R
~
EXPLOSION 9.0 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY

TO CATEGORY E l
APPLICABLE
APPLICABLE
~
SAND AND DUST 12.0 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY

TO CATEGORY D
FUNGUS 13.0 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY
TO CATEGORY F
A-25
appendix A

SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
SALT SPRAY 14.0 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY
TO CATEGORY S
~
MAGNETIC EFFECT 15.0 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY

AS CLASS A
~ ~~~
POWER INPUT 16.0 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY

TO CATEGORY A
VOLTAGE SPIKF: CONDUCTED 17.0 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY
TO CATEGORY A
AUDIO FREQUENCY 18.0 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY
CONDUCTED SUSCEPTIBILITY TO CATEGORY A/Z
INDUCED SIGNAL 19.0 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY
SUSCEPTIBILITY TO CATEGORY Z
~~ ~
RADIO FREQUENCY 20.0 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY

SUSCEPTIBILITY TO CATEGORY A / Z
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSION 21.0 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY
TO CATEGORY A/Z
LIGHTNING INDUCED 22.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIED AS CATEGORY
TRANSIENT SUSCEPTIBILITY X. NO TEST REQUIRED
OTHER TESTS NONE
REMARKS:
1. THE HF-9032 IS QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY TO THE PREVIOUSLY TESTED HF-9034.
2. TESTS WERE CONDUCTED AT COLLINS AVIONICS AND COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION,

CEDAR RAPIDS, IA.
A-26
appendix A
PART NO: 622-8125-OOU-002 TSO NUMBER: C31d, C32d

ADDRESS : COLLINS AVIONICS & COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION

SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
TO CATEGORY F2
4.5.24
ALTITUDE 4.6.1
DECOMPRESSION 4.6.2
OVERPRESSURE 4.6.3
TOCATEGORYB
TO CATEGORY A

TO CURVES M, N, AND R
TO CATEGORY E l
APPLICABLE
APPLICABLE
TOCATEGORYD
TO CATEGORY F
A-27
appendix A

SECTION/
P A R A G M H NO
TO CATEGORY S
AS CLASS A
TO CATEGORY A
VOLTAGE SPIKE CONDUCTED 17.0 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY
TO CATEGORY A
CONDUCTED SUSCEPTIBILITY TO CATEGORY A/Z
SUSCEPTIBILITY TO CATEGORY A/Z
TO CATEGORY A/Z
OTHER TESTS NONE
REMARKS:

CEDAR RAPIDS, IA.
A-28
appendix A


SE CTI0N/
PARAGRAPH NO
TO CATEGORY F2
4.5.24
ALTITUDE 4.6.1
DECOMPRESSION 4.6.2
OVERPRESSURE 4.6.3
TEMPERATURE VARIATI0N 5.0 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY
TO CATEGORY B
TO CATEGORY A

TO CURVES M. N. AND R
TO CATEGORY E l
APPLICABLE
APPLICABLE
TO CATEGORY D
TO CATEGORY F
A-29
appendix A

~~

SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
TO CATEGORY S
~~

AS CLASS A
TO CATEGORY A
TO CATEGORY A
CONDUCTED SUSCEPTIBILITY TO CATEGORY NZ
SUSCEPTIBILITY TO CATEGORY NZ
TO CATEGORY NZ
OTHER TESTS NONE
REMARKS:

CEDAR RAPIDS, IA.
A-30
appendix A


SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
TEMPERATURE AND ALTITUDE 4.0, REV 1 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY F2
4.5.24
ALTITUDE 4.6.1
IN-FLIGHT LOSS O F COOLING 4.5.4
DECOMPRESSION 4.6.2
OVERPRESSURE 4.6.3
TO CATEGORY B
TO CATEGORY E l
WATERPROOFNESS 10.0 EQUIPMENT QUALIFIED BY SIMILARITY
TO CATEGORY W
APPLICABLE
TO CATEGORY D
(BY ANALYSIS)
TO CATEGORY S
A-31
appendix A

SECTION/
PARAGRAPH NO
AS CLASS A
EQUIPMENT ALSO QUALIFIED BY
SIMILARITY
TO CATEGORY A
CONDUCTED SUSCEPTIBILITY TO CATEGORY NZ
SUSC EPTIBILITY EQUIPMENT ALSO QUALIFIED BY
SIMILARITY
SUSCEPTIBILITY EQUIPMENT ALSO QUALIFIED BY
SIMILARITY
LIGHTNING DIRECTED 22.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIED AS CATEGORY
EFFECTSTEST X. NO TEST REQUIRED.
ICING 23.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIED AS CATEGORY
X. NO TEST REQUIRED.
OTHER TESTS NONE
REMARKS:

CEDAR RAPIDS, IA.
A-32

HF 9000 Instruction Book

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HF 9000 Instruction Book

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

instruction book HF-9000 High-Frequency

INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS

© Copyright 2004 Rockwell Collins, Inc. All rights reserved.

TO: HOLDERS OF THE HF-9000 HIGH-FREQUENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

Change pages supplied are:

INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS

Printed in the United States of America

Total number of pages in this publication is 300 consisting of the following:

No. No. No. No.

Front Matter (523-0806627-506211) 2-12 Blank ........................................... 0

Page *Change Page *Change

No. No. No. No.

2-53 thru 2-54 ....................................... 3 2-113 .................................................... 0

Page *Change Page *Change

No. No. No. No.

Section 4 Theory Section 8 Supplements

Section 5 Maintenance 1............................................................ 2

*Zero in this column indicates an original page.

3.1 General ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.3.12 Fault Clearing Procedure.......................................................................................................................3-17

4.1 General ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.4.10 Datafill Operation................................................................................................................................... 4-11

Section 6 Parts List

6.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 6-1

Section 7 Diagrams............................................................................................................................................... 7-1

HF-9000D High Frequency Communications System, 523-0778856-202211

Appendix A Environmental Qualification Data ................................................................................................ A-1

1-1 Typical HF-9000 Equipment.................................................................................................................... 1-1

2-37 Antenna Coupler HF-9040, Installation Control Drawing ................................................................ 2-109

4-1 Typical HF-9000 System, Block Diagram............................................................................................... 4-3

5-1 Fiber-Optic Fault Indications, Clockwise Configuration (Radio Set Control to

Section 6 Parts List

6-1 HF-9000 High-Frequency Communications System, Parts Location Diagram.................................... 6-3

HF-9000D High Frequency Communications Systems, 523-0778856-202211

1 Receiver-Transmitter HF-9087D and Radio Set Control HF-9012D ....................................................... 1

1-1 Radio Set Control, Equipment Supplied ................................................................................................. 1-2

2-1 Continuous Mode Port Selection ...........................................................................................................2-52

3-6 Sound Command Context Dependencies .............................................................................................. 3-40

4-1 HF-9000 Dual System Operating States ................................................................................................ 4-5

5-1 Test Equipment and Tools ....................................................................................................................... 5-3

HF-9000D High Frequency Communications Systems, 523-0778856-202211

1 Radio Set Control Equipment Supplied ..................................................................................................... 2

Typical HF-9000 High-Frequency Communications System Components

The following military nomenclature are assigned t o the HF-9000 equipment

HF Antenna Coupler HF-9040 622-8113-001 CU-2477/ARC-217(V)

NON STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS

EEPROM Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory

SERVICE BULLETINS/SERVICE INFORMATION LETTERS

Do Not Service or Adjust Alone

Observe the following precautions when handling fiber-optic components.

The HF-9000 system using the HF-9030/9031/903lA/9032/9034/9034A/9070/9072 receiver-transmitters is

1.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED

Typical HF-9000 Equipment

TYPE PART PANEL KNOB COLOR ]ALE**

Incorporation of Service Information Letter (SIL) 1-91 or Service Bulletin (SB)No 5

OLD PART NO NEW PART NO

1.3 INSTALLATION HARDWARE

Band-Pass Filter HF-9060 (commonly called preselector) is an automatically-tuned, 4-pole pre/postselector

Table 1-2. Receiver-Transmitter,. Equipment

Table 1-2. Receiver-Transmitter, Equipment Supplied (Cont)

TYPE PART FILTER POWER OUTPUT REMOTE

EQUIPMENT OLD PART NO NEW PART NO

* Peak envelope power or average.

Table 1-3. Antenna Coupler, Equipment Supplied

Page Change Page Change

Page Change Page Change